Nidec PDF

SSTTA
ATTIIC
C SSTTA
ARRTTEER
RAAN
NDD EEXXC
CIITTA
ATTIIO
ONN
SSYYSSTTEEM
M FFO
ORR SSYYN
NCCH
HRRO
ONNO
OUUSS M
MOOTTO
ORR
IIN
NSSTTA
ALLLLA
ATTIIO
ONN,, U
USSEE A
ANND
DMMA
AIIN NA
NTTEEN AN
NCCEE M
MAAN
NUUA
ALL
Nidec-ASI.
Motors, Generators and Drives
Via Fratelli Gracchi 39
20092 Cinisello Balsamo (MI) - Italy
Tel. +39 02 6445.1 Fax. +39 02 6445.4550
www.nidec-asi.com
service@nidec-asi.com
NIDEC ASI S.p.A. – INSTALLATION, USE AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 -06 - 2017
STATIC STARTER SYSTEM
FFO
ORRGGA
ASSTTU
URRB
BIIN
NEE
AN
A ND
D
MO
M TO
OT R-C
OR OM
CO PR
MP ES
RE SO
SS ORRU NIIT
UN T
GENERAL OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

MANUAL
ATTENZIONE
Prima di togliere qualsiasi copertura di protezione dei circuiti elettrici, staccare tensione ed assicurarsi che
non venga ricollegata da altre persone prima che la copertura venga ricollocata al suo posto.
WARNING
Before removing any cover concealing electrical circuitry, disconnect the electrical supply at source, and
ensure that it is not reconnected by you or anyone else, until the cover has been replaced.
WARNUNG
Bevor Sie eine Aabdeckplatte, die elektrische Schaltungen verdeckt, entferme, trennen Sie das Gerät vom
elektrischem Netz. Beachten Sie, daß niemand vor dem Wiederaufsetzen der Abdeckplatte, den Strom
einschaltet.
ATTENTION
Avant d'enlever tout couvercle protégeant un montage, débrancher la source d'alimentation et s'assurer
qu'elle ne pas rebranchée par toute autre persone ou par vous-méme avant que le couvercle soit remis.
ADVERTENCIA
Antes de quitar alguna cubierta, que oculta los circuitos eletricos, desconecte la fuente de energia aléctrica y
asegurese que no sea conectada nuevamente per usted o cualquier oltra persona, hasta que ésta cubierta
haya sido colocada otra vez.
GENERAL INDEX
 SECTION I: GENERAL OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
 SECTION II: STATIC STARTER MANUAL
 SECTION III: STATIC EXCITATION SYSTEM MANUAL
Plant: BORL BINA 2

COMPRESSOR TYPE 4B3A-2.27_1
BHARAT OMAN REFINERY Ltd
BINA/INDIA
Code : 2MU1000253116B
Revision: 00
Edition date: 09.06.2017
SECTION I
GENERAL OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
N° P.MP..SV.VARI.B.1822
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
Motors, Generators and Drives- Milano Rev. 01 Pag. 1 di 40
EQUIPAGGIAMENTI ELETTRICI ED ELETTRONICI IN QUADRO
ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT (BOARDS)
MANUALE GENERALE DI USO E MANUTENZIONE
GENERAL OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
02 Up_grade for <500kw LCI equipement Fregoni Paletti 09-06-217
01 Sostituito logo aziendale e corrette imprecisioni.. Scremin Paletti Collini 02.10.06

Edizione Italiano/Inglese – Sostituisce :
00 Italian/English edition – Supersedes : 09/02/2000
PMPSVVARII 1564 – Rev. 00 (Italiano)
PMPSVVARIE 1582 – Rev. 00 (English) CALABR. TORRI COLLINI
REV. DESCRIZIONE REDATTO VERIF. APPROV. DATA
MANUALE DI USO E MANUTENZIONE
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
1822
1 PURPOSE
2 SAFETY
2.1 health and safety

2.2 safety and warning symbols
2.3 Plate indicating the rules and obligations
3 REFERENCE TECHNICAL DATA
3.1 Electric data

3.2 Operating environmental conditions
3.3 Protection degree as per EN60529
3.4 General Arrangement
4 RECEIVING AND HANDLING
4.1 Receiving
4.2 Handling
5 STORAGE
5.1 Packed equipment storage

5.2 Unpacked equipment storage
6 INSTALLATION
6.1 Safety rules before and during installation

6.2 Check of foundations and board locations
7 CONNECTION
7.1 Signal and control connections

7.2 Fiber optics connections
7.3 Power connections
7.4 Board grounding
7.5 Insulation tests
8 ON-SITE STORAGE
8.1 Reference environmental conditions

8.2 Board mechanical protection
8.3 Anti-condensation protection

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
9 PRELIMINARY CHECKS, COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION
9.1 Preliminary checks and commissioning

9.2 Safety rules during operation
9.3 Accessing the equipment
9.4 Recommended use
10 MAINTENANCE
10.1 Maintenance preliminary operations

10.2 Board general maintenance
10.3 Control circuit maintenance
10.4 Special maintenance
11 PART REPLACEMENT
12 USE AND DIAGNOSTICS
13 DEMOLITION AND DISPOSAL
14 ADDRESS MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR REQUESTS AND SERVICE

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
1. PURPOSE
This document provides instructions concerning installation, commissioning, operation and mainte-
nance of electric and electronic boards developed by the Power Electronics Operating Unit (ELP) of
Ansaldo Sistemi Industriali (A.S.I.).
Aim of this document is to define general purpose rules to properly use the equipment supplied, irre-
spective of the types of electric equipment housed in the boards.
More detailed information and instructions are given in the Operation and Maintenance Manuals of
the single products and/or groups of products.
As a rule, the equipment referred to is composed of energy conversion systems, generally made up
of power sections, regulation and control electronic circuits and signaling and command auxiliary cir-
cuits. Depending on the equipment type and complexity or on specific contractual requirements, the
various functions can be housed in a single board as well as in separate boards.
GENERAL WARNING
1) the assembly and unpack shall be performed by qualified personnel.
2) the personnel must use appropriate equipment and clothing for their own protection and
safety
3) read the instructions and manuals for the use of the sub suppliers products prior to any op-
eration
4) the laying and cable connections shall be accordance with the instructions of Chap.7, re-
quirements are needed for EMC compatibility (see statement)
RWARNING ! Ignoring the procedures prescribed voids the warranty, the certificates are
produced and threatens the security of the person
According to EU Machinery Directive 98/37/EC and 2006/42/EC, or outside EU applicable laws, this
equipment is not a complete machine and it shall be incorporated into a system before to be operated.
The SFC is a part of an installation consisting of other different equipments and machines grouped to
form a system. All the functional safety relating operations needed by the system shall be guaranteed
by the System Integrator.
It has be noted that the SFC alone shall not be CE marked since it is a part of an installation consist-
ing of other different equipments and machines.
The SFC shall be installed according to this manual and cannot be operated until the system (machin-
ery), in which is incorporated, has been declared complying with the “Machinery Directive 98/37/EC
and 2006/42/EC” or other local applicable laws.

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
2. SAFETY.
2.1 HEALTH AND SAFETY
D
DAAN
NGGE
ERR !!
Before removing any cover concealing electrical circuitry, disconnect
the electrical supply at source and ensure that it is not reconnected by
anyone else until the cover has been replaced.
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
- Shutdown : Open main input switch
- Team job : Maintenance should be performed by a team of two electricians

capable to give assistance to each order in case of emergency.
- Fire : First of all, de energize the equipment on fire. Before using

an extinguisher, make sure that its content is suitable for fighting elec-
tric fire.
- Tools : All electric tools should be grounded and tools handless

should be insulated. Never leave tools in cabinets after job comple-
tion.
- Personal clothes : Wear suitable protective suites like glasses and protection
shoes. Never wear metal strip watches, rings or armlets
that may cause contact with live circuits.
- Doors and panels : Never force door block switches. shut off power before
opening any panel door for maintenance.
- Single contact point : Maximum care should always be paid when working with
open doors and panels. Operate in such way that a single body part
may come in contact with any equipment.
Make use of a single hand. Never lean against a powered
equipment.

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
2.2 SAFETY AND WARNING SYMBOLS
This manual contains different cautionary statements:
DANGER ! Warns against action that can lead to hazardous scenarios, risk of death or
electrical shock it. Highlights some hazardous situations that can arise dur-
ing maintenance operations.
WARNING ! Procedures that must be strictly followed or operating modes that shall not
be applied it: highlights the risk of damaging the parts of the equipment.
NOTE Relates to a clarification about instructions, repair operation or any other

subject.
Dangerous scenarios are highlighted using the following symbols:
Risk of death, fire or heavy injuries.
 The job requires personnel skilled for the purpose, well aware of safety
rules, regulations and standards while operating on Medium Voltage
Equipments.
 You are not allowed to modify the insulation distance or remove insulat-
ing materials and covers.
Risk of death, electric shock or heavy injuries
 All the interventions concerning the maintenance and electric installa-

tion on the selected cubicle must be effected by skilled technicians.
 You are not allowed to modify the insulation distance or remove insulat-
ing materials and covers.

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
2.3 Plate indicating the rules and obligations

The figure below shows the serigraphy of the registration plate which is applied on the door of each
selective board section where equipment supplied by high voltage is represented:
CAUTION
ATTENZIONE
PERICOLO
ELECTRICELETTRICO
DANGER
ONLY SKILLED
ACCESSO OR
CONSENTITO
INSTRUCTED
SOLO A PERSONE
AVVERTITEISOADMITTED
PERSONNEL ISTRUITE
RISPETTARE
OBSERVE LE NORME
THE SAFETY RULESDIAND
SICUREZZA
PROVIDE
E
YOURSELF MUNIRSI DI
WITH PERSONAL MEZZI DI
PROTECTIVE
PROTEZIONE
EQUIPMENT BEFOREINDIVIDUALE
APPROACHING PRIMA
ELEC-
TRICAL EQUIPMENT
DI ACCEDERE ALL'APPARECCHIATURA
 WARNING No dielectric strength tests must be carried out on parts of the selection
board. To measure the signal voltage suitable measurement instruments
must be used (internal minimum resistance 10k/V).
Handle the device so not to damage any of its parts.
Protect the device from stresses (temperature, humidity, crashes, etc.)

which are not allowed.
Always effect earthing, using the suitable bar in the board.

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
The drive contains equipment sensitive to electrostatic charges: they can

WARNINGS therefore be damaged if not properly handled. If a maintenance or re-
placement operation has to be performed on the electronic cards, the fol-
lowing warnings must be observed:
The electronic cards should be handled only if this is strictly necessary to

perform the work. A maintenance kit must be used when touching the
cards, in order to protect them from electrostatic charges (use a ground-
ed metal bracelet and a conductive pad where to lay the card during the
repair).
The electronic cards must not be touched by insulating material (i.e. plas-
tic sheet, insulating surfaces, synthetic clothes). The electronic cards
should lay only on conductive surfaces.
When soldering on the cards, the soldering iron tip must be grounded.
Cards and components must be wrapped and shipped only in conductive

envelopes (i.e. metal envelopes).
If the envelopes are not conductive, the cards must be wrapped in con-
ductive sheets (domestic aluminium sheets can be used).

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
3 REFERENCE TECHNICAL DATA

3.1 Electric data
COMMESSA N. DISEGNO N. CARICO MASSIMO

AV.72.7064697.0302.01
JOB No. DRAWING No.
2FN1000253116C
MAX. LOAD 43 A
TENSIONE NOMINALE FASI FREQUENZA CORRENTE NOMINALE POTERE INTERRUZIONE
RATED VOLTAGE PHASES FREQUENCY RATED CURRENT SHORT - CIRCUIT CAPACITY
Alim. PRINCIPALE
PRIMARY Supply 6600 V 3 50 Hz 49 A 40 kA
Alim. SECONDARIA
ANCILLARY Supply 415 V 3 50 Hz 42 A 100 kA
Alim. SERVIZI
SERVICES Supply 110 V 1 50 Hz 8 A 25 kA
Milan Factory - Italy According to EN 61800-5-1, IEC 61800-5-1 Standards
See job order specific documentation
(e.g. WIRING SCHEMATICH DIAGRAM)
3.2 Operating environmental conditions

- Minimum temperature :+ 0 °C
- Maximum temperature :+ 42 °C
- Average temperature for 24 hours :+ 40 °C
- Maximum relative humidity :
up to 50% @ 40 °C
up to 90% @ 20 °C
Altitude : less than 1000 m above sea level
Installation indoor
Atmosphere Industrial
Area classification – safe-
3.3 Protection degree as EN60529:

Degree of protection IP31
The electric equipment is housed within a full metal enclosure, bolted and protected from atmospher-
ic corrosion, either designed by A.S.I. or purchased from leading manufacturers.
Enclosures, being modular, perfectly suit different constructive solutions, in order to meet any con-
tractual requirement in terms of depth, width, front/back access, door opening dimensions, etc.
As a rule, information about the board arrangement, dimensions, door opening, distances or limita-
tions to comply with as well as the position provided for connection inlets/outlets are given in the
Functional Diagram or Dimensional Drawing provided with any shipped equipment or in specific doc-
ument, according to contractual requirements.
For shipping purposes the board, already assembled and tested, may be divided into a set of sec-
tions. As a rule, each section is composed of a series of compartments (up to 5); the total length
must not exceed 4 meters. The board sections are shipped along with the auxiliary materials needed
to assemble the equipment on site.
Depending on haul, transportation means or specific contractual requirements, the following types of
packages are provided for:
polyethylene and corrugated board protection;
wooden crate with polyethylene protection;
reinforced phenolic plywood case and dehydra- ting salt.

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
3.4 General Arrangement
External dimensions are the following:

LENGTH: 6000mm.
WIDTH: 1600mm.
HEIGTH: 2642mm.
WEIGHT: 9240 Kg.

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
4 RECEIVING AND HANDLING
4.1 Receiving
On receiving the board, check that no package is missing and has been damaged in transit.
Board sections should be placed as near as possible to their final location; the package should then
be carefully removed, avoiding damages to the board or its components.
Any stiffener or support element located inside the compartments, in order to protect the equipment
from knocks or abnormal stress occurring during transportation and handling, must be removed only
after the equipment has been fully assembled in its final location.
Check all components for damages and verify the presence of accessories.
In the event of irregularities, immediately contact both the shipper and A.S.I. Sales Office to signal
the problem and file a complaint, if needed, to make a claim from the Insurance Company.
4.2 Handling
The board sections must be handled and hoisted with utmost care, avoiding abnormal stress, hard
knocks, etc.
Packed sections (in cases or crates) must be hoisted using suitably sized cranes and chains (see
fig. 1).
NOTE Weights are listed in the PACKING - LIST.
Unpacked sections or sections with polyethylene/cardboard protection must be handled using cranes
and chains must be passed through the holes of the lifting bars (or hoisting rings, in case of small-
size boards) provided for on top of the board (see fig. 2).
If no crane is available and only if the board sections are provided with full-length C-shaped
bottom beams, sections can be handled using suitably spaced rolls, placed under the base parallel
to the board front panel, so to correctly rest on the bottom beams.
fig. 2 handling unpacked board sections

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
This method of transportation may only be used if the surface onto which the rolls rest is
perfectly flat, so to prevent stresses and consequent deformation of the board structure
(see fig. 3).
NEVER use lift trucks nor, for short-distance handling,
 WARNINGNG pinch bars or similar tools. The use of these tools,

particularly by untrained personnel, may result in lo-
cal and permanent deformations of the board struc-
ture.
fig. 3 handling board sections on rolls
5 STORAGE
As above mentioned, the board should be placed as near as possible to its final location. If the
equipment must be stored for a given time period before installation and commissioning, carefully
and suitably protect the equipment from large temperature variations, dust and atmospheric agents.
Therefore, we suggest to store the board within its original shipping package; in all cases, follow the
instructions given below.
Boards must not be stored in areas where con-
 WARNINGNG struction works are in progress, to avoid collisions

with moving means or damages caused by untrained
personnel.

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
5.1 Packed equipment storage
5.1.1 Corrugated board protection or wooden crate
Store in a room protected from atmospheric agents, covered, well ventilated to avoid condensation,
at temperatures ranging from 0 °C to + 40 °C, maximum relative humidity up to 60% with periodic
peaks up to 90%. Maximum storage time: 4 months.
5.1.2 Reinforced phenolic plywood case
Even if the equipment could be stored outdoors, for short periods, we suggest to store it under a roof
at temperatures ranging from -25 °C to +70 °C. This type of package allows storage times up to 1
year, without requiring particular checks or maintenance.
5.2 Unpacked equipment storage
Store the board in a protected area placing it on a flat floor, to avoid deformation of the structure.
See instructions given in chap. 8 “On-site board storage”.
6 INSTALLATION
The board must be installed in its final location after all civil works or related works (cable duct pre-
paring, raceway installation, etc.) have been completed; the room must be dusted and any machine
or handling mean must be removed.
6.1 Safety rules before and during installation

The equipment must be installed with all the internal and
WARNING
external protections, both electric and mechanic, provid-
ed for. This means that safety devices must not be cut out
nor resized, in order to ensure suitable safety conditions
at startup for both machinery and operators. In the event
this is temporarily required, in order to check the opera-
tion of certain machines or the functions of specific se-
quences, additional safety systems must be used, able to
ensure equal safety conditions.
Before powering the circuits, check all harness to avoid connecting different power supply voltage
circuits or inverting control signals (forward-backward, up-down runs, etc.). To this purpose, we rec-
ommend to check conductor continuity at the different connections.
A.S.I. equipment is factory-set so to comply with power mains rated voltage and frequency of the
country to which the equipment shall be shipped. If the electrical and mechanical components of the
equipment are used in countries where power mains rated voltage and frequency differ from those of
the equipment destination country, the equipment electrical features must be adjusted (it is suggest-
ed to contact A.S.I.).
If insulation tests (insulation resistance measurement and dielectric strenght) must be carried out on
the equipment upstream systems (e.g. to check the distribution system, medium-voltage cabin, trans-
former insulation) completely disconnect the board from the test circuit. Test voltage could damage
equipment devices directly connected to the said systems.

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
6.2 Check of foundations and board locations

The foundations onto which boards shall be installed must be flat and suitably stiff, in order to pre-
vent deformations of the bearing structure and settling due to the board weight or stresses resulting
from the insertion of power components (transformers, reactors, etc.), shipped separately, into the
board compartments.
Check the compliance of foundation dimensions, anchorage areas, cable inlet positions, etc., with
the related drawings of the Functional Diagram or Dimensional Drawing (see chap. 3).
Figures 4-5-6 show the recommended installation procedures for standard metal structural panels
produced by A.S.I.. Different installation procedures must be agreed upon with A.S.I. time after time.
In case of forced ventilation cooling system, check that air inlets are located in areas free from dust,
moisture, corrosive fumes, etc. In addition, check that air outlet ducts are located in areas free from
obstructions, which could reduce the air flow or cause air stagnation or flows return .
In case of deionized water cooling system, check that in-feed and drain pipes comply with the related
drawings as for dimensions and positions.
Fig. 4 recommended anchorage for A.S.I. boards

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
Fig.5 floor holes for A.S.I. boards bottom connections
NOTE: LEVEL BB = 1320 mm Max

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
Fig.6 cable inlet area for A.S.I. boards bottom connections
7 CONNECTION
For A.S.I. standard boards, bottom cable inlets are normally provided for; all compartments making
up the board are supplied with suitable sheet-steel plates which can be adjusted to permit the pas-
sage of cables. In particular cases, a kit of aluminum plates is supplied, which can be drilled to mount
cable fasteners.
In order to prevent malfunctions in low-level electronic circuits, due to conducted or irradiated elec-
tromagnetic disturbances, a number of precautions must be taken so to minimize the effects. The
equipment housed in the board is designed and produced according to specific criteria concerning
component arrangement, circuit segregation, signal protection and separation, etc.
NOTE Therefore, plant connections, cable arrangement and inter-

connections to the board must follow specific rules, particu-
larly as for grounding circuits and control system common
connections.
Chapter 14 provides general rules and criteria to realize plant connections. More detailed information and
instructions can be found in the specific product Manuals.

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
7.1 Signal and control connections
These connections are always made directly to the panel terminal block; the cables, from inlet to the
terminal board run inside suitable raceways.
Connect as per Terminal Board Diagram enclosed to the supplied equipment.
As to access the auxiliary cables tray :

1) Open the door of the compartment +.22
3) Remove the panels of closing of the fund

compartment
4) Now it is possible to access the closing plate of the

1 cables tray
Cable
3 Cable Gland

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
7.2 Fiber optics connections

Fiber optics cables (either made in plastics or glass), are much more fragile than traditional cables,
in particular the connections to the end connectors. Utmost care must be taken not to tread on or
knock them moreover they must be handled with care. Avoid bending them and exceeding the max-
imum bending radius, typically 10 times the cable diameter, with 90° maximum bending angle.
When handling them, always keep the end connectors (as well as the corresponding connectors on
the equipment) protected, using the suitable plastic caps supplied, which must be removed only
when making the interconnection between fixed and movable parts.
We recommend to store these caps for any future maintenance.
Fiber optics connections are always directly connected to the end-use devices housed within the
board (transmitters or receivers). They can be laid inside the board within the raceways containing
signal cables. To avoid any damage, it is forbidden to lay these cables without mechanical protec-
tions
Cable in excess (if any) must not be cut and re-connected, unless specific equipment has to be
used, following the manufacturers instructions and according to the cable and connector types, but
rolled and left inside the board, with bending radius not less than 30 times the cable diameter.
Fasten the cable end so to avoid mechanical stress to the connector junction.

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
7.3 Power connections
Power connections inside the cubicles are normally made by using cables,
up to 150 mm2, and bars for greater sections. External connection is provided for the electrome-
chanical equipment or power module terminals. Connect and fasten the cables to the beams or
brackets suitably provided inside the board
A A
1 2
B B
4
2
3
figure 11 figure 10a figure 10b

Example of cable fastening Example of cable connection to inlet terminals
A = BAR FOR CABLE CONNECTION

B = CABLE TERMINAL
1 = BOLT
2 = WASHER
3 = SPLIT WASHERS
4 = NUT
(figures 10 and 11 show examples of terminal board input/output cable connection and fastening).

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
AC power supply and load connections (asynchronous and synchronous motors) must be made by
using three-pole cables (or three-pole cables plus ground connector). If several cables in parallel
have been used, make sure to meet phase correspondence, as shown in the diagram below
BOARD LINE
INLET OR
L1-1 (U1-1)
L1
L2-1 (V1-1)
CABLE L2
L3-1 (W1-1)
L3
L1-2 (U1-2)
L2-2 (V1-2)
CABLE
L3-2 (W1-2)
2
7.3.1 Fastening procedures:

- use self-locking nuts or nuts with plain and split washers
- make sure that nuts and bolts are free of grease; if needed, clean them with alcohol
- if possible, nuts must be inserted on the operators side, so to ease fastening
Operations
- use steel 8.8 screws treated with galvanic-chromate anticorrosion systems and
fasten using a torque wrench adjusted to the driving torque values shown in the
following table
- after fastening, remove any grease in excess with a cloth
- mark the screw, washer and nut with red enamel, to indicated they have been
correctly fastened.
DIAMETRO COPPIA
BULLONE Kgm
BOLT DRIVING TORQUE
DIAMETER Kgm
M5 0,5
M6 1
M8 2
M10 4
M12 7
M16 12

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
7.4 Board grounding
7.4.1 Protection conductor (PE) connection

The protection conductor is made up of a copper bar (marked with the symbol PE ) which crosses
lengthwise the board and, as a rule, is located near the power supply voltage connections.
The bar must be connected to the plant ground system by the operator which carries out the installa-
tion,
NOTE Grounding is forbidden by any other board area, even if apparently

suitable and apt (in fact, these areas could not bear maximum fault cur-
rents toward the ground).
For the grounding of the container use the two earthing point set on the longest sides. (see underlying
figure). It is suggested to use a cable or a copper braid with section ≥ to 200 mm².
Preparation of the earthing point :

1) Carefully clean the surface in the
connection areas, removing any chip, debris,
grease, etc., using a cloth with alcohol.
2) Brush the connection areas using a wire brush
(short-wire) or fine-grain emery cloth.
3) Carefully clean all brushed areas using clean
cloth.
4) Immediately apply a thin layer of ALCOA – EJC No.
2 (next pages safety data sheet) grease on all pre-
pared surfaces
Earth safety connection shall be verified and earth connection resistance shall be measured to verify
compliance with safety standards before connecting any other power supply line to the equipment.

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
7.5 Insulation tests
Each board, before functional testing in factory, always undergoes a series of insulation tests (die-
lectric strength and insulation resistance) at the levels provided by the currently standards; therefore,
there is no need to repeat these tests once the board has been installed on the plant. If, after instal-
lation, you want to repeat the insulation tests, we suggest to carry out them by ANSALDO SISTEMI
INDUSTRIALI engineers or qualified personnel trained by ANSALDO SISTEMI INDUSTRIALI.
RNING ! since test voltages could be dangerous to many electronic devices housed with-
in the equipment and to the personnel performing the test.
7.6 SIGNAL CLASSIFICATION
As for the precedents paragraphs, hereafter follows a description of general classification criteria and
the related operating instructions.
7.6.1 Signal classification by levels
To correctly separate the conductors connected to disturbance-sensitive circuits from those which
could cause disturbances, conductors have been classified by grouping together disturbance-
sensitive and disturbing connectors having the same amplitude.
A. Level 1 (low level)

Logic and analog signal common connections.
0 - 50 Vdc analog signals.
Logic signals (Digital Numeric).
- Special signals with the related common connections.
- Connection of control circuit common connections.
- Connection to the distribution system to power high-sensitivity analog devices (e.g. ±
15V, ± 12V, +5V, etc.).
- All < 50 mV connections to high-sensitivity logic devices and the related circuitry,
strain-gages, thermocouples.
- Operational amplifier signals.
- Power amplifier signals.
- Insulation amplifier output signals controlling high-sensitivity analog devices.
- Interphone circuits.
- All connections to high-sensitivity logic devices and the related circuitry.
- Connections from thermoresistors, encoders, tachometric generators.
B. Level 2 (medium level)

> 50 Vdc analog signals with < 28 Vac residual ripple.
Signal lamps and switching circuits up to 48 Vdc.
- Relay and signal lamps < 48 Vdc common connections.
- Connection to the < 48 Vdc distribution system to power relays, signal lamps and in-
put separator amplifiers.
- All connections to < 48 Vdc input separator amplifiers, signal lamps and relays.
- Connection to the 6 Vac distribution system supplying signal lamps.
- Analog circuits related to tachometric and pilot generators.
- Electric shielding common connections (SC).

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
C. Level 3 (high level)

> 48 Vdc switching signals.
> 50 Vdc analog signals with < 28 Vac residual ripple.
50 V regulation signals with > 20 A currents.
A. C. power supplies with < 20 A currents.
- Power supplies for < 20 A control circuits.
- Signal lamps with > 48 Vdc or > 6 Vac voltages.
- Relay and contactor coils.
- Automatic circuit breaker coils up to 20 A electrical input
- < 20 A exciter circuits for rotary machines.
- Feedback circuits for armature voltage of d.c. machines.
- Circuits for ground detectors.
- Shunt signals for instrumentation (SHUNT - TA - TV).
- Circuits for outlets and panel internal lighting.
- Circuits powering unwinders for recorders.
- A.c. power supply and d.c. output circuits of static < 20 A thyristor exciters
D. Special level 3S (high level)

- Signals coming from d.c. machine armature resistors and series fields.
- Signals coming from shunts for regulation devices (SHUNT).
E. Level 4 (power circuits)

A.c. and d.c. power circuits ranging from 0 to 800 V with currents ranging from 20 to 800 A.
- A.c. power supplies and d.c. outputs of thyristor power supplies.
- Primary and secondary circuits for transformer whose power is > than 5 KVA.
- A.c. power supply and d.c. output circuits of static > 20 A thyristor exciters.
- Power supply and output circuits of power supplies, both regulated and not regulat-
ed.
- > 20 A exciter circuits for rotary machines.
F. Special level 4S (power circuits)

A.c. and d.c. power circuits for operating voltages > 800 V and or operating currents > 800
A.
7.6.2 Cable laying recommendations
As above mentioned, plant cables must be laid following a number of specific instructions.
The drawings named Terminal board arrangement and external connections, related to the plant,
show the specific levels of the board output conductors. Taking into account these data and the in-
structions given below the installation can be better carried out.
WARNING ! These recommendations are given in order to lay the cables according to
criteria able to reduce interferences on control and regulation circuits.
Ignore these procedures invalidates the EMC declaration.

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
7.6.3 Minimum distances for raceway and/or conduit installation depending on the cable
level
A. Minimum distances in mm among raceways.

Distances are intended between the raceway top and the bottom of the raceway in-
stalled above, or between the sides of adjacent raceways.
LIV 1 2 3 3S 4 4S
LEV
1 0 * 150 150 660 660
2 * 0 150 150 460 660
3 150 150 0 0 ** 310
3S 150 150 0 0 200 460
4 660 460 ** 200 0 0
4S 660 660 310 460 0 0
B. Minimum distances in mm among conduits.

Distances are intended between conduit external surfaces
LIV 1 2 3 3S 4 4S
LEV
1 0 25 75 75 310 310
2 25 0 75 75 230 310
3 75 75 0 0 0 150
3S 75 75 0 0 150 230
4 310 230 0 150 0 0
4S 310 310 150 230 0 0
C. Minimum distances in mm among raceways and conduits
LIV 1 2 3 3S 4 4S
LEV
1 0 25 100 100 460 460
2 25 0 100 100 310 460
3 100 100 0 0 0 200
3S 100 100 0 0 150 230
4 460 310 0 150 0 0
4S 460 460 200 310 0 0
: 0 : see item L at paragraph 7.6.4.

NOTE * : see paragraph 7.6.4 - item C.
**: see paragraph 7.6.4 - item B.

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
7.6.4 Cable laying
A. Equal level conductors for control and power circuits can be grouped in the same raceways
or conduits. Cables of different levels can not be laid in the same raceway or conduit.
B. Level 3 and 4 cables can be laid in the same raceway but must be separated using a contin-
uous steel spacer. This spacer must not be necessarily grounded.
C. If a set of separated raceways for level 1 and 2 cables can not be accomplished, these can
be laid in the same raceway provided they are separated using a continuous steel spacer,
which must be grounded. This separation method is not as effective as using two separate
raceways; therefore, during plant commissioning, separate runs could be needed for some
cables. If level 1 and 2 cables are laid in parallel raceways, keep 25 mm minimum distance
between the two adjacent sides.
D. If different level cables cross within raceways and conduits, we recommend to design 90°
crossings, meeting the minimum distances listed in the tables given at paragraph 7.6.3. If
minimum distances cannot be accomplished, grounded steel shields must be installed at
crossings.
E. All level 1 and 2 cables must be laid in steel raceways without air intakes and with movable
steel cover having safe and continuous lock; this to prevent high-reluctance air gaps and en-
sure efficient shielding. Level 3 and 4 cable raceways must be provided with cover and air
intakes whose surface must not exceed 20% of the total surface. All raceways and/or con-
duits, including covers, must be separately connected to the plant grounding system.
F. All distances among raceways and < 100 KVA power equipment (corresponding to level 4)
must comply with table A of paragraph 7.6.3. All distances among conduits and < 100 KVA
power equipment (corresponding to level 4) must comply with table B of paragraph 7.6.3.
The minimum distance between 1, 2 and 3S level cables and > 100 KVA power equipment
running parallel must be 1500 mm if cables are laid in raceways, 750 mm if laid in conduits.
G. Power connections using 4 and 4S level cables connecting parts of the same circuit must be
laid following the same run (in and out), i.e. in the same raceway or conduit. This reduces
linkage between power and regulation circuits.
H. Distances among different level cables can not be always complied with when connected to
the equipment terminal boards. In this case, however, parallel runs of different level cables
must be minimized and can not exceed 1500 mm.
I. All distances listed in table C, given at paragraph 7.6.3 are valid only if raceways are
equipped with steel cover; otherwise, distances to be met are those listed in table A.
L. In all cases when 0 mm is listed in the tables given at paragraph 7.6.3, different level con-
ductors can be laid in the same raceway or conduit. However, the distances to be met with
respect to other raceways or conduits must correspond to safety values.

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
7.6.5 Shielded cable features
Plant shielded cables must have the following features. For information about the type of cable
to be used, refer to Terminal Board and external connection arrangement related to the plant.
7.6.5.1 Installing circuits with operating voltage up to 690 V.
A. Single-core shielded cable made up of one copper flexible wire having min. 16 AWG
(1,3 square mm) section, insulated for at least 690 V operating voltage, overall shielding
not smaller than 85%, external insulating sheath, max. capacity between conductor and
shielding not exceeding 230 pF/m.
B. Cable with a couple of kinked and shielded conductors, made up of two copper flexible
wires having min. 16 AWG (1,3 square mm) section, kinked and insulated for at least
690 V operating voltage, overall shielding not smaller than 85%, external insulating
sheath. Max. capacity among conductors, with only the shielding grounded, not exceed-
ing 100 pF/m; max. capacity among conductors, connected to the shielding and
grounded, not exceeding 185 pF/m.
C. Multiple-core shielded cable made up of more than two copper flexible wires having
min. 16 AWG (1,3 square mm) section, (*) insulated for at least 690 V operating voltage,
overall conductor shielding not smaller than 85%, external insulating sheath. Max. ca-
pacity among two conductors, with grounded shielding, not exceeding 100 pF/m; max.
capacity among one conductor and all the remaining conductors connected among
themselves and to the shielding and grounded not exceeding 185 pF/m.
7.6.5.2 Installing circuits with operating voltage > 690 V.
A. Single-core shielded cable made up of one copper flexible wire having min. 16 AWG
(1,3 square mm) section, insulation adequate to the operating voltage, shielding not
smaller than 85%, external insulating sheath. Max. capacity between conductor and
shielding not exceeding 200 pF/m.
B. Cable with a couple of kinked and shielded conductors, made up of two copper flexible
wires having min. 16 AWG (1,3 square mm) section, kinked and insulated for at least
1000 V operating voltage, overall shielding not smaller than 85%, external insulating
sheath. Max. capacity among conductors, with only the shielding grounded, not exceed-
ing 100 pF/m; max. capacity among conductors, connected to the shielding and
grounded, not exceeding 165 pF/m.
(*) For multiple cables to be inserted into connectors, the min. allowed section for the con-
nector used together with special features, if any, are indicated time after time.
NOTE : Lay pitch for shielded cables should not exceed 30 mm.

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
7.6.6 Shielded cable terminals

Always with reference to documents Terminal Board and external connection arrangement, re-
lated to the plant, shielded cable terminals must comply with one of the following diagrams:
A) The electric shielding is insulated, reaches the external sheath and is taped to the
latter, if grounding is made by another location outside the board.
B) The electric shielding is connected to a specific terminal of the board terminal board
C) The electric shielding is connected to the board shield connecting bar.

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
7.6.7 Suggested procedure for output isolator cable junctions insulation

(If necessary)
Number of tape layers according to the switchgear voltage
SWITCHGEAR TAPE LAYERS

VOLTAGE IRRATHENE GLASS
[V] APPLIED 2/3 APPLIED ½
OVERLAID OVERLAID
15000 4 1 75 mm 50 mm
NOTE : 1) One layer of irrathene tape (wound 2/3 lap)

Requires 3 turns around the bar in one width of the tape.
The layer thickness is 3 times the tape thickness.
e) One layer of glass tape (wound ½ lap)
Requires 2 turns around the bar in one width of the tape.
The layer thickness is 2 times the tape thickness.
A A/3 A/3 B B/2

ARRANGEMENT OF
TAPE LAYERS
2/3 A B/2

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
8. ON SITE STORAGE
This chapter provides the criteria to be followed to store the installed boards on-site, before power
supply and operation.
8.1 Reference environmental conditions
room: closed room, environmentally protected, without air-conditioning

and ventilation
temperature: +0 °C to +40 °C
relative humidity: 60% with sporadic peaks up to 90%
CAUTION !
NOTE In case of equipment provided with deionized water cooling
system, make sure ambient temperature never decreases
below 0°C after loading the hydraulic circuit. If needed,
drain the circuit following the specific instructions given in
the related Manual.
If the cooling liquid contains antifreezing agents (glycol),
follow the instructions given in the related or specific job-
order manual.
8.2 Board mechanical protection

Once the panel has been properly anchored to the foundation beams, protect it from dust and debris
with a fabric cover: do not use polyethylene, plastic or similar waterproof sheets to prevent internal
condensation.
Periodically (every 30-40 days) check the cover status and verify no dust or condensate is present
inside the board.
Otherwise, proceed as follows:
restore the cover
remove all dust with cloths or compressed air, dry and free from oil (pressure: 4-6 atmos-
pheres), driving the air flow away from fragile parts (e.g. electronic cards)
open all the panel doors to speed up condensate evaporation; if needed,
use dry and/or hot (up to 60 °C) air flows.
8.3 Anti-condensation protection
The precautions listed in the preceding paragraph ensure optimum board storage for a few months.
In case the board is not used for a period equal to or longer than 6 months, particularly in winter, it
is necessary to prevent even sporadic condensation phenomena which, if repeated, could reduce
the board reliability.
In this case, power the board internal heaters, where installed, or provide additional 100-150 W
heaters, one for each board compartment, placing them in a free area, so to drive the hot air flow
away from components, cables, etc.
Interlock the heaters to one or more thermostats (depending on the room temperature evenness),
so to obtain automatic heaters start when the ambient temperature is lower than 10-12 °C.
Prepare and carry out the checks as for par. 8.2.

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
9 PRELIMINARY CHECKS, COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION
9.1 Preliminary checks and commissioning

Before powering and after installation and interconnections have been carried out, the board must
undergo a series of preliminary tests and checks in order to verify no damages have occurred, the
board has been properly connected and is able to operate as per the project data.
The following instructions provide a guide to the personnel charged with equipment commissioning.
CAUTION
ATTENZIONE
PERICOLO
ELECTRICELETTRICO
DANGER
THE FOLLOWING OPERATIONS MUST BE CARRIED

OUT BY QUALIFIED PERSONNEL AND MUST COM-
PLY WITH THE CURRENTLY ENFORCED LAWS
ONLY SKILLED
ACCESSO OR
CONSENTITO
INSTRUCTED
SOLO A PERSONE
PERSONNEL
AVVERTITE IS ADMITTED
O ISTRUITE
RISPETTARE
OBSERVE LE NORME
THE SAFETY DI AND
RULES SICUREZZA
PROVIDE
E
YOURSELFMUNIRSI DI
PROTECTIVE
PROTEZIONE
EQUIPMENT INDIVIDUALE
BEFORE APPROACHING PRIMA
ELEC-
TRICAL EQUIPMENT
NOTE Follow the instructions given in pa-ragraph 10.1
Before connecting the equipment to the power mains (L1, L2, L3 terminals) and the auxiliary circuit
external power supply (if any), check for the phase sequence, in order to prevent inverted rotation of
any three-phase asynchronous motor housed inside the equipment (fans, pumps) or external (loads).
In addition, always check the power mains voltage and frequency correspond to the values listed on
the rating plate. The measured voltage and frequency values must range within ± 10% and ± 2%, re-
spectively. In all cases, we recommend to always power the equipment with the rated voltage and
frequency operating, for example, on the distribution transformer outlets.

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
9.1.1 Make sure the board is generally clean, free from dust, installation material debris, cable pieces,
tools, etc.
To this purpose, you can use compressed air, if adjustable and clean, i.e. free from water, oil or
other substances, making sure that:
strong air flows are not directed toward fragile components, in particular electronic
Cards
dust and debris are not blown on the equipment devices or foul them once after
blowing.
If needed, use an exhaust fan, always following the above mentioned instructions.
9.1.2 Make sure that terminals, power junctions and, in general, all connections, have
been properly fastened. Check for missing components or accessories.
9.1.3 Check the board grounding
9.1.4 Make sure that any support or protection used to handle the equipment has been
removed.
9.1.5 Make sure that, after the installation is completed, the board overall protection
degree complies with the specifications.
9.1.6 Check all external connections, particularly the common connection network of
electronic regulation and control circuits.
9.1.7 Check for the normal operation of single devices and protection systems.
In particular, check for the proper operation and rating of power switches,
transformer protection devices, maximum current relays, min.-max. voltage relays,
ground protections, thermal protections, faulty ventilation relays, hydraulic circuit
fluxmeters and pressure gauges, etc., as per instructions given in the manuals of
single devices.
9.1.8 Make sure customized circuits, transducers, interfaces, etc. are correctly rated.
Instructions about rating and customizations are given on suitable sheets of the
schematic diagram.
9.1.9 Check the auxiliary and control circuit supply voltages, according to the voltage and
frequency values given on the schematich diagrams.
9.1.10 Carry on no-load tests on the control circuits, verifying step-by-step the control logic
sequences and automations; you can refer to the functional diagram.
9.1.11 Check, where applicable, the board intake fan, forced air cooling fan or deionized
water cooling pump rotation.
9.1.12 Energize the power section and verify the converter operation, following the
instructions given in the related Manual or, if needed, the specific job-order
manual.

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
9.2 Safety rules during operation
Never remove the physical barriers placed around live components when the equipment is powered. If
they must be removed, use any safety precaution able to highlight and minimize the resulting risks.
How to use the Keys.
Keys box position:

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
Keys System Philosophy
Follow steps 1 to 7 as shown in the figure

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
Barriers must be replaced as soon as the operation requiring their temporary removal have been
completed.
During operation, access the equipment only to carry out reset operations or replacements. If
possible, the latter should be carried out after the board has been disconnected or after the
power supply of the concerned section has been de-energized.

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
9.3 Accessing the equipment
During operation, the access to the equipment is only allowed to trained or qualified personnel.
If expressly required in the order, the equipment can be designed so to allow for access also to ordi-
nary personnel. In this case, A.S.I. provides for main power automatic disconnection system which is
activated as soon as the board doors are opened.
However, the special device which cuts out the above mentioned system can only be operated by
qualified personnel.
9.4 Recommended use
9.4.1 During operation, keep the cabinet doors closed.
9.4.2 If air filters are provided for by frame or door grids, fans must only be operated with
the filters properly.
9.4.3 Be sure the ambient air, used to cool the boards, does not exceed the maximum
temperature allowed for and create return flows. Fans could be installed conveying
hot air flows outside or, even better, the rooms can be equipped with suitable air
conditioning systems.
Remember that the cooling (ambient) air temperature reference value, with the exception of particu
lar cases already provided for in the contract, ranges from +0 °C to +40 C; the average value must
not exceed +35 °C during 24 hours.
Although equipment operation is ensured at these conditions, in order to increase the life of the com-
ponents, ambient temperature should not exceed 25/30 °C and should not be subject to sudden var-
iations.
9.4.4 Do not alter or cut off the protection devices against electrical or mechanical failures. This re-
duces safety conditions and, in addition, could result in severe damages to the equipment
which, altering its operation, would require expensive shutdown.
9.4.5 Do not take the electronic circuits out of their slots without first disconnecting their supply; this
could damage the circuits and/or result in unexpected operation of the controlled machines.
9.4.6 If you do not have a deep knowledge of rating device operation (in particular those concerning
electronic circuits: potentiometers, dip-switches, etc.) do not operate them. Improper use of
these devices could stop or even damage the equipment and connected machines.

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
10 MAINTENANCE
The board proper and continuous operation obviously relays on good and regular maintenance.
Therefore, periodical inspections, checks and maintenance must be carried out on the board; time in-
tervals depend on environmental and operating conditions (at least once per year).
Maintenance operations must be carried out more frequently in case the equipment is installed in
particularly dusty, humid, corrosive, etc. rooms, (see appendix A7 “ Preventive Maintenance”).
We recommend to first schedule monthly/fortnightly maintenance operations in order to asses the

optimum intervals, according to environmental and operating features, at which the operations listed
below must be carried out.
WARNING ! ALWAYS DISCONNECT ALL BOARD CIRCUITS BE-

FORE PERFORMING MAINTENANCE OPERATIONS.
ALL CURRENTLY ENFORCED SAFETY REGULA-
TIONS MUST BE FULLY COMPLIED WITH.
In addition to regular maintenance, the user should keep a careful log recording all abnormal
events, with the related dates (alarm activation, protection tripping, replaced parts); this in order to
determine, more efficiently and quickly, the cause of any malfunction.
10.1 Maintenance preliminary operations
CAUTION !
All maintenance operations, both routine and ex-
WARNING ! traordinary, must be carried out with the equipment
fully disconnected.
Proceed as follows:
10.1.1 Open all line inlet switches and/or disconnecting switches and lock them, if possible.
10.1.2 Open all auxiliary switches and/or disconnecting switches installed inside the board.
10.1.3 Open all outlet switches, disconnecting switches and toggle switches (to prevent return power
from the field) and lock them, if possible.
10.1.4 Make sure the board is fully de-energized, by carrying out the suitable measurements. Careful-
ly check all circuits marked in orange which, even after the main power disconnecting switch
has been opened, could still be live.
Remember that also the following circuits could not be switched off by the main power supply
disconnecting device:
- lighting circuits powering the lamps used during maintenance or replacement operations
- service circuits (outlets only used to power replacement or maintenance tools)

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
- minimum voltage disconnecting circuits, only used for automatic disconnection in the event no
power supply is present.
10.1.5 Attach suitable warnings to the above mentioned disconnecting devices, forbidding device op-
eration as well as removal of the said warnings by personnel not assigned to maintenance op-
erations.
10.1.6 Caution ! Some electronic equipment, particularly inverters, house high-capacity capacitors
which could remain charged even after the main line has been disconnected. Refer to the relat-
ed manuals as for discharge time and the methods to detect the presence of residual voltage.
10.1.7 Before touching any power line with your hands, use a grounded insulated rod, grounding at the
same time all poles of alternated and direct current lines.
10.2 Board general maintenance
For a good board maintenance, we recommend the following procedures:
10.2.1 Clean and dust the board: iron or coal dust, in particular, could significantly reduce the insulation
degree.
To do this, you can use compressed air, if suitably adjustable and clean, i.e. free from water,
oil or other substances, making sure that:
- strong air flows are kept away from fragile components, particularly electronic cards
- dust and debris are not blown toward board devices and do not foul them after blowing has
been stopped.
If needed, use an exhaust fan, still following the above mentioned precautions.
10.2.2 Check for stripping paint or oxidation on the board structure.
10.2.3 Verify the power junction status. Check for oxidation, which could increase contact resistance.
Make sure all screws and bolts have been properly tightened, as per table given at par. 7.3.1.
In addition, make sure the terminals of the other connections have been properly tightened.
If fiber optics are used, make sure the related connectors have been tightened. In the event dis-
connecting is required, follow the instructions given at par. 7.2.
10.2.4 Check the operation of all electromechanical equipment (switches, contactors, disconnecting
switches, relays, etc.); as for maintenance, follow the specific manufacturers instructions.
10.2.5 Check the status of the heat-sinks onto which power semiconductors are installed: no corrosion,
scale or deposit should be detected. In fact, these could reduce the semiconductor performance
(heat removal).

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
10.2.6 Check air filter efficiency, for both natural and forced air systems, taking particular care in case of
dusty environment.
Carefully blow or replace them, if needed.
10.2.7 In case of deionized water cooling system, make sure all parts making up the hydraulic circuit have
been properly tightened and check filter efficiency; if needed, replace them following the instruc-
tions given in the related manuals.
10.3 Converter power circuit maintenance
Power circuits include, in addition to conversion semiconductors and the related components, the cooling
system (if applicable): ventilation circuits, both natural and forced, deionized water hydraulic circuits and
the related pumping and filtering station.
Since no general criteria can be defined, due to the various circuit types, cooling techniques and construc-
tion details, refer to the specific product manuals for routine and/or extraordinary maintenance operations,
particularly as for component replacements which sometimes require the use of specific tools supplied to-
gether with the equipment.
10.4 Control circuit maintenance
Control circuits are made up of electronic cards which do not require specific maintenance, with the ex-
ception of periodic inspections in order to:
- check the board status and, if needed, remove dust or debris. We recommend not to take the board
out of their slots, if not required. Brush them, using a smooth bristle brush and low-pressure com-
pressed air, if needed, provided it is clean and free from oil or other substances.
- inspect the board checking for track corrosion, component oxidation, damaged or worn components,
etc.
- check the connection and terminal status.
Caution !
WARNING ! Electronic cards house components and de-
vices sensitive to electrostatic discharges
(ESD); therefore, to prevent damages the
boards must be handled with special care, fol-
lowing the instructions given below.
- before taking out the cards, discharge any electrostatic energy from your body by touching a surely
grounded area
- handle the boards by their edges; do not touch with your hands components rheophores nor connector
pins
- clean the boards on a grounded table coated with anti-electrostatic material; otherwise, use a metal ta-
ble unpainted and grounded. Be sure no plastic materials (bags, foam polystyrene, etc.) are present in
the work area, which are possible sources of electrostatic discharges
- immediately replace the boards into their slots, restoring all connections; if needed, store the boards in-
to anti-electrostatic envelopes or containers (as an alternative, cardboard boxes).

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
10.5 Special maintenance
Programmable controllers (PLCs) require, in addition to cleaning and other maintenance operations speci-
fied in the related manuals, a single maintenance operation, i.e. battery replacement. Before replacing, to
prevent losing the program, see the controller manual.
The following remarks about battery life are valid for most common PLCs.
If used as buffer in the presence of power mains voltage, PLC batteries generally last two years from the
date of installation; otherwise, if they are used as sole energy source, i.e. in the absence of power mains
supply, they last about three months. Remember that A.S.I. equipment is generally delivered with the
software already installed in the RAM memory; therefore, batteries are already connected. If the equip-
ment is not installed and powered within three months from the date of shipment (and not the date of de-
livery!!), the software program must be re-installed and batteries, in certain cases, need to be replaced.
Remember that all batteries, even if they are not used, are subject to a continuous natural decay; there-
fore they could not be valid if used as spare parts.
11 PART REPLACEMENT
If replacements are required, due to failures or malfunctioning, strictly follow the part list enclosed to the
Functional Diagram and the instructions given in the Product Manuals for the converters installed on the
board.
Nidec-ASI is not liable in the event replacements are not performed in compliance with the instruc-
tions provided.
12 USE AND DIAGNOSTICS
Refer to the specific product Manuals.
13 DEMOLITION AND DISPOSAL
Electric or electronic board generally do not contain dangerous or toxic substances; however, remember
that for the materials listed below specific disposal procedures must be followed.
- Batteries:
they are installed into programmable controllers (PLCs) and uninterruptible power supplies (UPS).
- Cathode-ray tubes:
if computer screens or digital control systems are provided for.
- Fluorescent lamps:
they are used, sometimes, for board internal lighting, as an alternative to filament lamps.
- Oil filled high capacitors or capacitors banks:

the components used by Nidec-ASI are free from PCB, as per manufacturers statement.
- Electrolytic capacitor banks:

they are found into voltage-source inverters.
- Ethylene glycol (or equivalent substances):
it can be found into deionized water cooling circuits with operating temperatures lower than 0 °C.
- Freon (type R134a or equivalent substances):

it can be found into cooling systems with air-to-air heat exchanger.
- Air filters:
take care also during routine cleaning (blowing).
2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
N° P.MP.SV.VARI.B.
1822
- Anionic and cationic resins:

they are found into filters for deionized water cooling circuits.
For the above listed materials, fully comply with the laws currently enforced at the time of
disposal.
14 ADDRESS MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR REQUESTS FOR

SERVICE
The converter is a product seen around the world through a vast and extensive network of ser-
vice centers.
For any information or clarification regarding the use, maintenance, installation, etc.. The
Company believes writing is always available to be queried Buyer / Customer.
From the latter part of the questions should be put in clear terms, with reference to this manual
and always indicating the data reported on the identification plate of the converter.
Any request to speak at the service of the Buyer / Customer or clarification regarding the tech-
nical aspects of this document should be addressed to:
Nidec-ASI - MANUAL OF USE AND MAINTENANCE - Original Instructions.
Nidec-ASI Spa
Headquarters and factory:
Via F.lli Gracchi 39

20092 Cinisello Balsamo (MI)- Italy
Tel. +39 02 6445.1 Fax. +39 02 6445.4550
www.nidec-asi.com
service@nidec-asi.com

2MU1000253116B – Rev. 00 – data 09 - 06 - 2017
SECTION II
STATIC STARTER MANUAL

STATIC STARTER SYSTEM
FOR GAS TURBINE
AND
MOTOR-COMPRESSOR UNIT
USE AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

ATTENZIONE
WARNING
WARNUNG
einschaltet.
ATTENTION
ADVERTENCIA
INDEX
CAP. 1 FOREWORD
1.1 REMARKS ABOUT THE MANUAL
1.2 TERMS AND SYMBOLOGY
1.3 QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENT UNITS
1.4 USEFUL FORMULAS
1.5 GENERAL SAFETY PRESCRIPTIONS
1.6 DOCUMENT SUBDIVISION
CAP. 2 DOCUMENTATION USE
2.1 INTRODUCTION
2.2 WIRING DIAGRAM PATTERN
2.3 INITIAL SHEETS
2.4 SHEETS WITH CIRCUIT FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM
2.4.1 Identification Codes Used in Electric Technology
2.4.2 Equipment Codes
2.4.3 Numbering of Connections
2.4.4 Reference for feed through wires passing through 2 sheets belonging to the same F.D.
2.4.5 Identification of the Equipment Terminal Clamps
2.4.6 Calibration Rated Data
2.4.7 Equipment Pattern and Cross-references between Contacts Used and Coils
2.5 TERMINAL BOARD PATTERN
CAP. 3 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
3.1 SAFETY PRESCRIPTIONS
3.2 CHECKS BEFORE INSTALLATION
CAP. 4 DESCRIPTION OF THE EQUIPMENT
4.1 CARPENTRY AND ACCESSORIES
4.2 CONVERTER PANEL SECTION
4.3 POWER CIRCUITS
4.3.1 Thyristors module
4.3.2 Thyristors firing circuit
4.3.3 Intermediate circuit leveling DC reactance
4.4 AUXILIARY AND CONTROL CIRCUITS
4.4.1 Control panel
4.4.2 Interface cards and transducers
4.4.3 PLC and its interfaced relay circuits
4.4.4 Automatic Synchronizer System
4.5 MAINTENANCE
CAP. 5 USER INTERFACE
5.1 GENERAL
5.2 USER’S INTERFACE [ SSDTERM ]
5.2.1 General
5.2.2 Description of the diagnostic software
5.2.3 Menu
5.2.3.1 Configuration
5.2.3.2 ScopE
5.2.3.3 FlaGs
5.2.3.4 History
5.2.3.5 Save Parameters in EEPROM
5.2.3.6 Measure
5.2.4 Speed Regulator Description
5.2.4.1 parameters Menu
SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B 1-I

Index
CAP. 6 PROTECTION AND TROUBLESHOOTING

6.1 GENERAL
6.2 INITIAL TESTS
6.3 HARDWARE PROTECTIONS
6.4 PLC PROTECTIONS
6.5 ALARMS FROM PLC LOGIC
6.6 PROTECTION RESTORATION
6.7 SIGNALS AND DIAGNOSTICS
CAP. 7 LOGICS OF OPERATION
7.1 GENERAL
7.2 START UP AND SHUT–DOWN SEQUENCES
APP. A1 APPENDIX
OPERATING PRINCIPLES
APP. A2 APPENDIX
SIGNAL MEASURING AND CONDITIONING
APP. A3 APPENDIX
PROTECTIONS
APP. A4 APPENDIX
IGNITION BOARD OF OPTICAL FIBRE THYRISTORS
APP. A5 APPENDIX
GROUNDING AND GROUNDING VOLTAGES
APP. A6 APPENDIX
POWER MODULE MAINTENANCE
APP. A7 APPENDIX
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
2 - II SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
FOREWORD 1
In this Chapter
1.1 REMARKS ABOUT THE MANUAL 1

1.2 TERMS AND SYMBOLOGY 2
1.3 QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENT UNITS .3
1.4 USEFUL FORMULAS 6
1.5 GENERAL SAFETY PRESCRIPTIONS 7
1.6 DOCUMENT SUBDIVISION 9
1.1 REMARKS ABOUT THE MANUAL
This manual supplies detailed news concerning all the phases from transport to installation of the
selection board as well as all the safety measures which must be adopted in order to enable the
operator to carry out simple operations in safety conditions.
The manual refers to skilled technicians, people in charge of the installation, erection, start-up
and maintenance.
The operators must necessarily:
Be aware of the specific Safety Rules concerning the on/off of the earthing, the identification of
electrical circuits, equipment and systems.
Know the main physical and electrical aspects of the system.
Have an excellent knowledge of the symbols used in the wiring diagrams.
Know the criteria pertinent to the implementation of wiring harness and electric components.
Such operators need not have gained previous direct experience in the specific sector of frequency
converters.
This document must be considered as integral part of the equipment and must be kept for all the life
of the concerned equipment.
Carefully read this manual before installing and using the converter and before carrying out any
maintenance operation.
The information included in this manual can be modified without warning.

Nidec-ASI is not responsible for the errors which can be identified in this manual or for the damages
they may bring about.
This manual cannot be either fully or partly reproduced or copied in any form without a previous
written permit by Nidec-ASI which reserve all the rights.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000230691B Rev. 00 1-1

1 Foreword
1.2 TERMS AND SYMBOLOGY
The manual reports three different types of instruction:
WATCH OUT ! It signals incorrect actions or misbehaviour which can bring about dangerous
situations to the operators. Besides it highlights secondary dangers, which
can occur during maintenance operations.
WARNING It signals the procedure to be respected or to be avoided so to correctly

carry out installation, repair works or replacement without damaging the
equipment.
REMARK It is used to further clarify an instruction, repair work or any subject-matter.
The instructions will be matched to the following symbols:
It points out situations which may seriously endanger the operator. It is

always matched to a WATCH OUT signal.
It points out situations where the presence of voltage can endanger the
operator. It is always matched to the WATCH OUT signal.
It highlights operations in presence of electrostatic charges. It is matched to

a WARNING.
 It highlights a WARNING.
 It highlights a REMARK - NOTE.
1-2 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B

1 Foreword
1.3 QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENT UNITS
Variable Symbols Unity of measurement Conversion factors

description Symbols
SI TECH SYST SI TECH SYST
Length l l m (metro) m 1 Km=1000 m
2 2 2 2
Area A A m m 1 m =100 dm
3 3 3 3
Volume V V m m 1 m =1000 dm
3
1 dm =1 liter
Plane Angle   rad ° 360° = 2  rad
 (radians) (degrees) 1° =  /180 rad
1’ =1°/60 =  /10800 rad (minute)
1”=1’/60 =  /684000 rad (second)
Time t t s (second) s 1 min = 60 s
1h = 60 min = 3600 s
1d = 24 h = 86400 s
1a = 365 d
Frequency f f Hz (hertz) 1/s 1 Hz = 1/s
Linear Speed v v m/s m/s 1 m/s = 3,6 km/h
Angular Speed  N rad/sec revolutions
per minute 2**N
= 
60
2 2
Linear a a m/s m/s Gravity acceleration:
Acceleration g = 9,81 m/s²
d/dt
2
Angular  rad/s
Acceleration
Mass m m Kg Kgp s²/m 1 Kgp s²/m = 9,81 Kg
3 3
Density e d Kg/m Kgp/dm
Force F F N (Newton) Kgp 1 Kgp = 9,81 N
2 2
Pressure p p Pa (Pascal) Kgp/cm 1 Pa = 1 N/m
2 4
1 Kgp/cm = 9,81*10 Pa
Work W W J (joule) Kgp m 1 J = 1 N m = 1 Ws
Energy E E 1 Kgp m = 9,81 J
Force- M M Nm Kgp m 1 N m = 1 J = 1 Ws
Momentum 1 Kgp m = 9,81 N m
Torque
Power P P W (watt) Kgp m/s 1 W = 1 J/s = 1 N m/s
1 Kgp ms = 9,81 W
J
2 2 2
Inertia J Kg m Kgp ms 1 Kgp ms = 9,81 Kg m²
Momentum
Current I I A (ampere) A
Voltage U U V (volt) V
Electric R R (ohm)  1 = 1 V/A
resistance
Capacitance C C F (farad) F 1 F = 1 C/V
Electric charge Q Q C (coulomb) C 1C=1As
Electric G G S (siemens) S 1 S = 1 A/V = 1/
Conductance
Inductance L L H (henry) H 1 H = 1 V s/A
2
Magnetic induction B B 1 T = 1 Wb/m
T (Tesla) T
Flux   Wb (Weber) Wb 1 Wb = 1 V s
Magnetic field H H A/m A/m

Temperature t t °C °C 1 K = 1 °C
Absolute T K 0 K = -273,16 °C
Temperature
SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000250116B 1-3

1 Foreword
POWER
HP : HORSEPOWER
CV : HORSEPOWER
PS : PFERDSTÄRKE (1 PS = 1 CV)
1 CV = 0,7355 KW = 0,9863 HP
1 HP = 0,7457 KW = 1,01387 CV
1 KW = 1,36 CV = 1,34 HP
Example:
P = 1200 HP
P [KW] = 0,7457 * 1200 = 895 KW
ENERGY
1 Kcal = 4186,8 J
6
1 KWh = 3,6 * 10 J
1 KWh = 860 Kcal
1 BTU = 1054,6 J = 0,252 Kcal
TEMPERATURE
Absolute Temperature : T ( K)
Temperature (Celsius degrees) : tc (°C)
Temperature (Fahrenheit degrees) : tf (°F)
T = tc + 273,16 (K)
5
tc = (tf - 32) *
9 (°C)
9
tf = 32 + tc *
5 (°F)
Examples:
0 °C = 32 °F
25 °C = 72 °F
40 °C = 104 °F

1 Foreword
PRESSURE
1 atm = 101325,3 Pa = 1,013253 bar = 760 mm Hg

5
1 bar = 10 Pa = 750 mm Hg = 0,9869 atm
1 mm Hg = 133,322 Pa =1,333227 millibar = 0,00131579 atm
5 5
1 Pa = 10 bar = 0,007500594 mm Hg = 0,9869 * 10 atm
VOLUMETRIC FLOW
V
q= m3 / s
t
3 5
1 l /min = 1/60000 m / s = 1,67 * 10 m3 / s
3 4
3
1 m / h = 1/3600 m / s = 2,78 * 10 m3 / s
3 5
q [ m / s ] = 1,67 * 10 * q [l /min]
3
q [l /min] = 60000 * q [ m / s ]
3 4 3
q [ m / s ] = 2,78 * 10 * q [m /h ]
3 3
q [ m / h ] = 3600 * q [ m / s ]
UNITY OF MEASUREMENT IN THE BRITISH AND AMERICAN SYSTEMS
1 inch = 25,4 mm
1 foot = 12 inches = 304,8 mm
1 marine mile (British) = 1,853 Km
1 marine mile international (1954) = 1,852 Km
1 knot = 1 marine mile per hour
1 mile = 1,609 Km
1 gallon (American) = 3,785 litres
1 gallon (British) = 4,546 litres
1 pound = 0,45359 Kg
1 ounce = 1/16 pound = 28,349 g
1 B.T.U. = 0,252 Kcal
1 HP = 0,746 KW

1 Foreword
1.4 USEFUL FORMULAS

International System Technical System
(SI)
Work and Energy: Work and Energy:
W =F*l 1 2 2 2 2
E [Kgp m] = * GD [Kgp m ] * N [giri/min]
W =M* 7157
E =P*t
1
E = *J * 
2
Torque: Torque:
M =F*l M=F*l
M =
PW 
=
60 * PW 
= 9,55 *
PW  P kW 
rad/sec 2 * Ngiri / min Ngiri / min
 
M [Kgp m] = 974 *
N giri/min
Power: Lifting:
W 1
P = P[Kw] = * G [kgp] * v [m/s]
102
t
Lifting: Rotational motion:
P [W] = G [N] * v [m/s] (G : peso)
P[Kw] = 1 * M [kgp m] * N [giri/min]
Rotational motion: 974
P =M*
P = M*
2
*N =
1
   
* N giri / min * m Nm
60 9,55
Linear motion:
P [W] = F [N] * v [m/s]
Acceleration and braking time: Acceleration and braking time:

J Kp m 2  * rad / s   GD2 kgp m2  * Ngiri/min
  1 J * N giri/min 1  
t [s] =  t [s] =
 
=
M N m  9,55 M Nm 375 mkgp m
Inertia: Inertia
2 2
J =m*r GD = 4 * J
m = mass (Kg) G : weight (kgp)
r = radius (m) D : diameter (m)
JR [kg m ] = 91,2 mkg v m / s

2 2 2
N 2 giri/min2
m = mass (Kg)
v = speed (m/s)
nmot = motor speed (g/min)
JR = Inertia at the motor shaft (Kg/m²)
Induction motors:
Input Power:
PI = 3 U I cos  cos  motor power factor
Output power (mechanical power):

PU = 3 U I cos   motor efficiency
Temperature raise in motor windings:

Rc - Rf Rc - Rf
COPPER : t = (234,5 + tf) ; ALUMINUM : t = (230 + tf)
Rf Rf
t (°C) : temperature rise
tf (°C) : cold temperature
Rc () : hot winding resistance
Rf () : cold winding resistance

1 Foreword
1.5 GENERAL SAFETY PRESCRIPTIONS
This section contains pieces of information concerning the safety of the staff operating in the
selection board area. This general information is about the risks which may occur during operation
and maintenance of the involved equipment.
The operators and the staff in charge of maintenance must know about the perils associated with
high voltage and frequency and must be aware of the relevant safety procedures.
WATCH OUT !  All the interventions concerning the maintenance and electric installation
on the selection board must be effected by skilled technicians.
 You are not allowed to vary the insulation distance or remove insulating
materials and covers.
The figure below shows the serigraphy of the registration plate which is applied on the door of each
selective board section where equipment supplied by high voltage is represented:
CAUTION
ATTENZIONE
ELECTRIC
PERICOLO DANGER
ELETTRICO
ONLY SKILLED
ACCESSO OR
CONSENTITO
INSTRUCTED
SOLO A PERSONE
PERSONNEL ISISTRUITE
AVVERTITE O ADMITTED
RISPETTARE
OBSERVE LE NORME
THE SAFETY DI AND
RULES SICUREZZA
PROVIDE
E
YOURSELFMUNIRSI DI
PROTECTIVE
EQUIPMENT
PROTEZIONE BEFORE
INDIVIDUALEAPPROACHING
PRIMA
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

1 Foreword
 WARNING No dielectric strength tests must be carried out on parts of the selection
board. To measure the signal voltage suitable measurement instruments
must be used (internal minimum resistance 10k/V).
Handle the device so not to damage any of its parts.
Protect the device from stresses (temperature, humidity, crashes, etc.)

which are not allowed.
Always effect earthing, using the suitable bar in the board.
The drive contains equipment sensitive to electrostatic charges: they can

WARNINGS therefore be damaged if not properly handled. If a maintenance or
replacement operation has to be performed on the electronic cards, the
following warnings must be observed:
The electronic cards should be handled only if this is strictly necessary to

perform the work. A maintenance kit must be used when touching the
cards, in order to protect them from electrostatic charges (use a
grounded metal bracelet and a conductive pad where to lay the card
during the repair).
The electronic cards must not be touched by insulating material (i.e.

plastic sheet, insulating surfaces, synthetic clothes). The cards should lay
only on conductive surfaces.
When soldering on the cards, the soldering iron tip must be grounded.
Cards and components must be wrapped and shipped only in conductive

envelopes (i.e. metal envelopes).
If the envelopes are not conductive, the cards must be wrapped in

conductive sheets (domestic aluminium sheets can be used).

1 Foreword
1.6 DOCUMENT SUBDIVISION
The documents pertinent to the SILCOVERT S include, besides this manual, also the following
manuals:
Use and Maintenance General Manual for the electric and electronic equipment in the instrument
panel. (PMPSVVARIB1822).
Electric Panel and Terminal Board Functional Scheme
Ladder list PLC program
Control panel Functional Scheme
 REMARK The part referring to transport, storage and unpacking is reproduced outside
the packing itself and in the installation and maintenance manual.

1 Foreword
1 - 10 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
1 Foreword
SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000250116B 1 - 11
DOCUMENTATION USE 2
In this Chapter
2.1 INTRODUCTION 1
2.2 WIRING DIAGRAM PATTERN .2
2.3 INITIAL SHEETS 2
2.4 SHEETS WITH CIRCUIT FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM .3
2.5 TERMINAL BOARD PATTERN 17
2.1 INTRODUCTION
This section aims at supplying all the instructions necessary to a correct and quick reading of the
documentation worked out by Nidec-ASI with reference to the electric equipment supplied and to be
used by the operators.
By electric equipment is meant a whole of devices for a complete plant or for a part of it, contained in
one or more electric switchboards, called main wiring diagram or functional diagram.
This documentation mainly consists of:
Equipment main wiring diagram.

Pattern of terminal boards and external connections.
 REMARK In the main equipment and terminal board wiring diagram the following
information is included:
Equipment single-wire diagram.
Electric control board overall dimension and location of the terminal

boards in the various compartments.
Prescriptions for the foundations.
List, ordered by letters, of all the equipment contained in the electric

switchboard/s with the relevant identification number or short description.
Detailed equipment functional diagram enabling identification of the

terminal boards corresponding to the wires from the electric control
boards.
Identification number of each terminal board to be matched to the

belonging compartment.
Name of the outgoing signal.
Clamp type
All the rules and conventions on which this Nidec-ASI documentation for equipment is based will be
set forth in this section. They will help find and read each type of information.

2 Documentation use
2.2 WIRING DIAGRAM PATTERN
In order to ease the information retrieval contained herein, the main diagram has a conventional
sheet order which is always respected.
The main distinction is:
Initial Sheets.
Sheets with circuit functional diagram.
Terminal Board Pattern.
In the former is inserted either the information to be used for electric switchboard installation (overall
dimensions, foundations, etc.) or the information which one can make use of to understand the
functional diagram.
In the latter, besides the functional diagram, also the data of the machine and equipment is inserted
which is necessary to the equipment start-up and management.
2.3 INITIAL SHEETS
Equipment Heading
It basically shows the plant name and the Client’s company style. They are defined according to the
information furnished by the Client himself and by the Commercial Dpt. of Nidec-ASI.
Table of Contents of the Diagram / Revisions

From the table of contents some general information can be drawn on the organisation of the sheets,
on their numeration and progress of revisions.
Cable-and-trunk Schematic
It is a one line scheme offering an overview of equipment of the power, regulation, auxiliary parts.
There is also a simplified representation of the power circuits with the main power devices which are
connected as well as of the regulation blocks.
The relay logic, conversely, is not pointed out, with exception of the logic which is absolutely
necessary to understand how regulation works.
Hydraulic Chart (where available)

It is a hydraulic scheme offering an overview of the equipment with a simplified representation of the
measurement, regulation and control devices.
Overall Dimensions of the Control Panels with Terminal Board Location and Data for
Installation
These sheets give some basic information on the implementation and project of the installation. They
are the following:
overall dimensions of the control panels containing the drive devices

dimension of the sections which the control panels will be divided into for transport purposes
maximum overall dimension of the structure with relevant plan, height and sides
data for the execution of the foundations
displacement into the control panel of the equipment concerning the different drives
identification of the terminal boards placed in the single compartments so to enable the sudden
detection of the corresponding pattern sheets.
Control Panel Equipment Main List

It basically aims at supplying the users with valid means to order parts and besides it permits to
detect precisely the location of each device inside the functional diagram and to have a short
description of the same.
The list is ordered according the function initials of the equipment contained in each panel (each
panel has its own equipment list); the equipment beginning with numbers are listed first.
In the column equipment identification, the alphanumeric initials enable to detect each device at
Nidec-ASI.

2 Documentation use
2.4 SHEETS WITH CIRCUIT FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM
General Introduction Characteristics

The functional diagram shows in detail the electric circuits of drives, equipment and machines and
conductors, with disregard of the physical location which these may have either in the panel or in the
plant.
The circuits are represented in quiescent conditions, that is without electrical feeding and with open
cut-offs.
During operation, that is in presence of tension, the circuits are in a work condition which, according
to a logic deriving from the electric characteristic of the equipment and sequence of the foreseen
operations, enables them to perform the function they have been built for.
Exemption is made for specific equipment and particular devices such as for example time relays,
keyers, stroke ends, and so on.
Complex equipment and machines are generally decomposed in their constructive elements (coils,
contacts, armatures, etc.), with conventional graphic symbols linked with connection lines (wires).
The equipment and the machines, that is all the electric devices are identified by an initial, whilst the
wires are characterised by a number.
Conventional Graphic Symbols

As the charts symbolically represent circuits and equipment, it is fundamental to know them making
use of the conventional graphic symbols, to understand how the system works.
The conventional graphic symbols used are those foreseen by the IEC standard, they basically
represent simple equipment (resistors, capacitors, etc.) or elements of complex equipment (contacts,
coils, etc.).
Sense of Representation of Circuits and Signals

In the functional diagrams the sequence of circuits is normally from the left to the right and from up
downward.
In the wiring diagrams where symbols of logic and analogic functions are used, the reference signals
and all the incoming signals are usually represented on the left of the symbol, whilst the outgoing
signals on the right of it; the inlet can be occasionally represented above and the outlet below.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 2-3

2 Documentation use
2.4.1 Identification Codes Used in Electric Technology
In general
To exactly identify each material the following information blocks are assigned:
Block 1 Main Code (functional) descriptive symbol =

Block 2 Location descriptive symbol
+
Block 3 Material descriptive symbol
-
Block 4 Connection Point (clamp) descriptive symbol
:
The prefix signal (dot) separates the different information levels in the block.
The information relevant to the four blocks are the following:
Block 1 = AN . AN  Technologic

 Elettrotecnic (electric)
Block 2 + AN . AN  Place

 Location
Block 3 - A N A  Type
 Progressive
 Function
Block 4 : AN
Information Block 1 – Functional Structure
= AN.AN
The assignment of letters and numbers to each section of the information function block is merely
arbitrary.
Standard DIN40719 and IEC 750 describe how to identify the letters to be used.
When identification of the technologic structure (single drive) does not exist or is not necessary, only
the functional (electrotecnic) structure remains; therefore the separation point is not necessary.
In any way the picked code must always be written on the plant drawings.

2 Documentation use
SUBDIVISION INTO TECHNICAL GROUPS INDEPENDENT FROM APPLICATION
= AN
FUNCTION CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

Title, index, revision, location, data, overall
A General information dimension, prescription, list of material,
explanatory notes.
C General transformer, out board low voltage

distribution.
D Line input, distribution to power supply units,
Power circuit with power supply to AC motors.
E network frequency Available, Further power supply unit sub-
division depending on D.
F Available, D.C. power supply unit
G A.C.A./D.C., D.C./A.C. converters
H Available, second (dodecaphase)converter or

Converter and user inverter.
J power circuit User, motor circuit.
K Available, D.C. motor excitation.
L Relay logic, contactors .
M Available, complex protection units (extra rapid

Command, control, signal, command).
N and protection circuits PLC, interface cards, relays, etc...
P Available.
Q Available.
R Available, alarms, signals, control units.
S Electric/physical measuring with complex

Measurements instruments.
T Available.
U Analogic or digital regulator.
V Regulations Auxiliary functions.
W Available.
X Available, terminal block signal distribution to

field.
Y Miscellaneous Available, heaters, board lighting, sockets.
Z Personalization sheets. (threshold table).
Table - 1

2 Documentation use
Remarks to table 1:
The second figure is numeric and must be always a progressive number within the function.
Even numbers must be preferably, but not absolutely used, to enable addition of sheets in the same
function without altering the order of the function itself.
Example:
=G4. U 2
Progressive in the function U
G4 drive regulation
D.C. no. 4 drive

2 Documentation use
Information Block 2 – Location
+ AN
To identify the installation areas of the equipment, a series of letters can be used which are usually
defined in accordance with the mechanic manufacturer, because the data is so huge which is not
possible to define previously the letters to be used.
An example of the definitions of such letters can be the following:
E  Control panel rooms

F  Production Line
H  Hydraulic Station
M Engine Room
S  Control room (computer room, control cabin, operating cabin, etc.)
In case several rooms, lines, cabins, etc. exist, to the predefined letter the progressive number must
be added.
The area identification codes will then be as follows:
+E1, +E2, +E3,

Inside these areas the equipment relevant to the plant will be installed and defined through an
alphanumeric code according to what defined in table 2.
Codes obtained from DIN40719 part 2C12.
The combination of letters as specified in the previous description with those of table 2 will originate
the location code of the equipment in the plant.
Some explanatory examples are given below.
+E1 +E1
Control panel room no 1
BT Distribution Panel no 1
+F1 +P1
Production line no 1
Control desk
+E2 +G1
Instrument board room no 2
D.C. converter no 1
 REMARK This type of information is usually written omitting the intermediate sign + .
+E1E1, +F1P1, +E2G1

2 Documentation use
SUBDIVISION ACCORDING TO LOCATION
+ AN
LOCATION UNITS LETTER PATTERN CLASSIFICATION IN DETAIL

EXAMPLE
A Cells, boards, ect... including high voltage unit

High Cells, boards, (metal clad, ect..).
Voltage panels, boxes B Same as above, to be used for evidencing different
parts in the same area.
C Areas for installation of transformers, reactors, ect..,

Special rooms Transformers only.
or cells reactor, capacitor D Areas for installation of high voltage capacitor
batteries.
E Frames, panels, low voltage three-phase A.C.

Low Frames boards.
Voltage F Frames, panels, boards, which A.C. converters are
panels mounted on or in.
G Frames, panels, boards, which D.C. converters are
boards mounted on or in.
H Frames, panels, boards, which A.C. auxiliary or
control units are mounted on or in.
K Frames, panels, boards, which A.C. or D.C.
regulation or aux. systems are mounted on or in.
L General boxes for low voltage distribution.
Boxes M Measurement boxes or push-button boxes used for
local control.
N Boxes for location of terminal blocks pertaining to
system distribution.
Control P Main/auxiliary control benches with reading desk.
benches R Main/auxiliary wall control panels.
S Areas for installation of power generators.

Miscellaneous Other units than T Areas for installation of large size motors.
those not defined U Ventilation/cooling system (air, water ect..)
with letters from V Battery rooms or recharge station.
A to R W Available.
X Special units assembled one by one.
EDP Y computers room main units.

System Z Peripheral units.
Table - 2

2 Documentation use
Definition of LOCATIONS on a Control Board Consisting of Several Compartments
+G1 Control Board
Compartment Compartment Compartment Compartment Compartment

1 2 3 1 2
Section 1 Section 2 Mechanical Subdivision
Definition of the Assembly areas in a Double front-end Compartment
Example:
+1 +1  +11
First compartment
First section
Location code
+G1.11

2 Documentation use
Information Block 3 - Material
-A (A) NN
(CEI 44-6, IEC 204-2, DIN 40719 part 2 Table 1)
LETTER COMPONENT TYPE PATTERNS INFORMATION BLOCK
Laser
A Unit sets Transistor amplificators AD
Integrated circuit amplificator AJ
Magnetic amplificators AM
Valve amplificators AV
Printed plate AP
Box AT
Rack AR
terminal block cards  AX 
Photoelectric cell BF 
B Transducers for Electric dynamometer B
conversion of electric Crystal transducer B
quantities into not Microphone BM 
electric quantities and Read head B
vice-versa Lauds peaker BS 
Synchro transmitter B
Analogic/numeric multi step
transducer or sensor (for display
or measurement).
Pressure transducer BP
Position transducer BQ
Rotation transducer (tachymeter) BR
Temperature transducer BT
Speed transducer BV
Level transducer BL
C Capacitor Capacitor C
D Binary operator, Digital units and integrated
circuits:
timers and recording Delay line
units Bi-stable element
Mono-stable element D
Recorder
Magnetic memory
Tape or disk recorder
Other unit than those mentioned in E
E Miscellaneous present table
Heaters EH
Lightening lamps EL
Fans EV
Air conditioners EC 
Table - 3.1
2 - 10 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
2 Documentation use
F Protection units Surge arrester. F

Current threshold protection unit FA
(instant reaction type).
Current threshold protection unit FR
(delayed reaction type).
Current threshold protection unit FS
(instant end delayed reaction type)
Fuse. FU
Voltage threshold protection unit. FV
Rotary generators.
G Generators Quartz oscillators. G
Power supply Rotary or stationary frequency
converter. GF
Power supply. GS
Auxiliary power supply. GA 
Acoustic warning. HA
H Signaling units Light warning. HL
Alarm systems. HS
J
Instant on-off relays or contactors. KA
K Relays, contactors Blocked, bi-stable relays or
contactors (on-off relays with
mechanical coupler or permanent
magnet, ect..). KL
Contactors. KM
Polarized relays. KP
Reed relays. KR
Time and on-off relays (timer) KT
Static relays. KV 
Inducer.
L Inducers, reactors Arrest coil. L
Reactor.
Motors. M
M Motors A.C. motors. MA 
D.C. motors. MD 
Display, recorder and integrator
P Measures, test units measures. P
Signal generators.
Ammeter. PA
Pulse counter. PC
Wattmeter PJ
Recorder. PS
Clock and time counter. PT
Voltmeter PV
Frequency meter. PF 
Table - 3.2
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 2 - 11
2 Documentation use
Q Power circuits Automatic switch

manouvering tools (Knife switch with fuse). QF
Disconnector. QS
Main switch. QM
Auxiliary protection switch. QE 
Fixed or variable resistor. R
R Resistor Potentiometer. RP
Shunter. RS
Thermistor. RT
Varistor. RV
Dynamic break resistor. RD
Selector or commutator. SA
S Control units Push-button (proximity control unit
included). SB
Numeric, single step, mechanic or
electronic on-off sensor:
Liquid level sensor. SL
Pressure sensor. SP
Rotation sensor. SQ
temperature sensor. ST
Lighted push-button. SH 
Current transformer. TA
T Transformers Control circuit power supply
transformer. TC
Power transformer. TM
Magnetic stabilizer. TS
Voltage transformer. TV
Current converter. UA 
U Modulators D/A converter. UD 
converters Frequency converter. UF 
Energy converter. UJ 
A/D converter. UN 
Voltage converter. UV 
Diode. VD 
V Semiconductors Transistor.
Thyristor. VT 
Zener. VZ 
IGBT.
GTO.
IGCT.
Control circuit power supply
rectifier. VC
Table - 3.3
2 - 12 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
2 Documentation use
W Transmission ways, Wire.

wave guides, aerials Cable.
Wave guide. W
Dipole.
Parabolic antenna.
Bar. WB 
Multiple cables. WC 
Connection bar. XB
X Terminal, taps, plug Test plug. XJ
Taps. XP
Plugs. XS
Terminal board (block) XT
Connectors. XC 
Electromagnet. YA
Y Electrically powered Electromagnetic break. YB
mechanical units Electromagnetic clutch. YC
Magnetic spindle or table. YH
Electromagnetic valve. YV
Motor potentiometer. YR 
Impedance adaptors, Line equalizers.
Z equalizers, Crystal filter Z
band limiters LC - RC filters ZF
Table - 3.4
 REMARK 1  = Codes not considered by the rules but suggested by common use.
 REMARK 2 Using a two-letter code, according to table 3, double the first, if the second
identification letter is not foreseen.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 2 - 13
2 Documentation use
2.4.2 Equipment Codes
The equipment and machines, that is all the electric devices represented in the functional diagrams,
are identified by a single “code”.
A code identifies unambiguously a piece of equipment only, whilst the other elements making up a
complex device are characterised by the same code, even if they were represented split.
The equipment codes are usually reported next to the graphic symbol which they refer to and
precisely on the left of it, if this is represented vertically, or below if it is represented horizontally.
:1 :3 :5
+E1.11A
=A1.D2
-QS01
:2 :4 :6
In the functional diagram the information blocks ( + ) e ( = ) are omitted, whenever they coincide with
those reported in the suitable functional diagram box.
The descriptive sign ( : ) is usually omitted.
:1 :3 :5
+...........
=...........
-QS01
:2 :4 :6
+E1.11A
=A1.D2
2.4.3 Numbering of Connections
Each connection represented in the functional diagram is characterised by its own identification
code.
Main Circuits
A. C. D. C. Protections
Phase L1 Positive L+ Protection conductor PE

Phase L2 Negative L- Protection & neutral conduct PEN
Phase L3 Earth conductor E
Neutral N Middle Point M Earth strays conductor TE
2 - 14 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
2 Documentation use
Direct Current Supply
Polarity Identification acronym
Positive +24V, +15V, +5V, ecc.....

Negative -24V, -15V, -5V, ecc.....
Common 0V, gnd, ecc.....
Shield SH
In other circuits, the wire number is obtained matching the code of the functional group (=) with the
number of the terminal relevant to the component it will be connected to.
A1
A2
=A1L2A
=A1.L2
2.4.4 Reference for Feed through Wires Passing Through Two Sheets Belonging to the Same
Functional Diagram
In a functional diagram consisting of several sheets, it is not infrequent that common feeding and
signals pass from one sheet to the other.
To enable a quick retrieval of the destination or origin of these connections, the references are
signalled with the sheet number and diagram column where the connections start or continue.
If the destination or origin are referred to another control board, the reference is put into square
brackets with further display of the control panel code.
See the example shown in the following page.
 REMARK 1 The feed through connections passing from one spreadsheet to the other of
the diagram are identified in the starting point in the sheets where these
connections end; their identification is complete and pointed out in the prefix
of the starting spreadsheet.
 REMARK 2 In the pre-fab wiring harness, the connections are not numbered, but only
the external terminals are identified.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 2 - 15
2 Documentation use
6 7 8 6 7 8
13 23
=D02 =D02/ 7
-KA01 /7
-KA01
24
14
A1
A1 A1
-KA06
-KA01 -KA02
A2
A2 A2
14 13
14 13
/8
24 23
24 23
=D04/7
34 33
34 33
44 43
44 43
= D02 = D04
+ ....... + .......
2.4.5 Identification of the Equipment Terminal Clamps
In some equipment the terminals are physically marked and some else are not; in this event,
however, dummy identification codes are assigned in order to implement wiring harness.
The equipment terminals are identified on the functional diagrams only when both conditions occur:
The terminals are physically marked on the equipment
The signal in words is indispensable to effect the correct connection using the functional
diagram only as it occurs during start-up operations, fault search, and so on.
2.4.6 Calibration Rated Data
This data is foreseen only whenever the information is necessary to understand the operation as
well as the tests, the start-up and the plant management.
It can be pointed out next to the graphic sign or in a suitable table of the functional diagram.
2.4.7 Equipment Pattern and Cross-references between Contacts Used and Coils
Below each coil there is a description of the pattern of the equipment contacts and below the
references of the contacts used.
The references of the contacts used are expressed with alphanumeric digits showing the sheet and
column number of each contact in the diagram where they are used.
2 - 16 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
2 Documentation use
2.5 TERMINAL BOARD PATTERN
Aims and Descriptions
The tables showing the pattern of the terminal boards of the control boards have the following basic
functions:
They enable the construction and wiring harness of the terminal boards as an integral part of the
control boards, from this point of view they are a typical fabrication document.
During the project for installation they aim at drawing the outer cable tables.
During plant assembly they help make the actual connection of the external wires with the
terminal boards.
The forms where the terminal board pattern is described, expressly report all instructions required for
their use.
It is to be noted that the destination of the outgoing cables is pointed out with the location marks
defined in the suitable sheet of the general scheme or, devoid of these, as in the case of motors,
through the initials used in the circuit charts.
The numeration of the connections in the “identification No” column is always reported in detail.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 2 - 17
2 Documentation use
2 - 18 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
2 Documentation use
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 2 - 19
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 3
In this Chapter
3.1 SAFETY PRESCRIPTIONS 1

3.2 CHECKS BEFORE INSTALLATION 3
3.1 SAFETY PRESCRIPTIONS
WATCH OUT ! The product has been built for use according to the installation and
maintenance procedures described in this manual which have to be
carried out by skilled operators. The user is liable for making sure that the
installation is accomplished in compliance with the current laws on plant
and work safety.
A correct installation and connection only may ensure the good

functioning and the foreseen performance. The use manual must be
entirely read and understood before the equipment is used.
This manual provides information on Medium Voltage variable frequency Converters of the SILCOVERT-S
range, with power from 0.5 MVA to 40MVA and output voltages equal to 1.3 - 7.2 kV.
The Use and Maintenance Manual, together with the Declaration of Incorporation, is an integral part of the
SILCOVERT-S equipment and must always accompany it; the user or integrator must keep these
documents in order and in good condition for the full duration of SILCOVERT-S equipment use.
A copy of the Use and Maintenance Manual can be requested from Nidec ASI S.p.A. in case of loss or
destruction, by specifying the exact model, serial number and year of manufacture.
This manual reflects the state of the art at the time of delivery. The Manufacturer reserves the right to apply
any modification to the product deemed useful without the obligation to update the previous production
Equipment Manual.
This Manual describes the SILCOVERT-S frequency converters providing the information required for
incorporation/installation, commissioning, use and maintenance.
The Manual is addressed to personnel in charge of incorporating/installing, commissioning, using and
servicing the SILCOVERT-S converter.
Carefully read this Manual in full before incorporating/installing, commissioning, using and servicing the
SILCOVERT-S converter.
The user of the SILCOVERT-S converter and of its Use and Maintenance Manual must know and be
able to use the basic principles of electrical engineering and physics, the practice of electrical
wiring, the symbols used in the wiring diagrams, the safety rules and must be experienced in using
Medium Voltage electrical equipment.
The Manufacturer declines all liability for any damage caused by the SILCOVERT-S converter to people,
animals and property in the following cases:
 Incorrect use or for different purposes to those for which it was built
 Incorrect incorporation/installation in machine, system or equipment for which it was intended.
 Failure to comply with the installation/incorporation rules stated in this Manual
 Use by unqualified or unauthorised personnel
 Defects in the electrical, hydraulic, pneumatic and water (if present) supplies
 Failure to comply with the technical specifications concerning the power supplies listed in section 2
of this Manual

3 Mechanical installation
 Missing or insufficient periodical maintenance

 Modifications or interventions on the equipment not agreed with or unauthorised by the Manufacturer
 Use of non-original spare parts or, however, different to those specified for the Model
 Total or partial non-conformity with the Instructions in this Manual
The person in charge of organising and managing the activities provided for the SILCOVERT-S converter is
responsible for having the following safety rules respected and must ensure that the authorised personnel:
 is qualified to perform the requested activities
 knows and carefully observes the rules in this Manual
 knows and applies all general and specific safety rules applicable to the SILCOVERT-S converter.
Failure to comply with the safety rules can lead to personal injuries and damage the SILCOVERT-S
converter.
Reading, even if exhaustive, of this Manual cannot, in any way, replace adequate experience and
appropriate training of personnel in charge of incorporation/installation, use and maintenance on the
SILCOVERT-S.
The user and/or integrator can, at any moment, contact the Manufacturer to request further information to
that contained in this Manual or to propose improvements.
The following documents are an integral part of this Manual:
1. Electrical schematic diagram (relative to the job order) 2FNxxxxxxxxxx
2. Specific job manual (relative to the job order) 2MUxxxxxxxxxx
3. Layout drawing (relative to the job order) 2DDxxxxxxxxxx
In order to guarantee maximum reliability of operation, Nidec ASI S.p.A. has carefully chosen the materials
and components used in manufacturing the SILCOVERT-S converter, performing a series of severe checks
and tests before shipment.
Proper operation of the SILCOVERT-S converter over time depends on its correct use and adequate
maintenance, in accordance with the instructions listed in this Manual and in other supplied documents.
This Manual aims at providing technical information to personnel in charge of incorporating/installing, using,
and performing maintenance on the SILCOVERT-S.
It is very important to comply with the Manufacturer's instructions contained in this Manual to guarantee
correct incorporation/installation, use, safety, and reliability of the SILCOVERT-S over time.
The instructions in this Manual are addressed to qualified and experienced technical personnel, with
adequate knowledge in the electrical, electronic and mechanical fields.
For further details on the definition of experienced person and designated person, refer to Standard EN
50110-1.
The Use and Maintenance Manual contains the necessary information to understand the methods of
incorporation/installation of the SILCOVERT-S, its operation and its correct use. In particular, the Manual
contains the technical descriptions concerning the safety devices and systems, the operation, tools use and
the interpretation of the diagnostic signs, the main procedures and routine maintenance interventions.
For correct integration and use of the Nidec ASI S.p.A. SILCOVERT-S within the final
equipment/machine/system (not supplied by Nidec ASI S.p.A. and not described in this Manual)
incorporating it, it is assumed that the work environment is adequate and conforms with the laws in force
with regard to health and safety.

1 Impiego della documentazione
!
DANGER
Very carefully read this Manual before commissioning, using and

performing any type of maintenance on the SILCOVERT-S, in
order to be able to strictly follow the instructions herein.
All users must read and understand the instructions in this
Manual.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000250116B 3- 3
!
DANGER
The SILCOVERT-S supplied by Nidec ASI S.p.A. is designed for

incorporation in a complete equipment/system.
Refer to the equipment/system Manual to obtain all information
relating to it and the safety rules concerning the use of the complete
equipment/system.
It is strictly forbidden to use the SILCOVERT-S converter before
having read and understood the instructions in this Manual and in the
Manual of the equipment/system incorporating the SILCOVERT-S
converter.
Furthermore, the Customer can request training courses for its personnel, with the purpose of guaranteeing
an adequate knowledge of the SILCOVERT-S converter and of the rules for proper incorporation,
integration, use and maintenance.
3.2 CHECKS BEFORE INSTALLATION

The installation room must be void of dust, metal particles, oil suspension
WARNING and without gas or corrosive liquid sprays.
Follow the procedures described in section 5 of the Use and

Maintenance Manual of the Electric Equipment which each supply is
equipped with (PMPSVVARIB1822)
Only experienced and qualified personnel with adequate knowledge in the electrical and electronic fields,
authorised and duly trained personnel can manage the SILCOVERT-S converter; this includes
incorporation/installation, operation, use, maintenance, cleaning, disassembly and dismantling.
Personnel in charge of incorporation/installation, operation and maintenance of the SILCOVERT-S must be
aware that the knowledge and application of the safety rules is an integral part of their tasks.
The instructions contained in this Manual are addressed to qualified and specialised personnel with
adequate knowledge in the electrical, electronic and mechanical fields, and authorised and informed on the
risks related to Medium Voltage equipment.
The definition of an experienced person and of a designated person for managing the electrical systems is
that contained in Standard EN 50110-1 to which reference must be made for further details.
!
DANGER
Unauthorised personnel cannot access the SILCOVERT-S converter

installation area.
Perform the following operations before starting to use the SILCOVERT-S:

 Read this Use and Maintenance Manual carefully
 Make sure the SILCOVERT-S is fully incorporated/installed in the equipment or system for which it is
intended.
 Make sure all of the necessary safety devices are present to guarantee the equipment/system
conforms with the instructions of the applicable Directives

 Know which safety devices and protections have been provided and are available in the
SILCOVERT-S, with their position and function inside the equipment.
It is prohibited to start the SILCOVERT-S, described in this Manual, unless the equipment/system/machinery
into which it has to be incorporated or installed has been declared in compliance with the rules of Machinery
Directive 2006/42/EC and of the Directives applicable to the equipment/system/machinery in its entirety.
 WARNING
The various safety devices and systems are listed in chapter 4.
!
DANGER
It is prohibited to disconnect or partially remove the safety protections

placed to protect against dangerous parts.
It is prohibited to remove any Danger, precaution or prohibition plate
or sign.
It is strictly prohibited to open the electrical panels during their
operation or immediately after having disconnected power.
All of the safety and protection devices must be maintained fully
efficient in order to guarantee their correct operation. They must be
immediately repaired or replaced by the after-sales assistance centre
in case of damages or malfunctions.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000250116B 3- 5

SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000250116B 3- 7
E
EQQU
UIIP
PMME
ENNTT D
DEES
SCCR
RIIP
PTTIIO
ONN 4
In this Chapter
4.1 CARPENTRY AND ACCESSORIES 1

4.2 CONVERTER PANEL SECTION 3
4.3 POWER CIRCUITS 3
4.4 AUXILIARY AND CONTROL CIRCUITS 10
4.5 MAINTENANCE 34
4.1 CARPENTRY AND ACCESSORIES
Generals
The constructive structure of this new series of carpentry reflects the well-proven diagram
for panels manufactured by Nidec-ASIand its joint partners.
It consists of an assembly of modular components made of high quality skinpassed hot-
rolled sheet steel complying with FeP11MG UNI5867 classification. The main features of
this line of compartments are structural strength, mechanical resistance, and protection
from external agents and module versatility.
Design criteria
Screwed structures have been used due either to the several years' experience in this type
of execution or to the following reasons:
Maximum homogeneity in the elements composing the compartments
Easy wiring and assembly of the equipment
Ease of manufacturing panels with compartments of different sizes
Constructive characteristics
The basic structure of each compartment consists of an assembly of components
standardized in order to allow a rapid assembly of ledgers and stands (if any).
The basic components are joined together by means of bolts; along the vertical pillars are
supplied two parallel rows of 25 mm square and round alternate holes fit to meet any
assembly need.
The constructive form of pillars and ledgers gives the structure a particular strength.
The main frame is realized using a front and a rear rim, bound by four ledgers. The
resulting frame is prearranged to contain a component holder panel. Thanks to the insertion
of suitable pillars, modular panels can be used.
In the upper part of the compartment there is a space that can be used for:
 the passage of omnibus bars
 fan assembly
 cooling air canalization in case conditioners are used
 any other business
Doors are accomplished with a single swing-door, for compartments whose maximum width
is equal to. 1000mm, and are normally hinged on the right. A lock controlling a handle
interlocking the doors in three points secures the closing system.

4 Equipment description
The air change inside the compartment, when necessary, is accomplished through
openings on the doors. These openings are protected by modular grids (of a louver type)
ensuring an IP21 protection (against the penetration of solids with size greater than
12.5mm and against water dripping).
As previously stated, the compartments included in the basic version ensure a IP21 total
protection level that can be increased to IP51 thanks to some devices (against the
penetration of dust and water from all directions).
Surface treatments
The metal part which constitute the main structure, the side panels and the closing doors
are painted with application, by means of electrostatic output systems, of ground bright
orange peel finished epossypolyester paint; the normalized color is grey RAL7035, whose
minimum thickness should be equal to 70micron.
The internal details such as brackets, ledgers, pillars, panels, bolts and screws, etc., are
galvanized. The galvanization maximum thickness should be equal to 7 micron; for
particular applications or environments this thickness can be increased up to 12micron.
Accessories
In order to allow the mounting of components and assemblies inside the compartments, a
set of standardized accessories, described hereunder, is available.
Assembly of revolving racks

A couple of suitably designed hinges allow the assembly of revolving racks even of
remarkable dimensions (up to a maximum of 36HE, i.e. 1600mm)
Assembly of magnetic parts

Suitable stands allowing the assembly of magnetic equipment ex: transformer,
(maximum approximatly weight equal to 1600Kg) are provided for.
In case of greater weights a separate transport is provided for: The magnetic parts are,
therefore, equipped with wheels and mounted, inside the compartments, on suitable
sliding rails.
Omnibus bars
Suitably designed and insulated accessories allow the assembly of omnibus bars on the
compartment upper part.
The maximum allowed size for each phase is equal to three 80x10 mm copper bars.
During the normal operation these bars allow a current capacity equal to 3400A
Lifting and transport

In case of handling of a single compartment the use of eyebolts is provided for. To allow
the lifting of the panel sections consisting of two or more compartments, suitable ledgers
are provided for, secured on the compartment roof in correspondence with the edges as
to obtain the maximum safety during the operations.
The maximum size of the normally transportable sections is equal to 4 m; however, in
particular cases and with limited weights, it is possible to reach greater dimensions.
Miscellaneous accessories
Grounding bars, normally mounted on the compartment floor are provided for.
A set of bolts, nuts, spacers etc. for a proper union of the sections at the client's
premises is supplied.

4.2 CONVERTER PANEL SECTION
See figure below:
VFD BOARD (sfc&avr):
Cubicle side:
A. front
P. rear
D. top
C. door
P
C
+22
+21
+12
+11
4.3 STATIC STARTER POWER CIRCUITS +11, To + 21A/P
The power circuit main components are:

Thyristor module (+21A)
Intermediate circuit leveling reactance (+21P)
Input / output Transformers (+11 / +12)

The power modules are standard sub-assemblies and can be different according to the size of the converter.
show simplified electric diagrams indicating the main components of a power module:
L
Fig. -1 principle diagram of a SILCOVERT-S converter
The two bridges are assembled in the SILCOVERT-S converter as shown in the following figure in order to
obtain a more compact structure:
Fig. -2 power module electric diagram
Each thyristor is completed with a snubber and a firing card with relative power supply circuit, as shown in
the following figure:
BOD protection
anode
Monitoring
optical fibre
Isolation transformer Snubber
for firing card power Control optical
supply fibre
Activation control
between cathode
and gate
Fig. -3 thyristor connections
The power modules vary according to the type of cooling and configuration selected. The most common
modules are listed below.

Power modules for air-cooling converter
The power module is divided as follows:

Rectifier stage connected to the transformer secondary and inverter stage connected to the
generator by starting switch installed on it.
In these modules are assembled:

 Stack for the positioning of # 6 thyristors
 DC link bus bar
 RC circuits for the protections of thyristors (Snubber)
Figure 4.4– Three-phase power module located inside the compartment

4.3.2 Intermediate circuit leveling DC reactance
The intermediate circuit DC reactance is located on the compartment +21P

The reactance has the function of limiting the current oscillation in the DC intermediate
circuit; it is normally realized with an iron core and air cooled.
It is equipped with a maximum temperature sensor.
FRONT VIEW
DETAIL
Special tool to
introduce / to
extract
reactance

VFD input Transformer
Remuve the front panel of the cubicle +11A
Step-down input transformer
585kVA 6600V/1650V 3 PH 50 Hz
VFD output Filter Transformer

Remuve the front panel of the cubicle +12A
Step-up output filter transformer
515kVA 1450V/6600V 3PH. 50Hz

4.4 AUXILIARY AND CONTROLS CIRCUITS
Compartment +22 front side contains all circuits and equipment completing the drive.
They consist of:
Static starter control panel
AVR control panel
Interface relay and electronic card and transducers
PLC, relay circuit and HMI PC_panel
The power supplies of these equipments derive, according to the client availabilities, from:
for power auxiliaries [ ventilation ]

Three-phase input line 415V 50Hz from which is obtained, in the absence of a
dedicated line
for cubicle auxiliaries [ lights, taps, etc.]
Single-phase auxiliary line 240V 50Hz
for LCI & AVRControls, PLC and interfaces
Single-phase auxiliary line 110Vdc
relay
4.4.1 Control panel

Commonly referred to the control rack, it contains all the electronic cards that are used to
control a synchronous machine.See below.
Control cards
for inverter
bridge, rectifier
bridge
and speed

The control is connected to the PLC, signals coming from the field (decoupled via relay) and to the PC fitted
on the panel door to modify the parameters. Usually, the power supply sources are external to the control
page. The power supply sources are placed inside the first rack only in the 3-line configuration to optimise
space. The power supply sources provide +15V and -15V power supply to all the boards via the ALIM01
board.
Control Frame
This frame contains the cards that constitute the control of the converter and regulator.
These cards are Europe 2 standard size.
They can present customizable components varying according to the system. For this
reason the values of these calibrations are reported in the customization sheets of the
project functional diagrams.
 NOTE Before replacing a card, check that all components that can be
calibrated match the system ones.
The control performs the following functions:

- LCI Speed regulator
- LCI Current regulator
- LCI Rectifier bridge phase shifter
- LCI Inverter bridge phase shifter
- AVR Current regulation (see exciter section)
- AVR Converter bridge phase shifter control (see exciter section)
- Interface towards converter (pulse generation, analog signal acquiring)
- Interface towards PLC
- LCI Thyristor monitoring
- Synchronizer system
Later he describes as inherent in the LCI. As for the arguments concerning the excitation
system refer to the manual section dedicated to it

The LCI main boards in the control rack are:
- ALIM01: power supply board, which, besides providing power supply to the other boards,
it provides also +5V power supply for the ACPU02 board.
- AINT02: the interface board of the ACPU02 board is equipped with analogue and digital
inputs and outputs towards the other boards in the control and towards the
PLC.
- ACPU02: microprocessor board used for the speed regulator.
- AREV11: board used to normalise the signals coming from the transducers and their
elaboration. Usually, two boards are found in a rack, one for the transducers
fitted on the rectifier bridge and one for the transducers fitted on the inverter
bridge.
- AGIM21: board in which the current regulator and the rectifier bridge phase shifters are
implemented.
- AGIF21: board in which the inverter bridge phase shifter is implemented
- APROT4: board in which the excitation current regulation and the converter protection
system are implemented
ALIM01 board
The ALIM01 board is a power supply board and provides +15V -15V power supply to all the boards in the
control rack. Moreover, it provides +5V power supply to the ACPU02 board.
Figure shows the board image.
Fig. -4 ALIM01 board
The board has 2 LEDs on the front panel indicating the presence of +15V e -15V power supply. On the same
front panel, there is also a connector indicating the main diagnostic signals.
The ALIM01 board can adjust only the output voltage (+5V) via a specific RP1 trimmer.
4 - 10 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
AINT02 board
The AINT02 board is an interface board for the ACPU02 board and it is used to:
 receive and send digital signals to the PLC
 receive and send analogue signals to the other boards on the control
the front connector is used to exchange signals with the PLC via the specific XCPD37F interface.
Fig. -5 AINT02 board
The board has programmable elements. The codes of the software installed are indicated in the
customisation sheets (Gxx/Zxx) found in the schematic diagram job order document 2FNxxxxx.
XCPD37F interface board
Fig. -6 XCPD37F interface board
The interface board is connected to the AINT02 board with a 37-pole pre-wired cable, and it is used to
communicate with the PLC. The exchanged signals are digital.
All the interface boards are external to the control rack and are fitted on the DIN guide.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 4 - 11
ACPU02 board
The ACPU02 board is found in the control rack and the implemented functions are:
 Speed regulator
 inverter bridge firing angle
Fig. -7 ACPU02 board
The board has programmable elements. The codes of the software installed are indicated in the
customisation sheets (Gxx/Zxx) found in the schematic diagram job order document 2FNxxxxx.
Moreover, the release of the speed regulator software installed in the board can be verified with the
SSDTERM communication program. This program can be installed in every PC and can communicate with
the board via the serial port on the front panel. Besides verifying the software version, the SSDTERM
program can monitor and modify the parameters of the speed regulator and make the trends of the main
variables of the converter for operation analysis.
The board front panel has a LED matrix display, in which a different letter is typed for each type of operation,
e.g.:
 S = system ready
 P = system in protection
 M = converter in motor mode
 G = converter in regenerative braking mode
 1 = communication lost with the AINT02 board
 2 = non-congruent parameters number with the installed version
 W = parameters saving
4 - 12 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
AREV11 board
The AREV11 board is connected to the XREV11 interface boards via 25-poles pre-wired cables. This cable
receives the signals coming from the voltage and current transducers. From the signals coming from the TVs
and TAs, the board elaborates:
 Signals as synchronism for the regulation boards.
 Calculation of the frequency and amplitude of the voltage and current (rectifier and inverter bridge)
for the protection device.
Fig. -8 AREV11 board
The board receives the analogue signals coming from the transducers via the interface boards. These
signals are normalised and elaborated in order to be available to the other boards in the control rack. Mainly,
the board receives:
 data from the measuring transformers (rectifier or inverter), from which we obtain: the power supply
frequency or the rotation speed of the motor, as well as the voltage amplitude.
 data of the current transducers (rectifier or inverter), from which we obtain: the Idc current for the
regulation and protection system
 data of the excitation system transducers for the regulation of the excitation device and relative
protection devices.
The front panel of the board has:
 3 optical fibre transmitters to send the enabling signals to the thyristor monitoring boards.
 Connectors for the connection to the XREV11 interface board, a connector for the board input
signals, and a connector for the board output signals.
The customisation sheets (Gxx/Zxx) found in the schematic diagram job order document 2FNxxxxx
indicate the resistance values, the trimmers calibrations and the software versions installed in order
to replace the board with an identical one in terms of calibrations.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 4 - 13
An example of customisation sheet indicated in the functional layout is provided by the following figure:
board name
and rack
position
Corresponding
value
Component,
value, position,
and
corresponding
signal
Fig-9 AREV11 board customisation Software

version
Trimmers and
microswitch
XREV11 interface board
Fig. -10 XREV11 interface board
The interface board is connected to the AREV11 board with two 25-pole pre-wired cable, and it is used to
normalise the analogue signals via the resistances.
As the control boards, also the interface boards have customisations indicated in the schematic diagram job
order document 2FNxxxxx.
4 - 14 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
APROT4 board
The APROT4 board is the protection system of the converter. By monitoring the voltage, current, speed, and
excitation current signals, it can identify anomalous or dangerous operation conditions and stop the
operation before the converter, motor, or transformer are damaged.
The main protection devices are hardware type and are separated from the regulation board to guarantee
proper operation of the software even in the presence of problems in the regulation algorithms.
Besides the protection system and block logic, the board has also regulation loops of the excitation current.
When the SILCOVERT-S converter is used as drive, the regulation loops of the excitation current can be
represented in the following way:
Current
Iecc Ref. - regulator
Iecc
Voltage limit -
Voltage
> Excitation device
thyristor firing
regulator angle
Vmot
V/Hz
V/Hz limit - regulator
Operating
point
ω Vmot
Fig. -11 Excitation current regulation loop
The firing angle of the excitation device thyristor bridge is calculated according to the output of the three
regulators implemented in the APROT4 board, the lower reference (and, therefore, the higher firing angle)
between the various regulators will be used. The gains values can be customised as well as the protection
intervention thresholds.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 4 - 15
Fig. -12 APROT4 board
The front panel of the board has different components:

A- leds
Three red LEDs indicate which regulation loop is controlling the excitation device (current regulator, V/Hz
regulator, and voltage regulator)
Five green LEDs indicate the progress of the sequence (circuit breakers closed, excitation current available,
pulses enabled by PLC, pulses enabled by the control, current available, etc.)
B- 7-segment Led
It is used to indicate the code of the active protection
C- switch “Enable”
This switch is used to enable/disable the thyristor pulses only during the test phase.
D- switch “Sel Loop” and buttons “+” / “-“
This switch and the "+" and "-" buttons are used to modify the references of the excitation system regulation
loops.
E- Reset button
The reset button is used to eliminate the trip saved on the board and shown by the 7-segment LED
F- 25-pole connector
Is used to receive/send digital signals to the PLC via the specific XPROT3 interface board.
4 - 16 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
XPROT3 interface board
Fig. -13 XPROT3 interface board
The interface board is connected to the APROT4 board with a 25-pole pre-wired cable, and it is used to
exchange signals with the PLC. The signals available are all indicated with the LEDs and their function is:
LED COLOUR Control INPUT/OUTPUT ACTIVE FUNCTION
H1 Green Input Input circuit breaker closed
H2 Green Input Output disconnector switch closed
H3 Green Input Short circuit test enabling
H4 Green Input Bypass switch closed
H5 Green Input Field saving function enabling
H6 Green Input Excitation current regulator enabling
H7 Green Input Thyristor pulses enabling
H8 Green Input Reset
H9 Red Output Binary code for protection identification
H14 Red Output Pulses available
H15 Red Output Excitation current available
H16 Red Output Earth point alarm
H17 Red Output Available
H18 Red Output LED is off in the event of trip
H21 Green Power supply available
Tab. -1 XPROT3 board status LED
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 4 - 17
AGIF21 board
The AGIF21 board is used to create the firing commands for thyristors of the inverter bridge. From the
voltage available on the motor, the board can determine the correct firing command according to the angle
required.
Fig. -14 AGIF21 board
The front panel of the board has:

A- Multi-turn trimmer
3 multi-turn trimmers are required to reset any offset on the voltage due to the measurement TV
B- Optical fibre receivers
4 optical fibre receivers (glass) for the encoder connection
C- LED matrix
Two green and red LED columns
Rotor Inverter bridge

position thyristors
Clockwise Anticlockwise
rotation rotation
Rotor
acknowledgement W=0
Pulsed operation Natural

mode commutation mode
Fig. -15 AGIF21 board front panel
4 - 18 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
AGIM21 board
The AGIM21 board is found in the control rack and the implemented functions are:
 current regulator
 thyristor firing commands via optical fibres
Figure indicates the board image.
Fig. -16AGIM21 board
The optical fibres that can be connected to the board are 18 divided into three groups of 6. One group refers
to the inverter bridge, while the other two are set for a twelve-pulses configuration. In the event the number
of thyristors exceeds 18, the commands are multiplied with AGIM22 modular board insertions.
AGIM22 board
The AGIM22 board is used when configurations with more thyristors in series are available. The board is
used to multiply the thyristor firing commands.
Fig. -17AGIM22 board
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 4 - 19
XBA52A board
This board is not inserted in the control rack, but it is fitted on a DIN guide inside the compartment.
It is used to monitor the status of the medium voltage circuit breakers. Thanks to this board, in case of trip, it
is possible to eliminate the converter pulses and, therefore, to stop the current, before the input circuit
breaker is opened.
Fig. -18 XBA52A board
XTRIM2 board
This board is placed near the excitation thyristor bridge and it is used to transform the optical firing
commands of the excitation thyristors into electrical commands. Each board can command 3 thyristors.
Fig. -19 XTRIM2 board
4 - 20 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
Fibe
AMOTX Opti THYRISTOR
CONVERTER
Thyristors
Monitoring AMOTX
Phase Shifter
DC
Inverter
AGIM1 Thyristors
Idc Monitoring AGIF1 ACPU0
T1
Phase Shifter T2 T1...T6 Inverter Firing
T3 A Ld B0-B7
Pulses Amplifier S Angle
Operator T4 A
I
Interface FO Transmitters T5 X
T6 X
Fibe
Rectifier D Rectifier Opti
AGIM1
AMOTX T1 Z TST
AINT0
Current Regulator T1...T6 A
Phase Shifter T2 Y TST Synch.
Speed Regulator Phase Shifter Thyristors S
Pulses Amplifier T3 X TST Tes
Monitoring
A
I T4
Pulses Amplifier L3 L2 L1 FO Transmitters T5 VR"T" Signals
AINTX
X
X
PO Transmitters Inverter T6 VS"R"

ACPUX Inverter VT"S"
Rectifier Y
T1 Thyristors
T2 T1...T6 Firing
SpdREF IdcREF T3 A
S
T4 A
I
Rico T5 X
T6 X
Rectifier
DIAGRAM
EXAMPLE OF LCI CONTROL BLOCK
I'd H VR'T VT'S VS'R Thyristors
Firing
SpdFBK HZ
L3 L2 L1 L3 L2 L1 U V W
Signal Measuring
XTAV0 Signal Measuring
& Conditioning & Conditioning
AREV0 ATAVX XTAV0 ATAVX
IR' IR"
1XL I'dc X
IT' IT"
1YLD Y CN
VR'T'
1ZLD VR'T' VR'T' VR"T" Z CN
VR"T"
HZ VT'S' VT'S'
LINE VT'S' VS"R"
FREQ. VS'T' Iexc VT"S" VT"S"
Vgnd
I"dc VMot
I'dc VLine
Synchronous
y d SM Motor
APROT D FIEL
2 MxLine
Iexc Protection
3 MnLine
VGnd Load
4 MxI'dc y
VLine
5 MxI'dc d
I'dc Step Down
7 I'dc<I"dc Transformer
Reve
8 I"dc<I'dc
VMot
9 MxI"dc
I"dc
A MxVmot
b MnIexc
E Trip SW
Line Circuit
F MxStart Breaker
Logic & Trip Trip
Signalling Trip XBA5
PL
AREV0
XPROT DISPLA Speed to
Voltage
Converter
Motor
Speed
Reve
SpdFBK
The following tables shows a brief description of the cards available on the LCI control.
RACK 1 FRAME CARD NAME DESCRIPTION

Card manufactured by ASI. It manages the
Position A ALIM01 following functions:
 Power supply CPU card
following functions:
Position D AINT02  Internal analog output.
 Digital input/output with the external
circuit
following functions:
 Speed regulator
Position F ACPU02  Inverter bridge angle adjustment
 Reference and ramp management
 Current adjustment
 User interface
Card manufactured by ASI. It monitors the
converter analog quantities and trips at the
preset threshold values generating a
hardware protection. It signals, by means of 7
LEDs located on the front panels, the tripped
protection.
Position H APROT4 The card manages also all signals necessary
to the pulses enabling; the enabling is
signaled by means of 5 green LEDS in the off
status. Finally it is used for generating the
exciter current reference for the excitation
system, 3 leds indicate the severals kind of
regulation.
Card manufactured by ASI. It processes the
three line voltages and obtains the line
frequency.
Position J AREV11 It processes the signals coming from the
rectifier bridge CTs and PTs. The card holds
a front connector to interface with the terminal
board card.
Card manufactured by ASI, fixed frequency
converter phase shifter. The card generates
the firing logic signals to drive the pulse
generation card of the fixed frequency
converter according to the synchronism
signals of the fixed frequency converter and
the firing angle calculated by the current
Position L AGIM21
regulator.
In the card upper part, 6 fiber optics are
directed towards the rectifier bridge; in the
card lower part, 6 fiber optics are directed
towards the inverter bridge.
AGIF21 pos. R interface card to receive
commands to thyristors of the inverter bridge.
4 - 22 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
RACK 1 FRAME CARD NAME DESCRIPTION

Card manufactured by ASI. It processes the
three line voltages and obtains the line
frequency.
Position N AREV11 It processes the signals coming from the
inverter bridge CTs and PTs. The card holds a
front connector to interface with the terminal
board card.
Card manufactured by ASI, variable frequency
converter phase shifter.
The card generates the firing logic signals to
drive the pulse generation card of the variable
frequency converter according to the
synchronism signals of the generator
Position P AGIF21 frequency and the firing angle calculated by
the current regulator. Encoder signal emulator
in pulsed running stage [ ω ≤ 10% ].
It obtains the suitable synchronisms for the
inverter bridge operation from the machine
voltages. It also detects the rotor position with
the machine is standstill not running.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 4 - 23
Local commands, lamps and instruments.

For the local management of the drive, on the door of the +13 compartment they are
anticipated the followings commands:
RESET PUSHBUTTON [7]
EMERGENCY PUSHBUTTON [8]
There are a series of analogics instruments for the visualization of the principal greatness
INDICATOR OF THE SYCHRONOSCOPE [4]

DISTRIBUTOR OF SECURITY KEYS [6]
and a
OPERATOR PANNEL [5]
connected directly to the CPU of the plc and in it all the states and the alarms of the driving can
be read (to see chapter 6 for list messages).
5
4
7 8
4 - 24 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
4.4.2 Interface cards and transducersThe function of the interface cards is that of
connecting and adapting all signals coming from the transducers located in the power
compartments and from outside the panel.
All these cards are 24Vdc supplied and are divided as follows:
Digital signals interface Cards
Analog signals interface Cards
Thyristors monitoring Cards (if provided)
Thermal detector Cards (if provided)
The cards can present customizable components varying according to the system. For this
reason the values of these calibrations are reported in the customization sheets of the
project functional diagrams.
 CAUTION Before replacing a card, check that all components that can be
Even if the transducers are not located inside the auxiliary compartment, due to their
connection with the interface cards, they will be described in this section.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 4 - 25
Converter input and output transducers

The input and output transducers are fitted on power modules, as shown in figure.
Forced air-cooling converter: +21p +21A
Hall-effect CT
Hall-effect PT
Fig. -20 measurement transducer position

Magnetic PT,s
The variables monitored in a SILCOVERT-S converter are:
 2 voltages (usually Vrt and Vts) of the rectifier bridge
 2 voltages (usually Vrt and Vts) of the inverter bridge
 2 currents (usually Ir and Is) of the rectifier bridge
 2 currents (usually Ir and Is) of the inverter bridge
If the configuration is different from the classic one (six-phase reaction on the rectifier bridge and on the
inverter bridge), the number of transducer can increase.
The transducers used to monitor the sizes are:
 Hall-effect Pt for rectifier converter
 Magnetic PT for inverter converter
 Hall-effect CT to measure AC currents
Voltages are monitored for the protection system and for the identification the thyristor firing angle. On the
other hand, currents are used for the protection system and for the speed regulation system.
4 - 26 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
The following table shows a brief description of the transducers assembled in the
drive.
CODE COMPONENT NAME DESCRIPTION
Label CT01 LCI current transducers. It detects the AC
current circulating in the star circuit rectifier
Label CT02 CT's Lem 500A/0,1A
bridge R and S power cable phases and SSIT
Compartment +21P star secondary winding protections.
Label CT03 LCI current transducers. It detects the AC
current circulating in the Inverter bridge R and
Label CT04 CT's Lem 500A/0,1A
S power cable phases. and SSOT star
Compartment +21P secondary winding protections.
Label PT01 LCI voltage transducer. It detects the delta
circuit incoming line voltage in the rectifier
Label PT02 PT's Lem 1000V/50mA
bridge (R-T and T-S phases).
Compartment +21P
Label PT03 LCI magnetic voltage transducers. It detects
the incoming line voltage in the inverter bridge
Label PT04 PT's 1800V/100/√3 (R-T and T-S phases).
Compartment +21A
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 4 - 27
Earth Fault Detector (optional)

The earth fault detector can be added upon request and, depending on the configuration of the converter,
transformers, and motor/generator, two types of detectors are available:
 detector positioned on the DC circuit
 detector positioned on the inverter output
The earth fault detector circuit placed on the DC circuit can be represented in the following way:
CT
Fig. -21 earth fault detector on DC circuit
By monitoring the current that crosses the measurement CT, it is possible to determine the presence of an
earth point in the converter or in the external circuits (transformers and motors). This type of protection is
used in fully isolated configurations, where the transformers and motor do not have earth points (including
the star centres).
The operating principle is very simple. When any point of the converter, including the connections with the
transformer and motor, has an earth fault, even with impedance, current circulates through the CT. This
current, transformed into a voltage signal, is continuously monitored inside the converter control. When this
signal is higher than the adjustable threshold (equal to a fault impedance), a signal will indicate the leakage
current to earth.
Caratteristi of LCI ground protection.
4 - 28 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
The intermediate CT_LEM DC current circuit is located on the compartment +21P
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 4 - 29
4.4.3 PLC and its interfaced relay circuits
All panel input and output signals are galvanically separated by means of 8 relay terminal
board cards as shown in the figure below, except for the commands to the average voltage
switches that use relays with power contacts.
The coils of input cards and power auxiliary relays are equal to 110Vdc, while input cards
and logic relays are equal to 24Vdc.
Input
From / to
110Vdc PLC and
24Vdc Relay logic
Output
Galvanic separation
Ensured by the interface cards
PLC RACK PLC RACK

CPU AND INPUT/OUTPUT
POWER CARDS
SUPPLIER
4 - 30 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
4.4.4 Auto Synchronizer system
The VFD automatic motor on grid system control.

The CB closing control for the parallel is sent through the synchronizer shown in the image below
SYNCHRONIZER
SYNCHRONIZER ∆ VOLTAGE
Main CB make time. AVR automatically
(CB2 closing time) matching the grid voltage
value. Is not used the
appropriate function of
the synchronizer.
The Green LED indicates
SYNCHRONIZER proper alignment of the
∆ Frequncy two voltage values
Calibration
SYNCHRONIZER
MOTOR VOLTAGE
increase
decrease
commands
SYNCHRONIZER
GRID VOLTAGE (not used)
From Switch Gear
grid PT's SYNCHRONIZER
MOTOR SPEED
increase
decrease
commands (send to
SYNCHRONIZER LCI speed control)
SYNCHRONIZER
STATOR MOTOR MAIN CIRCUIT
VOLTAGE BREAKER
From switch Gear Closing Command
Motor PT's (send to Switch
Gear CB2)
Control Panel +13A
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 4 - 31
4.5 MAINTENANCE
The panel proper operation relies on a suitable and regular maintenance.
It is therefore fundamental to perform, at a frequency determined by the environmental and
operating conditions, checks and maintenance operations.
More frequent interventions shall be performed in case of panels located in particularly wet
environment or characterized by the presence of corrosive vapors, etc.
Routine maintenance
In order to perform a proper general maintenance of the panel we recommend what follows:
Clean the panel and remove dust regularly. DO NOT USE COMPRESSED AIR in order
to avoid that dusts are spread on all components. Use a vacuum cleaner (pay particular
attention to avoid deposits of iron and coal dusts that could result in a dangerous and
unacceptable decrease of the insulation levels.). Check for water infiltration or
condensate.
Check that no paint scrapings and oxidation of the panel structure are evidenced.
Check the preservation of power joints. Bolts and nuts will be periodically fastened by
means of a torque wrench. Check the absence of oxidations on the bar joints.
Check the tightening of all terminals relative to the low voltage connections (low voltage
power supply and command signals).
Check the preservation of heat sinks on which thyristors are assembled; they should not
evidence corrosion or scaling which could result in a reduction of the heat sink efficiency
as regards to heat removal.
In case of air cooled converter, it is recommended to replace the suction filters, located
on the converter rear doors, every year.
Check the proper operation of all electromechanical equipment (switches, contactors,

auxiliary relays, knife switches, etc.): Their maintenance will be performed according to
the manufacturer specific instructions.
4 - 32 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
As regards to the control and interface electronic circuits, they do not require a particular
maintenance.
WARNINGS
The electronic components assembled on the cards are sensitive to
electrostatic discharges.
before handling the electronic cards provide yourself with a grounded
metal strip to be applied to the operator wrist and a conductive mat on
which the card will be placed.
It is recommended, in any case, to perform a periodic inspection to:

Check the card cleaning condition and eliminate dust or dirt, if any.
Check the preservation of cards and, in particular, of the protective paint (when
supplied), the absence of corrosion of tracks or other metal elements of the connector,
the absence of partially damaged or worn components, etc.
Check the preservation of the frame back connectors and their connections.
Unscheduled maintenance
The unscheduled maintenance is performed only in case of a faulty component. The most
difficult part concerns the replacement of a component in the power module.
(See Appendix 6 of this manul for more datails).
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 4 - 33
4 - 34 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 4 - 35
U
USSE
ERR''S
S IIN
NTTE
ERRFFA
ACCE
E 5
In this chapter
5.1 GENERAL 1
5.2 USER’S INTERFACE [ SSDTERM ] 3
5.1 GENERAL
The user’s interface (SSDTERM) is a programme, operating in WINDOWS environment, that allows the user
to set / display the customization parameters of the speed regulator.

5 User’s interface
The programme can be located on the personal computer in a directory other than the work one,
but all the files managed by the programme will be taken and put in the work directory.
Conditions to start the programme are to be in WINDOWS environment
The location of the speed regulator cards in the box is as follows:
ACPU02
CARD
Serial Link
AINT02
CARD
COM1
The serial link cable, identification codes 1000079378 + 1000079381, consists of what follows:
BLACK
05 05 05
06 BLUE 06 06
04 BLACK 04 04
07 GREEN 07 07
03 BLACK 03 03
08 RED 08 08
02 BLACK 02 02
09 WHITE 09 09
01 01 01
MALE CONNECTOR on ACPU02 card side FEMALE CONNECTOR

on Personal Computer side

5.2 USER’S INTERFACE
SSDTERM
5.2.1 General
SSDTERM is a software tool that permits to carry out a fast and effective analysis of the
speed regulator operation state. It is not located permanently in the system since it is
designed for the heaviest diagnostic analyses such as the system installation. The system is
provided with a segment-type LED (ACPU02) for the following elementary signals:
M The system is set in motor mode.
G The system is set in braked motor mode.
W The system is saving the regulator parameters in EEPROM.

The system is in error mode for AINT02 card is not present, or FLEX programming was
1 unsuccessful.
2 The system detected a parameter matching error, default parameters must be loaded.
P The system received an external protection signal.
The hardware requirements needed by this tool are as follows:

IBM-compatible personal computer;
VGA graphic display (min. colour1024x760 pixel is suggested);
RS232 38400-baud serial line.
Windows 2000 NT / XP / VISTA / 7 (32bit)
The installed functions are:
displaying of logic and numeric variable values;
graphic displaying in real time of eight numeric variables (Oscilloscope);
editing of specific installation parameters and relevant saving in EEPROM;
uploading and downloading of calibration parameters on ASCII files;
uploading and downloading of all the regulator data (Acpu02) on ASCII files;
If compared with LCD terminal, advantages are:
displaying of more data at the same time (e.g.: 2 windows with 15 variables and 16 flags);
graphic representations without making use of other tools;
file management permitting the data processing and printing even without system;
possible analysis of curves of interest (a posterior).

This paragraph deals with the description of the LCI-SSDTERM programme in HMI-WINDOWS
version; the WINDOWS version keeps its setting and the same functions, yet adopting the
graphical look and the command immediacy that are typical of the execution environment.
Calling L.C.I. SSDTERM:
In the following images we see how you link LCI-SSDTERM program.
1) Select LCI HMI diagnostic panel

2) Touch on the icon
3) Wait for the window opening

4) Select COM 2 port for link with LCI-SSDTERM
4) Touch the connect button and wait green light and select your language
PASSWORD : A B C D only to visualize the value

AA BB CC to change the value

5.2.3.1 CONFIGURATION PAGE
The menu configuration is the home page. If “configuration” is selected by  , the following page is shown:
MENU
A
5
1 2
3 4
The CONFIGURATION page permits to get access to the parameters, variables and control states and to
preset the oscilloscope function. The page has five buttons that are used to pass to others menu.
This button is used to save all the parameters data and configuration in a file with .SSD
Save
extension and name chosen by the user.
This button is used to load the parameters file with .SSD extension chosen among the ones
Open available in the current directory.
This button is used to record trends of eight variables selected by the user in a file with .HST
Scope extension
History This button is used to reload recordings with .HST extension
This button is used to monitoring the status of the all digital input / output signals of the speed
Flags regulator
Under the bar of the menus there is the configuration page that can be essentially subdivided into 5 windows
as shown in the figure above:
 Windows no. 1, 2 can be used to get access and, if necessary, to modify the control parameters and
to display their variables.
 Windows no. 3, 4 can be used to get access and, if necessary, to modify the control flags.
 Window no. 5 is used for oscilloscope and variables visualization function pre-setting.
To select the correct page of parameters it can be used the buttons marked in the figure with the letter A or
B.
A B They permit to scroll the

various control pages where
there are all the parameters.

The possible pages, that conitain the groups of variables, that can be selected are:
ANALOG.INP.1 Analog inputs of ACPU02 card.

ANALOG.INP.2 Analog inputs of ACPU02 card.
ANALOG.OUTPUT Analog outputs of AINT02 card.
EXTREF+MANRAMP External reference by digital input and manual ramps.
AUT. RAMP ACCEL Acceleration ramps in automatic mode.
AUT. RAMP DECEL Decelleration ramps in automatic mode.
CURR. LIMIT MOT Current limits when the drive is used to drive the motor.
ANGLE REGUL. MOT Angle adjustment of inverter bridge. (motor mode)
CURR. LIMIT GEN Current limits when the drive is used to recover energy.
ANGLE REGUL. GEN Angle adjustment of inverter bridge. (generator mode)
SPEED REGUL GAIN Speed regulator gains.
SETUP THRESOLD Speed threshold setup.
I2T PROTECTION Stator overload protection setup.
EXC CURR.LIM. Rotor thermal protection.
TESTING Test menu.
Navigation in windows no. 1 or 2:
In the windows number 1 and 2 there are present the parameters and the variables of the speed regulator.
The parameters in brown color are writable parameters instead the black ones are readable.
In order to carry out a modification on a writable parameters, put the mouse on the relevant cell containing
the value and click.  with the left button of the mouse.
In this way another window appears as shown in the figure below:
1
2
3
8 7
4
The new window includes:

Parameter denomination, [1]
Variation range out of which the setting is not allowed [2]
Presently set value [3]
Zone intended for the new chosen value typing in [4]
Button(s) to choose the regulator to which the modification has to be sent [5]
The button to be utilized to exit the function without changing the value [6]
A small keyboard to type the new value [7]
two + - buttons to modify the parameter value of the lowest possible value [8]

Navigation in windows no. 3 or 4:
In the windows number 3 and 4 there are present the flags of the speed regulator that represent the status of
the speed regulator and status of the digital I/O signals.
In order to carry out a modification on a writable flags, put the mouse on the relevant cell containing the
status (ON / OFF) and click.  with the left button of the mouse.
In this way another window appears as shown in the figure below:
The window includes:

Parameter denomination [a]
Presently set value [b]
The new settable value [c]
Button(s) to choose the regulator to which the modification has to be sent [d]
The button to be utilized to exit the function without changing the value [e]

Navigation in window no. 5:
In the window number 5 there are four buttons as shown in the figure below:
To eliminate the selected variables
To set the visualization function [C]
To set the oscilloscope function parameters [B]
To set the oscilloscope function variables [A]
[A] Oscilloscope Variable Setting
This window displays the variables that can be selected for the oscilloscope (no more than 8 per regulator).
In order to input new parameters, select them pressing on the name of the parameter (the name becomes
highlighted in blue) and confirm with the “conf” button in the top part of the relevant window.
This button is naxt the name of the page that contain the parameter selected
In order to eliminate some parameters from the oscilloscope, select them pressing on the relevant
denomination with the left button of the mouse (the name becomes highlighted in blue), then press the
button with scissors.
[B] Oscilloscope Function Parameter Setting
This window displays the variables that can be selected for the oscilloscope (no more than 8 per regulator).
In order to input new parameters, select them pressing on the name of the parameter (the name becomes
highlighted in blue) and confirm with the “conf” button in the top part of the relevant window.
[B] Visualization Function
This window displays the variables selected (no more than 8 per regulator). In order to input new
parameters, select them pressing on the name of the parameter (the name becomes highlighted in blue) and
confirm with the “conf” button in the top part of the relevant window.

5.2.3.2 SCOPE
If “scope” is selected by  the following page is shown:
Clicking on this box

it will be enable the
automatic stop and
save of the traces
Example of oscilloscope page [ scope]
With this function all the parameters of the regulator can be displayed in graphic format. The available
functions are:
AUTO
It permits to create an autoscale for the Y axis. All the parameters displayed are within the range.
MANUAL
The range of the Y axis is equal to the number inserted in the two boxes Min e Max.
Trip Stop
Checking the box permits to stop the acquisition of the values of the parameters when a trip appears and an
automatic file .HST is written.
VAR. NAME
In this box the name of the parameters are displayed and for each parameters it’s possible to set:
 Enable / disable visualization with the button plot
 Offset of the parameter
 Gain of the parameter
PARAMETERS
Clicking on the box permits to modify the parameters sent to the SCOPE function
5 - 10 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
At the top of the window in the scope menu there are five buttons that permits to change menu or to save the
trends present in the Historical Buffer in a .HST file. This file can be seen again selecting the History function
Example of oscilloscope page [ scope ]
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 5 - 11
5.2.3.3 FLAGS
Selecting “Flag” by  the following page is displayed.

The menu (Figure below) permits to display all the digital input/output signals/variables subdivided into 16-bit
columns.
At the display base a help line indicates the available commands:
This code indicates

the speed regulator
version
Example of Menu flags
5 - 12 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
5.2.3.4 HISTORY
The menu permits to open one of the saved graphic files. Selecting “History” by  and the following page is
shown :
Example of History page
Choose the file to be displayed and when the file is opened, the following page is shown :
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 5 - 13
The following commands are available at the display base:
VALUES
It permits to display the numeric value of the chosen dimensions.
In order to help the analysis of recording two bars (a blue and a black one) are available; they are moved by
dragging or pressing black and blue >> ,<< buttons that are located in the middle.
The value taken by each dimension in correspondence with the bars and the time distance between the two
bars can be seen up on the left.
CURSORS
EXPORT
It permits to export the file in a .CSV file to other analysis.
5 - 14 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
5.2.3.5 SAVE PARAMETERS IN EEPROM
In the menu configuration with the flag MSAVE it’s possible to save the parameters on the memory
EEPROM on the ACPU02 card. This operation is necessary to save the parameters and don’t lose them
when the supply is switched-off.
To save the parameters click on the button MSAVE and click on the button Reg N.1 to confirm the operation.
If the procedure is correct on the display of the ACPU02 card will be shown the letter W.
5.2.3.6 Measure
The menu permits to have a graphic indication of the variables:
The variables, that are shown, are the analog input/output of the AINT02 and ACPU02 cards.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 5 - 15
5.2.4 SPEED REGULATOR DESCRIPTION
To understand the several parameters is preferred to introduce the speed regulator. The speed regulation is
carry out inside the control card ACPU02, it can be represented as below:
Rive Kp
- + Rico
Reve Ki/s
where:
 Rive = internal speed reference

 Reve = speed feedback
 Kp = proportional gain
 Ki = integral gain
 Rico = current reference
As you can see on the schematic diagram above, for each analog input signal is possible to set a filter by the
set parameters, this issue will be discussed below. As you can see on the schematic diagram above, for
each analog input signal is possible to set a filter by the set parameters, this issue will be discussed below.
The integral action has a limitation to avoid the wind-up phenomena. Also the current reference has a
limitation due to the current limits imposed by the set parameters.
The regulator is connected with the outside through the cards XREV11 as in the following scheme:
XREV11 XREV11
AREV11 AREV11
The control recives the signals from transducer and create the current reference (RICO) as output of the
speed regulator
5 - 16 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
A more complete scheme for explain the regulator input is the following:
Live Aut.
Rive
Rico
Rive Regulator
Live Man. Ramp PI
+
RiveReg
StepW
Reve Limcor
Aut Man.
The speed regulator can have two types of reference called Rive and RiveReg. Selecting Rive the regulator
will follow the planned reference, which will be created by the external reference and by the insertion of the
selected ramp. Selecting the reference instead RiveReg will have been overlapped a step defined by the test
parameters (stepW, TimeWsec) . This function is used to define the step response of the speed regulator.
StepW
TimeW
T T
Live
Rive
RiveReg
Reve
5.2.4.1 PARAMETERS MENU
All the defined parameters are present in the various menus of the list parameters that will be explained in
the following pages. The various parameter pages are:
 ANALOG.INP.1 Analog input to the ACPU02 card

 ANALOG.INP.2 Analog input to the ACPU02 card
 ANALOG.OUTPUT Analog output to the AINT02 card
 ExtRef + ManRamp External reference and manual ramp parameters
 AUT. RAMP ACCEL Acceleration ramp parameters in automatic mode operation
 AUT. RAMP DECEL Deceleration ramp parameters in automatic mode operation
 CURR. LIMIT MOT Current limit characteristic in the motor operation
 ANGLE REGUL. MOT Inverter firing angle characteristic in the motor operation
 CURR. LIMIT GEN Current limit characteristic in the generator operation
 ANGLE REGUL. GEN Inverter firing angle characteristic in the generator operation
 SPEED REGUL. GAIN Speed regulator gains
 SETUP THRESHOLD Signal threshold setting page
 I2T protection Stator overload protection characteristic
 Exc CURR. LIM. Rotor overload protection characteristic
 Testing Test parameters setting page
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 5 - 17
Here below will be done a more detailed explanation of the various parameters page.
Menu: ANALOG. INP1
In the following menu are presented the analog input signals with the relative parameters of conditioning.
Three types of parameters exist essentially:
 the input greatness readable represented by [R]
 the calibration parameters corresponding at the nominal value of the variable. This value is equal to a
signal of 8V, represented by [W]
 the parameter FLT that represents the filter value used on the greatness [W]
The parameters are therefore:
Parameter Name Min/Max Value Typical Value Description
REVE rpm 0 / 65000 R Speed feedback
LIVE An. rpm 0 / 65000 R Outest analog speed reference

Continuous current of intermediate
IDC1 [A] 0 / 65000 R
circuit of the converter n°1
V MOT [V] 0 / 65000 R Motor voltage
Nominal value corresponding to an
REVE Nom 1 / 65000 W 3000
analog signal of 8V of amplitude
LIVE An Nom 1 / 65000 W 3000
IDC1 Nom 1 / 65000 W 1350
VMOT Nom 1 / 65000 W 1450
kW FV1 1 / 65000 R Output power of the converter n°1
KWFV1 Nom 1 / 65000 W 2825
Filter on analog input Parameter x
REVE FLT RP 2 / 9000 W 100
1ms
REVE FLT CN 1 / 9000 W 10
1ms
LIVE FLT 1 / 9000 W 10
1ms
IDC FLT 1 / 9000 W 10
1ms
The signal REVE has two type of filters called REVE FLT rp e REVE FLT cn. These two type of filters can be
explained by the image below:
REVE FLT rp REVE FLT rp

Input reve REVE FLT cn REVE
2 2
ω > 5% ωNOM ω > 10% ωNOM
With the increase of the speed the filter REVE FLT rp will be disable. When the speed will decrease only one
of these will be insert to reduce the delay create by the filter.
The nominal parameters are used to transform the electrical signal in the corresponding value with the
correct unit.
 The analog signals that represent voltages and speed have an amplitude of 8V at the nominal value
of the variable.
 The analog signals that represent currents have an amplitude of 6V at the nominal value of the
variable.
5 - 18 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
Menu: ANALOG. INP2
Likewise to the previous menu also this menu represents analogical input greatnesses in entry to the
ACPU02. Like the preceding greatnesses, also in this case there are some parameters used to set the
greatnesses visualization.
The parameters are therefore:
IEXC [A] 0 / 65000 R Excitation current in [A]
VLINE [V] 0 / 65000 R Line voltage
kW FF1 0 / 65000 R Power absorbed by the converter n°1
VDC F 0 / 65000 R DC Voltage of the converter n°1

IEXC Nom 1 / 65000 W 267
VLINE Nom 1 / 65000 W 1550
kWFF1 Nom 1 / 65000 W 2825
VDCF Nom 1 / 65000 W 2092
Torque kNm 0.00 / 650.00 R Computation of the torque
Continuous current of intermediate
IDC2 0 / 65000 R
circuit of the converter n°2
kW FF2 0 / 65000 R Power absorbed by the converter n°2
kW FV2 0 / 65000 R Output power of the converter n°2

IDC2 Nom 1 / 65000 W 1350
kWFF2 Nom 1 / 65000 W 2825
kWFV2 Nom 1 / 65000 W 2825
These two menus contain the analog input variables of the regulator and the parameters for their
visualization.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 5 - 19
Menu: ANALOG.OUTPUT
RICO [A] -65000 / 65000 R Current reference
LIVE Instr 0 / 65000 R Speed reference for instrument

Speed reference downstream of the
RIVE out 0 / 65000 R
ramp
REVE F out 0 / 65000 R Speed feedback
RICO Nom 1 / 65000 W 1350
Strum FS 1 / 65000 W 4000
RIVE Nom 1 / 65000 W 3000
REVE F Nom 1 / 65000 W 3000
Filter on analog output Parameter x
RICO Flt 1 / 100 W
1ms
Angle out 0 / 65000 R Firing angle of the inverter bridge
Pout [kW] 0 / 65000 R Output power of both converters

Total power absorbed by the
Pin [kW] 0 / 65000 R
converters
Angle Nom 1 / 65000 W 256
Pout Nom 1 / 65000 W 2825
Pin Nom 1 / 65000 W 2825
The output "Rico [A]" is the reference sent to the current regulator; the other output signals are used for the
instruments or for other diagnostic systems.
Also the analog output have the same calibration parameters; changing these modify the analog output
signals.
5 - 20 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
Menu: ExtRef + ManRamp
This menu is used to define the parameters of the ramp in the manual operation, as well as the external
references of speed.
LIVE Autom 0 / 65000 R 0.0 Speed reference for automatic mode
LIVE Manual 0 / 65000 R 0.0 Speed reference for manual mode
LIVE Used 0 / 65000 R 0.0 Speed reference used
LIVE Dig E1 1.0 / 6500.0 W 200.0 Speed ref. selected by digital input 04
Reference increase by command UP
Inc LiveMan 0.1 / 3200.0 W 0.5
dig. 12
Reference decrease by command
Dec LiveMan 0.1 / 3200.0 W 0.5
DOWN dig. 13
Accel Man 0.1 / 900.0 W 1.0 Acceleration in manual mode
Decel Man 0.1 / 900.0 W 1.0 Deceleration in manual mode
Slow Ramp 0.1 / 900.0 W 1.0 Acceleration for slow ramp mode
In the manual mode there is only one acceleration and only one deceleration, so it’s impossible to create a
profile that change with the speed.
The parameters used in manual mode are:
 Command to change the speed reference (UP / DOWN command)

 Acceleration and deceleration parameters.
The external references are enabled by the corresponding digital input and the various speed reference
selected is indicated by a flag.
This function can be schematized in the figure below:
Rive _
Live Dig. E2 Ramp
Digital Input 5
Reve
The speed reference Live Dig.E2 can be selected by the digital input 5 and the flag Iref2 shows the
selection. The various flags will be explained in the flags list.
It’s important to note that the ramp are expressed in RPM/s.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 5 - 21
Menu: AUT. RAMP ACCEL
This menu contains all the necessary parameters to define the accelerations in the motor mode.
Speed threshold for ramp gradient

SPEED 1 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 50.0
change
SPEED 2 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 100.0
change
SPEED 3 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 500.0
change
SPEED 4 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 1000.0
change
SPEED 5 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 1500.0
change
SPEED 6 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 2000.0
change
Acceleration from zero to parameter
ACCEL. 1 0.1 / 3200.0 W 5.0
Speed1 Rpm
Acceler. from Speed1 Rpm to
ACCEL. 2 0.1 / 3200.0 W 5.0
parameter Speed2 Rpm
ACCEL. 3 0.1 / 3200.0 W 8.0
ACCEL. 4 0.1 / 3200.0 W 7.0
ACCEL. 5 0.1 / 3200.0 W 6.0
ACCEL. 6 0.1 / 3200.0 W 6.0
Acceleration for speed greater than
ACCEL. 7 1 / 32000 W 6.0
Speed6 Rpm
A typical example is represented by the graph below:
Acceleration
Acc7
Legend:
1  Speed1
Acc6 2  Speed2
3  Speed3
5  Speed5
Acc3 Acc1  Accel.1
Acc2  Accel.2
Acc4  Accel.4
Acc6  Accel.6
Acc7  Accel.7
Speed
1 2 3 4 5 6
These accelerations are used for both forward and backward rotation mode.
5 - 22 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
Menu: AUT. RAMP DECEL
This menu contains all the necessary parameters to define the decelerations in the generator mode.

SPEED 1 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 50.0
change
SPEED 2 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 100.0
change
SPEED 3 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 500.0
change
SPEED 4 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 1000.0
change
SPEED 5 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 1500.0
change
SPEED 6 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 2000.0
change
Acceleration from zero to parameter
DECEL. 1 0.1 / 3200.0 W 5.0
Speed1 Rpm
Deceler. from Speed1 Rpm to
DECEL. 2 0.1 / 3200.0 W 5.0
DECEL. 3 0.1 / 3200.0 W 8.0
DECEL. 4 0.1 / 3200.0 W 7.0
DECEL. 5 0.1 / 3200.0 W 6.0
DECEL. 6 0.1 / 3200.0 W 6.0
Deceleration for speed greater than
DECEL. 7 1 / 32000 W 6.0
Speed6 Rpm
A typical example is represented by the graph below:
Deceleration
Dec7
Legend:
1  Speed1
Dec6 2  Speed2
3  Speed3
5  Speed5
Dec3 Dec1  Decel.1
Dec2  Decel.2
Dec4  Decel.4
Dec6  Decel.6
Dec7  Decel.7
Speed
1 2 3 4 5 6
These accelerations are used for both forward and backward rotation mode.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 5 - 23
Menu: CURR. LIMIT MOT
This menu is used to define the current limits during the motor operation.
CUR.LIM Amp 0 / 65000 R Actual value of the current limit

Speed threshold for current limit
SPEED 1 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 100.0
recalibration
SPEED 2 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 400.0
recalibration
SPEED 3 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 1500.0
recalibration
SPEED 4 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 2000.0
recalibration
SPEED 5 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 2400.0
recalibration
SPEED 6 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 2450.0
recalibration
SPEED 7 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 3000.0
recalibration
CURR.LIM. 1 0.0 / 6500.0 W 400.0 Current limit from zero to Speed 1
CURR.LIM. 2 0.0 / 6500.0 W 800.0 Current limit at Speed 2
A typical current limit characteristic:
Current
Legenda:
1  Speed1 Rpm
Lc4 2  Speed2 Rpm
4  Speed4 Rpm
5  Speed5 Rpm
7  Speed7 Rpm
Lc1  CurrLim1
Lc2  CurrLim2
Lc3  CurrLim3
Lc4  CurrLim4
Lc2 Lc5  CurrLim5
Lc6  CurrLim6
Lc7  CurrLim7
Lc1
Lc6/Lc7
Speed
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 125%
There is a limit that impose the current limit equal to zero when speed is over 125%.
5 - 24 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
Menu: ANGLE REGUL. MOT
This menu is used to define the inverter firing angle characteristic during the motor operation.
ANGLE FV 0 / 160 R Actual value of the firing angle
PresetRP 100 / 160 W 135 Preset angle in pulsing mode

Filter on inverter bridge angle
ANGLE Flt 1 / 10 W 1
calculation
Speed threshold for angle
SPEED 1 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 500.0
recalibration
SPEED 2 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 900.0
recalibration
SPEED 3 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 1200.0
recalibration
SPEED 4 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 1500.0
recalibration
SPEED 5 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 1900.0
recalibration
SPEED 6 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 2200.0
recalibration
ANGLE 1 100 / 160 W 136 Angle from zero to Speed 1
ANGLE 2 100 / 160 W 141 Angle at Speed 2
A typical firing angle characteristic is the chart below:
Angle
Legenda:
Agl 2 1  Speed1 Rpm
2  Speed2 Rpm
3  Speed3 Rpm
4  Speed4 Rpm
Agl 3 5  Speed5 Rpm
6  Speed6 Rpm
Agl1  ANGLE1
Agl 1 Agl2  ANGLE2
Agl3  ANGLE3
Agl4  ANGLE4
Agl 4 Agl5  ANGLE5
Agl6  ANGLE6
Agl 5
Agl 6
Speed
1 2 3 4 5 6
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 5 - 25
Menu: CURRENT LIMIT GEN
This menu is used to define the current limits during the generating operation.

SPEED 1 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 100.0
recalibration
SPEED 2 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 500.0
recalibration
SPEED 3 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 700.0
recalibration
SPEED 4 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 800.0
recalibration
SPEED 5 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 1500.0
recalibration
SPEED 6 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 2100.0
recalibration
SPEED 7 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 2200.0
recalibration
CURR.LIM. 1 0.0 / 6500.0 W 200.0 Current limit from zero to Speed 1
A typical current limit characteristic:
Current
Legend:
1  Speed1 Rpm
Lc6/Lc7 2  Speed2 Rpm
Lc4/Lc5 3  Speed3 Rpm
4  Speed4 Rpm
5  Speed5 Rpm
6  Speed6 Rpm
Lc1  CurrLim1
Lc2  CurrLim2
Lc4  CurrLim4
Lc5  CurrLim5
Lc7  CurrLim7
Speed
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
5 - 26 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
Menu: ANGLE REGUL.GEN
This menu is used to define the inverter firing angle characteristic during the generating operation.
Com.Brake 0/1 W 0 Emergency braking enabling
Din.Brake 0/1 W 0 Dynamic braking enabling
CUR.LIM.Flt 1 / 65000 W 100 Filter on the current limit

SPEED 1 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 100.0
recalibration
SPEED 2 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 500.00
recalibration
SPEED 3 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 700.00
recalibration
SPEED 4 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 800.00
recalibration
SPEED 5 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 2000.0
recalibration
SPEED 6 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 3000.0
recalibration
ANGLE 1 5 / 85 W 15 Angle from zero to Speed 1
The parameters Brake and Din.Brake allow to recovery energy to the incoming line when the motor
decelerate (Din.Brake) or when brake (Brake). When Din.brake is 0 the machine decrease its speed per
inertia until there is an emergency brake (Brake = 1).
For the plant in examination the angle assumes these values:
Angle
Legend:
1  Speed1 Rpm
2  Speed2 Rpm
3  Speed3 Rpm
Agl6 4  Speed4 Rpm
Agl5 5  Speed5 Rpm
6  Speed6 Rpm
Agl4
Agl1  Angle1
Agl2  Angle2
Agl3 Agl3  Angle3
Agl4  Angle4
Agl5  Angle5
Agl2 Agl6  Angle6
Agl1
Speed
1 2 3 4 5 6
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 5 - 27
Another important parameter, in this menu, is CUR.LIM.Flt that consists of a filter inserted on the current
limit. It is used to have a sweet current at the start up. The chart below represents the time constant that
corresponds to the parameter:
Current limit
CUR.LIM.Flt
5 xCUR.LIM.Flt
After 5xCUR.LIM.Flt the filter is equal to the current limit. This filter is always inserted and it is forced to zero
at the start up or when there is the passage from motor mode to generator mode.
5 - 28 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
Menu: REGULATOR GAIN
This menu is used to define the speed regulator parameters.
Errvel Rpm -32000/32000 R Speed error
Ntg -32000/32000 R Integral part of the regulator
prop -32000/32000 R Proportional action of the regulator

Proportional gain of regulator from
PROP.GAIN1 1 / 65000 W 4000
zero to Speed1
Proportional gain of regulator over
PROP.GAIN2 1 / 65000 W 13000
Speed2
Integral gain of regulator from zero to
INT.GAIN1 0 / 65000 W 2000
Speed1
Integral gain of regulator over
INT.GAIN2 0 / 65000 W 5000
Speed2
SPEED1 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 100.0 Speed threshold for regulator gain
SPEED2 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 400.0 Speed threshold for regulator gain
Error threshold on mot./gen. passage
DELTAGEN % 0.10 / 650.00 W 5.00
current error
Current threshold used to enable
ABIL.AMOT% 0.20 / 650.00 W 3.00
AMOT card
Xintegrale 1 / 50 W 1 Multiplier for integral gain
ExtCurrLim 1.0 / 6500.0 W 1100.0 External current limit
Dec Amp/ms 0.1 / 6500.0 W 1.0 Current deceleration ramp A/ms
Inc Amp/s 0.1 / 6500.0 W 100.0 Current acceleration ramp A/s
The parameters that can be inserted concern the constants of the proportional and integral actions of the
speed regulator. As can be noticed by the chart, it can be inserted several constant at different speed.
Another important parameter is DeltaGen % that represents a threshold of current necessary to discriminate
the generator operation from motor operation.
A typical characteristic gain-speed is:

Gain
Kp2
Legend:
1  Speed1 rpm
2  Speed2 rpm
Kp1  Prop.Gain1
Kp2  Prop.Gain2
Ki1  Int.Gain1
Ki2  Int.Gain2
Ki2
Kp1
Ki1
Speed
1 2
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 5 - 29
The parameter Xintegrale is used to increase/decrease rapidly the integral action when the speed error
changes its sign.
The parameters ExtCurrLim, Dec Amp/ms and Inc Amp/s are used when the external current is enable with
the digital input 2. When the digital input 2 is ON the Curr.Lim change as the chart below:
Increase Ramp
Inc Amp/s
Decrease Ramp
Dec Amp/ms
Internal Curr.Lim
Curr.Limit
Current
Ext. Curr.Lim
time
Ext. Curr. Lim = ON Ext. Curr. Lim = OFF
As soon as input 2 becomes ON the Current Limit becomes equal to the current and after that decreases
with the ramp (Dec Amp/ms). When the input 2 becomes OFF the current limit increases with the ramp (Inc
Amp/s).
This function is used also in black start mode to limit the power absorbed by the SFC from the diesel
generator.
Internal current
limit
External current
limit
Current limit
used
5 - 30 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
Menu: SETUP THRESHOLD
This menu is used to set the speed threshold to define the different phase of operation.
LIVE Min 0.0 / 6500.0 W 100.0 Lower speed reference limit
LIVE Max 0.0 / 6500.0 W 2350.0 Maximum speed reference limit
Preset Man 0.0 / 6500.0 W 1500.0 Reference presetting in manual mode

Pulse enabling if
1LiveRive> 0.0 / 6500.0 W 20.0
(Live && Rive) > (1LiveRive)
W=0 0.0 / 6500.0 W 10.0 Speed threshold for digital output 01
Ist W0 0.0 / 6500.0 W 5.0 Speed hysteresis for parameter W=0

Speed threshold for RP - CN
WRpCn 0.0 / 6500.0 W 200.0
passage
Speed hysteresis for parameter W
Ist RpCn 0.0 / 6500.0 W 20.0
RpCn
Speed threshold for exciter regulator
W > 15% 0.0 / 6500.0 W 3000.0
V/Hz
Speed hysteresis for parameter Ist
Ist W >15% 0.0 / 6500.0 W 20.0
W>15%
W > SPEED 1 0.0 / 6500.0 W 200.0 Speed threshold for digital output 02
Speed hysteresis for parameter
Ist W>SPEED 0.0 / 6500.0 W 20.0
W>SPEED1/2/3/4
The parameter 1LiveRive> is used to enable the output signal RICO. When the speed reach the value set by
the parameter W RpCn the operation of the regulator passes from pulse regim to natural commutation. The
suppression of the pulses happens instead through the parameter W = 0.
The following figure shows the regulator operation:
Live
W RpCn + Ist RpCn Rive
Reve
W =0
1LiveRiv
T
T
Natural commutation
mode enable Stop thyristor firing
Speed regulator
enable
Each speed parameter has a hysteresis that permit to the regulator to work properly.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 5 - 31
The speed threshold have an hysteresis to avoid continuous changes of the signalling because of possible
oscillations around the value of reference. An example of hysteresis is the following:
Parameter Parameter
+
hysteresis
As can be observed by the figure above, the flag will change when the input will assume a greater value than
the parameter plus the hysteresis and it will return to the initial value when the input signal will assume a
smaller value than the parameter inserted. In this way is possible to avoid continuous changes when is
present an oscillations on the signal.
5 - 32 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
Menu: I2T Protection
The protection I2T is used to avoid overheatings of the stator winding.
2
Curr.ST.I2T 0.0 / 6500.0 R Visualization of the I T limit used
SPEED 1 Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 1000.0 Speed threshold for current limit
CURR.LIM.1 A 0.0 / 6500.0 W 1000.0 Current limit to SPEED 1 Rpm
CURR.LIM.2 A 0.0 / 6500.0 W 1000.0 Current limit at SPEED 2 Rpm
In this menu is possible to set the current limit to avoid to overload the machine during the operation. The
overload is calculated by the formula below:
 I 
2 
   1dt

2
I t   statore
  Ilimitestatore  
 
Where:
 Istatore = stator current
 Ilimite-statore = stator current limit (CurrLim)
 I2t = overload area
The relationship between the stator current and its limit is the overload (OVL)
For example:
If the motor have an overload possible of 150% for 30s (tOVL), the area I2t will be:
I2tTRIP = (OVL2 – 1)tOVL= (1.52 -1) x 30 = 37,5
Therefore it’s possible to calculate the max time for the overload:
I2 t TRIP
t
OVL2  1
The characteristic is inversely proportional with the overload value.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 5 - 33
An example of the relationship between overload and time of intervention is represented by the following
graph:
CURVA DI SOVRACCARICO
overload
10000
1000
t [s]
100
10
1 1,05 1,1 1,15 1,2 1,25 1,3 1,35 1,4 1,45 1,5
OVL [p.u.]
Knowing the value of the admitted area and calculating the percentage of overload is possible to define the
time of intervention of the protection.
The thermal protection is modified in base to the speed of rotation, because the ability of cooling comes to
be reduced at low speeds.
A typical characteristic current limit-speed :
Curr3/Curr4
Curr5 Legend:
Curr6/Curr7 1  Speed1 rpm
2  Speed2 rpm
Curr2 3  Speed3 rpm
4  Speed4 rpm
5 Speed5 rpm
6  Speed6 rpm
7  Speed7 rpm
Curr1  CurrLim1 A
Curr1
ω1 ω2 ω3 ω4 ω5 ω6 ω7 125%
5 - 34 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
Menu: Exc CURR.LIM
The protection I2T is used to avoid overheating of the rotor of the machine.
2
Curr.RT.I2T 0.0 / 6500.0 R Visualization of the I T limit used
CURR.LIM.1 A 0.0 / 6500.0 W 1000.0 Current limit to SPEED 1 Rpm
Likewise to the preceding menu also this menu represents the thermal protection but this menu concern of
the rotor of the machine.
Menu: TESTING
This menu is used to test the speed regulator.
StepW 0.0 / 6500.0 W 50.0 Speed step value for test.
TimeW sec 0.0 / 600.0 W 10.0 Step time duration on reference.

Current percentage for short circuit
CurRef % 0.00 / 100.00 W 0.0
test
Frequ. Hz 0.1 / 2.0 W 0.1 Inverter bridge switching frequency
P.MaxSpeed 0.0 / 6500.0 W 3000.0 Maximum speed protection
AREA S A2T 0.1 / 6500.0 W 37.5 Area for I2T stator protection
Int.Gain S 0 / 65000 W 1 Gain for stator protection
AREA R A2T 0.1 / 6500.0 W 37.5 Area for I2T rotor protection
Int.Gain R 0 / 65000 W 1 Gain for rotor protection

Minimum speed for stator I2T
I2T ab.Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 3000.0
abilitation
Minimum speed for rotor I2T
I2Te En Rpm 0.0 / 6500.0 W 3000.0
abilitation
Idc/ImLim 1 / 65000 R Percentage of load for stator
(I-IE)/IE 1 / 65000 R Percentage of load for rotor

2
Trip ST I2T 0 / 65000 R 1 = TRIP for stator I T
2
Trip RT I2T 0 / 65000 R 1 = TRIP for rotor I T
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 5 - 35
Through this menu is possible to carry out the following tests:

 Step response of the speed regulator
 Short circuit test
 I2T protections
 Max speed protection
The parameters AREA S A2T & AREA R A2T are used to define the overload area for the I2T protection
(37,5 means 150% of overload for 30s). The parameters I2T ab.Rpm, I2Te En Rpm and P.MaxSpeed enable
the corresponding protections.
The response at the step is verified with the parameters StepW and TimeWsec that go to work on the
reference signal of the regulator (RiveReg).
5.2.4.2 FLAGS MENU
The Flags are used for monitoring the regulator operation and enable the function available. Also for the
flags are present several menus, explained below:
 CONTROL Function available

 STATUS Status variable
 INP_EXT1 External input for enabling function
 IN_AINT1 Input signals AINT02
 IN_ACPU1 Input signals ACPU02
 OUT_EXT1 Output
 OU_AINT1 Output AINT02
 OU_AINT2 Output AINT02
 OU_ACPU1 Output ACPU02
 OU_ACPU2 Output ACPU02
Menu: CONTROL
Parameter Name Min/Max Value Value Description

Clear Stp / Go W Reserved.
deFlt Stp / Go W Default parameter restoration.

Enabling of parameter saving in
Msave Stp / Go W
EEPROM.
Bbox Stp / RUN W Not available
Regol Man / Aut W Manual or Automatic operation mode.

Speed step enabling displaying for
STEP OFF / ON W
tests.
Short circuit test enabling, current
Dcurr Stp / Go W
reference.
Speed step enabling displaying for
Dstpw Stp / Go W
tests.
5 - 36 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
Menu: STATUS

Test Stp / Go R EEPROM error– [2] on Led ACPU02
Operation blocking– [1] on Led
Trip Stp / Go R
ACPU02
Sopp Stp / Go R Stop operation – [S] on Led ACPU02
Motor running adjustment – [M] on
RegMA Stp / RUN R
Led ACPU02
RegMI Man / Aut R Not Available
Generator running adjustment– [G]
RegGA OFF / ON R
on Led ACPU02
RegGI Stp / Go R Not Available.
LmCor Stp / Go R Current limit reached
ErPar OFF / ON R Available

AINT02 card error – [1] on Led
Aint1 OFF / ON R
ACPU02
W0 OFF / ON R Inner signal for W = 0%
Rp-cn OFF / ON R Inner signal for RP – CN passage
AbReg OFF / ON R Speed regulator enabling

Inverter bridge angle regulator
AbFv OFF / ON R
enabling
AbRam OFF / ON R Ramp enabling
----- OFF / ON R Not Available
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 5 - 37
Menu: INP_EXT1

Start OFF / ON R Run signal
Fixed current limit enabling -
Lmcr1 OFF / ON R parameter ExtCurr.Lim% (menu
ExtRef+ManRamp)
Analog reference enabling – LIVEAn
Aref1 OFF / ON R
Rpm (menu ANALOG.INP.1)
Inner reference enabling – Live Dig
Iref1 OFF / ON R
E1 (menu ExtRef+ManRamp)
Inner reference enabling – Live Dig.
Iref2 OFF / ON R
Iref3 OFF / ON R
Iref4 OFF / ON R
Brush OFF / ON R Brush selection
/F--R OFF / ON R 0 = Forward / 1 = Reverse

Slow ramp enabling (Menu AUTOM.
Slwrm OFF / ON R
RAMP)
Hramp OFF / ON R Ramp stop
Up OFF / ON R Speed increase by digital command
Down OFF / ON R Speed decrease by digital command
Brake OFF / ON R Emergency braking
Aut OFF / ON R 0= Automatic / 1= Manual

0= rotor detection enable / 1= rotor
Ricro OFF / ON R
detection disable
Menu: IN_AINT1

1TM01 OFF / ON R Maximum line voltage
1TM02 OFF / ON R Minimum line voltage
1TM03 OFF / ON R Maximum generator voltage (conv.1)
1TM04 OFF / ON R Maximum converter current (conv.1)
1TM05 OFF / ON R Maximum motor current (conv.1)
1TM06 OFF / ON R Current differential (conv.1)
Resrv OFF / ON R Reserved
1TM07 OFF / ON R Available
1TM09 OFF / ON R Maximum generator voltage (conv.2)
1TM10 OFF / ON R Maximum converter current (conv.2)
1TM11 OFF / ON R Maximum motor current (conv.2)
1TM12 OFF / ON R Current differential (conv.2)
5 - 38 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
Menu: IN_ACPU1

1 LCN OFF / ON R Natural switching limit
Converter blockage –hardware
1TRIP OFF / ON R
protection
Command for pulse backing to limit
0 ARL OFF / ON R
delay
ABREG OFF / ON R Regulator enabling
ArSop OFF / ON R Converter pulses suppressed
1WAV OFF / ON R 1 = forward / 0 = backward
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 5 - 39
Menu: OUT_EXT1

Output to 1 when speed is equal to W
W=0 OFF / ON W W = 0 + Ist W0
=0
Output to 1 when speed is >
W > SPEED1% + parameter W > SPEED1 +
W1RCH OFF / ON W
Ist W>SPEED% IstwSPEED (menu SETUP
THRESHOLD)
LIVE E2% + Output to 1 when speed is > param.
W2RCH OFF / ON W
IstLIVEE2% LiveDig E2 (menu ExtRef+ManRamp)
LIVE E3% + Output to 1 when speed is > param.
W3RCH OFF / ON W
IstLIVEE3% LiveDig.E3 (menu ExtRef+ManRamp)
W > SPEED2% +
W4RCH OFF / ON W parameter W > SPEED2 +
Ist W>SPEED%
IstwSPEED
W > SPEED3% +
Ist W>SPEED%
IstwSPEED
Output to 1 when stator thermal
I2T S OFF / ON W I2T PROTECTION
protection is ON
Output to 1 when rotor thermal
I2T R OFF / ON W I2T PROTECTION
protection is ON
Output to 1 when speed is > LIVE
W =LIVE InpAn. +
Wpot OFF / ON W InpAn. + IstwSPEED (menu
1st W>15%
ANALOG.INP.1)
W > SPEED4% +
Ist W>SPEED%
IstwSPEED
Output to 1 when the converter1 is in
DIFC1 OFF / ON W
current differential
Output to 1 when the line voltage is >
MXVL2 OFF / ON W
1TM09 (menu IN_AINT1)
MXIC2 OFF / ON W
current limit
DIFC2 OFF / ON W
current differential
Output to 1 when the generator
MXVMT OFF / ON W
voltage is > 1TMXX
Output to 1 when the exciter is in
P-EXC OFF / ON W
protection mode
5 - 40 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
Menu: OU_AINT1

X synchronism simulation for short
1X OFF / ON W
circuit test
Y synchronism simulation for short
1Y OFF / ON W
circuit test
Z synchronism simulation for short
1Z OFF / ON W
circuit test
Electronic circuit enabling for short-
0AbPr OFF / ON W
circuit test
Maximum pick-up time protection de-
0Mxst OFF / ON W
enabling
Disp5 OFF / ON W Available

PSpMx OFF / ON W
P.MaxSpeed (menu TESTING)
Output to 1 when the rotor detection
1RicR OFF / ON W
is enable
Amot OFF / ON W Output to 1 when Amot card is enable
Brush OFF / ON W Brush selection
Menu: OU_AINT2

Disp0 OFF / ON W Not Available
Disp1 OFF / ON W Not Available
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B 5 - 41
Menu: OU_ACPU1

Bit for inverter bridge angle with
Bit 0 OFF / ON W
weight 1°
Bit 1 OFF / ON W
weight 2°
Bit 2 OFF / ON W
weight 4°
Bit 3 OFF / ON W
weight 8°
Bit 4 OFF / ON W
weight 16°
Bit 5 OFF / ON W
weight 32°
Bit 6 OFF / ON W
weight 64°
Bit 7 OFF / ON W
weight 128°
Inverter bridge angle acquisition
0ABan OFF / ON W
enabling
0Marc OFF / ON W 0 run command
1Marc OFF / ON W 1 run command

1 speed lower than W RpCn (menu
1W<10 OFF / ON W
SETUP THRESHOLD)
1 speed higher than W RpCn (menu
0W<10 OFF / ON W
SETUP THRESHOLD)
1 speed lower than W = 0 (menu
1 W=0 OFF / ON W
SETUP THRESHOLD)
1 speed higher than W = 0 (menu
0 W=0 OFF / ON W
SETUP THRESHOLD)
Menu: OU_ACPU2

1 Mot OFF / ON W 1 working by motor
1Wav OFF / ON W 1 forward running

1 higher references 1LiveRive>
1L-R> OFF / ON W
(menu SETUP THRESHOLD)
1 lower references 1LiveRive> (menu
0L-R> OFF / ON W
SETUP THRESHOLD)
0SReg OFF / ON W 0 current regulator disable
1SReg OFF / ON W 1 current regulator disable

1 higher references W > 15% (menu
1W>15 OFF / ON W
SETUP THRESHOLD)
1 lower references W > 15% (menu
0W>15 OFF / ON W
SETUP THRESHOLD)
Resvr OFF / ON W Reserved
5 - 42 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
In this Ch
hapter
6.1 GENE ERAL .1

6.2 INITIA
AL TESTS 2
6.3 HARD DWARE PROTECTIONNS 3
6.4 PLC PROTECTIO
P ONS 8
6.5 ALARMS FROM PLC LOGICC ......................................................................... 8
6.6 PROT TECTION RESTORATI
R ION 8
6.7 SIGNAALS AND DIAGNOSTI
D ICS 9
6.1 GE
ENERAL
Durring the initialization phase (i.e.. at the po ower On oro after a C
CPU reset) tests are
e
perrformed in order
o to check the perippheral statu
us:
RAM, EEPROM memorie es, cards insserted on th
he bus and the
t parameeter consiste
ency.
e tripping off a protectio
The on causes a delay limiit backing of
o the conveerter firing pulses
p (with
h
sub
bsequent pu ulse suppre ession once
e the current is nullified
d) and the oopening of the
t networkk
switch.
Wee distinguish
h:
Testt performedd through So oftware.
Prottections rea
alized throug
gh electroniic circuits lo
ocated in thee control (H
Hardware).
Prottections rea
alized by rela
ay logic or PLC.
All protections are stored..
SILCOVER
RT S – 2MU
U1000253116B 6-1
6 Protection
ns and trouble
eshooting
6.2 INITIAL TEST

TS
The
e initial testss performed
d by the pro
ogram of the
e ACPU02 micro-contr
m roller card are:
a
Performed test Possible cause
c - Actio
on
Cause
P
Pins not prop
perly inserted
d
RAM test failed.
f F
Faulty RAMs s
Action
Replace the card.
Cause
F o C
Faulty card or
MICRO testt failed. Action
Replace the card.
Cause
Caard presence test failed.
T
Test failed du
ue to AINT022 card.
On th
he frontal LCD D the numbeer
Action
w ayed [ 1 ]
will be displa
Replace the card or make
m sure th
hat it is propeerly inserted in the bus.
Cause
Parrameter conssistency test L
Loading of th he default parameters at tthe first EEprom
failed
d. writing
On th
he frontal LCD er Action
D the numbe
w ayed [ 2 ]
will be displa If it is the
e first time that the memoory is written,, it is sufficient to change
e
through S SSDTerm Flags-Control--Msave.
6-2 SILC
COVERT S – 2MU1000
0253116B
6 Protections and troubleshooting
6.3 HARDWARE PROTECTIONS
All hardware protections are realized with electronic comparators tripping at the voltage
thresholds that can be calibrated by means of resistors.
All protections are stored to the Rack 01 APROT4 card and displayed through a DISPLAY.
For further information concerning the hardware protections refer to the section appendix 3.
Five digital signals on the output of the APROT4 card they send to PLC the protection that
occurred.
The table below explain for each digital combination the right meaning.

PROTECTION TABLE
Display
Protection Threshold Delay Customizable
code
00 No trip
01 Interconnections cable fault Instantaneous
02 Available
03 Max line voltage 110% 8 ms Yes
04 Min line voltage 85% 97ms -> 3s Yes
05 Max current 1 star 127% Instantaneous Yes
06 Max current 1 delta 127% Instantaneous Yes
07 Differential current Υ – ∆ 15,5% 600μs No
08 Differential current Idc1<Idc2 15,5% 600μs No
09 Differential current Idc2<Idc1 15,5% 600μs No
10 Max Current motor side 127% Instantaneous Yes
11 Max motor voltage 110% 8 ms Yes
12 Min exciter current 2,5% 0,5s -> 1,5s No
13 Max exciter current 127% 8 ms Yes
14 Wrong motor rotation 0,8Hz 12ms No
15 Software trip Instantaneous
16 Max start rotation time 4s - > 25s Yes
17 N° 2 Thyristors fault
18 Max Speed selectable Instantaneous Yes

Differential current
19 input transformer
------ not applicable No
Differential current
20 output transformer
------ not applicable No
21 Ground fault 25% Instantaneous Yes
22 Max current input transformer ------ not applicable Yes
23 Max current output transformer ------ not applicable Yes
All control hardware protections are described here below.

LED Protection Cause – Action

- The connection cables between the cards XAREV11.. and AREV11.. are
interrupted
Interconnection 
0 cable fault
Check the connection of the connectors on cards XAREV11.. and
AREV11..
 Replace the 25-pole cables
1 Spare
- The input voltage exceed the 110% of the rated voltage
(the tripping threshold can be customized on the card APROT4)

2
Check the value of the input voltage by means of an external transducer.
Max line voltage
 Check the wiring between TV LEM and XAREV11.. card
 Check the electronic cards that elaborate the voltage signal
(XAREV11.. - AREV11.. - APROT4)
- The input voltage is lower the 85% of the rated voltage
(the tripping threshold can be customized on the card APROT4)
 Check the real presence of the input voltage by means of an external
3 Min line voltage

transducer.
Check the wiring between TV LEM and XAREV11.. card
- The input current exceed the 127% of the rated current
(the tripping threshold can be customized on the card Rack01APROT4)
rated I'dc = 6V average, trip calibrated at 9.12V  0.1V peak
 Check the connection between CT Lem and XAREV11.. card.
4 Max current 1 star  Check the CT Lem power supply.
 By means of a  multimeter, check the thyristors of the rectifier bridge; if
the thyristor is in short circuit, it is spoiled.
(XAREV11.. – Rack01 AREV11.. – Rack01 APROT4)
Current peak where the

comparator is calibrated
DC CURRENT 6V
SIGNAL average
- The input current exceed the 127% of the rated current

(the tripping threshold can be customized on the card Rack02 APROT4)
rated I'dc = 6V average, trip calibrated at 9.12V  0.1V peak
Max current 1
5 delta
 Check the CT Lem power supply.
- (XAREV11.. – Rack02 AREV11.. – Rack02 APROT4)
During the start-up, and after the CB by_pass opening , the SFC100 and
SFC200 input currents must be equal.
Any faults that cause an imbalance of the currents is reported.
Differential
6 current Υ – ∆
The anomalies can be caused:
 Failure to clamp a power circuit cable, check on VFD side or TLS
transformer side.
 Make the controls as described for the alarms four and five


- The difference between the inverter current and the rectifier current
exceed 10% of the rated current.
The tripping threshold can be customized on the card APROT4
Rated I'dc = 6V average, trip calibrated at 0.92V  0.1V
Differential  Check the connection between CT Lem and XAREV11.. card.
7 current Idc1<Idc2  Check the CT Lem power supply.
- The difference between the rectifier current and the inverter current
exceed 10% of the rated current.
Differential 
8
Check the connection between CT Lem and XAREV11.. card.
current Idc2<Idc1  Check the CT Lem power supply.
- The inverter current exceed the 125% of the rated current.
Max Current
9 motor side
 Check the CT Lem power supply.
Current peak where the

comparator is calibrated
DC CURRENT 6V
SIGNAL average
DC
Current
- The output RMS voltage of inverter bridge exceed the 110% of the rated
voltage.
Rated Vmot = 8V average, trip calibrated at 8.9V  0.1V
Max Motor 
A Voltage
Check the exciter current loop with the excitation system, and the
APROT4 reference setting. (APROT4 – AREV11.. – XAREV11.. –
UA01/2)
 Check the connection between TV Lem and XAREV11.. card.
- This protection is operated if the excitation current decreases below a pre-
set value.
Min Exciter Rated Iexct = 6V average, trip calibrated at 0,4V  0.1V
b Current  Check the exciter current loop with the excitation system, and the
UA01/2)


- The excitation current exceed a pre-set value.
Rated Iexct = 6V average, trip calibrated at 9,0V  0.1V
Max Exciter
c Current
 Check the exciter current loop with the excitation system, and the
UA01/2)
 Check the status of transducer =G3.T10 –UA10.
- This protection indicate a turning in an opposite direction of the motor.
It can occur for start up from stand still, for a wrong rotor detection.
 Check if the led RD and one between the rotor position leds, on the card
Wrong Motor
d Rotation 
AGIF21, turn on when the exciter current increase at start.
Check the electronic cards that elaborate the voltage signal
 (XAREV11.. - AREV11.. - APROT4)
 Check the connection between TV Lem and XAREV11.. card.
- This protection indicate a damaged of the cards AINT02 – ACPU02 or the
E Software Trip

program blocked.
Replace the cards AINT02 – ACPU02
- At starting the machine didn’t reached the speed threshold > 1 in a pre-set
Max Start time. The protection delay time can be customized on the card APROT4.
F Rotation Time  Check if the led RD, on the card AGIF21, turn on.
 Check the current limit parameters and the acceleration parameters.
N.2 Thyristors
G fault
- NOT APPLICABLE
This protection indicate that the speed detected from SFC exceed the
maximum speed value set by control parameter “P.MaxSpeed”
 Check the correspondence between the trip occurred and the control fault
H Max speed table (led H9-H10-H11-H12-H13 card -AX07)
 Check the motor speed
 Check the parameter settings about this protection
Note: Over speed threshold 515rpm
Differential not applicable
L current Input
Transformer
Differential not applicable
P current Output
Transformer
The signal indicates a current leak to the ground; when one phase of the
system has low impedance compared to the earth with bypass disconnector
close.
 Check the electric insulation of the main components.
U Ground Fault  Check the supply among the terminals + and - of the PT Lem.
 Check the electronic cards that elaborate the fault signal
 Check the electronic cards that elaborate the current signal
Note: with zero  to Gnd we have 8V average, trip calibrated at 3,6V  0.1V
Max current input not applicable
transformer
Max current output not applicable
transformer

6.4 PLC PROTECTIONS
The protections generated by the PLC logic concern all those trips that cause a
malfunctioning of the converter owing to devices positioned inside or outside the board.
The action of any of these blocks forces the converter to stop.
The possible causes and actions to be taken to disable the trips are described in paragraph
6.7.
6.5 ALARMS BY PLC LOGIC
The alarms generated by the PLC logic do not force the converter to stop but only generate
a visual signal. The converter stop is to operator’s cost.
The possible causes and actions to be taken to disable the alarms are described in
paragraph 6.7.
6.6 PROTECTION RESET
The protection reset is carried out by means of Reset yellow button located on the control
door or in the PC panel on the allarm/trip screen, provided that the fault cause has been
removed, if the button is pressed, the signals of involved protections are switched off and
the 7-segment LED of ACPU10 card passes from signal “P“ to signal “S“ (status of pulse
suppression).
The reset button located on the APROT4 card front permits to carry out a restoration of
protections limited to the only control (then excluding PLC and relay logic); therefore,
generally, it shall not be utilized.
 NOTE
REMARK: Blocks generated by causes external to the control enable
no LED of APROT4 card. Therefore the 7-segment LED does not
change to status “P”.
The trips is shown on display of operator panel.

6 Protecttions and trou
ubleshooting
g
6.7 SIG
GNALS AND DIAGNOST
TIC
The
e following levels of diagn
nostic can be
e recognized:
Messag
ges on Perso onal compute
er HMI-PC
LED on control card
d fronts
The LED signa als on interfa

ace cards an
nd PLC inpu
ut / output ch
hannels are visible only opening the
e
control cubicle door.
Sig
gnalings on
n operative panel
p HMI-P
PC
Co gnalings represent the m

ontrol unit sig most immedia
ate diagnostic
c level in thee system;
Thhe following pages show w a table fo
or each available protecttion and inddicate the co
orresponding
g
sig
gnaling, summmarized if needed.
OTE: to und
NO derstand annd to resolv
ve any probllems it need
ds to know the electric
c schematic
c
diagra
am of the SF
FC drive.
Puutting in execcution the us e initial page that will introoduce to the

ser interface program, the e operator, is
the following (plant sinopticc).
SILCOVER
RT S – 2MU
U1000253116B 6-9
If the system does not have any trips or alarms, the panel [1] at the top of the video, will be white,
in contrary case, the panel will visualize in succession all the blocks, alarms and active states. 2
To visualize all the signalings press the button [2] panel alarms.
6 - 10 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
Alarms page:
This page displays active blocks (RED), active alarms (YELLOW) and blocks/alarms no longer active
(Background grey).
All events are displayed with the time when they were triggered (Trigger column) and the time when the
event was reset (Recovery time column).
The messages remain stored in a temporary file in the PC hard disk until they are deleted manually (the data
are not lost in the event of PC power failure).
   
Silent alarm activated
Reset alarms
All the messages displayed in this page will remain active until the following operations are performed.
To eliminate the alarms log press the “START” button (the message below appears) after which press the
“CLEAR ALL” button.
This message warns the operator that the data will be

lost unless they are saved on the PC's HD. A .CSV file is
created by pressing the stated button.

This key sends you back to the display page of data saved on the PC's HD.
SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B 6 - 11
.CSV file display page:
When the DISPLAY "ALARM"key is pressed a window opens where a .CSV file may be selected.
CSV files may also be opened with the application: Microsoft Office Excel.
ALARM shortcut
The following pages contain a description of all alarm and block messages displayed with the cause and
possible actions to be taken to solve the problem.
6 - 12 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
ubleshooting
g
Tabella n° 1 – EVENTS
S & COMMANDS
Mess
sage/Comma
and Descrip
ptions
Cause
The m
message sho ow that the sttatic starter iss ready to start .
Necesssary conditio
ons:
VFD RE
EADY TO ST
TART
1.. Trips no present
p
2.. External trips no prese ent
3.. System is s not in test mode
m
4.. No alarms s from switch h gear (CB paanels ready))
5.. No alarms s from TLS/T TMS transforrmers
6.. Waiting timme before re estart is zeroo
Static Startter in test mo

ode (see chapter 7)
Action
 Remove the cause ab bove describ
bed.
Cause
After Local or Remote start
s comman nd.
The excitattion system provides
p the starting curreent for start-up with SFC
The currentt value is visible in Motorr instrumentss table on thee right of the
video
EXCITA
ATION SYSTEM IN
RUNNING
TER CURRE
EXCIT ENT
PRESENT
SILCOVER
RT S – 2MU
U1000253116B 6 - 13
6 Protection
ns and trouble
eshooting
Mess
sage/Comma
and Descrip
ptions
Condition in
n normal ope
eration.
The AVR syystem adjustts the motor power factorr to 1
Local comm
mand selecte
ed
ATION SYSTEM IN
EXCITA
AUTOOMATIC POW
WER
FACT
TOR COSTAANT
REEGULATION
N
wer factor ch
Manual pow hange set point
Maintains cconstant the VAR value present

p at thee instant of activation
a
EXCITA
ATION SYSTEM IN
AUTOMA ATIC VAR POWER
COSTANT REGULA ATION
Manual rea
active power change set point
p
6 - 14 SILC
0253116B
Message/Command Descriptions
Operating condition on when you want to verify the correct operation of the
exciter converter bridge
To exclude the function to act as follow
Action
1) Select Local commands
2) Select MANUAL mode
3) Excitation on command
4) With UP/DW commands change the current value.
5) Excitation off command.
6) Return in AUTOMATIC mode- End test
EXCITATION SYSTEM IN
TEST/MANUAL CURRENT
REGULATION
2
4
3
SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B 6 - 15
After Remote start command.

The SFC system provides the starting current for start-up
The voltage, current and speed values are visible in Motor instruments
S.F.C. SYSTEM RUNNING
Energy
Hour
After Remote start command.

The VFD system provides to send the Circuit Breaker closing commands
to switch gear equipment for start-up.
CB status is visible in Monitoring page and S.F.C. page.
CIRCUIT BREAKER
Motor running AVR running
SFC running
Status closed
Status opened
6 - 16 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
1) Local command selected.

2) VFD STOP
The VFD system provides to send the Circuit Breaker closing commands
to switch gear equipment.
VFD LOCAL STOP

COMMAND
Section Local/Remote command enabled
VFD stop command
Shows status after stop command
SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B 6 - 17
Operating condition on when you want to verify the Rectifier, Reactor and
Inverter bridge air cooling system.
Function enabled when Local commands and VFD test are inserted.
S.F.C. IN TEST MODE
Start command, check reactor and converter blowers status:
S.F.C. BLOWERS TEST
Push STOP command, test blowers finished.
6 - 18 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
ubleshooting
g
Mess
sage/Comma
and Descrip
ptions
Action
Thhe instructio
ons contain
ned in this Manual
M are aaddressed to
o qualified
an
nd specialissed personnnel with adequate know wledge in thee electrical,
ellectronic an
nd mechanic nd authoriseed by Nidec-ASI S.p.A.
cal fields, an
Th
he verificattion and trooubleshooting activitiees require trained and d
qu
ualified perrsonnel, ablle to work on medium m voltage eq quipment, in
n
co
ompliance w with the safe
ety standard
ds and plantt/site regula
ations.
An in-depth k o the system, power ssupply lines (main and
knowledge of
au
uxiliary) and
d power con so required .
nverter is als
Before
B perforrming the short circuit tesst through thee HMI comm mands, it is
had
h to predisspose the converter for th his test.
e short circuiit bar on the output of thee converter (Inverter
To install the
side
s U-V-W)).
S.F.C. – C
CONVERTER
R TEST
SILCOVER
RT S – 2MU
U1000253116B 6 - 19
-Open SSD-Term SFC control management (see chapter 5).
-APROT card switch in OFF positions.
-Check the value of the parameter CurRef%. Should be set to zero.

S.F.C. – CONVERTER TEST
- Close SSD-term windows and push START command.
START
- 52 FF closed Firing ON (APROT switch ON)

- Start SFC blowers
6 - 20 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
Set the current value with CurRef% parameter, you may want to go up in
steps of increasing values, starting from 10% up to a maximum 50% of the
rated current. To supply power to the control must be enabled by setting
test "GO" in correspondence with the FLAG "Dcurr" located in the menu
"Control".

START
Change value and Push Data Send "Reg N.1"
Check Idc current wiwe form and values.
SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B 6 - 21
-Set the current value with CurRef% parameter at ZERO. Disable test by
test "STP" in correspondence with the FLAG "Dcurr" located in the
menu "Control".
Stp
-Confirm change value with Data Send "Reg N.1"

- Close the SSD-Term window
- Put in OFF position the APROT card switch.

STOP
- Push the STOP command.
Remove the short circuit bar.
6 - 22 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
During start-up, when the motor speed reaches at 95%, VFD activates the
synchronization system relay.
AVR line matching function activated
SYNCHRONIZER SYSTEM
ENABLED
Sinchronizer rlay +13A panel

Synchronizer relay with zero pole slipping regulation activated
SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B 6 - 23
52M closing command enabled.
START UP END
SYNCHRONIZER SYSTEM
ENABLED
Sinchronizer rlay +13A panel
6 - 24 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
Cause
Signal coming from the Plant.
With signal is allowed to perform only the VFD local test functions.
MAINTENANCE PERMISSIVE
PRESENT
Signal activated Warning: If VFD is in running, with permissive present

the VFD is stopped.
SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B 6 - 25
Push Remote/Local command selection. Requested Password (default
0000)
Insert the password
LOCAL COMMAND
SELECTED
Option – Change password
Command executed
6 - 26 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
Requested temperature page buttons
SELECTED TLS/TMS Temperature monitoring

Threshold Temperature
ALARM AND TRIP
( only if provided)
Option – Change password button
SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B 6 - 27
Touch Threshold points of the Alarm or Trip. Requested Password (default

1111).
Insert the password. In option you can change the password
SELECTED TLS/TMS
Threshold Temperature
ALARM AND TRIP
( only if provided)
Change password command
After insert your password, you can change set-point of the alarm or trip if
touch the respective key.
Increases or decreases value with UP/DW commands and Enter new value
6 - 28 SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B
Touch Threshold points of the Alarm or Trip. Requested Password (default
2222).
Insert the password. In option you can change the password
SELECTED MOTOR Change password command

Threshold Temperature After insert your password, you can change set-point of the alarm or trip if
ALARM AND TRIP touch the respective key.
( only if provided)
Increases or decreases value and Enter new value
SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B 6 - 29
6 Protection
ns and trouble
eshooting
Tabella n° 2 – ALARMS
S
A
ALARMS LIST 
Message Po
ossible caus
ses and pos
ssible correcctive action
ns
Cause
This messaage is linked at the statuss of the mediium voltage input breaker
(52FF) that supply the SFC
S in start-u
up mode.
The cause is to find in the
t Switch Gear contactss that it is coonnected on
the termina
al block.
een the breaker symbol will
On the scre w change ccolor.
52FF CIRCUIT BRE
EAKER
UNNAVAILABLEE
Action
 To consuult the Switch
h Gear manu ual.
 Check thhe signal betwween SFC and
a Breaker.
 Check th uit =G3.L01 –KA05.
he relay circu
 With the help of the functional
f dra
awing, verifyy all the electtric circuit
Cause
This messa age is linked at the status
s of the mediium voltage breaker
b
(52M) that M
Motor connects on grid.
t Switch Gear contactss that it is co
The cause is to find in the onnected on
the termina
al block.
On the screeen the breaker symbol will
w change ccolor.
52M CIR
RCUIT BREA
AKER
UN
NAVAILABLEE
Action
h Gear manu ual.
a Breaker.
 Check thhe relay =G3 3.L01 –KA08 8.
f dra
Cause
This messaage is linked at the status
s of the mediium voltage output
o
breaker (52
2VF) that sup pply the Moto
or in start-up mode.
t Switch Gear contactss that it is co
The cause is to find in the onnected on
the termina
al block.
een the breaker symbol will
On the scre w change ccolor.
52VF CIRCUIT BRE
EAKER
UNNAVAILABLEE
Action
h Gear manu ual.
a Breaker.
 Check thhe relay =G3 3.L02 –KA16 6.
f dra
6 - 30 SILC
0253116B
ubleshooting
g
A
ALARMS LIST 
Message Po
ossible caus
ses and pos
ns
Cause
The S
SFC input circuit
c breaker (52FF) iss not opened after the
e
commaand.
Action
52FF TIM
MEOUT OPE
ENING
C
COMMAND  Che eck the integrrity of relay =G3.P10
= –KAA59 installed
d in the
front off +13 cubicle
e.
 Che eck the integrity of relay =G3.P20
= –KA
KA21 installed d in the fron
nt
of +
+13 cubicle
 Che eck the cablee form VFD to o Switch geaar.
Cause
This messa age inform thhat the Motorr output circuuit breaker (5
52M) does
not close affter the PLC command.
Action
 Cheeck if Synchro onizer is enaabled.
52M CLO
OSING COMMMAND =G33.W01-HS03 3 11-12 (contact status iss opened).
FAILED  Cheeck if command and Led “CLOSE”
“ aree on
=G
G3.W01-HS03 3 9-10 termin nals with LEDD flashing.
 Cheeck the integrrity of relay =G3.P01-KA1
= 15
Cheeck the integrrity of relay =G3.P20-KA2
= 25
 Cheeck the cable from VFD to o Switch geaar.
Cause
The syynchronizer doesn't
d makee the value oof the motor voltage
v
freque
ency equal with the freque
ency of grid.
Action
 Che
eck if relay off the =G3.P10-KA57 in OON.
SPEED M
MATCHING FAILED
F  Che
eck if Synchro onizer is ena
abled.
=G33.W01-HS03 3 11-12 (contact status iss opened)
 Che
eck if BUS vo oltage and GEN voltage aare presents
=G 3.W01-HS03 3 1-3 and 5 – 7 terminalss.
 Che
eck if Increase and Decrease are activvated
=G 3.W01-HS03 3 14-15-16 te
erminals withh LED flashin
ng.
Cause
During p transformer is normallyy overloaded for a few
g the start-up
seconnds. With parrticular enviro
onmental connditions, or to
o excessive
duratio
on of the oveerload probleems caused bby the motorr-compressor
TLS T
TRF WTI ALA
ARM system
m
TLS T
TRF OTI ALA
ARM Action
Reducce compress sor load and restart.

Checkk ambient temperature
Checkk transforme er terminal bo
ox ( doc. Genneral arrange
ement)
Consuult the transfformer product manual.
Cause
The Bu y is a protecttive for oil-inssulated trans
uchholz relay sformers thatt
occurs
rs when the inside transfoormer has a ddevelopment
TLS TR RF BUCHHO OLTZ abnorrmal gas which is usuallyy indicates a serious faultt.
ALARM Action
(iff applicable))
Checkk transformeer terminal bo
ement)
To co
onsult the tran
nsformer prooduct manuaal
SILCOVER
RT S – 2MU
U1000253116B 6 - 31
6 Protection
ns and trouble
eshooting
A
ALARMS LIST 
Message Po
ossible caus
ses and pos
ns
Cause
Duringg the start-up
p transformer is normallyy overloaded for a few
minutees. With partticular enviro
onmental connditions, or to
o excessive
duratio
on of the oveerload probleems caused bby the motorr-compressor
TMS T
TRF WTI ALA
ARM
system
m
TMS T
TRF OTI ALA
ARM
Action
Checkk ambient temperature and cable from m
ement)
Consuult the transfformer product manual.
Cause
Motor overloaded for a few minnutes.
With p
particular env
vironmental conditions,
c oor to excessiv
ve
duratio
on of the ove
erload proble
ems caused bby the motorr-compressor
MOTOR
R TEMPERA
ATURE
system
m.
ALARMS
Action
Checkk ambient temperature and cable from m
Checkk motor term
minal box ( dooc. General aarrangement)
Consuult the motorr product manual.
Cause
The Buuchholz relay
y is a protecttive for oil-inssulated trans
sformers thatt
TMS TR RF BUCHHO OLTZ occurs
rs when the inside transfoormer has a ddevelopment
ALARM abnorrmal gas which is usuallyy indicates a serious faultt.
(iff applicable)) Action
Checkk transformeer terminal bo
ement)
To co
onsult the tran
nsformer prooduct manuaal
Cause
TLS T
TRANSFORM MER
Proba
ably leakage of oil from co
ooling system
ms (valves, seals,
s
MIN
N. OIL LEVE
EL
gaske
ets)
Action
TMS TTRANSFORM MER
MIN N.OIL LEVEL To co
onsult the trannsformer prooduct manuaal
(Iff applicable)) Checkk transforme er terminal bo
ement)
Add o
oil (consult th
he transformeer product m anual)
Cause
Magn eto-thermal breaker that supply the ccooler fan of control
cubiclle is opened
Action
QV
V03 OPENED
D Check the breaker =G2 2.D01 -QV03 3
Check the setting of magneto-therm mal QV03 breeakers (set 1.6A).
1
Check the insulation off the motors =G2.D01 -EVV03.
Check the relay =G3.L03 –KA21.
Replace th
he magneto--thermal brea aker.
Cause
The ouutput contac
ctor KME (G3
3.P22) is noot opened after
a the VFD
D
stop co
ommand.
Action
 Che
eck the integrity of relay =G3.P10
= –KA
A61.
KME TIM
ME OUT OPE
ENING
C
COMMAND
6 - 32 SILC
0253116B
ubleshooting
g
A
ALARMS LIST 
Message Po
ossible caus
ses and pos
ns
Cause
EXTERNA
AL TRIP FRO
OM DCS Extern al cause. Wiith this signal present thee VFD isn't re
eady to start
PRESENT
Action
Checkk the integrity
y of relay =G
G3.L02 –KA1 2.
EXTERNA
AL TRIP FLR ROM LCP Checkk the integrity G3.L02 –KA133.
y of relay =G
PRESENT
(If provided)
Cause
AV
VR controlle
er does not perform the eq qualization oof the motor voltage
v with
the gri d voltage. Th
he starting seq
quence is inte rrupted. When
n the starting
time co
ount is ended, the VFD is sto
opped .
Action
 The V VFD is still operating,
o pre
ess the yelloww button res
set.
Waitt 10 seconds s
A.V.R LINE VOLTA
AGE If the
e sequence of ontinues reguularly obtain the closure
o start-up co
MATCHIN
NG MODE FAILED
F of 522M.
If the
e start-up seq quence does s not continuue and the alarm
reap ppears perforrm the followwing checks
 Checck if the line voltage is present = G1.JJ03-XT22A term.11-12

Checkk the cable fo orm =G3.T03 3-UV30 19-117 to =G3.U0
06-AJ03.2
CONDDBS card XM M1-33 / XM1--34 terminalss.
Cause
NOT USED
D.
V
V/HZ LIMIT
Action
Cause
Check Externaal VAR regulation set-point value.
Check regulattion mode (P
Power factor oro VAR)
EXC. OV
VEREXCITA
ATION Action
LIMIT  Change re egulation modde from P.F. or VAR costtant in VAR manual
m
re
egulation mod OWN button and check thhe reactive value.
de. Push DO
Reduce VAR vvalue with trrend to zero..
Cause
Check Exxternal VAR regulation
r se
et-point valuee.
Check reg
gulation mod
de (Power facctor or VAR)
EXC. UN
NDEREXCITA
ATION
LIMIT Action
 Change rregulation mo ode from P.F
F. or VAR cosstant in VARR manual
re
egulation mod
de. Push UP P button and check the reeactive value
e. Reduce
VAAR value wiith trend to zero.
z
Cause
NOT USE
ED
MAX TIM
ME IN OVER
RLOAD
Action

SILCOVER
RT S – 2MU
U1000253116B 6 - 33
6 Protection
ns and trouble
eshooting
A
ALARMS LIST 
Message Po
ossible caus
ses and pos
ns
Cause
Operattion of the Ex
xc. cubicle E03 fan fault.
Action
EXC.CU
UBICLE AIRF
FLOW  Che eck if switch =G2.D01 –Q QV03 is in ON
N position.
LOSS  Che eck for the inntegrity of an nemometer ==G2.D01 –BP03 installed
d
in t he upper front part of +13 control cubbicle.
 Che eck for the inttegrity of rela
ay =G3.L03 ––KA18 installled in
conttrol cubicle..
Cause
The exxcitation systtem is in MANUAL MODE E current reg
gulations and
d
the VF
FD command d is in remote
e selected..
WARNING: EXCITAT
TION IN Action ( see a
also Tabella
a n° 1 – EVENTS & COM
MMANDS)
MANUALL MODE ANND VFD
COMMAANDS IN REEMOTE Check also the
e exciter selections (see cha 7).
S
SELECTED
Select local comma
ands
Changge from Manuual to Automatic regulatioon mode
Select remote com
mmand
Cause
The motor ddoes not increase the sp
peed
Action
Th
he protection
n delay time can be custo
omized on thhe card APROT4.
MOTOR
R NOT SPEE
EDING
 Check M
Motor-compre essor system
m load.
 Check if the led RD, on the card AGIF21,
A turnn on.
 Check th
he current lim
mit parameters and the accceleration parameters.
p
Cause
BRUSH
HLESS ROTA
ATING Fault o
of the Brushle
ess diodes.
DIOD
DES OPENE
ED Action
 Exe
ecute the protection test.
 Che
eck the Synchronous mottor manual.
Cause
During start
rt-up circuit breaker
b 52M opens witho ut opening control
c by
52M O
OPENING NOT
N VFD
CONTR
ROLLED BYY VFD Action
 Check thhe circuit breaker on switch-gear paneel.
 Consult SSwitch gear manual.
Cause
During start
b 52FF
F opens withoout opening control by
VFD
52FF UNTIMELY OP
PENING
Action
Cause
During start
b 52VF
F opens withoout opening control by
VFD
52VF UN
NTIMELY OP
PENING Action
6 - 34 SILC
0253116B
ubleshooting
g
A
ALARMS LIST 
Message Po
ossible caus
ses and pos
ns
Cause
Overco
ome the max
ximum time in start-up.
Action
MAX TIME
E WITH EXCITATION It servves for safeg
guarding the principal com
mponents fro om possible
ON AND MOTOR IN STALL excesssive heating g.
ppens for prolonged phase of test.
It hap
It hap
ppens in cons sequence of the lack of ssolution of pro
oblems
during g the phase of
o synchronizzation.
Cause
In Ma nual OR VAR regulation mode the m maximum reach of the
curren
nt reference
In Auttomatic modee the alarms associated overexcitation limit
or und
derexcitation
n limit.
Action
With
W Local co
ommand selected and in
i Automaticc Mode
 In local ppush excitatio

on DOWN co ommand withh overexcitattion limit on .
EXCITE
ER IN MAXIMUM  In Local command pu ush UP command with u nderexcitatio on limit on.
TR
RAVEL ENDD  If both lim
mits are OFFF or still rema
ain in ON, chheck the motor stator
value (power factoor, reactive power,
p excitaation currentt, motor
statorr voltage):
- Checkk if pw-factorr is activated. If power facctor regulatio ons is
activa
ated push VA AR manual modem button. With UP com mmand (first
time uup) or DOWN N button com mmand adjust st the reactivee near the
zero vvalue. With re
eactive to zeero value pussh power fac ctor constantt
regulaations button
n and check power
p factorr value.
 If the prooblem persistts, as soon as

a possible, rrepeating a start-up.
s
Looking forward to a repeat startt-up control:
motor te emperature, if possible to reduce the lload
 If, after a start-up, the
e problem is persistent, ccall service.
SILCOVER
RT S – 2MU
U1000253116B 6 - 35
6 Protection
ns and trouble
eshooting
A
ALARMS LIST 
Message Po
ossible caus
ses and pos
ns
Cause
In Ma nual mode or
o in VAR mo ode the minim
mum reach of
o the currentt
refere
ence
In Auttomatic modee the alarms associated overexcitation limit
or und
derexcitation
n limit.
Action
With
W Local co
ommand selected and in
i Automaticc Mode
 In local ppush excitatio

on DOWN co ommand withh overexcitattion limit on .
EXCIT
TER IN MINIM
MUM  In Local command pu ush UP command with u nderexcitatio on limit on.
TR
RAVEL END D  If both lim
mits are OFF F or still rema
ain in ON, chheck the motor stator
value (power facto or, reactive power,
p excitaation currentt, motor
statorr voltage):
- Checkk if pw-factorr is activated. If power facctor reg is ac ctivated pushh
VAR m manual mode button. Witth UP comm mand (first tim
me up) or
DOW N button com mmand adjus st the reactivve near the zero
z value.
With rreactive to ze
ero value pus sh power facctor costant regulation
buttonn and check cosFi value.
 If the prooblem persistts, as soon as

a possible, rrepeating a start-up.
s
Looking forward to a repeat startt-up control:
motor teemperature, if possible to reduce the lload
 If after a start-up the problem perrsists, call seervice.
Cause
C
Signal
S coming
g from the Pllant.
With
W signal is allowed to perform
p only the VFD tesst functions mode,
m in
Local mode.
PERMISSIVE MAINTE
ENANCE
PRESENT
Signal
S activa
ated
6 - 36 SILC
0253116B
ubleshooting
g
A
ALARMS LIST 
Message Po
ossible caus
ses and pos
ns
Cause
VFD SFC p power circuit to ground .
Action
GRO
OUND FAUL
LT Beforre doing maaintenance to o the powerr circuit of
the S FC must doo the following step
See VFD wirin

ng diagram sheet
s 14, points from 1 too 4 .
Action
 Put iin safety equ
uipment and check insulaation of the co onnecting
leadds from the transformer
t TLS
T output too the SFC co onverter andd
from
m the SFC converter output to the traansformer TM MS input.
 Discconnect the enter
e and exiit cables andd check the in
nsulation of
the converter too ground with
h an ohmmetter.
SILCOVER
RT S – 2MU
U1000253116B 6 - 37
6 Protection
ns and trouble
eshooting
A
ALARMS LIST 
Message Po
ossible caus
ses and pos
ns
Cause H1 Led d
Alarm moniitoring active
e after the SFFC Start commmand.
Report lackk of 52FF sig
gnalling contrrol ended.
Useful sign
nal to detect cabling
c Paragraph (6.3.)
probllems . See P
Action (see w
wiring diagra am)
 Che eck the 52FFF circuit brea
aker closed sstatus cable from
f
=G33.S07 – XAP PROT3 LED H01 terminaal 01 to PLC and a auxiliaryy
rela
ay.
STOP- H
H1 OR H2 IN
NPUTS
XPROTT CARD OPEENED
 Che F circuit brea
eck the 52FF aker closed sstatus cable from
f
G3..S08– XAPR ROT3 LED H0 01 terminal 001 to PLC annd auxiliary
rela
ay.
Cause H2 Led
d
Alar m monitoring g active after the S FC Start command d.
Rep
port lack of 522VF signal control endedd.
Useeful signal to detect cablin
ng problemss See Paragrraph (6.3.)
Action
 Ch heck the 52VVF & CB4 or
o CB5 circuuit breaker closed
c status
cable from =G3.S07 – XAPROOT3 LED H002 terminal 02
2 to PLC andd
ary relay.
auxilia
 Check the 52VF circuit

c breake
er closed staatus cable frrom G3.S08–
–
XAPROT LED H02 terrminal 02 to PLC and auxxiliary relay.
6 - 38 SILC
0253116B
ubleshooting
g
A
ALARMS LIST 
Message Po
ossible caus
ses and pos
ns
Cause
The controll card APROOT4, has the frontal
f microoswitch (Enab
ble) in OFF
position.
Action
WARNING- APROT44 CARD
 Put the sswitch in ON position.
IMPULSE SWITCH DIS
SABLED
Cause
STOP
P - ACK ROTTOR Control HW
W protection on
o APROT4 card.
POS
SITION FAILE
ED Action
 See desccription in the preceding paragraph (66.3.) Wrong
g Motor
Rotation
n
Cause
H7-XPR
ROT CARD PULSE
P
Control HW
W protection ono APROT4 card.
ENA
ABLING LOS
SS
Action
 See desccription in the preceding paragraph (66.3.)
Cause
EXCITER
R CURRENT
T LOSS Control HW
Action
 See desccription in the preceding paragraph (66.3.)
VFD PAN
NEL CONVE
ERTER Cause
WITH D
DOORS OPE
ENED SFC powerr cubicle withh doors opened
Action
Checkk that the doors are close
ed
Checkk door limit switch
s and KA
A48 relay cirrcuit (sheet =G3.L06).
=
QF
F10 OPENED
D Cause
415V incom
ming line swittch opened.
or Action
Closin
ng the QF op
pened
QF
F20 OPENED
D
Checkk KA41 or KAA42 relay circuit (sheet =
=G3.L06).
SILCOVER
RT S – 2MU
U1000253116B 6 - 39
6 Protection
ns and trouble
eshooting
A
ALARMS LIST 
Message Po
ossible caus
ses and pos
ns
FV11 VO
OLT.DETECT
TOR IN Cause
ALARM 415V incom ming line less
s.
Action (see wwiring diagraam =G2.D00 [sheet 28]])
Checkk QF10 fuses s
or Checkk FV11 settinng (sheet =G
G2.D00)
Checkk MCC1 of th he plant
5V is present replace FV11
If 415
FV21 VO
OLT.DETECT
TOR IN
Checkk QF20 fuses s
ALARM
Checkk FV21 settin
ng (sheet =GG2.D00)
Checkk MCC2 of thhe plant
5V is present replace FV2
If 415 21
KM10 TIM
ME-OUT CLOSING Cause
C
COMMAND When is ne
ecessary one e 415V incomming line cha nge, the KM10 or KM20
relay does not closing.
Action
or Checkk KM10 coil circuit
c
Checkk command circuit
c (sheett =G3.P22)
Checkk if FV11 is in alarm
ME-OUT CLOSING
KM20 TIM
Checkk KM20 coil circuit
c
C
COMMAND
Checkk command circuit
c (sheett =G3.P22)
Checkk if FV21 is in alarm
415V IN
NCOMING LINE
L - Cause
FAILED 415V from MCC1 and MCC2
M is less
s
Action
Checkk MCC of the
e Plant
Checkk FV11 and FV21
F setting
Checkk QF10 and QF20 Fuses s
Cause
Signal inco ming from Encoder Moto
or J.Box.
ENCODER
R POWER SUPPLY
S Action
Checkk KA07 relay
y circuit (shee
et =G3.L01)
Checkk Power supplier in Encooder Box (sheeet =G1.J04)
s in Encoderr Box (sheet =G1.J04).
Checkk FU01 fuses
Cause
PL
LC ALARMS: Error from C
CPU of the PLC
P system.
-PLC INPU
UT CARD
-PLC OUTPUT CARD
-PLC-DP C
COMMUNICAATION Action
Referr to PLC Siem
mens Manual.
6 - 40 SILC
0253116B
ubleshooting
g
Tabella n° 3 – TRIPS
 TRIPS LIST
T
Message Po
ossible caus
ses and pos
ns
Cause
The S
SFC input circuit
c ker (52FF) is not closed after the
break e
commaand.
Action
52FF TIM
MEOUT CLO
OSING
C
COMMAND  Che eck integrity
y relay circcuit =G3.P100 –KA50(co
ontrol cubicle
e
inside
e).
 Che eck integrity
y relay circu
uit =G3.P20 –KA22 (coontrol cubicle
e
inside
e).
 Cheeck the cablee form VFD too Switch geaar.
Cause
The S
SFC input circuit
c ker (52VF) is not closed after the
break e
commaand.
Action
 Che eck integrity
ontrol cubicle
e
52VF TIM
MEOUT CLO
OSING
inside
e).
C
COMMAND
y relay circu
e
inside
e).
 Cheeck the cablee form VFD too Switch geaar.
Cause
External trip
p from PLANNT control du uring start-upp.
EXTERRNAL TRIP FIRST
F .
TERVENTION
INT Action
 Reset th e external triips.
 Check th he external trrips chain.
 Check th he relay =G33.L02 –KA12 or KA13.
Cause
The emergeency button -SB01, on th
he +24 cubiccle front door, has been
pressed.
LOCA
AL EMERGEN
NCY
Action:
 Reset th
he button rotating
g it in clock w
wise sense.
 Verify the
e integrity off the wiring.
SFC CON
NTROL SUP
PPLIER Cause
One or morre power sup
pplier is/are fault.
-GA05[+15
5V] –GA06[-1 15V] . =G3.UU01 wiring diaagram sheett
Action
 Check th
he voltage off power suppply.
 Check th
he green led of powers su upply are ON
N (if not chan
nge it).
SILCOVER
RT S – 2MU
U1000253116B 6 - 41
6 Protection
ns and trouble
eshooting
 TRIPS LIST
T
Message Po
ossible caus
ses and pos
ns
A.V.R. P
POWER SUP
PPLIER Cause
One or morre power sup
pplier is/are fault.
-G
GA20[+24V] –GA21[-24V V] –GA22[+2 24V]. =G3.D002 wiring diagram sheet
Action
 Check th
he voltage off power suppply (+24Vdc ± 0,5V)..
 Check th
he green led of powers su upply are ON
N (if not chan
nge it).
Cause
QE01 FIRING CAR
RDS
PW.S
SUPP.OPENNED Serious anoomaly at pow
wer supply circuits of the converter pu
ulse
electronics cards.
Converter ((rectifier or in
nverter)
Action
WORNING.
W B
Before doing
g maintenan nce to the SF
FC power ciircuit, you
must
m to follow
w the steps (from 1 to 4)
4 outlined i n the previo
ous page 38
8
 Check thhe breaker =G3.D01 –QE E01.

 Check thhe TM01 trannsformer andd its secondaary connectio
ons.
 Try disco
onnecting on
ne at a time converter
c AS
SAI cards
 Replace the magneto o-thermal bre
eaker.
ASAI cardss
QV01 BL
LOWERS PO
OWER Cause
SUP
PPLY OPENE
ED Serious a
anomaly at power
p supply
y circuits of thhe reactor and converterr
Blowers.
Action
 Check th
he breaker =G3.D01.
 Check th
he setting of magneto-the ermal breakeers QV01.(1.6
6 Amp)
 Check th
he circuit of the motors =G
G3.D01 –EV V01.
 Check th
he relay =G3 3.L03 –KA17..
Blower Trip
p
Replace EV01.
6 - 42 SILC
0253116B
ubleshooting
g
 TRIPS LIST
T
Message Po
ossible caus
ses and pos
ns
Cause
PTC installe
ed inside of the
t reactor in
nterventions (G1.H01).
Action
Beforre doing ma aintenance too the powerr circuit of
the S FC must do o the following step
DC R
REACTOR MAX
M
TEM
MPERATURRE
Open
O the pan
nel.
 By meanns of a  multimeter, check if the therrmal pad con
ntact of the
DC reacttor is really open.
o
SILCOVER
RT S – 2MU
U1000253116B 6 - 43
6 Protection
ns and trouble
eshooting
 TRIPS LIST
T
Message Po
ossible caus
ses and pos
ns
Cause
AR
REV11 CARD
D Control HWW protection on
o APROT4 card.
ECTORS OPENED
CONNE Action
 See e description eding paragrraph (6.3.) Ittem "LED 0""
n in the prece
I/O analog interface XA
AREV Replaace the cablee. The cable code is showwn to table of the VFD
g diagram sheet = G3.U0
wiring 02.
VFD wiringg diagram =GG3.S01-2
cable
Cause
TLS T
TRANSFORM
MER
Not ap
pplicable
BUUCHHOLTZ
Z
Action
TMS TTRANSFORM MER WORNING.
W B
Before doing g maintenan nce to the TRRANSFORM MERS ensure
e
BU UCHHOLTZ Z th
hat: - VFD iisn't in Startt-Up
(Iff applicable)) - 52FF and 52VF are a opened
ement)
To coonsult the tran
nsformer prooduct manuaal.
Cause
Not appplicable
TLS TRA
ANSFORMER MIN.
Action
O
OIL LEVEL
WORNING.
W B
Before doing g maintenan nce to the TRRANSFORM MERS ensure
e
TMS TTRANSFORM MER th
hat: - VFD iisn't in Startt-Up
MIN N.OIL LEVEL - 52FF and 52VF are a opened
(Iff applicable)) To coonsult the trannsformer prooduct manuaal
ement)
Add ooil (consult th
he transformeer product m anual)
6 - 44 SILC
0253116B
 TRIPS LIST 
Message Possible causes and possible corrective actions

Cause
With particular environmental conditions, or to excessive
duration of the overload by motor-compressor system
system
Action
TLS TRANSFORMER WTI WORNING. Before doing maintenance to the TRANSFORMERS ensure
that: - VFD isn't in Start-Up
- 52FF and 52VF are opened
- DCS system send to VFD the "Maintenance permissive"
signals
Reduce compressor load and restart.
Check transformer terminal box ( doc. General arrangement)
Consult the transformer product manual.
Cause
system
MOTOR WINDING OR
Action
BEARING
OVERTEMPERATURE WORNING. Before doing maintenance to the MOTOR ensure that:
52FF, 52VF AND 52M (BY PASS) are opened
signals
Consult the motor product manual.
Cause
Action
WORNING. Before doing maintenance to the TRANSFORMERS ensure
TMS TRANSFORMER WTI that: - VFD isn't in Start-Up
- 52FF and 52VF are opened
signals
Cause
Not applicable
Action
TLS OVERPRESSURE
VALVE WORNING. Before doing maintenance to the TRANSFORMERS ensure
that: - VFD isn't in Start-Up
TMS OVERPRESSURE - 52FF and 52VF are opened
VALVE - ESD system should exclude
(If applicable) the signal "Maintenance permissive" to VFD
SILCOVERT S – 2MU1000253116B 6 - 45
6 Protection
ns and trouble
eshooting
 TRIPS LIST
T
Message Po
ossible caus
ses and pos
ns
CONVERT
TER and RE
EACTOR Cause
COOOLING FAULT Malfu nction of the Converter cubicle
c fan orr air flow sen
nsor.
Action
 Verify tha
at the input windows
w are not blocked by dust or objects.
o
 Check fa an rotation with
w local "SFC C BLOWERS S TEST" mo ode.
 Check re elay =G3.L03 3 –KA22.
 Check th he switch =GG1.G01 -BP01 installed cuubicle +21
Cause
The exccitation syste as not goes in the ON sta
em (AVR), ha atus, after
the SFC sstart comma and producedd by the PLC
C logic.
Action
 Checck the integrity of PLC card (Slot 002 outputs A125.4,
A shee
et
G3.N007).
EXCITATION ON COMMAND
FROM
M SFC TIME OUT
 Che
eck the integ
grity of cable to sheet =G
G3.U06 –AVR
R CONTROL
L
BOARRD clamp XM M1-13 .
eck 52E brea

 Che aker must be closed
 Cheeck KME clo
osing commaand.(G3.P10--KA51)
6 - 46 SILC
0253116B
ubleshooting
g
 TRIPS LIST
T
Message Po
ossible caus
ses and pos
ns
Cause
The ou utput breakerr (52VF) is not opened
52VF TIM
ME OUT OPENING after th
he command d.
C
COMMAND
Action
 Check the integrity relay circuit =G3.P10 –K KA55 installe

ed in
+11 coontrol cubicle
e.
 Checkk the integritty relay circuuit =G3.P200 –KA23 installed in +11
contro
ol cubicle
 Check the cable forrm VFD to Switch-GEAR R (52VF)
 Consullt the switch gear manual.
Cause
The sig es that block occurred in ccontrol.
gnal indicate
Action
 Cheeck which ye ellow LED is lighted up onn APROT4 card, pos.[H]
SFC C
CONTROL TRIP
T in S
SFC rack con ntrol
 Afte
er identifying the LED, see paragraphh 6.3 (hardwa
are
prootection) of th
his chapter.
Cause
C
KME CLO
OSING COMMMAND The EX
XC input circ
cuit breaker (KME)
( is not closed afterr command.
T
TIME OUT Action
A
 Ch heck integrity
ontrol cubicle
e
inside
e).
y relay circu
e
inside
e).
y relay circu
e
inside
e).
SILCOVER
RT S – 2MU
U1000253116B 6 - 47
6 Protection
ns and trouble
eshooting
 TRIPS LIST
T
Message Po
ossible caus
ses and pos
ns
Cause
EXTERNA
AL TRIP FRO
OM DCS Extern al causes. With
W this signal is presentt during start--up
PRESENT
Action
Checkk the integrity
y of relay =G
G3.L02 –KA1 2.
EXTERNAAL TRIP FLO OM LCP Checkk the integrity G3.L02 –KA133.
y of relay =G
PRESENT
(If provided)
Cause
C
Fault o
of the Brushle
ess diodes.
BRUSH
HLESS ROTA ATING
D
DIODES IN
ORT CIRCUIT
SHO
Action
A
 Exe
ecute the pow
wer relay pro
otection test F
FF58 (=G3.S
S09).
 Che
eck the Sync
chronous mottor manual.
Cause
52M TIM
ME OUT OPE
ENING The Ma ain breaker (52M)
( is not opened
C
COMMAND after th
he command d.
Action
 Check the integrity relay circuit =G3.P01 –K KA16 installe

ed in
+22 coontrol cubicle
e.
 Checkk the integritty relay circuuit =G3.P200 –KA27 installed in +22
2
contro
ol cubicle
 Check the cable forrm VFD to Switch-GEAR R (52M)
 Consullt the switch gear manual.
6 - 48 SILC
0253116B
ubleshooting
g
 TRIPS LIST
T
Message Po
ossible caus
ses and pos
ns
Cause
The Exxciter input breaker
b -52E has tripped.
Action
Ensurre that the VF
FD is turned off. And 52EE opened
Checkk that no volttage is prese
ent downstreeam of 52E
Disco
onnect the caables to the converter
c inpput
52E TR
RIP (<U ; I>; I>>)
Test tthe breaker with

w manual ON/ OFF haandle above the t front
side. IIf the circuit breaker trips
s to test the ccontrol circuitts as listed
below
w
 Con
nsult the onliine Siemens Circuit Breaaker manual
Cause
The E
Exciter input breaker
b -52E
E was openeed in operatio
on.
52E UN
NTIMELY OP
PENING
(CHECK STATU
US) Action
Close
e the 52E and d restart systtem
Checkk relay circuit sheet G3.L
L04-KA28
EXCITE
ER CONVERRTER Cause
FUSES TRIP The Exxciter fuses installed in the input coonverter are broken. Trip
p
d to it :"AVR Max Currentt (IOC)"
related
Action
Warning make
m sure th
hat the 52E iis opened
 Checck the fuses -FU11,12,13 3 installed in the rear of +11 cubicle.

Checck Thyristorss with ohmme eter instrumeent
Checck the integrity of relay =G3.L04 –KA A25 installed in the front of
o
+11 ccontrol cubicle.
Checck exciter Brushless diod de. Consult thhe Motor Ma anual
SILCOVER
RT S – 2MU
U1000253116B 6 - 49
6 Protection
ns and trouble
eshooting
 TRIPS LIST
T
Message Po
ossible caus
ses and pos
ns
Cause
The E
Exciter input relay
r KME was
w opened inn operation.
KME UN
NTIMELY OP
PENING
(C
CHECK COIL
L) Action
Checkk with ohmm
meter the coil status
Checkk the comma
and cable (shheet G3.P22))
Cause
EX
XCITATION With paarticular env
c orr malfunction n of the
TRANS
SFORMER MAX cooling
g system. Th he signal is activated
a wheen the windin ngs reach at
TEM
MPERATURRE 150° CC. Alarm rela ontrol cubiclee air cooling Loss"
ated to it :"Co
Action
If the Trip is acctivated after the activation of "Loss C
Control Cubiicle Air-
coooling) checkk:
Air inl et windows free

Fan ccorrect rotatio
on
EV03 power supp ply circuit
If the Trip is acctivated with

hout the priorr activation of the "Loss Control
C
Cubicle Air-co ooling) check k:
Check the integrityy of transform

mer thermal ccontact
Check relay =G3.L L04 –KA26 anda your com mmand circu
uit installed in
n
the fro
ont of +22 co
ontrol cubicle
e.
Cause
With paarticular env

c orr malfunction n of the
cooling
g system. Th he signal is activated
a wheen the thyristtors reach at
EXCITAT
TION CONVE
ERTER 100° CC. Alarm relaated to it :"Co
ontrol cubiclee air cooling Loss"
MAX T
TEMPERATUURE Action
If the Trip is acctivated after the activation of "Loss C
Control Cubiicle Air-
coooling) checkk:
Air inl et windows free

Fan ccorrect rotatio
on
EV03 power supp ply circuit
If the Trip is acctivated with

hout the priorr activation of the "Loss Control
C
Cubicle Air-co ooling) check k:
Check the integrityy of converterr thermal coontact

Check relay =G3.L L03 –KA24 anda your com mmand circu
uit installed in
n
ont of +22 co
the fro ontrol cubicle
e.
6 - 50 SILC
0253116B
ubleshooting
g
 TRIPS LIST
T
Message Po
ossible caus
ses and pos
ns
Cause
The exxcitation systtem control is
s fault.
Action
 Che
eck the rack control LCD display messsage.
AVR
LCD dispplay
Errors and
d trip name
 See e the exciter control

c manuual. Chap. 5 .2
EXC. A.V.R. SYSTEM ERROR  Che eck the integrity of relay =G3.U06
= –KKA24 installed
d in the fron
nt
of +222 control cub
bicle.
Try to rreset and repeat the starrt-up
If the reset co
ommand throough the HMII or the yelloow button, th
he AVR is no
ot
re
eset You pussh the button in the picturre
1 2
AV
VR Rack con
ntrol in E (errors) AVR Rack ccontrol in C. (ok)
SILCOVER
RT S – 2MU
U1000253116B 6 - 51
6 Protection
ns and trouble
eshooting
 TRIPS LIST
T
Message Po
ossible caus
ses and pos
ns
VFD- POW
WER CONVVERTER Cause
PANEL WITH DOOORS SFC powerr cubicle withh doors opened
OPENED DDURING ST
TART-UP Action
Checkk that the doors are close
ed
Checkk door limit switch
s and KA
A48 relay cirrcuit (sheet =G3.L06).
=
415V IN
NCOMING LINE
L - Cause
FAILED 415V from MCC1 and MCC2
M is less
s DURING ST
TART-UP
Action
Checkk MCC of the
e Plant
Checkk FV11 and FV21
F setting
Checkk QF10 and QF20 Fuses s
SFC INCOMING LINE LOW Cause

V
VOLTAGE Control HW
W protection ono SFC RAC CK control APPROT4 card.
(3) Action
 See desccription in the preceding paragraph (66.3.) item 3
SFC INC
COMING LINE MAX Cause
C
CURRENT Control HW
(4) Action
6 - 52 SILC
0253116B
ubleshooting
g
 TRIPS LIST
T
Message Po
ossible caus
ses and pos
ns
SFC UNBAALANCE CU URRENT Cause
ID
DC1 < IDC2 Control HW
PRROTECTIONN Action
(7)
SFC UNBA
ALANCE CU URRENT Cause
ID
DC2 < IDC1 Control HW
W protection ono SFC RAC CK control APPROT4 card
(8) Action
SFC- MOT
TOR MAX CU
URRENT Cause
AX CURRENT
MA Control HW
(9) Action
SFC- MOT
TOR MAX VO
OLTAGE Cause
(A) Control HW
Action
 See desccription in the preceding paragraph (66.3.) item A
SILCOVER
RT S – 2MU
U1000253116B 6 - 53
6 Protection
ns and trouble
eshooting
 TRIPS LIST
T
Message Po
ossible caus
ses and pos
ns
SFC- E
EXCITATION
N LOW Cause
C
CURRENT Contro
rol HW protecction on APRROT4 card.
(b) The e stem of the group is activve, but the co
excitation sys ontrol of the
SFC ddoes not receeive current feedback siggnal.
Action
e preceding paragraph (66.3.) item b
See desccription in the
 Check th he analog tra
ansd.output =G3.S06 –A AX07 termina al 25-26.
 Verify the
e signals of interface
i between SFC aand Excitation system.
 Check th he SFC contrrol card AREEV11 (rack poos. (N).
 Check th he cable betwween XREV1 11 card and A
AREV11 carrd (rack pos.
(N
N).
XAREV - ==G3.S02-AX0 03
(VFD wiring
g diagram sh
heet 56)
SFC- T
TRIP SOFTW
WARE Cause
(W
WATCH DOG G) Control HW
(E) Action
 See desccription in the preceding paragraph (66.3.) item E
Cause
Contro
rol HW protecction on APRROT4 card.
The ccontrol card APROT4,
A doe
es not enabl e the pulses because the
e
rotor p
position has not been rec
cognized.
MO
OTOR STALL
Action
(F)
e preceding paragraph (66.3.) item F
See desccription in the
 Verify the
e Leds on th he AGIF21 ca ard (see pagee 6 -72)
 Verify the
e AGIF21 ca ard setting.
 Verify the
e generator PT_Lem and d the AREV1 1 card settinng.
MOTOR W
WRONG ROT TATION Cause
[LED
D APROT D d ] Control HW o SFC RAC
W protection on CK control AP
PROT4 card display
Action
WORNING.
W B
Before doingg maintenannce to the MOOTOR ensu
ure that: -
VFD isn't in S
Start-Up
- 52FF,, 52VF and 52M
5 are ope
ened
- ESD s system should exclude e
the siignal "Mainttenance perrmissive" to
o VFD
 See descrip
ption in the preceding
p paragraph (6.33.) item d
6 - 54 SILC
0253116B
ubleshooting
g
 TRIPS LIST
T
Message Po
ossible caus
ses and pos
ns
MOTO
OR OVERSPEED Cause
(H) Control HW
Action
 See desccription in the preceding paragraph (66.3.) item H
SILCOVER
RT S – 2MU
U1000253116B 6 - 55
6 Protection
ns and trouble
eshooting
Le
eds signals on
o control card
c fronts.
More detailed information can be obta ained by meaans of signals of LEDs ppositioned on n the controll
ca
ard fronts.
In the following
g pages the description o
of the LEDs located
l on th
he card frontss is given.
LEDs O
ON CARDS
S FRONT
CARD N
NAME LED CODE FUNCTION DESCRIPT ION
POSIT
TION COLOUR
1 Aint02 te
est failed
2 Eeprom p parameters lost
l
ACPU0
02 [D] P Protectio
on
S Suppresssion state
M-G Regulatioon state
Led 1
L Gree
en (1) R
Rotor positionn or with jumpper XJ2 ON - inverter angle 1°
L 2
Led Gree
en (2) R
L 3
Led Gree
en (3) R
L 4
Led Gree
en (4) R
L 5
Led Gree
en (5) R
L 6
Led Gree
en (6) R
L 7
Led Gree
en (Fw) M
Motor forward d CW or with jumper XJ2 ON - inverte er angle 64°
L 8
Led Gree
en (Rd) R
Rotor detectioon on or with jumper XJ2 ON - inverteer angle 128°°
AGIF21
1 [Q]
L 1
Led Red
d (1) In
nverter thyristor 1 pulse on
o
L 2
Led Red
d (2) In
o
L 3
Led Red
d (3) In
o
L 4
Led Red
d (4) In
o
L 5
Led Red
d (5) In
o
L 6
Led Red
d (6) In
o
L 7
Led Red
d (Bwd) M
Motor backwa ard CCW
L 8
Led Red
d (LCN) Natura commutation of inv
N verter bridge
Led 1
L Red
d (Reg Curr) ON curre ent regulator actived
L 2
Led Red
d (Reg V/H
Hz) ON V/Hz z regulator acctived
L 3
Led Red
d (Reg Vmmot) ON voltage regulator actived
L 1
Led Gree
en (ARL Lin e) Input/Outtput line OFF
F
L 2
Led Gree
en (ARL Excc) Exciationn OFF
APROT
T4 [F]
L 3
Led Gree
en (ARL Extt) External enable OFF
L 4
Led Gree
en (ARL Int)) Internal enable
e OFF
L 5
Led Gree
en (Sop) Converteer pulses supppressed
7 segment led
d Trimmer and trip disp
play
6 - 56 SILC
0253116B
OPERATION LOGICS 7
In this Chapter
7.1 GENERAL 1
7.2 START UP AND SHUT–DOWN SEQUENCES 2
7.3 START UP IN D.O.L. MODE SEQUENCES (not applicable) ………………………4
7.1 GENERAL
You can operate the drive from the control room only in automatic mode.
At any rate it is possible carry out the test for checking that the apparatus is ready before the
starting sequence. Select the operation mode – AUTOMATIC , SHORT CIRCUIT TEST –
by means of the pushbutton placed on the HMI operator panel.
For use in Local Command of the Tuch Display see Chapter 6 par. 6.7
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B Rev.00 7-1

7 Operation logics
7.2 START UP AND SHUT- DOWN SEQUENCES
For the sequences it has to refer to the following plant drowing:

6.6KV Main
Breaker 52M
Soft Starter
Input
Breaker 52FF

SFC

M
52FV
6.6kV/1,65kV 1,45KV/6.6KV
TLS TMS
415V exciter
break. 52E + KME Static exciter
A.V.R.
420V/430V
TE
V.F.D.
LEGEND:
DCS = Generic Unit Contro Plant
VFD= Voltage Frequency Drive (SFC + AVR)
AVR= Excitation system
SFC = Frequency converter system
52x= Circuit Breaker
Motor START
Signal description NOTE
VFD ready No Trips and Automatic mode exciter
[VFD  DCS] in Remote & Automatic

Start command Impulse contact
[DCS  VFD]

Start SFC cooling fans
[Internal command]

Closing command SFC input breaker Direct command to
[SFCinput brk 52FF] SFC input breaker

Closing command SFC output switch Direct command to
[SFC  output switch 52FV] output switch

Closing command exciter input breaker Direct command to
52E+KME exciter relay
Start exciter fan
[AVR  input brk KME]

Enable exciter regulator - converter Start turning motor to reach the internal speed
Enable SFC regulator - converter reference.
7-2 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B

7 Operation logics

Enable SFC regulator - converter When Motor is in running.

Enabled Line voltage matching to exciter Speed > 95%.
Line voltage matched


It follows
It follows from the preceding sheet


Enabled Synchronizer Speed = Grid frequency
Speed matched

Main breacker closing command Motor on grid
[Synchronizer  output switch 52M]

Opening command SFC output switch Direct command to
[SFC  output switch 52FV] output switch

Opening command SFC switches Direct command to
[SFC  output switch 52FF] input switch

Delay-Stop SFC cooling fans Time = 20 second
[Internal command]

Disable SFC regulator - converter S.F.C. system stop

Start-UP end Compressor loading
[VFD  DCS]
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Shut down sequency

Stop command Impulse contact
[DCS  AVR]

VFD 52M opening command AVR Firing disabled
[VFD  output switch 52M]
Disable exciter regulator - converter

Opening command EXC input breaker Direct command to
[AVR  input breaker KME] EXC input breaker

Stop exciter cubicle fan

VFD ready No Trips and Automatic mode exciter
[VFD  DCS] in Remote & Automatic

7 Operation logics
7.3 START UP IN D.O.L. MODE SEQUENCES IF APPLICABLE
Motor START
VFD NO ready SFC converter in trip
[VFD  DCS]

Local selector in DOL mode DOL mode selected
[VFD  DCS]

You can choose bitwin Local command or remote command selection
LOCAL COMMAND mode Local command selected

[VFD  DCS]

Local START command Direct command to
[SFCinput brk 52M] 52M by-pass breaker

Motor running Motor running
[SFC  DCS]

Start up in DOLmode END Start-UP end
[AVR  DCS]

Power factor regulator enabled Power factor constant regulator
[AVR  DCS]

Warning. When start up motor is ended you change Local Command to Remote command mode
Shut down sequency


Remote command selected VFD in Remote command
[VFD  DCS]

Stop command Impulse contact
[DCS  AVR]

VFD 52M opening command AVR Firing disabled
[VFD  output switch 52M]
Disable exciter regulator - converter

Opening command EXC input breaker Direct command to
[AVR  input breaker KME] EXC input breaker

Stop exciter cubicle fan

VFD not ready Check SFC status or change DOL selector
[VFD  DCS] position from DOL mode to Normal mode
7-4 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B

7 Operation logics

SECTION III
STATIC EXCITATION SYSTEM MANUAL

STATIC EXCITATION SYSTEM
FOR SYNCHRONOUS MACHINES
USE AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ATTENZIONE
WARNING
WARNUNG
einschaltet.
ATTENTION
ADVERTENCIA
INDEX
CAP. 1 GENERAL INFORMATION

1.1 DEFINITION
1.2 CONSIDERATION
1.3 TECHNICAL DATA AND ENVIROMENT LIMITS
1.4 POWER CONFIGURATIONS
1.5 CONTROL SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
CAP. 2 DOCUMENTATION USE
2.1 EXCITER PANEL SECTION
2.2 EXCITER POWER CIRCUITS
2.3.1 Regulator cards Customization
2.3.2 Interface Cards and Transducers
2.4 REGULATION SYSTEM
CAP. 3 PARAMETERS and OPERATION
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 User's Interface SSDTERM
3.1.2 Description of the Diagnostic Software
3.1.2.1 Menu
3.1.2.3 Bbox (black box)
3.1.2.4 ScopE
3.1.2.5 FlaGs
3.1.2.6 History
3.2 PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION
3.2.1 List of Parameters
3.2.2 List of Flags
3.2.3 Control and Examples of utilization of Exciter Regulator Parameters
3.3 LOGIC FUNCTION
CAP. 4 COMMISSIONING
4.1 DEFINITION
4.2 GENERAL INFORMATION
4.3 COMMISSIONING OPERATIONS
4.4 APPENDIX TO CHAPTER 4 CALCULATIONS AND APPLIED FORMULAS
CAP. 5 COMMISSIONING
5.1 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
5.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING
5.3 COMPONENT REPLACEMENT
5.4 APPENDIX TO CHAPTER 5 ACS CONVERTER
SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000230691B 1-I

Index
2 - II SILCOSTAT D – 2MU100230691B
GENERAL INFORMATIONS 1
In this Chapter
1.1 DEFINITION 1
1.2 CONSIDERATION 1
1.3 TECHNICAL DATA AND ENVIROMENTL LIMITS 3
1.4 POWER CONFIGURATIONS 5
1.5 CONTROL SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS 10
1.1 DEFINITION
The CEI EN 60034-16-1 Standard defines EXCITATION SYSTEM as a device which supplies them
field current to a machine including all the control and regulation elements, the de-excitation or field
discharge devices and the protecting devices.
System is STATIC because the machine field gets power from an electrical source without moving
parts and because static rectifiers are used to supply the direct current.
The system consists of two parts functionally distinct (Fig. 1.1):
 the power section that supplies the excitation current to the rotor windings directly keyed to
the synchronous machine shaft;
 the control section that guarantees the remarkable electric quantities control
1.2 CONSIDERATIONS
The most significative advantages of the static excitation systems, in comparison with the rotating
ones, can be summed up in the following points:
 In terms of EFFICIENCY, the ratio given power/absorbed power (98%) is greater;
 MAINTENANCE problems are smaller: there is a remarkable reduction in the hours of stop
due to maintenance, mainly because there are not mechanical parts in motion;
 The system RELIABILITY is higher: having the static type a greater MTBF (Medium Time
Between Failures), the number of stops due to failure is considerably reduced;
SILCOSTAT D - 2MU1000253116B Rev. 00 1-1

1 General Informations
Fig. 1.1 Excitation system for synchronous machine

CAPTION
a Synchronous machine
b Power section
c Control section
d Mains
e Machine breaker
f Main feed
g Excitation quantities
h Machine quantities
i Mains quantities
j Measures, signals, alarms
k Commands, states
3
d
f e
3
a
b ~
g
j h
c
k i
 The higher rapidity of RESPONSE to sudden load changes eliminates the drawbacks due to
main falls;
 The system better ACCURACY (0,2% in comparison with 4% or 5% that can be obtained with
the rotant type) brings about considerable general improvements of the system.
The digital control systems, in comparison with the analog ones, allow:
 A dead times reduction in carrying out the reparations (MTTR = Medium Time To Repair),
thanks to the use of a smaller number of electronical parts;
 A better CONFIGURATION capability, allowing to specify gains and time constants, to enable or
to forbid functions without altering the hardware;
 an easy operator INTERFACE, using keyboards and monitors/displays with extremely “user-
friendly” modalities;
 a complete PROCESS CONTROL, being able to have access to the main logic and analog
variables statuses through the user interface;
 a complete DIAGNOSTICS, obtained integrating the “external” information from luminous control
units and lamps with the information summed up in the proper messages shown on
monitor/display.
1-2 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B

1 General informations
1.3 TECHNICAL DATA AND ENVIROMENTL LIMITS
Enviromental limits:
Grandezza Unitá Valore Note

Quantity Unit Value Notes
Temperatura di immagazzinamento ºC -30 .. +70
Storage temperature
Temperatura di utilizzo ºC 5 .. +47 
Usage temperature
Frequenza Hz 25 .. 75
Frequency
Umidita' relativa max. @ 20 ºC % 90
Max. relative humidity @ 20 ºC
Umidita' relativa max. @ 40 ºC % 50
Max. relative humidity @ 40 ºC
Altitudine max. m 1000 s.l.m
Max. altitude a.s.l.
 Per temperature di utilizzo costantemente al di sopre di 40 ºC lo scomparto del Controllo deve essere dotato
di condizionatore d' aria.
For usage temperatures constantly above 40 ºC the Control compartment must be equipped with air-conditioner.
Vibrations - The standard excitation cubicle mechanical structure can withstand a continuous
sinusoidal vibration, not exceeding the following absolute maximun limits:

Ampiezza costante di spostamento mm 0.02 nel campo 5 .. 57.5 Hz
Horizontal displacement amplitude in the range 5 .. 57.5 Hz
Ampiezza di accelerazione verticale m/s² 2.6 nel campo 57.5 .. 500 Hz
Vertical acceleration amplitude in the range 57.5 .. 500 Hz
Seisms - The standard excitation cubicle mechanical structure can withstand seismic disturbances,
measured at floor where installed, not exceeding the following absolute maximun limits:

Ampiezza di accelerazione orizzontale m/s² 1.96 = 0.2 g
Horizontal acceleration amplitude
Ampiezza di accelerazione verticale m/s² 1.97 = 0.16 g
Vertical acceleration amplitude
SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B 1-3

Input characteristics - The Vac line for converter power supply must withstand the following limits:

Tensione max. % 140 per 1 sec 
Max. voltage UV0
Tensione min. % 30 per 30 sec 
Min. voltage UV0
Frequenza max. % 150 per 60 sec
Max. frequency fN
Frequenza min. % 50 per 30 sec
Min. frequency fN
f/t max % 20 per 1 sec
fN
 Limiti per sistema alimentato dal montante di macchina. Per alimentazione da linea aux. i limiti sono 10 %
VacN.
Limits for system fed from the machine terminals. For power supply from an aux. line limits are 10 % VacN.
UV0: tensione secondaria a vuoto del trasformatore di eccitazione.
UV0: no-load excitation transformer secondary voltage.
fN: frequenza della linea di alimentazione del convertitore.
fN: ac line rated frequency of the converer feeding.
Exciter performances - Table shows the exciter typical data; application data are reported in the
functional drawings sheet: "Machine and converter data".

Tempo di risposta sec  0.05
Response time
Tensione di ceiling positivo pu 2 per motori sincroni = 1.2
Positive ceiling voltage VEN for synchronous motors = 1.2
Response ratio 4 per motori sincroni = 0.8
for synchronous motors = 0.8
Campo di variazione della tensione statorica: %
Stator voltage range: VAN
 in modalita' di regolazione automatica 80 .. 110
in automatic control mode
 in modalita' di regolazione manuale 30 .. 110 
in manual control mode
Precisione %  0.2
Accuracy VAN
Banda morta % 0
Dead band VAN
 Limiti per sistema alimentato dal montante di macchina. Per alimentazione da linea aux. i limiti sono 0 .. 110
% VAN.
Limits for system fed from the machine terminals. For power supply from an aux. line limits are 0 .. 110 % VAN.
VEN: tensione di eccitazione nominale della macchina.
VEN: excitation rated voltage of the machine.
VAN: tensione nominale statorica della macchina.
VAN: stator rated voltage of the machine.

1.4 POWER CONFIGURATIONS
General:
Silcostat-D is a digital control system for the excitation of synchronous machines. Result of a
consolidated electrical design experience and of an acknowledged qualitative standard, Silcostat-D
uses high-level technologies, complying with the strictest technical prescriptions, typical of power
plants, operating under extremely hard environmental, climatic and line conditions.
Silcostat-D static excitation system is available under different configurations (Fig. 1.2):
a ) single control channel and single power converter; USED

b ) double control channel and single power converter; NOT USED
c ) double control channel and double power converter;NOT USED
Power converter can be fed by an auxiliary line or from the machine terminals directly.
Fig. 1.2 System configurations
Controllo a
Control
Controllo 1 b
Control 1
Controllo 2
Control 2
Controllo 1 c
Control 1
Controllo 2
Control 2
Main Feed:
The three-fase line feeding the power section is called "main feed".
It can be derived from an auxiliary line or from the machine terminals directly; in the second
configuration the initial excitation circuit is needed (Fig. 1.3).

Fig. 1.3 CAPTION

b Exciter
c Excitation transformer
d Machine breaker (52G)
e Mains
f Excitation breaker (52E)
g Auxiliary line
h Initial excitation contactor (31)
i Auxiliary line or battery
j Machine terminals
e e
g
d d
f
j
i
c c
h
b a b a
~ ~
Power converter:
Power converter is a thyristor-static and six-legs type, unidirectional and totalcontrolled (Fig. 1.4):
tyristors are adopted as SCR (Silicon Controlled Rectifiers).
The choice of the thyristors is made for assuring its functioning at 1,4 times the no-load excitation
transformer secondary voltage.
Moreover, the overall safety is further highlighted by applying over-dimensioning coefficients in the
choice of thyristors compared to the minimum calculation size.
Not used Configuration Used
Vca Vcc Input Output

Vac Vdc Vca Vca
For brush field For brush less field
Fig. 1.4

Fuses:
Fuses are to protect bridge thyristors in case of internal failure and short circuit between converter
buses dc side; they are not requested to operate in case of overcurrent induced by a three-phase
short circuit on MOTOR terminals.
They are connected in series (Fig. 1.4) on thyristor bridge input phases from the excitation
transformer secondary circuit.
Snubbers:
In parallel to every thyristor of each bridge leg there are a dynamic snubber circuit and a static
snubber circuit (Fig. 1.5).
The first one, consisting of a RC filter, is sized to protect the thyristor from overvoltages that can
occur during its switchover; the second one is necessary when the field current, deviated in the crow
bar, passes through the discharge resistor applying between the converter dc terminals a continuous
voltage that can takes significant values (various kV).
The ohmic values requested are obtained by means of two resistors in series, in order to have a
certain degree of redundancy in case of short circuit of one of them.
Without its snubber, the thyristor may short-circuit owing to a overvoltage, but anyway it would be a
controlled failure, limited by the fuse and confined within the power bars.
Fig. 1.5
Discharger circuit:
If the main feed comes from an auxiliary line, a surge arresters based discharger circuit is connected
to the excitation transformer secondary circuit to neutralize possible overvoltages generated to the
excitation breaker 52E switching off.
Power redundancy:
Serial type (not used)

Two thyristor, identical ones, are connected in series on the same bridge leg and they are turned on
by the same control command (Fig. 1.6).
The possible thyristor failure can change it in an electrical short-circuit: in this case the interested
bridge leg don' t leak its conduction ability and the damaged rectifier will be replaced on the next
programmed machine overhaul.
Each thyristor on/off operation is monitored by optical fiber based circuits.
Fig. 1.6 Ramo del ponte

Bridge leg
Controllo 1
Control 1
Vca Vcc
Vac Vdc
Controllo 2
Control 2

Converter redundancy (not used)

The power section consists of two converters, identical ones, designed to supply the rated voltage
and current and to withstand the expected ceiling conditions (Fig. 1.7).
The two power converters never operate at the same time, i.e. in a given moment only one
converter supplies energy: the second one is in stand-by and can take the control automatically
when the working thyristor converter goes in the fault state.
Vca Vcc
Vac Vdc
Fig. 1.7
Cooling method:
Natural Air
For converter rated currents up to 200 A the cooling system with natural air is adopted.
The geometry of the inner power section spaces is such that it does not interfere with the convective
motions of the air masses.
Thermal energy is given up from the warmer zone, with hight temperature, to the air wich has lower
temperature. Because of the warm up, it moves upward giving up space to the colder air mass,
which can remove new heat.
Forced Air
For converter rated currents up to 3500 A and/or for the utilization in environments with irksome
climates, the cooling system with forced air must be adopted.
The thermic energy, generated from the converter, is yielded through dissipators to the air sucked by
the fans that are placed under the compartment containing the power bridge.
Antidust filters are set on the air intakes, generally put in the lower part of compartment access
doors.
To increase the degree of releability of the device, each converter cooling system can be made
redundant.
Two fans are present in this configuration: one is normally working and the second is in stand-by; it
automatically starts to operate in case of failure of the working one.
Fan motors are of heavy industrial type and don' t need maintenance.
Forced Water
Cooling of converter is with forced water in a closed circuit .
The encased heat-exchanger in the mechanical structure of the converters extracts heat warming
up the demineralized water of the hydraulic closed circuit. Water is forced through a pump to
circulate in a water-water exchanger, where it is cooled giving up the heat absorbed to the liquid
with the lower temperature (in the external hydraulic circuit).
As the hydraulic circuit passes through areas with different electrical potentials, the demineralized
water assures a reduction of the electrical conductivity so as to avoid electrical discharges on itself.
The cooling system, with the redundant structure (double pumps, two heat-exchanger circuits,
refrigirating liquid in the reserve tank, ..) is enclosed in a dedicate compartment of the cubicle.
The excitation system can be tripped either from the elevated water temperature, or from an
interruption of the refrigerating liquid flow, or from its lower level in the reserve tank.

Crow bar and discharge resistor (not used in the brush less system):
The device consists of two thyristors in antiparallel and connected in series to a discharge resistor
(Fig. 1.8).
The positive crow-bar CBP guarantees a quick de-energization of the synchronous machine field
and operates as a protection for continuous side direct overvoltages, whereas the negative one CBN
operates as a protection for continuous side inverted overvoltages permitting the recirculation of
currents with negative polarity, during line or machine failures (ex. step loss).
The two thyristors sizing ensures, through the perforation of the crow-bar, the bridge and the field
winding protection against overvoltages, even in case of firing circuit failure. Moreover the de-
energization of the machine is guaranteed, as from the conditions of maximum current excitation,
following a threephase short circuit of its terminal.
The crow-bar thyristor firing is carried out by these ways:
 intervention of the B.O.D. (Break Over Diode) circuit for dc side overvoltages, of positive and
negative polarity;
 lowering of the B.O.D. intervention threshold (main logic control) and control of the pulse train
(redundant control of the thyristor firing).
The pulse train for the crow-bar firing is generated by the digital control software.
+
CBP CBN
Vcc
Vdc
Rd
Fig. 1.8
The Rd discharge resistor has a value such that it causes, at its terminals, a voltage drop
corresponding to the negative “ceiling” (maximum forcing), when the maximum excitation current
flows through it.
The thermic dimensioning must consent the quick de-energization in case of three-phase short
circuit at the machine terminals starting from the condition of maximum excitation current.
Field breaker:
On request ore where it is necessary (compound systems) an electromechanic device is used to

deenergize the machine field.
The field breaker opens the excitation circuit by its main contacts, while its discharge contact closes
the rotor windings circuit through the discharge resistor.
Field flashing circuit:
It is necessary when the exciter is fed from the machine terminals.

The initial excitation current is drawn from an auxiliary line or a battery and it is injected into the field
circuit when the field flashing contactor closes.

1.5 CONTROL SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
In Figure 1.9 the main parts of the control section are summed up.
For “external electric system” (b) is meant everything that is not included in the exciter and in the
synchronous machine but that is electrically connected to them.
The digital control device (f) carries out the operations provided for by the software, on the basis of
information coming from the external system; it accepts like input logic signals and digitalized analog
quantities, giving output logic signals, converted from digital to analog values and firing pulses for
each power section thyristor.
The main control logic parts are the PLC and/or the relays, whose electrical and structural features
depend on the plant that they are destined for.
Controls and utilized and/or produced by the control logic consents must be electrically adapted to
ensure compatibility with the relay circuitry; the de-coupling is carried out through relays or
optocoupler devices.
The analog quantities coming from the electrical system external to the board (machine, relay, etc.)
cannot be dealt as a rule by the digital elaboration system directly, because they have too high
values and need to be de-coupled by the control.
For alternate quantities measure transformers with a low voltage secondary are used, whereas
continuous quantities are drawn by appropriate shunts through dedicated transducers.
1 - 10 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
Fig. 1.9 CAPTION

b External electric system
c Power section
d Control section
e Firing pulses amplifier
f Digital regulator and phase shifter
g Analog interface
h Command, control and signalling logic
i Local status, alarm and trip signals
j Local instruments
k Digital control feeder
l Logics feeder
m Operator interface
n Auxiliary feed
o Logic and analog signals
p Main feed
q Mains
d
k
l c
a
f e
~
a
b
c
i
h g
j
o o p q
b
n
SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B 1 - 11
1 - 12 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B 1 - 13
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION 2
In this Chapter
2.1 EXCITER PANEL SECTION 1

2.2 EXCITER POWER CIRCUITS 2
2.3 AUXILIARY AND CONTROLS CIRCUITS 3
2.4 REGULATION SYSTEM 13
2.1 EXCITER PANEL SECTION
The thyristors converter and the control is installed on compartment +22.
Compartment +22 Front – EXCITER CONTROL

Compartment +22 Rear – EXCITER POWER CIRCUIT
See figure below:
COMPARTMENT +22 Front and Rear
EXCITER CONTROL, EXCITER PT's, CT's TRANSDUCERS,

AUXILIARY CIRCUITS AND THYRISTORS POWER MODULE AND
TRANSDUCERS. POWER SUPPLY TRANSFORMER

2.2 EXCITER POWER CIRCUITS
The power circuit main components are:

Incoming step up transformer
Thyristor module with snubbers circuit and firing circuits
2.2.1 Step up transformer
The excitation transformer is installed on the rear of the +22 cubicle, it is used for adapting the level
of voltage to the nominal value of the converter.
The transformer is used also to isolate the converter from the main line and it is designed to give the
correnct power at the field of the MOTOR exitation in all the range of operation.
The power module is a thyristors type total controlled, it is composed of three block connected as
follows to have a AC/AC converter:
R U
Input Vca S V Output Vca

from to MOTOR
transformer brushless exciter
T W
In the compact one over of thyristors they are installed the snubber circuit, the pulses card interface
and a fan to cooling the module.
Ouput cable
Snubber circuit
Input cables

Pulses card interface.

It receives the firing command from the exciter regulator
Fiber Optic from AVR control
Compartment +22 front side contains all circuits and equipment completing the excitation system
regulator.
Following the composition of the hardware will be described.
A.V.R. Exciter Digital Control
The synchronous machine excitation control is carried out by the regulator and phase shifter
functions realized through software with advanced programming languages, that use the digital
technology with a microcontroller as hardware support.
Regulator and phase shifter are implemented by three electronic cards only:
the microcontroller unit CONDBS (CONDEE), the I/O expansion module DAUXEA, the firing pulse
generation card DPSEB.
SILCOSTAT D - 2MU1000253116B 2-3

XTRFOC
XC
LCD
X6 XC1
X7 XC8A
X9
XC3
CONDBS DPSEB
X8 XC8
CON2 CON3
DAUXEA
CONDBS microcontroller based card.

The card with the greatest number of parts is the CONDBS card. In order to keep its dimensions
reasonable, it was made in surface mounted technology.
Through three flat cables it is interconnected with the other cards; another flat cable connects the
card with the LCD type diagnostic terminal.
The microcontroller integrated circuit (Intel 80C196KC), the memory units (EPROM where is the
control software, and EEPROM that records the setting and featuring parameters of the specific
plant), some logic and analog interface circuits, the protection logic and the watchdog are all on the
CONDBS.
The watchdog controls the correct carrying out of the processing loop.
On the CONDBS card there is a serial port of the RS232 type that allows the optional connection
with a personal computer for diagnostic purpose and to personalize the system.
The CONDBS card is the up-to-date realise of the CONDEE microcontroller based card: they are
both functionally that mechanically equivalent and are interchangable.
DAUXEB I/O expansion card.

The DAUXEA card increases the already high resources of the CONDBS card analog and digital I/O.
The sample&hold, 12 bit AD, 12 bit DA converter, optoisolated I/O circuits and the excitating voltage
trasduction find place on this unit.
Special high-safety outputs and a watchdog circuit complete the hardware equipment.
It gets the inputs thorugh flat cable from the DPSEx card and the control signals through another flat
cable connected with the CPU CONDBS card.
The digital and analog I/O has its terminations on an exctractable connector with screw-tightening
terminal lugs.
The synchronous machine VRS and VST concatenate voltages and IR and IT currents analog
signals are sampled, held and then read by AD converter to obtain, after having beeen processed by
CPU, the VM (MOTOR voltage feedback), the IM (MOTOR current), the PM (active power
calculation) and the QM (reactive power calculation), according to Park transform based algorithm.
From the VRS voltage the period measure and then the synchronous machine frequency are drawn.
A special circuit coupled to a programmable timer, allows the accurate measurement of the
excitation voltage medium value, without introducing considerable delays on the reaction line.
On board of this card the crow-bar command pulse train is generated too (not used in the brushless
application).

DPSEB pulses generation card.

The DPSEB generates the supply voltages at + 5 V "switch mode" and  15 V, obtaining them from a
 24 Vdc input.
The DPSEB recive from the CPU card the pulses train command for the thyristors and between a
cable it is interfacing at the amplifier card XAI48B.
The following elements are integrant part of the digital control:
SPDI0 card.
Electronic card that carries out an expansion of digital I/O logic circuits.
XTRFOC card.
Pulses amplification card. It has six MOSFET amplification stages for the direct control of the pulses
transformers coupled to the f.o. thyristors gates; it is used in conjunction with the DPSEB card.
LCD terminal.
The LCD terminal is used to custumize the system and for diagnostic purposes. It is an integration
part of the control card hardware and it can be positioned, through a special cable, on the front of the
holder near the other signalings.

2.3.1 Regulator cards customizations
CONDBS Card layout
Jumpers:
Jumper Function Connection

JP1 Reserved Not connected
JP2 RAM selection (reserved) Not connected
JP3 RS232 enabled [1 - 2] or disabled [2 - 3] 1-2
JP4 EEPROM writing enabled [1 - 2] open disable 1-2
JP5 Remote RESET enabled Connected
JP6 Rx channel selection for RS232 [1 - 2] or RS485 [2 - 3] 1-2
JP7 Analog input selection from XM1-32 [1 - 2] or from DPSEB X9-5 [2 - 3] (AIN4) 2-3
JP8 Ingresso Input ±70  131V in XM1-26 (AIN3) Not connected
JP9 Ingresso Input ±37 69V in XM1-26 (AIN3) Not connected
JP13 ±10V [1 - 2] or ±0 ÷ 20mA [2 - 3] in XM1-33/34 (AIN6) 1–2
JP14 ±5mA [1 - 2] or ±10V [2 - 3] in XM1-35 (PWM) 2–3
JP15 Ingresso Input ±160  300V PIN 5-X9 (AIN4) Not connected
JP16 Ingresso Input ±300  570V PIN 5-X9 (AIN4) Not connected
JP17 Ingresso Input ±570  900V PIN 5-X9 (AIN4) Connected
JP18 ±5mA [1 - 2] or ±10V [2 - 3] in XM1-40 (PWM 3) 2–3
JP19 Pre-excitation (Flashing) enabled Application
JP20 VEXC [N.C.] or IEXC [Connected] internal regulator Application
JP21 If Connected, VM-ERR switches into MANUAL mode (single control channel) Application
JP22 Analog output XM1-35/36 unipolar 0 ÷ 10V [1 - 2] or bipolar 0 ÷ ±10V [2 - 3] 2-3
JP23 Pull up at 24V for XM1-10 opened [1 - 2] or closed [2 - 3] 1-2
JP24 ±5mA [1 - 2] or ±10V [2 - 3] in XM1-37/38 (PWM 1) 2-3
JP25 Analog input selection (AIN1) from XM1-28 [1 - 2] or from DPSEB X9-39 [2 - 3] Not connected
JP26 Encoder power supply +5 ÷ +22Vdc [1 - 2] or +22Vdc in XM1-22/23 [2 - 3] 2-3
JP27 ±5mA [1 - 2] or ±10V [2 - 3] in XM1-39/41 (PWM 2) 2-3
JP28 16 Mhz frequency selection [CONNECTED] RESERVED 1-2
JP50 Communication standard: profibus [1 - 2] or others [2 - 3] 2-3

Test points:
Test point Signal

TP1 XM1-26 analog input (the measured voltage is a function of the selected JP8  JP12)
TP2 VRT (SYNC2) phase “squared” voltage for the converter feedind (Vac)
TP3 X9 – 5 analog input (Vdc)
TP4 +22Vcc / Vdc
TP5 +5 Vcc / Vdc
TP6 +15 Vcc / Vdc
TP7 -15 Vcc / Vdc
TP8 GND - digital ground
TP9 +22Vdc voltage present: Vmeas  4 Vdc
TP10 Input encoder U1(XM1- 6 / 7) not used
TP11 Input encoder U3 (XM1-10 / 11) not used
TP12 Input encoder U2 (XM1 - 8 / 9)
TP13 GNDA - analog ground
TP14 High Speed Output (HSO 0)
TP15 GNDS - serial output ground (X5 and X2)
TP16 +5V - serial interface feeding (X5 and X2)
TP17 Analog input X9 - 4 (IEXC)
TP18 Analog input XM1 - 28
TP22 Analog input XM1 - 33 / 34
TP23 Rectified threephase input voltage mean value (Vac loss)
TP24 Analog output XM1 - 37
TP27 CPU clock frequency
Programmable components :
Chip Code
IC5 L3C25N05H00 (GAL)
IC6 07EC2C10662 (EPROM)
IC10 07EC2L41000 (GAL)
IC29 L3C29N05I00 (GAL)
Trimmers :
Trimmer Function
PR2 XM1 – 35 analog output [Iexc]: scale factor
7 segment display :
Chip Function
O Program start
T Initializing of hardware devices and software variables
Flashes at 1 Hz frequency indicating that the SW is active as planned. On or
 dot
Off without flashing means that the SW is tripped.
C Synchronous voltage missing.
P Printing in course.
E Protection active. See Error flags table cht 3

DAUXEB Card layout
Jumpers:

JP1 ±5mA [N.C.] or ±10V in XM4 - 40 (AOUT-0) Connected
JP2 ±5 mA [N.C.] o or ±10 V in XM4 - 41 (AOUT-1) Connected
Programmable components :
Chip Code
U29 078A2L32900 (GAL)
U30 078A2L33000 (GAL)
U40 078A2L34000 (GAL)
Trimmers :
Trimmer Function
POT1 Vexc or Iexc feedback signal zero adjusting
Resistors:
Resistor Typical value

R89 10 kΩ
R98 220 kΩ

DPSEB Card layout
Jumpers:

JP1 NOT USED N.C.
Trimmers for regulator voltages adjusting:
Trimmer Function
RP1 +15 V adjusting
RP2 -15 V adjusting
RP3 +5 V adjusting
Resistors:
Resistor Function Connection

RX1
Uexc feedback signal adjusting (in XM2 – 19: 10 V @ 1,5 * Vceiling) 82kΩ // 47 kΩ
X16 - X17
RX2
Iexc feedback signal adjusting from CTs (in XM3 – 1/4) 2.5 / I_inp  
X20 - X21
RX3
Reserved for possible resistors paralleled to Rx2
X22 - X23
RX4 Max instantaneous bridge overcurrent protection intervention
15kΩ
X24 - X25 threshold (IOC: Idc max = 10Vpk)
NOTE 
(I_inp) is the converter rated current IN divided by the adopted CTs transformation ratio.

Soldered jumpers:
Connection Function Standard

X1 - X2 Uexc feedback measured by DAUXEB VFC circuit Connected
X3 - X4 Not used Not connected
X13 - X14
Galvanically separated feedback signal Uexc measured
instead of Connected
by an external transducer and incoming in XM2 – 19
X15 - X16
X15 - X14 Not galvanically separated Uexc feedback signal
instead of measured by an internal resistive divider, incoming Not connected
X13 - X14 in X11 - X12
X18 - X19 Iexc feedback measured by an external transducer, incoming in Connected
XM2 – 21 (CTs must not be connected)
Test points:

X1 Uexc [standard] ±5 V @ ±1.5*Vceiling
X8 +15V +15 Vcc Vdc
X9 -15V -15 Vcc Vdc
X10 +5V +5 Vcc Vdc
X15 Uexc [special] ±10 V @ ±830 Vcc Vdc
X18 Iexc [standard] +2.5 V @ IN
X19 Iexc [standard] +2.5 V @ IN
X21 Gnd 0 Vcc Vdc
X23 Gnd 0 Vcc Vdc
X25 Soglia per Threshold for IOC + 10.12 V
X26 Impulsi accensione Firing pulses Thyr. 1 0 ÷ +15 V BURST
2 - 10 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
Local commands, lamps and instruments.

For the local management of the SFC and Exciter, on the door of the +22 compartment they are
some components.
RESET PUSHBUTTON
EMERGENCY PUSHBUTTON
There are a series of analogics instruments for the visualization of the principal greatness
INDICATOR OF THE EXCITER CURRENT
INDICATOR OF THE MOTOR POWER
INDICATOR OF THE MOTOR VOLTAGE AND CURRENT
and a
HMI TUCH OPERATOR PANNEL
connected directly to the CPU of the PLC and in it all the local command, states and alarms of the
SFC and excitation system can be read (See chapter 6 par. 6.7).
INSTRUMENTS
TEXT DISPLAY
LOCAL COMMAND
2.3.2 Interface cards and transducers
The function of the interface cards is that of connecting and adapting all signals coming from the
transducers located in the power compartments and from outside the panel.
All these cards are 24Vdc supplied and are divided as follows:
Cards for analog signals
The cards can present customizable components varying according to the system. For this reason
the values of these calibrations are reported in the customization sheets of the project functional
diagrams.
 NOTE Before replacing a card, check that all components that can be
Even if the transducers are not located inside the auxiliary compartment, due to their connection with
the interface cards, they will be described in this section.
SILCOSTAT D - 2MU1000253116B 2 - 11
Cards for analog signals

This group includes those cards managing the analog signals for the control;
The following table shows a brief description of this cards.
CODE CARD NAME DESCRIPTION

Card manufactured by ASI, connected by
wiring to the DPSEB control card, it receives
Label AX07 XELT11
the exciter converter CT's Lem feedbacks, this
signal is used for the regulation and protection.
Card manufactured by ASI, pulses
amplification card. It has six F.O. transmitter
Label AX08 XTRFOC for the direct control of the pulses transformers
coupled to the thyristors gates; it is used in
conjunction with the DPSEB card.
Card manufactured by ASI, pulses
amplification card. It has six MOSFET for the
direct control of the pulses transformers
Label AA10/AA11 XTRIM2
coupled to the thyristors gates; it is used in
conjunction with the XTRFOC card.(see par-
2.2.2 )
Card manufactured by ASI, connected by
wiring to the DPSEB control card, it receives
CRMSA the exciter converter PT's feedbacks, this
Label FF33
SYNC LOSS signal is used for the regulation, olso
monitoring the incoming line presence and
fase direction CW or CCW.
Transducers
They are divided into current transducers and voltage transducers, it are use for exciter thyristors
converter measurement and for interface the CT's and PT's of MOTOR.
The following table shows a brief description of the transducers assembled in the drive.
CODE COMPONENT NAME DESCRIPTION

Label CT10 Current transducer. It detects the AC current
Label CT11 CT Lem 500A/0,1A circulating in the exciter converter R and S
Compartment +22 power cable phases.
Label PT10 Voltage transducer. It detects the incoming
Label PT11 Magnetic PT 500V/100V line voltage in the exciter converter
Compartment +22 (R-T and T-S phases).
Voltage transducer. Interface the MOTOR
Label PT12
PT's. It detects the MOTOR voltage (R-S and
Label PT13 Magnetic PT 110V/5V
S-T phases).
Compartment +22
Label CT12 Current transducer. Interface the MOTOR
Label CT13 Magnetic CT 1A/0,1A CT's. It detects the MOTOR current.
Compartment +22
2 - 12 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
2.4 REGULATION SYSTEM
Schemes
The excitation control is carried out by the digital control functions based on the current state of the
regulated system, represented by its more significative analog quantities measures.
CB2
AVR
The phase shifter carries out the interface between the excitation digital control and the power
converter functions: it must fire the thyristors, automatically synchronizing with the main and ordering
starting angles for rectifiers between 5° and 150°, according to the various cases.
The right firing order check is carried out keeping the excitation (voltage or current) under control.
The phase shifter is designed to form an as much as possible linear “block” with the complex pulses
amplifier-converter: the ratio between the excitation feedback ("ecc") and the control quantity
("Vcon") produced by the regulator must have the shape indicated below; furthermore, the maximum
positive field forcing (ceiling) (angle of thyristors firing equal to 5°) must correspond to the linear
maximum "Vcon" value, whereas the minimum "Vcon" value must cause the maximum negative
forcing (angle of thyristors firing equal to 150°).
CAPTION:
b Machine regulator
c Excitation regulator and phase shifter
d Firing pulses amplifier
e Power converter
SILCOSTAT D - 2MU1000253116B 2 - 13
The regulator carries out the excitation control using the machine voltage as a feedback signal.
The function configuration parameters are such as that the phase shifter excitation loop is faster
than the regulator machine voltage loop: from the point of view of the last one, the phase shifter acts
like an unitary block.
Thyristors firing
Every thyristor is in the conduction status when it is subject to a direct polarization voltage between
anode and cathode (VAK > 0) and when the current flowing through it, drived from a positive pulse
applied to the gate electrode, reaches at least the “lachting” value; the conduction automatically
stops when the VAK voltage changes sign.
The pulses that command the thyristors conduction are generated from the digital control. They are
amplified from a MOSFET stage and later filtered in order to be used to drive the power electronics.
At any time the firing signal of the two thyristors involved in the conduction must have a total duration
of 6.6msec (with a threephase main with frequency equal to 50Hz, 20msec is the corresponding
period and - 20msec : 3 = 6,6msec - is the conduction time of the couple of SCR involved) for a
single stage; it consists of a burst of pulses (20sec) repeated every 40 sec.
Using the burst of pulses the value of the “latching” current is surely discontinuous, but the
probability of the thyristor switch on is increased in case of inductive loads and the mechanical
overall dimentions of the pulses transformers are reduced; the transformers have an 1:1
transformation ratio and they realize the galvanic de-coupling between the power electronic circuits
and the control circuits.
CAPTION:
a Amplifier
b Moulder
c Transformer
d Firing pulse at digital regulator output
e Firing pulse at thyristor gate
The phase shifter can drive the conduction of each one of the six branches of the bridge.
Since a period of the synchronism voltage corresponds to 360° electric degrees, starting from a
certain moment every 360° : 6 = 60° a couple of branches will be in conduction and it will be different
depending on phase sequence.
2 - 14 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
Software organization
The digital control system is of monoprocessor type: there is only one elaboration unit that carries
out the different functions through “interrupt” with different priorities, asynchronously as to the
system clock.
Every program is featured by a variables and hardware initialization section, carried out only one
time at the system power up, and by an infinite loop. In general, the loop includes a section
dedicated to the data acquisition (input), a second one dedicated to the data processing and a third
one dedicated to the output data production (output). The inputs can be quantities from board and
from plant (relay logic and switches statuses, electric quantities analog values), controls and
numerical values specified by the operator.
The time employed by the processing unit to finish an instruction loop is an important factor to
evaluate the regulation system performances.
Regulator
The regulator, through a P.I.D. function, controls the stator voltage level of the synchronous
machine, comparing it with an internal reference value.
The following functions are implemented:
 The reactive current compensation (COMPOUND) is used to compensate the external reactance
of the group transformer, or to share the reactive load among different paralleled MOTORs;
 FLUX LIMIT (V/Hz), to avoid that the group transformer and/or the synchronous machine stator
might be affected by the excessive values of the magnetic flux;
 STABILIZING SIGNALS (PSS), that introduce a feedback of active power and frequency for
electromechanical oscillation smoothing;
 UNDEREXCITATION LIMIT (UEL), that assures to the MOTOR the minimum excitation that is
necessary to keep synchronization, defined by the capability curve;
 OVEREXCITATION LIMIT (OEL), that avoids an excessive heating of the field windings,
keeping the excitation current under control;
 Field current OVERLOAD, to allow temporary machine forcing without excessive heating of the
field windings;
 REACTIVE POWER CONTROL at the machine terminals;
 POWER FACTOR CONTROL at the machine terminals;
 Operation with STATIC FREQUENCY CONVERTER (SFC);
 ROTOR TEMPERATURE calculation.
 The REFERENCE ADJUSTER function acts on the internal voltage reference, adjusting it
between its max. and min. limit-values of adequate quantities in the following cases:
 Further to an UP/DOWN command by the operator;
 Automatically, until the reactive power is brought up to zero (ZERO REACTIVE POWER
control);
 Automatically, until the machine voltage match the line voltage level (LINE MATCHING control).
The regulator can operate in the AUTOMATIC mode, i.e. at closed-loop (normal regulation), or in the
MANUAL mode, at open-loop (for gradual long-line voltage build-up, for installation, or for excitation
system maintenance).
Switching the operating mode from AUTOMATIC to MANUAL and/or vice versa can take place at
any moment and without particular care by the operator (TRACKING function).
SILCOSTAT D - 2MU1000253116B 2 - 15
Phase shifter
The phase shifter takes care of thyristor gating, by synchronizing itself automatically with mains, and
controlling the firing angles for the rectifiers between 5° and 150°, depending on the operating
mode.
During the field flashing operation (when the main feed is from the machine terminals), or when the
machine voltage decrease under the threshold value of 70%, the CONTINUOUS FIRING function
turns on all the thyristors (for a max 5sec time), so the converter operates as a diode bridge (i.e. an
uncontrolled rectifier) thus supplying the highest possible dc output.
PLC logic
The command, control and signalling logics of the exciter are carried out by a programmable locic
device or PLC.
2 - 16 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
SILCOSTAT D - 2MU1000253116B 2 - 17
2 - 18 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
PARAMETERS and OPERATION 3
In this Chapter
3.1 GENERAL 1
3.2 PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION 18
3.3 LOGIC FUNCTION 43
3.1 GENERAL
The user’s interface (SSDTERM) is a programme, operating in WINDOWS environment, that allows
the user to set / display the customization parameters of the excitation system.

3 Parameters & operation
The programme can be located on the personal computer in a directory other than the work one,
but all the files managed by the programme will be taken and put in the work directory.
Conditions to start the programme are to be in WINDOWS environment
The connection of serial link is show in the figure bellows:
Serial Link
The serial link cable consists of what follows:
BLACK
05 05 05
06 BLUE 06 06
04 BLACK 04 04
07 GREEN 07 07
03 BLACK 03 03
08 RED 08 08
02 BLACK 02 02
09 WHITE 09 09
01 01 01
MALE CONNECTOR on CONDBS card side FEMALE CONNECTOR

on Personal Computer side

3.1.1 USER’S INTERFACE SSDTERM

General
SSDTERM is a software tool that permits to carry out a fast and effective analysis of the
speed regulator operation state. It is not located permanently in the system since it is
designed for the heaviest diagnostic analyses such as the system installation. The system is
provided with a segment-type LED (CONDBS) for the following elementary signals:
. The system is running
C. The system is ready to start.
E. The system is in error.
The hardware requirements needed by this tool are as follows:

IBM-compatible personal computer;
VGA graphic display (min. colour1024x760 pixel is suggested);
RS232 38400-baud serial line.
Windows 2000 NT / XP
The installed functions are:
displaying of logic and numeric variable values;
graphic displaying in real time of two numeric variables (Oscilloscope);
Trace displaying and detail analysis of 8 variables memorized in Black box;
editing of specific installation parameters and relevant saving in EEPROM;
uploading and downloading of calibration parameters on ASCII files;
uploading or downloading of Black box data on ASCII files;
uploading and downloading of all the regulator data (Acpu02) on ASCII files;
on-line help.
If compared with LCD terminal, advantages are:
displaying of more data at the same time (e.g.: 2 windows with 15 variables and 16 flags);
graphic representations without making use of other tools;
file management permitting the data processing and printing even without system;
possible analysis of curves of interest (a posterior).

This paragraph deals with the description of the AVR-SSDTERM programme in HMI-WINDOWS
version; the WINDOWS version keeps its setting and the same functions, yet adopting the
graphical look and the command immediacy that are typical of the execution environment.
Calling A.V.R. SSDTERM:
In the following images we see how you link AVR-SSDTERM program.
Touch on the icon
Serial port
Wait for the window opening

4) Select COM 3 port for link with AVR-SSDTERM
5) Touch the connect button and wait green light and select your language
PASSWORD : A B C D only to visualize the value

AA BB CC to change the value

3.1.2.1 Menu
After pressing pushbutton "continue" the following image will be shown on the display:
The “home” page is the page of Configuration.

The commands available in the Configuration menu are:
It loads the parameters file with .SSD extension chosen among the ones
Open available in the current directory.
It saves all the parameters data and configuration in a file with .SSD
Save extension and name chosen by the user.
It displays the FLASH code existing in the target.
If “configuration” is selected by  , the following page is shown:
1 2 3
4 5
The CONFIGURATION page permits to get access to parameters, variable and control states
and to preset the black-box and oscilloscope functions.
The page is essentially subdivided into 5 windows.
Windows no. 2, 3 can be used to get access and, if necessary, to modify the control parameters
and to display their variables.
Windows no. 4, 5 can be used to get access and, if necessary, to modify the control flags.
Window no. 1 is utilized for black-box, oscilloscope and variables visualization function pre-
setting.

Navigation in w indow s no. 2, 3, 4, 5:

In order to be able to move within the interface system, use of what follows can be made in every
window:
either the drop-down menu located high or buttons called PgUp and PgDn located down on
on the left the right
They permit to scroll the
A B various control pages within
which all its dimensions are
contained
The groups of variables that can be selected are:

EXCITER Exciter general values.
Cal_gen Calibrator generator.
Q_reg Reactive power regulator.
VM_regl Machine voltage regulator.
Converter Excitation current regulator.
Comp_pss Compound and PSS regulator system (only for Generator).
Rot_lim Overexcitation Current rotor limit set point.
Q_lim Reactive power regulator
Q_capab Underexcitation Kapabiliti curves set point.
Rot_val Rotor values measured
Stat_val Sator values measured.
PK_read A/D sampled stator values.
Preset Preset paramiters.
Diag_gen Diagnostic waves generator system.
Dimensions written in black can be only read.

On the contrary, the ones written brown can be modified.
In order to carry out a modification, put the mouse on the relevant cell containing the value and
click.  with the left button of the mouse.
In this way different windows are shown if a parameter or a flag is being modified.
1
2
3
8 7
4

PARAMETER: The window includes:

Parameter denomination, [1]
Variation range out of which setting is not allowed [2]
Presently set value [3]
Zone intended for the new chosen value typing in [4]
Button(s) to choose the regulator to which the modification has to be sent [5]
The button to be utilized to exit the function without changing the value [6]
A small keyboard to type in the new value [7]
two + - buttons to modify the parameter value of the lowest possible value [8]
FLAG: the window includes:

Parameter denomination [a]
Presently set value [b]
The new settable value [c]
Button(s) to choose the regulator to which the modification has to be sent [d]
The button to be utilized to exit the function without changing the value [e]
Navigation in w indow no. 1:

button to get access are located high on the left:
To eliminate the selected variables
To set the visualization function [D]
To set the oscilloscope function parameters [C]
To set the oscilloscope function variables [B]
To set the black box dimensions [A]

[A] Black Box dimension setting

This window displays the parameters \ variables selected for black box
(no more than 8 per regulator).
In order to eliminate some parameters, select them pressing on the relevant denomination with the
left button of the mouse (they are pointed out in blue), then press the button with scissors.
1 In order to input new parameters, select them in the same way in windows no. 2, 3
and press “conf” button in the top part of the relevant window.
After choosing the new set of dimensions, press “conf” button in the bottom left part
2 of window no. 1 to send them to the regulator 1.
If the operation is completed successfully, the relevant window is shown:
[B] Oscilloscope variable setting

This window displays the variables that can be selected for the oscilloscope
[C] Oscilloscope function parameter setting

This window displays the variables that can be selected for the oscilloscope
3 - 10 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
3.1.2.3 Bbox
The menu permits to carry out the examination, in graphic and numeric format at every 10 msec
scanning moment, of the Black box content recovered by the command of the previous menu. (Fig.
5.2.3.3a).
8 tracks are available: they can be represented in different colours in a graphic window with a time
base of 4.00 sec.
A cursor permits to point the track segment, the instant value of which is shown with the same
colour utilized to display the graphic track.
In vertical, the track is represented with the maximum expansion and the maximum and minimum
values of the signal coincide with the graphic window limits.
Min and Max. values are displayed for every track.
Fig. 5.2.3.2a Example of Black box
The available commands are shown at the display base.
START & STOP

It runs when:
 a control start occurs, it goes to Bbox flag of CONTROL group and it
sets to RUN
 from black box page, pressing the start button in the bottom left part
(the one concerning the involved command)
it stops when:
 a control stop occurs; it goes to Bbox flag of CONTROL group and it
sets to STP
 from black box page, pressing the Stop button located in the bottom left part
Moreover the function state is displayed for every regulator (down on the left)
ACQUIRE AND SAVE RECORDINGS

Recordings are acquired by the control when:
 if the function is standstill, pressing the “open” button down on the left
 or recordings that have already been saved with .bbx extension can be uploaded using
the “open” button under the file menu
A recording can be saved:
 with an extension compatible with the function ( .bbx ) using the
“save” button under the file menu or with .csv extension by means of “export” button
located on the right
SILCOSTAT D - 2MU1000253116B 3 - 11
BARS
Bar value
Bar value
ZOOM
Fig. 5.2.3.3b Example of Black box
TRACK SELECTION AND SCALING

Making use of the central table below (a row for every dimension) a on/off plot command
is associated to every dimension; this command is utilized to enable or not to enable its
displaying (at east one dimension must be always active);
then two cells are provided to adapt the signal with an offset and a gain.
The buttons located down on the right are utilized to set axis “y”:
 If autoscale is selected the abscissa sets the lowest and the highest
values among all the dimensions.
 On the contrary, if the automatic flag is deselected or the manual
setting button is pressed the limits of axis y are set by two windows on the side.
SPACE BARS
In order to help the analysis of recording two bars are available (a blue and a black one);
they can be moved by dragging or pressing the black and blue >> ,<< buttons located in the
middle.
The value that each dimension gets in correspondence with the bars and the time distance
between the two bars can be seen down on the right.
ZOOM
It is utilized by means of the horizontal bar on the left, by which the time width is selected by
division.
3 - 12 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
3.1.2.4 Scope
If “scope” is selected by  the following page is shown (fig.5.2.3.4a, b, c):
Fig. 5.2.3.3a Example of oscilloscope page [ scopE ]
By this function all the variables existing in the regulator can be displayed in graphic format.
The available commands are shown at the display base:
AUTOSCALE NOW
It carries out the automatic setting of the variable scale values ranging between the minimum
and maximum of displaying, the abscissa is set between the lowest and the highest values
among all the dimensions.
MANUAL SET
If the automatic flag is deselected or manual set button is pressed, the ends of axis Y are set
with the two Minimum and Maximum windows.
VAR NAME
It displays all the chosen variables making use of the central table below (a row for every
dimension) a plot (on/off) command is associated to every dimension; it is utilized to enable
or de-enable its displaying (at least one of them must be always active). There are two cells
to adapt the signal with an offset and a gain)
INVERTED
The sign of the displayed dimension can be changed clicking on this button.
HISTORY
It creates a buffer in which the data present in scope are saved. The buffer dimensions
depend on the number of variables and sampling time.
SILCOSTAT D - 2MU1000253116B 3 - 13
PARAMETERS
It permits to change the parameters utilized in scales and diagnostic
Fig. 5.2.3.3b Example of oscilloscope page [ scope ]
SAVE
It permits to create a file in which the data present in the Historical Buffer can be saved.
This file can be seen again selecting the History function
Fig. 5.2.3.3c Example of oscilloscope page [ scope ]
3 - 14 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
3.1.2.5 FlaGs
Selecting “Flag” by  the following page is displayed.
The menu (Figure 5.2.3.5) permits to display all the inner and input/output logic inner variables
subdivided into 16-bit columns while, at the display base, the selected Flag, already seen in
Configuration menu, is still available.
If the password is enabled, the flags can be modified positioning the cursor on involved variable
that, as only two possible modes are available, can be changed pressing enter.
The only column the values of which can be modified normally is CONTROL; the output flags can
be modified too but only in diagnostic mode (Diag = ON) for the output relay test.
At the display base a help line indicates the available commands:
The code
indicates the
speed regulator
version
Fig. 5.2.3.4 Example of Menu flaGs
SILCOSTAT D - 2MU1000253116B 3 - 15
3.1.2.6 History
The menu permits to open one of the saved graphic files.
Selecting “History” by  and the following page is shown (fig.5.2.3.5a):
Fig. 5.2.3.5a Example of History page
Choose the file to be displayed.

When the file is open, the following page is shown (fig.5.2.3.5b):
Fig. 5.2.3.5b Example of History page
3 - 16 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
The following commands are available at the display base:
VALUES
It permits to display the numeric value of the chosen dimensions.
In order to help the analysis of recording two bars (a blue and a black one) are available;
they are moved by dragging or pressing black and blue >> ,<< buttons that are located in
the middle.
The value taken by each dimension in correspondence with the bars and the time distance
between the two bars can be seen up on the left.
BARS
Fig. 5.2.3.5c Example of History page
EXPORT
It permits to export the file for printing purpose or sending by e-mail.
SILCOSTAT D - 2MU1000253116B 3 - 17
3.2 PARAMETERS DESCRIPTION
The groups of variables that can be selected are:
EXCITER Exciter general values.

CAL_GEN Calibrator Motor.
Q_REGL Reactive power regulator.
VM_REGL Machine voltage regulator.
CONVERTER Excitation regulator
COMP& PSS Comound / PSS only Motor
ROT_LIM Rotor limit.
Q_LIM Underexcitation limit.
Q_CAPAB Capability curves value table
ROT_VAL Rotor values measures
STAT_VAL Stator values measures
PK_READ A/D sampled stator values
PRESET Preset parameters
DIAG_GEN Diagnostic Motor
3.2.1 LIST OF PARAMETERS:
EXCITER 01   R = Only reading -- W = Writing

Parameter name  Default min/max limit Description
Cal_out % R --------- ----------- Internal reference for regulator

VM % R --------- ----------- Motor voltage value
PM % R --------- ----------- Motor active power
QM % R --------- ----------- Motor reactive power
VEXC % R --------- ----------- Excitation voltage
IEXC % R --------- ----------- Excitation current
Status R --------- ----------- Regulator status (see flags)
Errors R --------- ----------- Errors recognized from the regulator (see flags)
Freq. Hz R --------- ----------- Motor voltage frequency
VL % R --------- ----------- Network line voltage
COSPHI R --------- ----------- Motor power factor
T_rot °C R --------- ----------- calculated rotor temperature (only brush sys)
3 - 18 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
CAL_GEN 02   R = Only reading -- W = Writing

c_out % R --------- ----------- Actual regulator reference

c_slp /sec R --------- ----------- Ramp slope
c_set % R --------- ----------- Exciter reference before ramp
str_slp /sec W 5.00 Ramp slope in automatic start up mode (SFC)
man_slp /sec W 3.0 Ramp slope in manual mode
aut_slp /sec W 2.00 Ramp slope in automatic mode.
q_slp /sec W 1.00 Ramp slope when Q_reg is enable
cos_slp /sec W 0.05 Ramp slope when CosP_reg is enable
c_man % W 300 100%=Ie0 Maximum current reference in manual mode
c_sfc % W 100 VMotor rated Maximum voltage during start up with SFC
Q_REG 03   R = Only reading -- W = Writing

q_fbk % R --------- ----------- Reactive power feedback

q_set % R --------- ----------- Reactive power reference value
q_out % R --------- ----------- Reactive power regulator output
q_kp ----- W 0.2 Proportional gain
q_ki ----- W 0.10 Integral gain
senval ----- R --------- ----------- Measured sine value
cosval ----- R --------- ----------- Measured cosine value
SILCOSTAT D - 2MU1000253116B 3 - 19
VM_REGL 04   R = Only reading -- W = Writing

vm_fbk % R --------- ----------- Motor voltage feedback

vm_set % R --------- ----------- Motor voltage reference
vm_out % R --------- ----------- Motor voltage reguletor output
vm_lim % R --------- ----------- Motor flux limit value (V/Hz)
vm_kd ----- W 20.70 ----------- Regulator dynamic gain
vm_ks ----- W 1000 ----------- Regulator static gain
vm_kt sec W 70.40 ----------- Regulator time constant
CONVERTER 05   R = Only reading -- W = Writing

e_fbk % R --------- ----------- Excitation voltage feedback

e_set % R --------- ----------- Excitation voltage reference value
e_kp ----- W 2.00 Proportional gain
e_ki °/sec W 2.0 Integral gain
alpha α° R --------- ----------- Thyristors firing angle
a_time ms R --------- ----------- Firing angle time
a_offs ms W 0.000 HW phase errors compensation
a_err ms R --------- ----------- Angle error in equidistant firing mode
period ms R --------- ----------- Incoming converter power supply period (Hz)
ie_fbk % R --------- ----------- Excitation current feedback
ie_set % R --------- ----------- Excitation current refernce
ie_out % R --------- ----------- Excitation current output after regulator
3 - 20 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
COMPOUND 06   R = Only reading -- W = Writing

comp_v % R --------- ----------- Compound contribution to VM reference value

comp_k % W 5.0 Motor N.U. QM compound coefficient 1 enable with Dig.input
comp_t sec W 2.00 Motor N.U. QM compound time constant
PSS 07   R = Only reading -- W = Writing

pss_v % R --------- PSS contributionton VM reference value

pss_kp ----- W 1000 Motor N.U. PM feedback gain
pss_kf ----- W 1000 Motor N.U. Frequency feedback gain
pss_t sec W 0.5 Motor N.U. Wash-out block
ROT_LIM 08   R = Only reading -- W = Writing

rl_out % R --------- ----------- Limit correcting contribution to VM reference

rl_set % R --------- ----------- Limit reference value
rl_fbk % R --------- ----------- Limit feedback signal
ie_lim % R --------- ----------- Rotor current limit
rl_ki ----- W 0.1 0 – 6500,0 Integral gain
t_irr sec W 10,0 0 – 6500,0 Rotor current overload unrepeatibility time
area sec W 10,0 0 – 6500,0 Overload thermal area
kimax ----- W 1 0 – 6500,0 Overload coefficient
ilim1 % W 156,8 0 – 6500,0 Current limit with 1st Motor cooling level
ilim2 % W 156,8 0 – 6500,0 Current limit with 2nd Motor cooling level
ilim3 % W 156,8 0 – 6500,0 Current limit with 3rd Motor cooling level
ilim4 % W 156,8 0 – 6500,0 Current limit with 4th Motor cooling level
SILCOSTAT D - 2MU1000253116B 3 - 21
Q_LIM 09   R = Only reading -- W = Writing

ql_out % R --------- ----------- Limit correcting contribution to VM reference

ql_set % R --------- ----------- Limit reference value
ql_fbk % R --------- ----------- Limit feedback signal
ql_ki ----- W 0.1 0 – 6500,0 Integral gain
CosP to define the 3rd point of the capability
cos_nom ----- W 0.95* 0 – 6500,0
curve
* Suggestion for motor cos_nom=1
Q_CAPAB 10   R = Only reading -- W = Writing

q_p0h % W 30.00 0,1 – 3200,0 QM @ PM = 0% and VM = 105%

q_p00 % W 28.00 0 – 6500,0 QM @ PM = 0% and VM = 100%
q_p01 % W 26.00 0 – 6500,0 QM @ PM = 0% and VM = 95%
q_1p05 % W 20.00 0 – 6500,0 1st Motor cooling level: QM @ PM = 50%
q_1p10 % W 20.00 0 – 6500,0 1st Motor cooling level: QM @ PM = cos_mon
q_2p05 % W 20.00 0 – 6500,0 2nd Motor cooling level: QM @ PM = 50%
q_2p10 % W 20.00 0 – 6500,0 2nd Motor cooling level: QM @ PM = cos_mon
q_3p05 % W 20.00 0 – 6500,0 3rd Motor cooling level: QM @ PM = 50%
q_3p10 % W 20.00 0 – 6500,0 3rd Motor cooling level: QM @ PM = cos_mon
q_4p05 % W 20.00 0 – 6500,0 4th Motor cooling level: QM @ PM = 50%
q_4p10 % W 20.00 0 – 6500,0 4th Motor cooling level: QM @ PM = cos_mon
q_1pos % W 28.00 0 – 6500,0 1st cooling level: max positive reference in QREG
2nd cooling level: max positive reference in
q_2pos % W 28.00 0 – 6500,0
QREG
q_3pos % W 28.00 0 – 6500,0 3rd cooling level: max positive reference in QREG
q_4pos % W 28.00 0 – 6500,0 4th cooling level: max positive reference in QREG
3 - 22 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
ROT_VAL 11   R = Only reading -- W = Writing

ie_val % R --------- ----------- Excitation current

v_sinc ----- R --------- ----------- Syncronizing voltage
ie_scl ----- W 931 0 – 6500,0 ie_val scale factor
STAT_VAL 12   R = Only reading -- W = Writing

vm_val % R --------- ----------- Motor voltage

im_val % R --------- ----------- Motor current
pm_val % R --------- ----------- Motor active power
qm_val % R --------- ----------- Motor reactive power
vl_val % R --------- ----------- Network line voltage
sfc_val % R --------- ----------- Motor voltage feedback from SFC
vm_scl ----- W 5400 vm_val scale factor
im_scl ----- W 3000 im_val scale factor
pm_scl ----- W 2394 pm_val scale factor
qm_scl ----- W 2430 qm_val scale factor
vl_scl ----- W 4300 vl_val scale factor
sfc_scl ----- W 8871 sfc_val scale factor
SILCOSTAT D - 2MU1000253116B 3 - 23
PK_READ 13   R = Only reading -- W = Writing

u_abs2 ----- R --------- ----------- Square module of VM vector

i_abs2 ----- R --------- ----------- Square module of IM vector
p_calc ----- R --------- ----------- Calculated active power
q_calc ----- R --------- ----------- Calculated reactive power
u_rs ----- R --------- ----------- Instantaneous VRS Motor voltage value
u_st ----- R --------- ----------- Instantaneous VST Motor voltage value
i_r ----- R --------- ----------- Instantaneous IR Motor current value
i_t ----- R --------- ----------- Instantaneous IT Motor current value
pk_per ms R --------- ----------- Sampling period
pk_ofs ms W 1.666 0 – 6500,0 Sampling instant offset
pk_err ----- R --------- ----------- u_abs2 anomaly (ok if < 100)
PRESET 14   R = Only reading -- W = Writing

vm_max % W 110.0 Motor voltage maximum controllable value

vm_min % W 90.0 Motor voltage manimum controllable value
ie_min % W 30.0 Minimum excitation current
cosprs % W 0.95* Preset value of cosP regulator
vm_thr % W 2.00 Parallel enabling threshold
q_thr % W 2.00 Reactive power zero signalling threshold
p_min % W 20.00 Minimum active power to enable PSS function
e_sfc % W 122.0 Current limit with SFC normal start
Minimun frequency to enabled V/Hz control
Fq_min hz W 0.00 If Fq_min=0 V/Hz disabled. For strt-up with
output transformer Fq_min=0
conf_i hex W 0123 Virtual inputs configuration word
conf_o hex W 2534 Virtual outputs configuration word
* Suggestion for motor cosprs =1
3 - 24 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
DIAG_GEN 15   R = Only reading -- W = Writing

dg_ref ----- W 0.0 0.0 / 6500.0 Base reference

dg_amp ----- W 0.0 0.0 / 600.0 Step summed to dg_ref amplitude
dg_per sec W 0.0 0.0 / 100.0 Diagnostic signal half-period
dg_slp ----- W 0.1 0.1 / 2.0 Step signal slope
dg_out ----- R --------- ----------- Generated diagnostic signal value
userin ----- R --------- ----------- Diagnostic signal from external motor
r_delta ----- R --------- ----------- Step of the reference (dg_out - dg_ref)
v_delta ----- R --------- ----------- Step of the feedback (xx_fbk - dg_ref)
excout ----- R --------- ----------- Output of internal current regulator
Pm_cos % W 5.00 0.10 / 10.00 Threshold to enable cosfi regulator
eng stall s W 3.00 0.0 / 650.00 Maximum time before DOL stall
Pole slip s W 3.00 0.0 / 650.00 Maximum time before pole slipping
Im_thr % W 20.00 -650.0/+650.0 Threshold of motor DOL current for exc ON
Qm_thr % W 20.00 -650.0/+650.0 Threshold to discriminate stall or pole slipping
ie_doll ----- W 20.0 0.0 / 650.00 Excitation current limit after DOL start
The v_delta signal is the xx_fbk feedback value of the active setting (i.e. in AUT mode: vm_fbk, in MAN
mode: e_fbk) subtracted from the fixed dg_ref part for which the result is the response to the r_delta step.
It may be useful to graphically display these signals during the regulation loops calibration.
SILCOSTAT D - 2MU1000253116B 3 - 25
3.2.2 LIST OF FLAGS:
  R = Only reading -- W = Writing – K_52g = 52M breaker (for motor) – K_52e = 52E breaker
CONTROL 01 System control flag
Flag name  States Description
Clear R/W Stp – Go ERRORS word cleaning

deFlt R/W Stp – Go Load the default values from EPROM to RAM
Msave R/W Stp – Go Save the parameter values from RAM to EPROM
Pr_vr R/W Stp – Go Parameter values printing command
Pr_bx R/W Stp – Go Black box values printing command
-------- R/W -------------- Available
Bbox R/W Stp – Run Black box RUN/STOP command.
Diag R/W OFF – ON Diagnostic Motor ON/OFF command
d_alf R OFF – ON Alpha diagnostic control.
d_icb R OFF – ON i_cb diagnostic control
d_pm R OFF – ON PM diagnostic control
d_ext R OFF – ON Diagnostic signal from external Motor enabling
d_dou R OFF – ON Digital output diagnostic control.
e_reg R Cur – Vlt Excitation current or voltage regulation.
phase R Rev – Dir Reverse or direct phase sequence
reset R/W Stp – Go RESET command to CPU
3 - 26 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
ERRORS 02 Regulator state
vm_er R No – Yes Motor voltage feedback error

e_fbk R No – Yes Excitation feedback error
e_min R No – Yes Excitation lacks in parallel operation
Sinc R No – Yes Synchronizing voltages lack
k_52e R No – Yes Breakers inconsistency: k52e = OFF and goexc = ON
k_52g R No – Yes Inconsistency between k52e + goexc = OFF and k52g = ON
Ram R No – Yes RAM memory error
Eep R No – Yes EEPROM memory error
+- 15V R No – Yes Poewr supply anomalous
kp R No – Yes External input protection lack
Ioc R No – Yes Instantaneou overcurrent
Wdog R No – Yes Watch dog error CPU fault
HSO R No – Yes HSO anomalous
A/D R No – Yes A/D converter time out
auxIO R No – Yes Digital I/O anomalous
---------------- R No – Yes Reserved
STATUS 03 Regulator state
trig R OFF – ON Thyristors firing enabling

e_en R OFF – ON Excitation regulator enabled
v_en R OFF – ON Machine regulator enabled
q_en R OFF – ON Reactive power regulation enabled
comp R OFF – ON Compound enabled
pss R OFF – ON PSS enabled
rl_en R OFF – ON Rotor limit enabled
ql_en R OFF – ON Underexcitation limit enabled
goexc R OFF – ON Excitation ON command
aut R OFF – ON Automatic operation selection
k52g R OFF – ON Parallel breaker status
k52e R OFF – ON Excitation breaker status input
stdby R OFF – ON Standby command
sfc R OFF – ON SFC enable
dl_en R OFF – ON DOL enable
sys_e R OFF – ON Regulator not available because of an error (see ERRORS)
SILCOSTAT D - 2MU1000253116B 3 - 27
INPUTS 04 Digital inputs
Goexc R OFF – ON Excitation command input

Aut R OFF – ON Automatic operation input
k52g R OFF – ON Parallel breaker status input
k52e R OFF – ON Excitation breaker status input
Stdby R OFF – ON Standby command input
qcap1 R OFF – ON Capability curve selection
qcap2 R OFF – ON Capability curve selection
-------------- R 0–1 Reserved
s_ST R 0–1 ST synchronizing phase signal
s_TR R 0–1 TR synchronizing phase signal
-------------- R 0–1 Reserved
-------------- R 0–1 Reserved
s_in1 R OFF – ON 1st configurable input on SPDIO card
s_in2 R OFF – ON 2nd configurable input on SPDIO card
s_in3 R OFF – ON 3rd configurable input on SPDIO card
s_in4 R OFF – ON 4th configurable input on SPDIO card
AUXINP 05 Digital inputs
up R OFF – ON Calibrator increase command

dwn R OFF – ON Calibrator decrease command
I_m R OFF – ON Line voltage matching command
q_0 R OFF – ON Reactive power to zero command
comp R OFF – ON Compound enabling
pss R OFF – ON PSS enabling
limit R OFF – ON Rotor and underexcitation limits enabling
cospr R OFF – ON Cosfi preset command
cosph R OFF – ON Power factor regulation command
qreg R OFF – ON Reactive power regulation command
-------------- R 0–1 Reserved
-------------- R 0–1 Reserved
-------------- R 0–1 Reserved
-------------- R 0–1 Reserved
-------------- R 0–1 Reserved
3 - 28 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
VIRTINP 06 Virtual digital inputs
xlim R OFF – ON Limit operation (for 2 regulator systems)

r_low R OFF – ON Rotor limit overload exclusion
sfc_l R OFF – ON Enable voltage limit 1 with SFC
sfc_v R OFF – ON Enable voltage limit 2 with SFC
indol R OFF – ON Enable DOL start
v_in5 R OFF – ON Available
v_inA R OFF – ON Available
v_inB R OFF – ON Available
v_inC R OFF – ON Available
v_inD R OFF – ON Available
v_inE R OFF – ON Available
v_inF R OFF – ON Available
VIRTOUT 07 Virtual digital outputs
-------------- R OFF – ON Available

-------------- R OFF – ON Available
count R OFF – ON Output for overload counter
V/Hz R OFF – ON Flux limit alarm
vm_low R OFF – ON Motor voltage < of the SFC limit
trig R OFF – ON AVR pulses on - enable
v_ou6 R OFF – ON Available
v_ouA R OFF – ON Available
v_ouB R OFF – ON Available
v_ouC R OFF – ON Available
v_ouD R OFF – ON Available
v_ouE R OFF – ON Available
SILCOSTAT D - 2MU1000253116B 3 - 29
OUTPUTS 08 Digital output
-------------- R 0–1 Reserved

k1cnv R OFF – ON Maximum delayed converter current protection relay
calmn R OFF – ON Calibrator to its minimum
calmx R OFF – ON Calibrator to its maximum
s_ou1 R OFF – ON 1st configurable output on SPDIO card
s_ou2 R OFF – ON 2nd configurable output on SPDIO card
s_ou3 R OFF – ON 3rd configurable output on SPDIO card
s_ou4 R OFF – ON 4th configurable output on SPDIO card
-------------- R 0–1 Reserved
-------------- R 0–1 Reserved
-------------- R 0–1 Reserved
-------------- R 0–1 Reserved
-------------- R 0–1 Reserved
K2rdy R OFF – ON Regulator available signalling relay
trig R 0–1 Reserved
-------------- R 0–1 Reserved
AUXOUT 09 Digital outputs
crowb R OFF – ON BOD threshold command

autom R OFF – ON Automatic operation mode
I_m R OFF – ON Line voltage matching carried out
q_0 R OFF – ON Reactive power to zero carried out
r_lim R OFF – ON Rotor limit intervention
q_lim R OFF – ON Underexcitation limit intervention
okdol R OFF – ON DOL start completed
Step R OFF – ON Step loss detected
Cosok R OFF – ON CosFi regulator ON
Mstal R OFF – ON Motor stall after DOL start
-------------- R 0–1 Reserved
-------------- R 0–1 Reserved
-------------- R 0–1 Reserved
-------------- R 0–1 Reserved
-------------- R 0–1 Reserved
3 - 30 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
3.2.3 CONTROL AND EXAMPLES OF UTILIZATION OF EXCITER REGULATOR PARAMETERS
Operation mode ON / OFF:

The excitation system operates whether GOexc [CONDBS XM1-13] is featured by a +24Vdc
voltage, synchronism signals are recognized and regulator is ready. Under these conditions, either
MAN, AUT, Q_R or COS status may be actived, depending on which regulation level is enabled.
When GOexc input goes to 0 Vdc, system excitation is inhibited and therefore the regulator is OFF.
The OFF state forces thyristor firing alpha angle to the limit of 150º.
Severe system errors force the regulator to switch OFF while the anomaly is signalled by KAFlx
relay, resulting into protection operation or commutation onto an alternative regulator (where the
system is a two channel type).
Stand-by:
Whether or not the jumper JP21 is insered on the CONDBS card, the meaning of stdby digital input
[CONDBS XM1-17] will be modified.
Single control channel system

A failure in the Stator voltage measuring circuits, with J21 jumper inserted and stdby input active,
does not trip the excitation but advise the failure condition and switches into MAN mode regulation.
A failure in the Stator voltage measuring circuits, with J21 jumper not inserted and stdby input not
active, this trip the excitation.
Double control channel system

CAUTION J21 jumper should be removed!
The exciter is preset to work in double-channel configuration, that means that while one regulator is
operating the second one is in standby (stdby) and is ready to replace the first.
Stand-by regulator is OFF and is not operating, nevertheless it measures the electrical sizes
imposed by the active regulator and in case a GOexc, command is given, it starts to pre-set the
regulation with the existing values, 0.4 sec. before the actual start.
Stand-by regulator makes self-diagnoses and advise its own anomalies (if any) before starting any
operation.
MAN (manual mode):

Whether a GOexc input has been released and no aut input [CONDBS XM1-14] is ongoing, manual
function should be selected; in such condition the excitation is regulated by operating the converter
function directly from the calibrator, by means of up and down commands.
Controlled quantities may be excitation voltage or current, depending on CONDBS card jumper J20
configuration.
Manual operation is appropriated at start-up and during maintenance operations.
AUT (automatic mode):

Whether both GOexc and aut logic inputs have been released, automatic function should be
selected; in such condition, both Converter and Vm_reg functions are enabled aut digital output
[DAUXEB XM4-16] reports that automatic mode is operating.
Motor voltage is the only controlled quantity; the internal calibrator allows to move from vm_min to
vm_max limit values, both of them are setting by Preset menu' functional block.
l_m (line matching or network follow-up) pulse command [DAUXEB XM4-04] forces the calibrator to
track the network voltage value, the regulator inform that the . When the two voltage are alignment a
digital output reports the alignment between motor and main voltage when the difference is lower
than vm_thr value setting in the Preset menu'.
The first regulator enable after the synchronization (DOL) is that of Motor Voltage, if enable it can be
made to work the following regulator ring:
 Q_R (reactive power regulation)
 COS (power factor regulation)
SILCOSTAT D - 2MU1000253116B 3 - 31
Q_R (reactive power regulation):

When automatic operation mode has been selected and the motor/generator is in parallel to the
mains grid, qreg digital input [DAUXEB XM4-13] active adds Q_reg function to other functions that
have been previously enabled, i.e. Converter and Vm_reg.
Reactive power is the controlled quantity.
Calibrator UP and DOWN commands allow the function to range reactive power within Q_capab
capability curve limits.
In this operating mode all previously described functions are enabled, the only exception being
compound function.
A pulse command from q_0 digital input (reactive power zero setting) [DAUXEB XM4-05] forces the
calibrator to zero until k52g contact opens, thus alerting that the synchronous machine is no longer
operating in parallel to the main. q_0 output reports that reactive power zero setting has been
completed when reactive power drops under 'q_thr' value imposed by Preset menu'.
Use UP and DOWN commands to interrupt reactive power zero setting even if machine breaker has
not been closed yet.
COS (power factor regulation):

COS mode is an extension of Q_R mode where SINE value corresponding to the required power
factor (cos ) is the controlled quantity.
Enable the operating mode by means of cos digital input [DAUXEB XM4-12]. Calibrator may range
from - 0.7 to + 0.7 and the value imposed by means of UP and DOWN commands is used to
calculate, in terms of PM active power, the reactive power reference of Q_reg function.
Use cospr command to force the calibrator to Preset manu' value.
3 - 32 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
3 - 33 SILCOSTAT D - 2MU1000253116B
Parameters Cal_gen (calibrator Motor):
The calibrator, or reference Motor, is a sole function for all operating modes applicable to the exciter.
c_out reference is generated from a ramp function that tends to c_set required reference with c_slp
selected slope .
These values are represented with a decimal point in variable position depending on the operating
mode:
MAN mode (1 decimal digit):

Once the excitation regulation has been presetted, calibrator c_set value may be changed into
c_man value or zero with UP and DOWN commands respectively.
The sloope shall be c_slp = man_slp.
c_flash is the calibrator starting value during preexcitation; on the other hand, as far as standard
manual operation is concerned, calibrator shall start from zero.
AUT mode (2 decimal digits):

Calibrator c_set value may be changed into vm_max or vm_min values (both of them may be pre-
set in the Preset menu') by means of UP and DOWN commands respectively.
Use l_m (main voltage follow-up) to set calibrator reference in such way that c_set = v_line. The
latter is main voltage measured value; if no value is measured, l_m presets the calibrator to rated
value by setting c_set = 100.00.
During the start-up phase, however, i.e. during the soft start (when calibrator has not yet met
vm_min value), the slope shall be c_slp = str_slp while it shall be c_slp = aut_slp at steady state.
Q_R mode (2 decimal digits):

Calibrator is changed setting c_set to its maximum and minimum values ql_pos and ql_set
obtained from the capability curve with UP and DOWN commands respectively; the sloope shall be
c_slp = q_slp.
COS mode (3 decimal digits):

Calibrator can be changed setting c_set to its limits +0.700 or -0.700 with UP and DOWN
commands respectively, the slope shall be c_slp = cos_slp.
With the q_0 reactive power abilitation command, the zero setting shall be c_set = 0 in both Q_R
and COS modes, and cal_slp shall be maintained to mode-corresponding value.
It should be remarked that in COS mode the calibrator acquires the sine value corresponding to the
desired cosine value, so that if cosfi = 1 it shall be calibrator = 0.
Release the above mentioned UP and DOWN commands to get c_set = c_out; further to that, the
calibrator shall freeze the last value met.
c_xef, c_xvm and c_xq values are calculated at the moment of c_out preloading for automatic and
manual bumpless commutations.
SILCOSTAT D - 2MU1000253116B 3 - 34
Parameters Q_reg (reactive power control):
Reactive power control is carried out by an integral-proportional regulator whose reference is

q_set.=.c_out (with cos = 0 digital input, DAUXEB XM4-12) or q_set = c_out * PM/cosfi (with
cos.=.1 digital input) where c_out is the sine of the angle corresponding to cosfi, and PM is
measured active power.
q_out regulator output is the outcome of the comparison between q_set reference and q_fbk = QM
feedback (reactive power measured) multiplied by q_kp proportional gain and q_ki integral gain.
Since it constitutes the reference for following machine voltage regulator, q_out value is maintained
within vm_max and vm_min limit values. sin_val and cos_val variables indicate sine and cosine
values calculated by PM active power value and QM reactive power value effectively measured.
When regulator is disabled (q_en = 0) q_out output is set to zero and calibrator reference is
supplied directly to following regulator.
Parameters Vm_reg (machine voltage control):
Machine voltage control is performed by a regulator whose vm_set reference results from adding
vm_rif value (either from calibrator or greater regulation loops, with q_en = 1) to compound, pss and
over and underexcitation limit contributions.
SILCOSTAT D - 2MU1000253116B 3 - 35
The maximum value of vm_set is vm_lim (flow limit). This corresponds to vm_max for machine
frequencies greater than the rated one but proportionally decreases for machine frequencies lower
than the rated one.
The V/Hz limitation is always enable, thus avoiding transformer winding overheating that may occur
whenever machine frequency is lower than the rated one.
vm_out regulator output is the result of the comparison between vm_set reference and
vm_fbk.=.vm_val beedback (machine voltage measured) multiplied by vm_kd dynamic gain and
vm_ks static gain.
The dynamic part is simply proportional, the static part can be deemed to be such if filtered with
vm_kt time constant (see following Note).
Since the output constitutes a reference for following excitation regulator, the value of vm_out is
maintained within  v_ceil limits if voltage excitation regulation is preset; on the contrary, in current
regulation, ie_max and ie_min are the limits.
When regulator is disabled (vm_en = 0) vm_out is set to zero and calibrator reference is supplied
directly to following regulator.
Machine voltage control loop customization.
 NOTE the relationship vm_ks/vm_kd defines the distance between 1/vm_kt pole
and 1/T1 zero;
vm_kt / T1 = vm_ks / vm_kd
Zero should cancel machine main pole that may be determined by:
T1= ((Xe + X'd) / (Xe + Xd)) * T'd0 where:
Xe = external reactance
Xd = direct axis reactance
X'd = direct axis subtransitory reactance
T'd0 = time constant
Vm_reg function frequency response:
3 - 36 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
Parameters Converter (excitation control):
The converter consists of an excitation regulator and a thyristor firing pulse Motor that is
synchronous to the main (phase shifter).
The excitation regulator is of proportional-integral type, whose reference is (with vm_en = 0 logic
signal) e_set = c_out, or (with vm_en = 1 logic signal) e_set = vm_out. The feedback signal shall
be e_fbk = ve_val (excitation voltage measured) or e_fbk = ie_val (excitation current measured)
depending on the type of regulation that has been preset. The regulator output is the result of the
comparison between e_set reference and e_fbk feedback multiplied by e_ki proportional gain and
e_ki integral gain. This output corresponds to thyristor firing alpha angle and is maintained within
some fixed limits consisting of 150 lag limit and 5 maximum conduction. When the regulator is
disabled (exc_en = 0), alpha output is forced to lag limit.
The phase shifter is synchronized to main voltage through it_sinc interrupt routine, providing
thyristor natural firing instant and main period, both of them expressed in milliseconds. Once the
period is known, alpha angle may be converted into an exact a_time pulse lag time with regard to
natural firing; moreover the correct pulse timing may be maintained even though it_sinc is not
updated, by recomputing natural ignition instant in equidistant firing from the last data received.
a_err value, expressed in microseconds, shows the difference between natural firing, supplied by
it_sinc, and firing calculated in equidistant firing.
The thyristor firing instant is the sum of a_time and a_offs natural firing instants. The latter is a
hardware synchronism circuitry phase error compensation value, to be calibrated during installation.
SILCOSTAT D - 2MU1000253116B 3 - 37
Parameters Compound & Pss (compound and power stabilizing signals):
comp_v compound compensation and pss_v stabilizing signal values are calculated in this block for
further addition to the machine reference.
comp_v compound output results from multiplying QM reactive power with comp_k coefficient,
filtered with comp_t time constant.
When regulator is disabled (comp or comp2 = 0) comp_v output is set to zero.
Compound function characteristic
PSS function characteristic Not Used

pss_v power stabilizing signal function output is obtained multiplying PM active power and pss_kp
coefficient and HZ machine frequency with pss_kf coefficient.
pss_v contribution value is limited to 10 %.
The new function uses the frequency (Hz) and active power (PM) feedbacks again, then treating
them by two “wash-out” and two “lead-lag” blocks that can be disabled if necessary.
3 - 38 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
It follows a list with the new parameters tipical values:
pss_kp = 1.00
pss_kf = 10.8
pss_tw1 = 0.20 [sec]
pss_tw2 = 0.00 [sec]
k = 2.00
pss_t1 = 0.15 [sec]
pss_t2 = 3.00 [sec]
pss_t3 = 0.15 [sec]
pss_t4 = 0.03 [sec]
PSSMAX = 1000 ( 10 %)
 NOTE The following relation must be always true: pss_tw1  pss_tw2.
It is possible to disable the second “wash-out” function and/or one or both the “lead-lag” blocks by
setting to zero the respective time constants: pss_tw2, pss_t2, pss_t4.
Suggested PSSMAX value to limit the pss_v function output is 1000 ( 10 %).
Parameters Rot_lim (rotor limit):
Rotor limit or overexcitation control consists of an integral whose rl_set reference is normally
corresponding to kimax * ie_lim overload value and decreases to ie_lim rated value if:
((IEXC/if_lim)² - 1)
overload integral meets the area value; a return to kimax * ie_lim value may occur only after the
t_irr unrepeatibility time.
rl_out regulator output results from comparison between rl_set reference and rl_fbk = IEXC
(measured excitation current) feedback multiplied by rl_ki integral gain.
Since it reduces machine voltage regulator reference in order to limit excitation, rl_out value is
negative within the range from 0 % to -30 %.
When regulator is disabled (rl_en = 0) rl_out output is set to zero and kimax - ie_lim commuter is
at rest.
ie_lim value is selected among 4 values, namely ilim1, ilim2, ilim3, ilim4, to be selected with the 4
binary combinations of the two q_cap1 and q_cap2 logics, the same ones used for the selection of
the capability curves.
SILCOSTAT D - 2MU1000253116B 3 - 39
Parameters Q_lim (underexcitation limit):
The underexcitation control consists of an integral regulator whose ql_set reference is calculated as
a function of PM power according to the capability curve identified by q_p0, q_po5, q_p10 reactive
power values, corresponding to active power, 0 %, 50 % and cos_nom rated power factor active
power respectively.
ql_out output regulator is the result of a comparison between ql_set reference and ql_fbk = QM
(measured reactive power) feedback multiplied by ql_ki integral gain.
Since it increases the reference of following machine voltage regulator in order to limit the
excitation, ql_out value is positive in the range from 0 % to +30 % .
When regulator is disabled (ql_en = 0) ql_out output is set to zero.
The capability curve describes maximum Motor performance in the PM, QM plane for a certain
status voltage, and VM at a fixed machine cooling level.
Parameters Q_capab (capability curves):
The capability curve used by the underexcitation control comes from values written in this block on
the basis of Motor data or during installation. These values make up 4 curves selectable from 4
binary combinations of two logic inputs, namely q_cap1 and q_cap2.
q_p0h, q_p00 and q_p0l values are common to the 4 curves and consent curve adjustments to
machine voltage variations. q_p00 value refers to rated voltage while q_p0h, q_p0l values refer to
±5 % rated voltage respectively.
With the two q_cap1 and q_cap2 logic signals to zero [CONDBS XM1-18 and XM1-19], the first
curve is identified by q_p00, q_1p05, q_1p10 values; this curve is valid for machine rated voltage
while dotted curves show how it moves in response to ±5 % machine voltage variations.
The 4 q_1pos, q_2pos, q_3pos and q_4pos values are also selectable with the same logic inputs;
they constitute the calibrator overexcitation limits in reactive power regulation.
3 - 40 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
Parameters Rot_val (rotor quantities):

Through the voltage to frequency converter of the DAUXEB card and the A/D converters of the
CONDBS card, rotor quantities, whose values and relative scale adjustmentsare listed in this group:
 ve_val excitation voltage is calibrated with ve_scl scale factor.
 ie_val excitation current is calibrated with ie_scl scale factor.
 i_cb crow bar current is calibrated with ic_scl scale factor and ic_offs offset.
 v_sinc synchronism voltage has no scale factor.
 t_rot rotor temperature is obtained calculating the relation between ve_val excitation
voltage and ie_val excitation current and multiplying the result with t_scl scale factor:
ve_ val
t_ rot [ o C] =  [( 234.5  t _ scl)]  234.5
ie_ val
It should be remarked that when ve_val/ie_val = 1 is true, t_scl scale factor meets t_rot rotor
temperature.
 e_offs parameter compensates the rotor brush fall so that excitation voltage part is
unaffected by the temperature. It should be used to correct the voltage and excitation current
alignment for temperature calculation.
These values are acquired by means of synchronised samples from the Converter, and relevant
measures and calibrations are possible only in synchronous service .
Parameters Stat_val (stator quantities):

Through the functional block named Pk_read and through the A/D converters of the DAUXEB card,
voltage and current relevant of two machine phases (u_rs, u_st, i_r, i_t) are sampled 6 times each
period, thus obtaining, with the PARK method, u_abs2 voltage vector square module u_abs2 and
i_abs2 current, from which p_calc, q_calc powers are calculated.
pk_err value constitutes u_abs2 derivative, that is why it shows a certain asymmetry in machine
phases or measuring errors.
pk_offs value allows sampling phase adjustment to optimize the measuring independence from the
harmonics.
The adjusted machine quantities with relative scale factors are listed in this group together with line
voltage measured through the A/D converter of CONDBS card.
 vm_val machine voltage is calibrated with vm_scl scale factor.
 im_val machine current is calibrated with im_scl scale factor.
 pm_val active machine power is calibrated with pm_scl scale factor.
 qm_val reactive machine power is calibrated with qm_scl scale factor.
 vl_val mains (or “line”) voltage is calibrated with vl_scl scale factor.
SILCOSTAT D - 2MU1000253116B 3 - 41
Parameters Preset:
General type calibrations are listed in this group.
 vm_max: max. machine voltage.
 vm_min: min. machine voltage
 v_cp: max. positive excitation voltage (celing).
 v_cn: max. negative excitation voltage (celing).
 ie_min: min. excitation current in parallel operation (ERRORS).
 rtmax: max. rotor temperature (t_rot alarm threshold).
 cosprs: power factor reference preselection in COS cosine regulation.
 vm_thr: l_m output signal threshold for parallel activation.
 q_thr: reactive to zero setting signal q_0 output threshold.
 p_min: min. active power value for pss enabling.
 conf_i: SPDIO card four logic inputs configuration.
 conf_o: SPDIO card four logic outputs configuration.
Parameters Diag_gen (diagnostic Motor):

This block allows to change the width and introduce step variations on 4 regulation variables
(namely cal_out, alpha, pm_val and i_cb); such changes shall be implemented in diagnostic mode
and shall be depending on the presettings carried out on the diagnostic flags of the word CONTROL.
When the flag diag = ON the variable selected is replaced with dg_out value, resulting from the
sum between dg_ref and the step signal generated with width dg_amp, dg_per (semiperiod) lasting
and dg_slp slope.
Should dg_ext flag be true, step signal shall consist of userin introduced by an (±10 V = ±2048)
external functions Motor. When the flag diag = OFF the step is set to zero and dg_ref signal is
forced to the value of the selected variable, thus allowing the entry into diagnostic mode without
problems.
The selection of variables to be operated is allowed in any operating condition; for that reason the
operator is free to handle the diagnostic, nevertheless the operator should be aware of system
problems that come from it: for example, in diagnostic mode with d_alf = ON, Diag_gen controls
directly the alpha firing angle and therefore all regulation loops are open. Diagnostic mode output is
bumpless since it is carried out preserving all modifications implemented on the regulation or
calibrator.
3 - 42 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
To operate on the calibrator (cal_out) the 3 presetting flags referenced with d_alf, d_icb and d_pm
should be OFF; these presettings are accepted in the above mentioned priority order only if
diagnostic mode is unactive (diag = OFF), while the presetting d_ext is always ready.
r_delta and v_delta values are provided for a wider display of step responses; they are respectively
the step component of the reference (r_delta = dg_out - dg_ref) and the step component of the
feedback signals in the different regulation modes:
 MAN: v_delta = e_fbk - dg_ref;
 AUT: v_delta = vm_fbk - dg_ref;
 Q_R: v_delta = q_fbk - dg_ref;
 COS: v_delta = senval - dg_ref
3.3 LOGIC FUNCTION
Logic functions that activate different digital regulator operating modes are show in the below figure.
VLINE
PM QM VM
sine exc_en cnuous_f trig IEXC 52e 52g
cos_en q_en vm_en alpha
it_fire
VEXC
cal_out
QM i_cb
QM
cal_gen ql_en comp_en cb_trig
PM
IEXC
rl_en HZ crowbar
cal_set pss_en
set flash = goExc

exc_en = goExc & k52e & /sys_err & on_sinc reset flash = exc_en + VM > 70%
vm_en = exc_en & aut
q_en = vm_en & (cos+qreg+q_0) & k52g
cos_en = q_en & cos & PM > 5%
ql_en = vm_en & limit & k52g
rl_en = vm_en & limit & k52g
comp_en = vm_en & comp & k52g & /q_en
pss_en = vm_en & pss & k52g & (PM > p_min+ist5%)
trig = flash + [((exc_en + cnuous) & /stdby) + (0,5sec & icb<10%)]
cb_en = /exc_en & (alpha == 150 ) & /stdby

cb_trig = cb_en & (2sec)
cbopn = cb_trig & (i_cb<10%) + 10sec

cnuous = flash + [(cbopn + 10sec) & /k52e] + [ vm_en &(pk_err + (VM < 70%))&(>200ms <2sec)]
ERRORS X X X X STATUS X X X X
1-HSO 1-+-15v 1-k52g 1-vm_err 1-stdby 1-goExc 1-comp_en 1-trig

2-A/D 2-KP 2-k52e 2-e_fbk 2-cnuous 2-aut 2-pss_en 2-exc_en
4-auxI/O 4-IOC 4-
4-Ram 4-e_min 4- 4-k52g 4-rl_en 4-vm_en
8- 8-WDOG 8-
8-eep 8-sinc 8-sys_er 8-k52e 8-ql_en 8-q_en
SILCOSTAT D - 2MU1000253116B 3 - 43
Configurable digital input/output

The additional SPDI0 card makes available four digital input channels and four digital output
channels
The 4 phisical inputs s_in1  s_in4 are associated to the 16 VIRTINP logic inputs through the four
hexadecimal figure configuration word named conf_i.
(i.e.: conf_i = 0123 connects s_in1 s_in4 rispectively to xlim, r_low, v_in2, v_in3).
The 16 logic VIRTOUT are connected to s_ou1  s_ou4 phisical outputs through the 4 hexadecimal
figure configuration word named conf_o.
(i.e.: conf_o = 03FF connects respectively flash, V/Hz, v_ouF, v_ouF, to s_ou1  s_ou4. It should
be remarked that the 2 outputs s_ou3, s_ou4 are connected to the same v_ouF signal).
Logic output:
 k1cnv:converter thermal area <[(1,25²-1) * 30 sec], where 1 corresponds to converter rated

current (2,5 V on the IEXC transducer input).
 calmn: (dwn & calibrator to its min.) + (vm_en & (vm_ref  vm_min)).
 calmx: (up & calibrator to its max.) + (vm_en & (vm_ref  vm_max)).
 flash set: JP19 inserted & GOexc & syncronizating voltages absent.
 reset: exc_en + (VM 70 %) + /Goexc.
 t_rot: t_rot  rtmax.
 count: t_irr.
 V/Hz: vm_set  vm_lim.
 k2rdy: all ERRORS flags set to 0.
 crowb: /cb_trig.
 autom: vm_en.
 l_m: (VL - VM)  vm_thr.
 q_0: QL  q_thr.
 rlim: rl_out  0.
 qlim: ql_out  0.
 cnuos: flash + (cbopn & /k52e) + [vm_en & (pk_err + (VM 70 %)) & (>200 ms <2 sec)].
 step: [(exc_en & i_cb) & >0.25 sec] & k52g & [(cb_negative & 40ms) + (no. cb switch over <3)].
 cbsht: [(exc_en & i_cb) & >0.25sec] & /step.
 cbopn: (cb_trig & /i_cb) + 10sec.
Regulator protections:
Error conditions are signalled through the diagnostic terminals and the state of k2rdy relay on
CONDBS card. For safety reasons, missing any anomalies k2rdy relay is always energized and
relevant led is lighted up.
When system is switched on, or when reset push button is pressed, k2rdy relay deenergizes. Once
the initialization phase is over and initial tests are completed, the programme shall energize such
relay, subject to further deenergization in case of anomalous trips.
Block conditions induced by memory tests shall be checked only during initialization:
 ram: error in RAM memory during the power up test;

 eep: EEPROM checksum error during the RAM data at power up.
3 - 44 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
Following block conditions, induced by hardware-software tests, shall be checked at any time:
 ±15V: [CONDBS card] ±15V power supply anomaly.

 kp: [CONDBS card] kp external protection logic input missing.
 ioc: [CONDBS card] maximum instantaneous current (IEXC  4 times converter rated current).
 wdog: [CONDBS card] watch-dog circuit.
 HSO: [CONDBS card] HSO output channels for thyristors firing pulses generation anomaly.
 A/D: [DAUXEB card] A/D converter time out.
 auxIO: [DAUXEB card] digital I/O anomaly.
Following block conditions shall be checked after completion of the initialisation phase and shall be
depending on the operating mode:
 vm_err: anomaly in machine voltage measurement (VM <10 % + pk_err)(>200 msec).

 e_fbk: excitation voltage (current) feedback signal missing.
 e_min: in-parallel excitation missing.
 sinc: >1 sec time synchronization voltages missing.
 k52e: inconsistency (/k52e & GOexc).
 k52g: inconsistency (k52g & (/k52e + /GOexc).
SFC operation:
The operation in conjunction with static starter (SFC) is requested when the sfc_l logic input (“low
limit” selection) is ON.
During the initial start up phase excitation current is controlled to the e_sfc parameter value untill the
stator voltage raises up to c_sfc value; from this instant, while the machine speeds up, the voltage is
controlled allowing the fiel current to deflux.
vmlow logic output indicates if the voltage increases over the reference c_sfc + 2%.
During the operation in conjunction with SFC the machine voltage feedback is red from an analog
signal supplied from the static starter when the sfc_v logic input is enabled; the sfc_val value can
be adjusted by acting on the sfc_scl scale factor.
SILCOSTAT D - 2MU1000253116B 3 - 45
3 - 46 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
COMMISSIONIG 4
In this Chapter
4.1 DEFINITION 1
4.2 GENERAL INFORMATION 1
4.3 COMMISSIONING OPERATIONS 2
4.4 APPENDIX TO CHAPTER 4 18
4.1 DEFINITION
This chapter shall supply a guide for the technical staff who shall put into service the exciter for the
first time.
Technicians should remember:
 For the correct machinery operation, the internal and external electric connections must be
perfectly ordered as per the functional diagram.
 The excitation regulation system structure allows it to operate within calibrated tolerance
levels.
 NOTE The following instructions do not refer to a particular application (system

typology) but have general character. Technical staff should be able to
manage the information given below and to apply it to specific situations.
4.2 GENERAL INFORMATION
Provided that the machinery has been positioned on the proper site and all electrical connections
have been laid according to the system diagram, the first excitation static system start-up is carried
out through a few phases:
Operations with machine stopped or on turning gear mode:

check the wirings and the proper functionality of the exciter parts, check and calibrate the most
internal automatic setting system loop (excitation setting).
Operations with machine with SFC:

check and tune the main setting loop of the machine voltage and system protection devices.
Operations with machine in parallel:

refine machine and power quantities readings, perform tests on automatic setting functions and
refine setting loops once more.
Final operations:
gather all data and results of the tests carried out on the machinery.

4 Commissioning
Time necessary to complete every single phase is closely linked to the complexity of the excitation
(number of automatic regulators and converters) and generation system, to the synchronous
machine availability and to the staff skills.
WARNING
The machinery contains devices working at dangerous voltages

and currents. It is necessary to carry out all the operations with whole
awareness and compliance with all the precautions and procedures
provided by security norms. Failure to comply with them can cause
irreparable damage both to the operator and to the machinery itself, not to
mention the external system to which the machinery is connected.
4.3 COMMISSIONING OPERATIONS
Operations with machine stopped or on turning gear mode:
With machine off or on barring device, and when it is necessary to

 CAUTION erogate power through the thyristor bridge, the excitation current
must never exceed 20 % .. 30 % of its rated value at no-load (Ie0). If
the machine is off, the current passage into the rotor must be done
quickly to avoid overheating problems on the collector loops.
In this phase a R-L a dummy load can be used or it is possible to energizing the field of Motor with
low current and for little time.
Note: In double control channel excitation systems, checking, calibration and setting of parameter
operations must be repeated for both the digital regulators so that they operate in the same way.
1) Check the presence of the auxiliary feeding line and its level, and the existence, polarity and
level of the central battery. The detected values must meet the proper tolerance levels.
2) Feed the exciter one circuit at a time (operating on single switches) and make sure of their whole
availability. Before feeding the digital control electronic cards, remove the terminals of the cables
labelled P24 and N24 from the terminal blocks, close the switch and measure the voltage levels;
do any necessary adjustment on the feeder setting trimmers. Open the switch and reinsert the
cable terminals in the corresponding terminal blocks on the cards.
3) Check that all the exciter remote control commands are operative.

4 Commissioning
4) Check the correct customization of the digital regulator cards.

In particular verify the EPROM memories existence, and compare the code printed on the label
(which identifies the system software) with the one registered on the corresponding item of the
functional diagram Z sheets.
On the electronic CONDBS card of the digital regulator the existence of some jumpers activates
special functions:
 JP19: for systems fed from the machine terminals it enables the field-flashing start-up
operation;
 JP20: excitation control by current feedback;
 JP21: for single channel systems it enables the operating mode switch-over from automatic
to manual control for machine voltage feedback loss.
5) Check the electric connections between the machine PT's and CT's and the exciter. If the
function of mains voltage automatic follow-up is available, check the electric connections
between the line PT and the exciter.
6) Check the logic interface wirings, and in particular the trip chains ones.
The functionality of the logic input digital control system signals can be checked observing the
status change (0 / 1) of the field corresponding to the energized relay in the list FLAGS - flag
STATUS, INPUT, AUX_INP of the operator interface.
In particular check:
 the connections and the functionality of the commands coming from the control room;
 the status signal of the 52E excitation breaker;
 motor trip input signal (86M) from outside the board;
excitation trip output signal (86E); the immediate opening of the parallel (52M) and excitation
(52E) breakers should be subsequently checked.
7) Feed the converter and make sure that the input line voltages, management of the CRMSA card,
correspond to the synchronism signals. Converter Vac feeding voltages between lines and
digital control input synchronism voltages must be in phase.
Vrs Vst Vtr
Tempo
Time
120 120 120
Periodo = 360
Period

4 Commissioning
The triphase feeding line for the power converter can have direct or reverse phase sequence
indifferently.
The synchronizing voltages must absolutely be in the same phase relation as those of the
power feeder.
At the synchronism signals input of the DPSEB card the following voltages must be:
Phase Name Terminals

SR Sync 1 XM1 - 02
RT Sync 2 XM1 - 03
TS Sync 3 XM1 - 04
N X0 XM1 - 01
In the following figure the necessary vector relation between converter feeder voltage and
synchronism inputs is represented.
The CRMSA unit receives three voltages between lines standardized to 100 Vrms, perfectly in
phase with converter power input voltages (with two jumpers for each phase, circuits can be
adapted to 80 Vrms or 120 Veff); it creates a transformer galvanic insulation with Dy5 vector
group; it filters possible disturbances; it detects secondary voltage zero crossings by means of
three analogic gauges whose synchronism outputs are featured by trapezoidal wave forms, with
maximum value approximately corresponding to 12V.
As a rule, the card supplies a +24 Vdc logic output signal upon the simultaneous detection of
the three synchronism voltages; signal falls to 0Vdc in case of anomaly.
This logic signal is sent to the CONDBS card where a pulse input (XM1-10 input) command
may interrupt the application program to handle the synchronism loss protection.

4 Commissioning
The three CRSMA card synchronism output signals have a trapezoidal form, with 12V
maximum value, and a 120 electrical degrees phase difference.
Width, whose value is kept constant, may range in the input voltage field from 0.2 to 1.4 p.u.,
corresponding to those of the power converter feeder.
Check pulses generated by control unit digital device.
Thyristor firing pulses may be detected from special test points on SilcoStat-D digital regulator
DPSEx electronic card.
Signal amplitude corresponds to 0  +24V (BURST).
t.p. branch 1
1
R
X27
X37 3 3
4
5
S
X47
X32 4 5
6
T
X42 6
X52 2 2
Converter branch numbering
Check:
- each single pulse duration and riveting:
T/6 = 3.3msec @ 50Hz

20µsec 20µsec
40µsec 40µsec
T/6 T/6
T/3
Control Pulse
- synchronization:
DIRECT phase sequence:

1° pulse is synchronized with VRT voltage in connection with branch nr.1: pulse
may be detected on X27 test point on SilcoStat-D digital regulator DPSEx electronic
card.

4 Commissioning
INVERTED phase sequence:

1° pulse is synchronized with VRT voltage in connection with branch nr.5: pulse
may be detected on X47 test point on SilcoStat-D digital regulator DPSEx
electronic card.
VRT voltage
tempo = time
- firing sequence:
Senso ciclico DIRETTO.

V RS V RT V ST V SR V TR V TS V RS
ramo 1
ramo 2
ramo 3
ramo 4
ramo 5
ramo 6
T/6 T/6 T/6 T/6 T/6 T/6

T
periodo delle tensioni di sincronismo
Direct phase sequence

Caption: Senso ciclico diretto = Direct phase sequence, Ramo = Branch, Periodo delle tensioni di sincronismo = Synchronism
voltage period

4 Commissioning
Senso ciclico INVERSO.

V TS V TR V SR V ST V RT V RS V TS
ramo 1
ramo 2
ramo 3
ramo 4
ramo 5
ramo 6
T/6 T/6 T/6 T/6 T/6 T/6

T
periodo delle tensioni di sincronismo
Inverted phase sequence

Caption: Senso ciclico diretto = Direct phase sequence, Ramo = Branch, Periodo delle tensioni di sincronismo = Synchronism
voltage period
Act on INCREASE and DECREASE CALIBRATOR on Panel control keysUP/DW to make sure that
VEXC (IEac) voltage level increases or decreases, thus checking whether:
- thyristor bridge has no macroscopic operating problems;
- voltage or current inner ring feedback is active and works properly.
CAUTION
Attention should be paid to excitation current

levels that are being met.
Check excitation voltage and/or current on
locally available instruments
WARNING
An analogic measuring instrument with accuracy

class = 0,2 should preferably be used.

4 Commissioning
8) Preset the exciter for local control manual mode operation and set the excitation on command.
Having fed the machinery and set to zero possible alarms untimely appeared during the power-
up, the system must be ready for excitation:
 existence of internal feedings for electronic cards;
 availability of digital regulator;
 external consents (ex. min turbine speed) if any, temporarily forced to close to allow
excitation;
 lack of any external trip command;
 de-excitation command off.
9) Calibrate the excitation current feedback signals reading.

Pay attention to the excitation current levels reached!
CAUTION
Check voltage and excitation current on the available local
tools.
Excitation current IEXC:

input DPSEB card
XM2 20(sg) - 21(com) and 17(sg)
10Vdc @ IEXC max input.
The excitation current is measured with two CT's Lem and the signal is adjust in the XELT11
card to ≈ 1,0 Vdc in correspondence to the IN power converter rated current.
IE = 1 V @ INa.c.
The signal is used as a feedback of the most internal regulation loop as an alternative to the
excitation current one.
The signal is used for the overexcitation limit function, depending on the cooling conditions
(hydrogen pressure), and to protect the IOC instantaneous overcurrent, preset for four times the
IN current.
The current signal is also used to calculate the rotor temperature, the max delayed current and
the minimum excitation current.
Short circuit the analog input of DPSEB card (XM2 17 -20) and with HMI intefase (SSDterm
SW) adjusting the offset of ve_val input (ROT_VAL param.) with the trimmer POT1 in the card
DAUXEB, the trimmer is accessible through a hole placed approximately at the centre of the
CONDBS electronic card, overlayed on the DAUXEB.

4 Commissioning
Connect a ammeter clamp on the output cable of exciter.

Select manual mode and press the excitation ON command.
Operate on calibrator commands (UP - DOWN) to go to an IEXC excitation current level
corresponding to max 20% .. 30% of Ie0.
In the ROT_VAL parameters menù of the operator interface, adjust the scale factor (ie_scl)
values of the measurement (ie_val) so that the operator interface display indicates the same
value (% di Ie0) of the analog tool (ammeter clamp).
(Ie setpoit % / 100%) * Ieo = Ie_instrument.
NOTE
The following consideration must be done for excitation system working with counter-rotating
asynchronous motor.
With reference to the preceding figure, to allow the excitation control the Ie_val alternating
current measure is converted into the VEXC voltage signal by the DPSEB board of the digital
regulator.
The IEXC p.u. base is the Ieac value that gives to the synchronous motor the excitation
current needed to obtain the rated stator voltage at no-load (E0).The rated stator voltage can
be obtained by the E0=f(IExc) synchronous motor curves.
The digital regulator "ie_val" voltage measure calibration is made when the Ieac current
corresponds to the IE0cc value (synchronous motor excitation current at no-load).
The right "ie_val" calibration can be done if it is at least known one operation point at rated
speed with a load IE0cc or Iencc equivalent.
For example :
 synchronous motor rotor data Vencc = 128 Vdc

Iencc = 678 Adc
Ve0cc = 35 Vdc
IE0cc = 251 Adc
 asynchronous motor stator data corresponding to Iencc = 678 Adc:

V1 = 158 Vac
I1 = 142 Aac
codfi = 0.51
The calibration can start setting ie_val = 1 p.u. when the current signal value is :
IE0ac  (IE0dc / IENdc)  I1 = (251 / 678)  142  52 Aac
Since the voltage signal of 1 Vdc at the XM2-17 input of the DPSEB board corresponds to the
no load rated current In = 52 Aac, for the IE0ac current the equivalent signals 1 Vdc : it is
obtained by rising the calibrator with the exciter in MANUAL control mode.
This approximation is possible because changing the load the asynchronous motor has no
slipping (the speed is imposed by the synchronous motor splined to the same shaft); the ratio
bet ween the motor quantities E1 and E2 remains a costant while the increase at the voltage
droops, dued to stator and rotor impedances, is adjusted by the regulation with the increase of
V1 , to abtain V2 that corresponds to the excitation value required by the synchronous motor
in that operation point.
V1- (Z1 * I1)=E1

and
V2 + (Z2 * I2)=E2
E1= K1  N1 f1
E2= K2  N2 f1 s
where,for the asynchronous motor :

4 Commissioning
Z1 = costant = stator impedence

Z2 = costant = rotor impedence
E1/E2 = costant
N1 = stator turns
N2 = rotor turns
s* = 2or3 = slipping
 = electomagnetic flux at the air gap ,
depending on the I0 (current at no
load) component only.
The rotor load being a costant, the cosfi thet the motor presents to the feeder
mantains it self a costant inside certain boundaries (cosfi = 0.51) . So that
E2/E1 = (V2 + Z2*I2) / (v1 - Z1*I1)

and
N2*I2 / (N1*I1 + Io)  constant
where
I1 +Io = 142Aac
n 2  ( f 1 * 60 / p )
*s=
( f 1 * 60) / p
 n2=1500 rpm
 p = pair pole
 f 1  50 Hz
4 - 10 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
4 Commissioning
10) Carry out tests on the most internal control loop (excitation feedback) for rectangular signal
responses to tune up the parameters of the phase shifter.
In diagnostic mode (Diag = on) set a reference (cal_out) with 1% step.
In the CONVERTER parameters menù of the interface user, adjust the values of proportional
(e_kp) and integral (e_ki) gains to obtain an optimal behaviour.
The existence of the JP20 jumper on the CONDBS electronic card of the digital regulator
establishes that the quantity for the excitation feedback is the current.
Excitation regulator reference parameters:
IEXC feedback:
e_kp = 2.00
e_ki = 12
The mentioned values are a starting point and are useful only to indicate the quantity order;
following the step response tests they must be refined in order to obtain satisfying values for the
application.
SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B 4 - 11
4 Commissioning
Operations with SFC running :
Start-up operation in automatic mode, set a external excitation ON command.

In systems fed by an auxiliary line, at the closure of the excitation command, the machine
voltage internal reference goes to the min calibrator value (parameter vm_min of the Preset
menù) with a soft start ramp aut_slp.
1) Check that the VRS and VST voltages between lines coming from the machine are 120° out of
phase delayed.
The voltage signals can be with drawn from the measurement PT secondary circuit before their
input into the digital regulator cards.
2) Calibrate the machine voltage feedback measure.

The machine PT's secondary circuits are connected to the digital regulator through further
measurement PT's, both types of transformer are featured by voltage ratios reported in the
Functional Diagram.
4 - 12 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
4 Commissioning
Verify that the machine PT's primary circuits are at the voltage value corresponding (or
proportional) to the VAN rated stator voltage, and calculate the corresponding input value.
 DAUXEB card.
 VRS phase-to-phase voltage to XM4 - 28/ 27 terminal lugs.
 VST phase-to-phase voltage to XM4 - 30/29terminal lugs.
 5 Vac standardized signal @ 100 % of VM.
For the stator voltage correct measurement the existence on the abovementioned terminal lugs
of two sinusoidal 120° phase shifted voltages of equal width is essential.
The value pk_err available on the diagnostic terminals PK_READ menu reports as of signal and
connection correctness (pk_err < 100 must be accepted).
In the STAT_VAL parameters menù of the operator interface, adjust the scale factor value
vm_scl of the measurement vm_val so that the operator interface displays the % of rated VAN
calculated value.
 CAUTION Inadequate parameter values can induce the excitation

system to an unwanted behaviour which could force the
external machine protection devices to intervene.
Operations with machine in parallel:
1) When the motor is ready to synchronizing with the net, check the control system stability at the
moment of the sudden load change, when closing the main circuit breaker (52M).
2) To exclude the functions power factor and reactive power (if it is inserted).
3) To activate the local commands and to use UP key and DW key to regulate the reactive power.
4) Calibrate the machine current feedback measure.
The secondary circuits of the machine CT's are connected to the digital regulator by further
measurement CT's; both types of transformer are featured by current relations reported in the
functional diagram.
Check that the machine CT's primary circuits have a voltage value corresponding (or
proportional) to the rated stator current IAN and calculate the corresponding input digital
regulator value.
In the STAT_VAL parameters menù of the operator interface, adjust the value of the scale factor
im_scl of the measurement im_val so that the operator interface display indicates the %
calculated IAN value.
SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B 4 - 13
4 Commissioning
5) (Temporarily) calibrate the active and reactive power measures.

Using the measures data mentioned in the previous points, i.e. the R phase measures, calculate
the active and reactive powers theoretical values:
PM = Vrs*Ir*cosØ [%]
QM = Vrs*Ir*sinØ [%]
In the STAT_VAL parameters menù of the operator interface, adjust the scale factor values
pm_scl of the active power measure pm_val and of the scale factor qm_scl of the reactive
power measurement qm_val so that the operator interface display indicates values
corresponding to the theoretically calculated, AN – machine apparent rated power % expressed
ones.
 NOTE The indication of QM (VARIABLES – Exciter menù) or qm_val

(VARIABLES - Stat_val menù) reactive power measurement must
be positive for prevalently inductive load.
The machine current, active and reactive power readings definitive
calibration occurs in the loaded operating machine production test.
6) During the production calibrate the active and reactive power measurements.
Using the active and reactive power values measured with accuracy by the control room
tools, adjust the scale factor pm_scl of the active power measurement pm_val in the
STAT_VAL parameters menù of the operator interface so that the display supplies the
numerical indication corresponding to the datum. Set the scale factor qm_scl of the
reactive power mesurement at the same value as pm_scl and verify that the qm_val
indication corresponds to the data; otherwise, introduce the necessary adjustments.
7) Carry out functional tests in automatic mode.

In rated conditions (VM = 100 %), and using the digital regulator diagnostic function, carry out
the following tests:
 step response (1% step width);

 underexcitation limit functionality.
 overexcitation limit functionality.
 power factor function test
4 - 14 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
4 Commissioning
Step response:
Define the machine working point (VM, PM, QM) as to operate far from limit conditions, and make
sure that all the compensation and limitation functions are disabled.
Underexcitation limit functionality:

Make sure that all the compensation functions are disabled.
Specify the fields values in the Q_CAPAB parameters menù, drawing them from the underexcitation
alternator capability curves (where QM < 0).
Once fixed the workpoint (VM and PM), for a given machine cooling level (defined by the
combination of the qcap1 and qcap2 inputs logic levels, in the FLAGS – INPUTS menù), go to a
reactive power level next to the limit curve using the increase and decrease calibrator commands.
Enable the function changing the corresponding logic input status (the limit field in the FLAGS –
AUXINP menù must be “on”) and evaluate the system response to the step on the machine voltage
internal reference.
SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B 4 - 15
4 Commissioning
Overexcitation limit functionality:

Make sure that all the compensation functions are disabled.
Specify, in the ROT_LIM parameters menù, the rl_ki integral gain and the ilim1 .. ilim4 fields current
limit values, drawing them from the "V" curves or from the alternator data.
For a given machine cooling level (determined by the combination of the qcap1 and qcap2 inputs
logic levels, in the FLAGS – INPUTS menù), using the increase and decrease calibrator commands
reach an excitation current level next to the corresponding limit.
Enable the function changing the corresponding logic input status (the limit field in the FLAGS -
AUXINP menù must be “on”) and evaluate the system response to the step on the machine voltage
internal reference.
4 - 16 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
4 Commissioning
Overload function functionality(OPTION)

Make sure that all the compensation function are disabled.
Specify, in the ROT_LIM parameters menù, the overload coefficient (kimax), the overload
unrepeatibility time (t_irr) and the overload area (area) values.
For a given machine cooling level (determined by the combination of the qcap1 and qcap2 inputs
logic levels, in the FLAGS – INPUTS menù), using the increase and decrease calibrator commands
go to an excitation current value next to the corresponding overexcitation limit level.
Enable the function changing the corresponding logic input status (the limit field in the FLAGS –
AUXINP menù must be “on”) and, using the increase and decrease calibrator command, force the
excitation current beyond the limit
Final operation:
Carry out the de-energizing sequence starting from on-load status.
Cancel the reactive power QM operating manually on the calibrator commands, or automatically by
means of the reactive zerosetting command.
At the end of the operation the electrical quantity QM must be on a level with the zero, with a
tollerance level specified by the PRESET parameters menù q_thr field value.
The excitation system must supply a ‘zerosetting completed’ logic signal: to the operator interface
local terminal in the FLAGS – AUXOUT menù, in the q_0 = on field.
Recording and saving the parameters changing on the CPU Eeprom.
SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B 4 - 17
4 Commissioning
4.4 APPENDIX TO CHAPTER 4
Machine voltage regulation model is showed in figure.
1+ sT1
µ0
1+ sT2
Once the cut-off frequency c of the control system is selected, and the synchronous machine
transient time constant T’do [sec] known, the time constant T1 is obtained as:
(Xe  X' d)
T1  T' do * [sec]
(Xe  Xd)
where:
 Xd = machine direct synchronous reactance [p.u.];

 X’d = machine transient synchronous reactance [p.u.];
 Xe = external reactance [p.u.];
 c = 4 .. 20 [rad/sec] for thyristor type exciters.
Once the static gain 0 is fixed to satisfy the static error requirements:
1 1
E   if/se μ0  1
t (1  μ0) μ0
The dynamic gain is calculated as:
μdin  ωc * T' do
The time constant T2 is determined using the following relation:
μ0
T2  T1 *
μdin
The correspondence of these parameters with the reference model ones and with the implemented
via software regulator ones is:
0 = vm_ks
din = vm_kd
T2 = vm_kt
Regulator diagnostic function:

The digital control has a functionality which allows to alter the width of one among four setting
variables, introducing some step variations.
The conditionable quantities are:
 cal_out = machine voltage internal reference;

 alpha = thyristors firing angle;
 pm_val = active power;

 i_cb = crow-bar current.
4 - 18 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
4 Commissioning
The selection is in the first instance carried out activating the proper fields in the FLAGS –
CONTROL menù:
d_alp d_icb d_pm

cal_out off off off
alpha on off off
pm_val off off on
i_cb off on off
Once the selection is made, when the field diag = “on” the selected variable is substituted by a value
which is the sum of the signal dg_ref (reference value) and the step signal generated by software
with dg_amp amplitude, dg_per duration of the semiperiod and dg_slp slope (Diag_gen menù).
As an alternative, it is possible, when the field dg_ext = “on” to add the userin analog signal (10 V
@ 2048) applied to dg_ref from outside by the CN1 connector.
menù: FLAGS - CONTROLS

d_alp
d_icb
dg_ext diag = on d_pm
userin
CN1
dg_per
cal_out
dg_out alpha
dg_amp
pm_val
i_cb
dg_slp
dg_ref
menù: VARIABLES - Diag_gen
The input and output diagnostic function mode happens without bumps (bumpless).
The selection of diagnostic mode and variables to operate on is

 CAUTION allowed in all the system operational conditions: the operator shall
operate cautiously and take the proper precautionary measures for
the system.
The alpha selection leads to working with open loop system, without
the machine voltage retroaction control.
Scale factor and offset :

The analog quantities acquired by the control system pass through the interface circuits and are then
converted into digital form.
The values treated by software are almost never absolute, but are referred to a known quantity (i.e.
to machine or converter ratings) for which the X Volt or Amps input signal must correspond to the
reading of x, in % of reference quantity.
x = (offs + X)*scl
where:
 offs = measure offset;
 scl = scale factor.
SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B 4 - 19
4 Commissioning
offs
X scl x
A reference instrument must be used to calibrate readings.
1) Offset calibration:
The offset is introduced to compensate for errors due to the hardware component tollerance
devices of the survey and input circuits.
With null input signal (X = 0) is obtained:
x = offs;
assign to offs the value -x read in that moment in such a way as there results:
x = 0;
2) Scale factor calibration:

With the reading offset in place, a value X which is known to correspond to x is applied to the
analogic input.
With the scale factor scl set at that time, the reading is:
x = X*scl;
but the real value, being C a constant, is:
x = x*C
from which:
C = x/x;
x = x*C = X*scl*C
The value of the scale factor to set is:
scl = scl*C = scl*(x/x)
As regards the active power (PM) and reactive power (QM) measurements the proportionality
between measurements and scale factors is valid considering the power quadrate:
scl = scl*C = scl*(x/x)²
4 - 20 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
4 Commissioning
Conversion of times into electric degrees:

Having available the time trends of two periodical quantities A and B (not necessarily sinusoidal), the
phase displacement angle φ between them is calculated using the following formula:
φ = t*(360°/T)
where:
 t = time displacement;
 T = period in seconds;
 360° = period in degree
A B
Tempo
Time
t
T = 360
Digital regulator protections:

The error conditions of the digital regulator are signalled through the local operator interface and by
the relay k2rdy status CONDBS card.
For security reasons, in conditions where no anomalies are present the k2rdy relay is always
energized and the relevant led turned on. On system power-up or by pressing the hardware reset
button (on the cards itself) the relay is deenergized; once the initialization phase is over and all tests
completed, the program excites k2rdy, and deenergizes it only should an anomaly occur.
Error conditions verified by the digital regulator are summed up in the following tables.
Memory tests – verified only during system initialization (power-up or

hardware reset):
ram RAM memory error
Eep EEPROM memory checksum error while resetting or data restoring into RAM
Tests on hardware and software – always verified:
15V 15V feeding anomaly – CONDBS card
Kp kp “external protection” input not present – CONDBS card
Ioc max instantaneous overcurrent (IEXC  4*IN) – CONDBS card
Wdog watch-dog circuit anomaly – CONDBS board
HSO HSO channels for firing pulses generation anomaly – CONDBS board
A/d A/D converters time-out – DAUXEB card
AuxIO digital I/O anomaly – DAUXEB card
Test on operation mode – verified only at the end of the initialization phase:
vm_err machine voltage feedback anomaly (VM < 10% + pk_err), per  200msec
Sinc converter synchronizating voltages lackage, for > 1 sec
e_min lack of excitation in parallel
k52e incongruence (k52e = off & goExc = on)
k52g incongruence (k52g=on & k52e=off) or (k52g=on & goExc=off)
e_fbk lack of excitation voltage or current feedback
SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B 4 - 21
4 Commissioning
4 - 22 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
DIAGNOSTICS AND MAINTENANCE 5
In this Chapter
5.1 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE 1

5.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING 2
5.3 COMPONENT REPLACEMENT 5
5.4 APPENDIX TO CHAPTER 5 ACS converter 8
5.1 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
General informations
To ensure the correct and continuative operation of the machinery it is necessary to carry out some
scheduled maintenance operations.
Mechanical checks
The operations 1, 2 must be carried out monthly, while the other ones at least during scheduled
group stops.
1. Check and, if necessary, clean or replace filters on the about vents.
2. Examine visually the parts to single out possible wear and/or burning, dust and/or foreign
particles accumulated inside the board.
3. Carry out the necessary replacements of not working parts. Remove dust and possible foreign
matters accumulated inside the board. Dust can be removed with a duster or vacuum cleaner
DO NOT USE COMPRESSED AIR .
4. Disjoin connectors, verify their wear condition and restore connections.
5. Check the terminal block contacts status.
6. Check the tightening’s of the terminal blocks and all the terminal electric contacts of the inside
board parts.
7. Check the tightening of the power bars nuts, the converter, etc.
8. Check the wear condition of all the mechanical and electromechanical moving parts

5 Diagnostics & maintenance
Electrical checks
The following operations must be carried out at least during the scheduled group stops.
 CAUTION Operate with simulated signal, or with excited machine in manual

mode.
1. Measure the control electronics and relay logic feeding voltages; adjust the levels if necessary.
2. Verify the efficiency of the measure transformers (CTs and PTs).
3. Verify the efficiency of the measure transducers.
4. Check the local indications on the panel-instruments and the indications on the local terminal
operator interface display (VARIABLES menù).
5. Verify the coherence of the local panel signalling and the operator interface local terminal display
(FLAGS menù) signalling with the relay logic command status.
6. Carry out some local operations that involve the relay contacts status alteration (selectors
movement, pressing buttons) and check the logic operation.
7. Check the functionality of all electromechanical moving parts.
5.2 TROUBLE SHOOTING
General informations
The excitation system distinguishes between ALARMS and TRIPS: while the events that cause the
first ones do not trip the MOTOR operation, when the second ones occur it is necessary to stop
supplying energy to the field, in order to avoid or limit permanent damages to the machinery and/or
to the synchronous machine. The events causing alarms and trips can be inside the board or arise
from outside the board.
Diagnostics
On the digital excitation systems control, diagnostics takes place:
 through luminous signals and messages on the PLC visual display unit (statuses, alarms and
trips);
 with the help of synthetic messages, appearing on the operator interface local terminal display.
The information drawn from the examination of the PLC visual display unit and of the regulator
display reading are complementary: both contribute to single out the possible cause of malfunction.
Through diagnostics, only malfunctions (inside and outside the

 CAUTION excitation system) foreseen during the project step can be singled
out.
Alarms and trips

For alarm and trip causes refer to chapter 6 and 7 of section II.

Regulator local terminal

The digital system carries out checks about the existence of analogic signals necessary to set and
check the congruence of some logical commands; besides, one’s own hardware status is checked.
To incur one of the undermentioned events means a SYSTEM ERROR: made exception for vm_err
which causes the commutation from automatic mode to manual mode (for single-channel system
only if foreseen), while the other ones cause the REGULATOR FAULT.
The diagnostic system shows a synthetic message on the user interface local terminal, which is
indicative for the noticed situation.
Message Meaning Suggestion

Verify:
VM machine voltage measurement - the vm_val measure,  0% in operation;
vm_err error: the system does not detect - the measure scale factor, vm_scl;
anymore the feedback signal. - machine Vrs and Vst voltage signal wiring
(PTs, filters, connections).
Verify:
Lack of ve excitation voltage - ve_val measure;
e_fbk feedback: the system does not - the scale factor measure, ve_scl
detect this signal. - the excitation voltage signal wiring (voltage
shunt, transducer, connections).
In case of untimely interventions, verify:
- the excitation current measure, ie_val: scale
Lack of parallel excitation: system
factor (ie_scl) and/or offset (ie_offs) can be
e_min detect a current value ie_val lower
than the ie_min parameter inadequate (family Rot_val);
- the ie current signal wiring (shunt, tranducer,
connection).
Verify:
- the synchronism monitoring circuit functionality;
- synchronism voltage signal wiring (TT, filters,
Lack or inadequate level of the
Sinc monitors, connections);
synchronism voltages.
- the wiring that brings the logical lacking
synchronism signal form the monitor to the
control.
Discrepancy between 52E and Verify:
START excitation command - the status signals and the plant commands
K52e
(breaker opened with active existence ;
command). - verify the inside board relay logic.
Discrepancy among 52E, START
Verify:
excitation command and 52G
- the status signals and the plant commands
K52g (machine breaker closed excitation
existence ;
breaker opened or excitation
command loss) - verify the inside board relay logic
CONDBS card: test error on the
Ram Replace CONDAE card
RAM memory condition.
It appears if EPROM or EEPROM memory or
CONDBS card have been replaced. Use the
CONDBS card: test error in the
Eep appropriate reset procedure (see Vol. 2 - A5.7);
EEPROM memory status
in case of negative result , replace the CONDBS
card.
verify digital control circuits;
CONDBS card anomaly on the 15V
±15V - replace the DPSEB card;
feeding voltages
- replace the CONDBS card
For a normal operation, the “external protection”
input (XM1-20 CONDBS) must be on the high
CONDBS card: lack of kp “external
kp logical level (P24/R).
protection” input.
In case of untimely intervention replace the
CONDBS card.

Message Meaning Suggestion

In case of untimely intervention:
CONDBS card: max instantaneous
ioc - check the excitation current measure circuit;
excitation current (>4*IN).
- check the regulator feeding circuits,
CONDBS card: watch-dog circuit
wdog - replace the DPSEB card;
error
- check that the synchronization voltages are not
CONDBS card: High Speed Output affected by sudden frequency changes or
HSO
circuits anomaly. disturbances;
DAUXEB card: A/D converters time-
A/D - replace the DAUXEA card
out.
DAUXEB card: I/O digital circuits
auxIO replace the DAUXEB card.
anomaly.

5.3 COMPONENT REPLACEMENT
WARNING
The electronic components assembled on the cards are sensitive to
electrostatic discharges.
before handling the electronic cards provide yourself with a grounded metal
strip to be applied to the operator wrist and a conductive mat on which the
card will be placed.
Some basic precautions to take against electrostatic loads are:
 use an antistatic arm-band in contact with the operator skin.

 use conductive or antistatic bags and containers.
 discharge possible static loads on the conductive work plan before handling the parts.
 keep the parts in their antistatic containers.
 minimize the parts handling.
 avoid to touch the reophores and to handle the parts touching only their bodies.
 avoid to keep plastic materials over the working areas, excluding antistatic or conductive
materials.
 avoid loads generation.
 not subject semiconductors to wiping movements under each surface.
 operate only on work stations correctly connected to the ground.
Digital control cards
Preliminary operations:
1. Cut off power supply to the digital regulator.

2. Enter the digital control electronic cards, remove the cover or protection (if any).
CONDBS, DAUXEB, DPSEB electronic cards replacement:
1. Remove terminal connectors.

2. Remove flat cables and serial connection connectors.
3. Remove the electronic card.
4. Install the new electronic card.
5. Plug flat cables and serial connection connectors.
6. Plug terminal connectors.
XTRFOC card:
1. Remove the connector.

2. Release the cables and fiber optics fixed to the terminal lugs.
3. Remove the electronic card. Insert a screwdriver of adequate length between the card box and
the special wing, integral with the card box. Lever, pushing the screwdriver upwards, and release
the card box connection from the DIN guide in its lower part.
vaschetta portascheda
card box
guida DIN
DIN guide rail

Controls and calibrations:

Electronic cards are supplied after having been calibrated and customized (they do not need
calibration of parts such as resistors, capacities, etc..).
1. Before replacing any digital control card (CONDBS, DAUXEB, DPSEx), print configuration
parameters currently stored in the digital system memory.
2. Before inserting the new electronic card verify the configuration jumpers position.
3. Reset the machinery restoring the digital regulator functionality: press simultaneously the ▼ and
mode keys on the operator interface local terminal.
4. Reset the machinery restoring to set to zero the memorized alarms and trips.
5. In case of CONDBS card replacement, reinsert in the digital system memory, through the
operator interface terminal, the digital regulator configuration parameters (setting them to the
same values as the ones reported in the previously made print out - point 1).
6. In case of DAUXEB card replacement, verify the correct logic and analog inputs reading; as
regards the latter, if necessary, adjust the scale factors and offset values until sufficiently
accurate input values are obtained.
7. Check, in any case, the stored configuration parameters and verify that they coincide with the
parameters valid before replacing the part and that data losses have not occurred.
Measure transformers
Preliminary operations:
1. Cut off the power supply to the digital control.
2. CTs: short-circuit the current signal input terminal lugs. Carry out the short circuit between the
terminal lugs using the special connection bar.
Close the connection, fixing it by the adjacent terminal lug.
3. PTs: open the voltage signal input circuit at terminal lugs.

Open the transformer primary circuit, using the central terminal lug.
Unscrew the central terminal lug screw and set it to the position opposite to the starting one
making it slide along the special guides. Tighten the central terminal lug screw.

Replacement:
1. Remove the main cable terminals from the terminal blocks.
2. Remove the measure transformer.
3. Fix the new measure transformer.
4. Connect the main cable terminals to the terminal block.
Final operations:
1. Restore the current signal input terminal lugs for the CTs.
Remove the short-circuit in the terminal lugs realized with the special connection bar.
Unscrew the terminal lug and open the connection.
2. Restore the voltage signal input terminal lugs for the PTs.
Close the primary circuit, setting the transformer central terminal lugs to the starting position.
Tighten the central terminal lug screw .
3. Supply power to the digital control.
Controls and calibrations:

Transducers do not need any calibration.
1. Verify the correct electric connections of the input terminal lug and of the secondary terminal lug
signals, using functional diagrams.
2. Check the value read by the digital control device: in case of discrepancy with the input
analogical signal real value, operate the special adjustments on the scale and offset factor
parameters (if any) relevant to that measure.

5.4 APPENDIX TO CHAPTER 5
ACS Converter
To consult the product manual Thyristor Clamp
Fuses

Fuses :

Interfaces impulse board:
1. Release the cables fixed to the terminal lugs.

2. Remove the electronic card. Insert a screwdriver of adequate lenght between the card box and
the special wing, integral with the card box. Lever, pushing the screwdriver upwards, and release
the card box connection from the DIN guide in its lower part.
vaschetta portascheda
card box
guida DIN
DIN guide rail
5 - 10 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B 5 - 11
5 - 12 SILCOSTAT D – 2MU1000253116B
APPENDIX A1
OPERATING PRINCIPLES
INTRODUCTION
This section describes the features of the electrical drives controlled by power thyristor converters. Particular
attention is given to the three-phase fully controlled bridges and to the current source inverter with load
commutation (LCI).
1 ELECTRICAL DRIVES
The block diagram of an electrical drive controlled by a power converter is shown in Fig.1. The load is
usually a machine designed to accomplish a certain task, for example a fan, a centrifugal pump, propulsion
thrusters, and so constitute a load for the electrical drive.
POWER
LOAD
LINE THYRISTOR
SOURCE CONVERTER MOTOR
SENSING CONTROL SENSING

UNIT UNIT UNIT
REFERENCE
SIGNAL
Fig 1 – Block Diagram of an electrical drive
The requirements of the load can be specified in terms of speed and torque demands. In order to select a
suitable drive for a specific load it is necessary to obtain complete information about the load requirements,
A motor having speed-torque and speed-current characteristics that suit the load requirements is chosen. A
motor will have characteristics compatible to the load if it satisfies the speed and torque requirements of the
load without exceeding the current limitation imposed either by the motor rating or the source capacity.
Usually the natural speed-torque characteristic of the motor is not compatible with the load requirements, for
this reason a power converter is interposed between the line source and the motor. Fig. 2 shows an example
of torque-speed characteristic.
Torque
Speed
Fig. 2 – Speed torque characteristic of a fan
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B Rev. 00 A1 - 1

A1 Appendix
The power converter controls the flow of the power from the source to the motor in such a way that the motor
speed-torque and speed current characteristics are compatible with the load requirements.
The control of the converter is enclosed in a control unit which operates at much lower voltage and power
levels. The control units consists of micropocessor, PLC, lnear and digital integrated circuits.
The reference signal (ex. seed setpoint ) adjusts the operating point of the drive and it is an input for the
control unit.
The control unit is electrically isolated from the power converter mainly for two reasons:
a) without isolation a malfunction in the power converter or in the motor may lead to the application
of the power voltage to the control unit damaging the control and may attempt the safety of the
operator during the drive start up tuning or during the maintenance.
b) Converter generates harmonics, without isolation the harmonics can enter in the control and
interfere with its operation
The sensing of certain quantities as converter current and voltage, motor speed is usually required for
protection and closed loop regulation (speed regulation loop, current regulation loop) and metering. The
sensing transducers of the power converter electrical quantities are isolated from the control unit for the
reasons stated above.
The complete drive system consisting of the load, motor, power converter, line source and sensing unit
should be considered as an integrated system. The power converter should be selected to make the motor
characteristics suitable the load taking into account the line supply source and rules governing its use, for
example it may be necessary to limit the current inrush during starting to avoid voltage fluctuations on the
supply line.
2 FUNDAMENTAL MOTION EQUATION
Any motor load system can be described by the following fundamental motion equation:
dm
T  TL  J (2.1)
dt
where :
T [Nm] developed torque of the motor
TL [Nm] load resisting torque, referred to the motor shaft
J [kgm2] moment of the inertia of the motor-load system referred to the motor shaft
m [rad/sec] instantaneous angular velocity of the motor shaft.
Equation (2.1) shows that the torque T developed by the motor is counterbalanced by the load torque TL and
by the dynamic torque Jdm/dt that is called dynamic torque because it is present only during transient
operation.
The drive accelerates or decelerates depending on whether T is greater or less than TL. During the
acceleration period, the motor shall supply not only the load torque TL but an additional torque Jdm/dt to
overcome the inertia of the motor-load system. In application having a load with large inertia the motor
torque must exceed the load torque by a large amount to have and adequate amount of acceleration, on the
other side in application requiring fast response, the motor torque should be maintained at the highest value
and the motor-load system should be designed to have the lowest inertia.
A1 - 2 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
When the speed increases, the kinetic energy of the drive ½ J2m also increases, in addition to the energy
supplied to the load, the motor supplies the kinetic energy. During the deceleration, the dynamic torque
Jdm/dt changes its sign, the motion of the drive is maintained by extracting energy from the stored kinetic
energy. When the load has a high inertia, the motor should produce a large braking torque (T is negative) to
have adequate deceleration, when it is required a fast rersponse, the braking torque should be maintained at
the highest value and the motor-load system should be designed with the lowest possible inertia.
When motor torque T and load resistant torque TL are known it is possible to solve Eq. 2.1 in terms of time
to get the speed vs time curve from speed 1 to speed 2 :
2
J
t ( )   T ( )  T ( ) d
1
L
(2.2)
Fig. 3 - Motor-drive Torque and Load Torque for Gas Turbine starter application
Fig. 3 shows an example of load resistant torque TL, note that when the Gas Turbine is fired resistant torque
changes sign becoming motoring torque, the same figure shows the motor-drive available torque.
Fig. 4 shows an example of Speed vs Time curve obtained by solving the integral (2.2).
Fig. 4 – Typical Speed vs Time curve for Gas Turbine starting
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 3
A1 Appendix
3 THYRISTORS
The main component of the power converters is the thyristor (silicon controlled rectifier SCR, it is used
essentially as a controlled switch. The circuit symbol and the volt-ampere characteristic curve are shown in
Fig. 5
IA
Forward
Anode A
conduction
IA
VAK Reverse
IG IG1 IG2 IG0=0
Gate G Breakdown
Voltage
IK
VBO VAK
Reverse Forward
Cathode K
blocking blocking
Fig. 5 – Thyristor equivalent circuit / VAK - IA characteristic
Converter thyristors are electronic components that pass current in only one direction, they have only two
stable operational states: they are either blocking or conducting.
In the absence of the gate current IG, the current carried by the thyristor for the anode-cathode voltage VAK,
less than VBO (forward breakover voltage) and greater than the reverse breakdown voltage is close to zero,
the thyristor behaves as an open switch. However, if VAK is made greater than the forward breakover
voltage, the thyristor voltage drops to a very small value (few volts depending on the thyristor rating), the
thyristor behaves as a closed switch.
In the power converters the thyristor is used essentially as a controlled switch. For a given application , a
thyristor is chosen such that the peak forward and reverse voltages to which it may be subjected during
normal operation are less than its forward breakover voltage. This ensures that the thyristor remains off in
the absence of the gate current. The gate current is applied at the instant turn-on is desired. The thyristor
turns on provided VAK > 0. After turn-on, when IA reaches a value known as the latching current, the thyristor
continues to conduct even after the gate signal is removed, only a pulse of current is required for turn-on.
Blocking voltage definitions
 VDSM VRSM
VDSM and VRSM stand for maximum surge voltage in forward and reverse direction, respectively.
These voltage ratings represent the thyristor’s ability to withstand non-repetitive voltage transients of
pulse width tp = 10ms or less caused by, for instance, extrinsic switching over-voltages or lightning
pulses. Exceeding these voltages can lead to spurious triggering (in the forward direction) and to a
severe degradation of the blocking characteristics or device destruction in either direction.
 VDRM VRRM
VDRM and VRRM stand for maximum repetitive voltage in forward and reverse direction, respectively.
The thyristor is able to block these voltage levels at line frequency (50 or 60 Hz) and sinusoidal
voltage pulses of 10ms or less. These ratings must not be exceeded because otherwise the leakage
currents and power losses rise rapidly and lead to thermal runway with subsequent blocking
instability.
A1 Appendix
Typical Voltage Design Rule
It is very difficult or even impossible to exactly know the amplitudes of VDS and VRS since they are related
to the quality of the line voltage which is dependent on location, environment and time of the day. The
following design rule has proven to be a good approach in many application. Given the peak value of the
line voltage from :
V 0(max)  2  VLINE ( RMS )
we obtain with a total overshoot factor of kof = 22.5
VDSM  VRSM  kofV 0(max)
Thyristor turn-off
The major limitation of the thyristor is that it cannot turned off by the gate signal. For turn-off – also known
as commutation – the anode current IA, must be reduced below a value which is known as the holding
current. Subsequently, it should be subjected to a reverse bias of sufficient duration for it to regain
forward voltage blocking capability.
In the power circuit supplied by an a.c. source, the foregoing conditions for the thyristor turn-off are
reached during the negative half cycle. The turn off achieved with the help of the line voltage is called
line commutation or natural commutation. According to the nature of this a.c. source, a further
subdivision may be made into supply-commutating and load-commutating converters.
Usually the term line commutation is referred to the converter connected to the supply line acting as
rectifier, the term load commutation is referred to the converter connected to the load acting as an
inverter, the term LCI means Load Commutated Inverter.
Most converter circuits embody a number of thyristors, which take over the flow of current periodically, in
the course of the operating cycle. The transfer of current from one valve to another is called
commutation. Since the externally commutating converter requires no special commutation circuit it can
be considered as having natural commutation.
Dynamic Characteristics of Thyristors
In contrast to an ideal switch with infinitely fast turn-on and turn-off, the turning-on and turning-off
processes of real thyrstors take place at a finite rate.
Thyristors do not block instantly when the forward current reaches zero, but conduct for a short time in
the reverse direction (carrier storage effect). They turn off only after a short delay period. A relatively
high reverse current spike builds up and turn-off does not, therefore, take place at zero current. The
reverse current spike depends upon the rate at which the forward current falls (diT/dt). The rapid
cessation of reverse current give rise to over-voltages in the circuit inductance, which endanger the
blocking thyristor.
IT
IT(t)
diT/dt
trr
t
IR(t)
Q
Fig. 6 – Thrystor turn-off
A1 Appendix
After the current zero, a certain time elapses before the thyristor blocks (reverse recovery time trr). In case of
thyristors, a further period elapses before they will block forward voltage (forward recovery time).
 tq (s)
turn off time is defined as the time between the zero crossing of the anode current and the instant at
which a positive voltage may be applied to the thyristor.
 Q (As)
Recovery charge is defined as the area under the IR(t) curve during reverse recovery. It depends
upon diT/dt (A/s) and the thyristor junction temeperature Tvj (°C).
The snubber circuit of Fig.7 is able to provide protection against the transient voltage by providing a path for
the inductive current to flow.
Fig. 7 – Thyristor snubber circuit for protection against overvolatges
When a thyristor is turned on by a gate pulse the current spreads across the area of the silicon wafer with
finite velocity. If the anode current builds up faster than the spreading velocity, a large current will flow in a
narrow region. Consequently the thyristor will be damaged due to local heating. Hence the thyristor are
characterized by a di/dt rating.
 di/dtcrit (A/s)
Critical rate-of-rise of on state current.
A very high rate of rising of voltage in the forward blocking state (dv/dt) can cause the thyristor to turn on
without a gate pulse, with a consequent risk of failure.
 dv/dtcrit (V/s)
This rating indicates the maximum permissible rate-of-rise of the blocking voltage when an exponential
voltage wave-shape is applied to the thyristor during its blocking state.
Thyristor current ratings
Thyristors are assigned average ITAVM and rms ITRMS current ratings. The current should not be allowed to
exceed these ratings even for a short duration, because of the thermal capacity of thyristors. However, they
are able to withstand short duration current surges. A thyristor may withstand at least a surge lasting one
cycle (at 50Hz or 60Hz) with its magnitude up to around ten times the rated rms current. Thyrsitor are
protected against sustained overloads by the fast-acting closed-loop control of converters.
 ITAVM ITRMS
Max average and root-mean-square on-state currents, respectively. These values are calculated
with the following boundary conditions: the case temperature is fixed to a certain value (e.g. 70 °C)
ITAVM and ITRMS are the average and RMS value of a half-sinusoidal on-state current which heats up
the junction to its maximum value of 125 °C. These figures indicate the approximate current handling
capability. They are mainly used to compare different products with respect to their on-state
performance. It can be demonstrated that :

ITRMS  ITAVM
2
A1 Appendix
 ITSM
Max. non-repetitive surge current for tp = 10ms (corresponding to 50Hz) and tp = 8.3ms (60Hz). This
is the max allowed peak value of a half-sinusoidal surge current applied at an instant when the
thyristor has been fully loaded by its rated on.-state current
Thermal charcteristics of thyristor
The physical processes in the silicon crystal are temperature dependent. Hence all the properties and
characteristics of a valve depend upon the temperature of the silicon crystal. With increasing temperature,
the leakage current increases, and in a thyristor the forward-blocking capability decreases. Normally the
maximum operating temperature of a thyristor is about 125 °C. Much higher temperatures are permissible for
short period, however, when no voltage is applied to the valves.
 Tvjmax
The maximum junction temperature during operation is mainly limited by the b locking capability of
the devices. If it is exceeded, the leakage currents increase drastically, leading to blocking
instabilities. This applies even to short-time overloads since the time constant of the internal
impedance from junction-to-case is of the order of a few seconds. When designing a converter, a
safety margin of 510 °C is recommended for the maximum junction temperature.
 Tvjstg
Storage temperature range. The maximum storage temperature is 150 °C since there is no blocking
stress, and all the materials of a thyristor can withstand this temperature continuously without
degradation.
 RthJC RthCH
Thermal resistance junction-to-case and case-to-heatsink respectively.
 ZthJC
Transient thermal impedance junction-to-case. ZthJC(t) is used for temperature calculations when the
power dissipation is not constant but varying with time.
Thyristor Losses
Thyristor are heated in operation as result of losses in the active element, the silicon wafer. In the course of
the switching cycle, dissipation occurs in the valve from the following sources:
 Turn-on losses
 Conduction losses
 Turn-off losses
 Blocking losses
In the case of thyristors operating from the supply mains (up to 60 Hz), the conduction losses produced by
forward current are largest.
A1 Appendix
Thyristor Key Parameters
The following is a list a the thyristor key parameters along with its definition and typical values for a thyristor
rated 5200V with wafer diameter of 100mm.
VDSM = 5200 V
ITAVM = 3350 A
ITRMS = 5250 A
ITSM = 55000 A
VTO = 1.03 V
rT = 0.160 m
 VDSM VRSM
VDSM and VRSM stand for maximum surge voltage in forward and reverse direction, respectively.
These voltage ratings represent the thyristor’s ability to withstand non-repetitive voltage transients of
pulse width tp = 10ms or less caused by, for instance, extrinsic switching over-voltages or lightning
pulses. Exceeding these voltages can lead to spurious triggering (in the forward direction) and to a
severe degradation of the blocking characteristics or device destruction in either direction.
 ITAVM ITRMS
Max average and root-mean-square on-state currents, respectively. These values are calculated
with the following boundary conditions: the case temperature is fixed to a certain value (e.g. 70 °C)
ITAVM and ITRMS are the average and RMS value of a half-sinusoidal on-state current which heats up
the junction to its maximum value of 125 °C. These figures indicate the approximate current handling
capability. They are mainly used to compare different products with respect to their on-state
performance. It can be demonstrated that :

ITRMS  ITAVM
2
 ITSM
Max. non-repetitive surge current for tp = 10ms (corresponding to 50Hz) and tp = 8.3ms (60Hz). This
is the max allowed peak value of a half-sinusoidal surge current applied at an instant when the
thyristor has been fully loaded by its rated on.-state current.
 VT
VT is the maximum on-state voltage at a given on-state current IT ,at maximum junction temperature.
 VT0 rT
In many case, it is convenient and accurate enough. To approximate the on-state characteristics to a
straight line, chracterised by VT0 and rT:
V T ( I T )  V T 0  I T  rT
A1 Appendix
4 RECTIFYING CIRCUITS
INTRODUCTION
A rectifier circuit is one which links an a.c. supply to a d.c. load, that is, it converts an alternating voltage
supply to a direct voltage. The direct voltage so obtained is not normally flat, as from a battery, but contains
an alternating ripple component superimposed on the mean (d.c) level.
Rectifying circuits divide broadly into two groups: the half-wave and full-wave connections. The half wave
circuits are those having a rectifying devices in each line of the a.c. supply, all cathodes of the varying
devices being connected to a common connection to feed the d.c. load, the return from the load being to the
a.c. supply neutral (Fig.8).
The expression half-wave describes the fact that the current in each a.c. supply line is unidirectional.
D1 D2 D3
S
N LOAD
Fig. 8 – Three phase half-wave circuit using diodes
The full-wave circuits are those which are in effect two half-wave circuits in series, one feeding into the load,
the other returning load current directly to the a.c. lines, eliminating the need to employ the a.c. supply
neutral (Fig.9). The expression full-wave is used because the current en each a.c. supply line, although not
necessarily symmetrical, is in fact alternating. The full-wave circuits are more commonly called bridges
circuits.
The control characteristics of various circuits may be divided broadly into on of the three categories:
 Uncontrolled
 Fully-controlled
 Half-controlled
The uncontrolled rectifier circuits contain only diodes, giving a d.c. load voltage fixed in magnitude relative to
the a.c. supply voltage magnitude.
A1 Appendix
In the fully-controlled circuits all the rectifying elements are thyristors. In these circuits, by suitable control of
the phase angle at which the thyristor are turned on, it is possible to control the mean (d.c) value of, and to
reverse, the d.c. load voltage. The fully controlled circuit is often described as a bi-directional converter, as it
permits power flow in either direction :
 between supply and load : rectifier

 between load and supply : inverter
D1 D3 D5
S
LOAD
T
D4 D6 D2
Fig. 9 – Three phases full-wave circuit using diodes
T1 T3 T5
S
LOAD
T
T4 T6 T2
Fig. 10 – Three phases full-wave / fully controlled circuit using thyristors
Pulse number is a way of describing the output characteristic of a give circuit, and defines the repetition rate
in the direct voltage waveform over one cycle of the a.c supply. For example, a six-pulse circuit has in its
output a ripple of repetition rate six times the input frequency, that is, the fundamental ripple frequency is 300
Hz (360 Hz) given a 50 Hz (60 Hz) supply.
A1 - 10 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
THREE - PHASE UNCONTROLLED BRIDGES
In the three phase bridge connection the load is fed by a three-phase half-wave connection, the return path
being by another half-wave connection to one of the three supply lines, no neutral connection is required.
The circuit diagram is usually drawn as shown in Fig. 11.
D1 D3 D5 iL
VR
VS
N LOAD vL
VT
D4 D6 D2
Fig. 11 – Three-Phase Uncontrolled Diodes Bridge
The converter is uncontrolled, using diodes. It is assumed that the load is an ohmic resistance and the
supply and ideal voltage source. In the first period the voltage VRS is positive with respect to the forward
direction of diodes D1 an D6, so that the diodes are conducting. All the other diodes are in the blocking
state, the voltage VRS is thus applied to the load resistance.
D1 D3 D5 iL
VR iD1
VS
N LOAD vL
VT
D4 D6 D2
iD6
Fig. 12 – Thee-Phase Diodes Bridge D1 D6 conducting path.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 11
A1 Appendix
Fig. 13 – Current Diode D1
In the second period the voltage VRT (-VTR) attains the highest value, and since it is positive with respect to
diodes D1 and D2, the current is now carried by these. The previously conducting diode D6 blocks. The load
resistance is supplied from the voltage VRT. The direction of current in the load does not change and the
current IL repeats the waveform of the first period. Each period lasts 60° el, or one-sixth of a cycle, so that in
one cycle the circuit passes through six different switching conditions. There are always two diodes carrying
current simultaneously. Each diode conducts for two consecutive periods The conduction period of the
diode is therefore 120° el (one-third of the cycle. In the load, the current waveform is the same in every
period. The dc voltage (load voltage) vL is composed of an envelope of the voltage peaks (Fig.18). Since the
load is resistive, the voltage waveform vL is similar to that of the current IL.
A1 - 12 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
D1 D3 D5 iL
VR iD1
VS
N LOAD vL
VT
D4 D6 D2
iD2
Fig. 15 – Three-phase Diodes Bridge D1 D2 conducting path
In one cycle the dc voltage exhibits six pulses. The circuit operates in a six-pulse mode. The converter
functions as a six-pulse rectifier.
Although the supply is shown as start-connected, a delta connection can equally well be used,
The six-pulse three-phase bridge ideal d.c.voltage Vdio (Fig.18) is given by :
120
1 3 3 2
Vdio  Vdc  VLoad 
 
60
sin tdt  Vm 
 
V  1.35V
3
where:
Vm  2V [Vpeak] Line peak voltage
V [Vrms] Line phase to phase rms voltage
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 13
A1 Appendix
As two diodes are in series with the load, the mean value is reduced by the two diodes voltage drop.
With resistive load the mean direct current Id0

3
Id 0  Idc  Iload  Im

where:
Vm 2V
Im  
Rload Rload
The mean diode (thyristor) current IThAV is obtained from the direct current:
1
IThAV  Id 0
3
since the diode (thyristor) conducts for one-cycle.
The r.m.s value of the diode (thyristor) current IThrms is:
1
IThrms  Id 0
3
The maximum diode (thyristor) blocking voltage VThm (Fig.19) is the peak value of the source (line) voltage
Vm:
VThm  Vm
Fig. 17 – Voltage at the top/bottom of the load relative to the supply neutral N
A1 - 14 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
Fig. 18 – Load voltage Vdc
Fig. 19 – Blocking Voltage Diode D1
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 15
A1 Appendix
Fig. 20 – Line Current Phase R (IR)
Fig. 20 shows the a.c. supply current IR=ID1-ID4 (phase R) to be symmetrical, but of a quasi-square shape.
The r.m.s value of the (rectilinear wave) a.c. supply current is given by:
2
Irms  Id 0
3
A1 - 16 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
CONVERTER SUPPLYING TRANSFORMER EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT
Usually the three-phase supply for the converter is provided through a transformer. If a transformer, with the
primary side connected to the supply line, it is short circuited on the secondary, a current Ik flows in the short
circuit, in the steady states Ik I much greater than the nominal current. The short-circuited transformer is
equivalent to the supply as an inductance Lk (with a reactance Xk = Lk). The short circuit reactance is
calculated as the ratio of the secondary voltage Vsec and the short circuit current Ik.
V sec
Xk 
3 Ik
D1 D3 D5 iL
VR LR
Xk
VS LS
LOAD vL
Xk
VT LT
Xk
D4 D6 D2
Fig. 21 – Transformer-converter equivalent circuit
Each transformer has its specified short-circuit voltage uk The short circuit voltage uk is a primary voltage
expressed in terms of the rated primary voltage Vp. When the transformer with secondary short-circuited is
supplied with this voltage on the primary side, the current loading the transformer corresponds exactly to the
rated current IN,
The short circuit current Ik of the transformer, referred to the nominal current IN, is equal to the reciprocal of
the short circuit voltage uk (uk = 10% - Ik = 10 IN). The short circuit reactance Xk is directly proportional to the
short circuit voltage uk. The short circuit inductance Lk of the transformer is taken into account in the
derivation of the equivalent circuit of the three-phase system supplying the converter. This is shown in
Fig.22.
The transformer equivalent circuit consists of three ideal voltage sources, corresponding to the value of the
nominal secondary voltage of the transformer and three linear reactances Xk. Only the short-circuit
reactance of the transformer is considered, the ohmic resistance is neglected. The equivalent reactance and
inductance are given by :
V ukV Xk
Xk   Lk 
3 Ik 3 IN 
PRIMARY SECONDARY
WINDING WINDING
VR R R VR Lk
Ik Ik
SUPPLY
CIRCUIT
SHORT
SUPPLY
V=Vsec V=Vsec
VS
CIRCUIT
SHORT
VS S S Lk
VT T T VT Lk
TRANSFORMER
TRANSFORMER CIRCUIT EQUIVALENT CIRCUIT
Fig. 22 – Converter supplying transformer equivalent circuit
The transformer-converter equivalent circuit is the one shown in Fig.21
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 17
A1 Appendix
THREE - PHASE UNCONTROLLED BRIDGES WITH INDUCTIVE SUPPLY
In the chapter THREE-PHASE UNCONTROLLED BRIGES the basic characteristics of the common
rectifying circuits were introduced, ignoring the effect of the a.c. supply impedance and concentrating only on
the characteristics of the circuits as rectifiers. In this chapter, the analysis of those circuits will be widened to
include the effects of the supply impedance.
In the above mentioned chapter, the assumption was made the transfer of commutation of the current from
one diode (or thyristor) to the next takes place instantaneously. In practice, inductance and resistance are
present in the supply source (usually the supply line and a step-down transformer), and time is required for a
current change to take place. The net result is that the current commutation is delayed , as it takes a finite
time for the current to decay to zero in the switching off diode (or thyristor), whilst the current will rise at the
same rate in the switching on diode (or thyristor).
The inductive reactance of the a.c. supply is normally much greater than its resistance and, as it is the
inductance which delays the current change, it is reasonable to neglect the supply equivalent resistance. As
explained in the previous chapter, the a.c. supply may be represented by its Thevenin equivalent circuit,
each phase being a voltage source in series with its inductance. The major contributor to the supply
impedance is the transformer leakage reactance.
With reference to Fig.23, diode D1 and D2 are conducting, the next diode in the switching converter
sequence is D3, the commutation from D1 to D3 doesn’t take place instantaneously but takes the time for
the current iD1 to decay to zero and for the current iD3 to reach the load current value id.
During the commutation time three diodes are conducting D1, D3 and D2. The relative circuits is shown in
Fig.24, the commutation equivalent circuit is shown in Fig. 25.
D1 D3 D5 iL=iD
iD1
VR LR
Lk
VS LS
LOAD vL=vd
Lk
VT LT
Lk
D4 D6 D2
iD2
Fig. 23 – Converter circuit during normal operation D1 D2 in conduction
A1 - 18 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
D1 D3 D5 iL=iD
iD1 iD3
VR LR
Lk
VS LS
LOAD vL=vd
Lk
VT LT
Lk
D4 D6 D2
iD2
Fig. 24 – Converter circuit during commutation from D1 to D3
D1 D3
L iD1=id-ik iD3=ik
2Lk
Fig. 25 – Commutation D1-D3 equivalent circuit

During the commutation period the equivalent circuit of Fig.25 now applies. Two phases (R and S) of the
transformer are short-circuited through the simultaneously conducting diodes 1 and 2. The (short circuit)
current ik increases in diode D3, while the current in diode D1 decreases. The current iD1, consisting of the
difference between id and ik (iD1=id - ik). falls and reaches zero at angle t1. The current ik is driven by the
voltage VRS and limited by two short-circuit inductance 2Lk.
Fig. 26 – Commutation D1-D3 currents waveform
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 19
A1 Appendix
At instant t1 diode 1 blocks and conduction is assumed by diode 3, diode 2 continue to conduct. The
converter remain in this condition (Fig. 27) until t2 is reached, diode D4 turns on. The transformer is again
short circuited across two phases trough diode 2 and diode 4, the current in diode 2 falls and at t2 diode 4
assumes the total flow of the current (Fig.30).
The transfer of current from one diode (thyristor) of the converter to another is termed commutation. During
commutation three diode (thyristor) are conducting. The period of commutation is defined as commutation
angle  ( overlap angle in electrical degree).
In an ideal circuit without inductance, commutation takes place in an infinitesimal time ( = 0). The circuit
conditions the change instantaneously (Fig. 16).
The load current iL=ID is shown in Fig.30
D1 D3 D5 iL=iD
VR LR iD3
Lk
VS LS
LOAD vL=vd
Lk
VT LT
Lk
D4 D6 D2
iD2
Fig. 27 – Converter circuit during normal operation D2 D3 in conduction
D1 D3 D5 iL=iD
VR LR iD3
Lk
VS LS
LOAD vL=vd
Lk
VT LT
Lk
D4 D6 D2
iD4 iD2
Fig. 28 – Converter circuit during commutation from D2 to D4
A1 - 20 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
D2 D4
L iD2=id-ik iD4=ik
2Lk
Fig. 29 – Commutation D2-D4 equivalent circuit
t2
Fig. 30 – Commutation D2-D4 currents waveform
Fig. 31 – Load Current
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 21
A1 Appendix
Fig. 32 shows the direct vd or load voltage vL in the uncontrolled three-phase bridge.The switching state of
the converter alternates, either two diodes (thyristors) or three (during commutation ) conduct
simultaneously. During commutation one valve takes over the current from another (D3 from D1). The
current ik flowing during the commutation is related to the short circuit current of the transformer. During
commutation there is in fact a limited short circuit across the transformer (or supply line), the short-circuit
current ik rises only to the level of the direct current Id.
Fig. 32 – Direct Voltage vd
Fig. 33 shows that during the commutation interval (overlap angle ) the instantaneous direct voltage vd
follows a sine wave with amplitude
3
Id Vm
2
where:

A1 - 22 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
During the normal conduction interval the instantaneous direct voltage vd is equal to the highest of the
source voltages Vm.
Fig. 33 – Detail of Direct Voltage during commutation
The mean direct voltage Vd is reduced from the ideal no-load voltage
3 3 2
Vdio  Vm  V
 
by a voltage drop Vdx, The converter behaves like a voltage source Vdio with an internal resistance.
Fig. 34 – Detail of diodes current during commutation
During commutation the commutating current (Fig. 34) is derived from the prospective short-circuit current:
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 23
A1 Appendix
where:
Vm
Im 
2 Xk
V uk V k V 2 k V 2
Xk     Xk  Lk
3 Ik 3 IN 3VIN St
V = Secondary phase to phase line voltage
IN = Rated Transformer Current
Ik = Three phase short circuit current
uk = Transformer short circuit voltage
St = 3VIN Transformer apparent power
Once the commutation is completed, after an interval t=/ , the commutation current reached the level of
the direct current Id
ik (  )  Im(1  cos  )  Id
The overlap angle is given by:

Id
  a cos(1  )
Im
The above equation is valid only for:
0    60
Fig. 35 – Commutation Voltage Time Integral
A1 - 24 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
The commutating current Ik induces a voltage vLk in the reactance Xk. The resulting voltage-time integral Ax,
reduces the mean direct voltage by a mean inductive voltage drop Vx:
Vd  Vdio  Vx
It can be demonstrated that :
3 3
Vx  Ax  IdXk
 
then:
3 2 3
Vd  V IdXk
 
The above formula can be expressed in per unit term as follows:
V V
Xk  XkpuXN XN  Xk  Xkpu
3 IN 3 IN
where:
V line to line voltage [Vrms]
IN line nominal current [Arms]
Id direct current [Adc]
The relationship between the dc current and the line ac current is given by:
3 2
IdN  IN IN  IdN  0.816 IdN
2 3
then:
3 X k 3 V 3 Id 3 2
Id  Xkpu  VXkpuIpu
  3 2 IdN 
where:
Id
Idpu  dc current expressed in p.u. notation
IdN
The dc voltage Vd expressed in pu of dc current and reactance is given by:
3 2 1
Vd  V (1  XkpuIdpu )
 2
In a similar way, it can be demonstrated that the commutation angle  expressed in pu of dc current and
reactance is given by :
  arccos(1  XkpuIdpu )
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 25
A1 Appendix
THREE - PHASE FULLY CONTROLLED BRIDGES WITH INDUCTIVE SUPPLY
The three-phase diode bridge introduced in the previous chapters can be made into a fully controlled bridge
by making all six rectifying elements thyristors as shown in Fig. 36. The mean load voltage Vd in now
controllable by delaying the natural instant of commutation of the thyristor by the firing delay angle 
The control system produces the triggering pulses necessary for the thyristors. These control pulses are
then conveyed to the gates of the thyristors by means of optical or magnetic pulse couplers. So as long as
the thyristors is supporting positive voltage and the current path is completed, the thyristor can be triggered
by the control pulses and will turn on.
T1 T3 T5 iL=iD
VR LR
Lk
VS LS
LOAD vL=vd
Lk
VT LT
Lk
T4 T6 T2
Fig. 36 – Three-Phase Fully Controlled Thyristor Bridge
The converter is fully controlled, using thyristors. It is assumed that the load is an ohmic resistance in series
with an inductance. In the first period when the voltage VRS is positive with respect to the forward direction of
thyristors T1 and T6 and has the higher values with respect to the other phase to phase voltages , so that
the thyristor T1 could be conducting when a trigger pulse is applied to the gate. Fig 38 shows that the
thyristor T1 conduction state is delayed by an angle  = 30° with respect to the natural instant of
commutation (refer to the equivalent diodes figure Fig.13). It is assumed that thyristor T6 is already in
conduction.
T1 T3 T5 iL=iD
VR LR
Lk
VS LS
LOAD vL=vd
Lk
VT LT
Lk
T4 T6 T2
Fig. 37 – Three-Phase Thyristor Bridge T1 T6 conduction path
A1 - 26 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
Fig. 38 – Current Thyristor T1
In the second period the voltage VRT (-VTR) attains the highest value, and since it is positive with respect to
the thyristors T1 and T2, the current is now carried by these only when a trigger pulse is applied to the gate
of T2 (after a delay  with respect to the natural instant of commutation, the previously conducting thyristor
T6 blocks. When both thyristor are in conduction the load is supplied from the voltage VRT. The direction of
the current in the load doesn’t change and the current Id repeats the waveform of the first period. Each
period lasts 60° el. Or one-sixth of a cycle, so that in one cycle the circuit passes through six different
switching conditions. There are always two thyristors carrying current simultaneously. Each thyristor
conducts for two consecutive periods. The conduction period of each thyristor is therefore 120° el (one third
of the cycle).
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 27
A1 Appendix
T1 T3 T5 iL=iD
VR LR
Lk
VS LS
LOAD vL=vd
Lk
VT LT
Lk
T4 T6 T2
Fig. 40 – Three-Phase Thyristor Bridge T1 T2 conducting path
The control pulses are synchronized to the supply voltage, In each period, the thyristors receive two control
pulses, separated by 60°, the reason of doing this is that a problem arises with the thyristor bridge circuit
that was not present in the diodes bridge circuit, and that is the one of starting. When connected to the a.c.
supply, firing gate pulses will be delivered to the thyristors in the correct sequence but, if only a single firing
gate pulse is used, no current will flow, as the other thyristor in the current path will be in the off-state.
Hence, in order to start the circuit functioning, two thyristors must be fired at the same time in order to
commence current flow. With reference to Fig.40, let’s suppose the supply is connected when VR is at its
peak value, T1 has not been fired, the next firing pulse will be to thyristor T2. However, thyristor T2 will not
conduct u7nless at the same time thyristor T1 is pulsed, as reference to the waveform shows these are the
two thyristors conducting at that instant. Hence for starting purposes, the firing circuit must produce a firing
pulse 60° after its firs pulse. Once the circuit is running normally, the second pulse will have no effect, as the
thyristor will already be in the on-state.
A1 - 28 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
The reference point for the timing of the first pulses (triggering angle ) is the natural turning-on point that
would be experienced by diodes, thus operating with triggering angle  = o° corresponds to that of an
uncontrolled diode bridge.
The phase-shifting of the triggering pulses – the variation of the triggering or firing angle  - can readily be
effected by an external control signal. The effect of shifting the triggering pulses, as will be explained further,
is to vary the output voltage of the converter. In a power control system, the converter functions as a
regulator or an amplifier.
CONTROL OF DIRECT VOLTAGE Vd
The converter functions as a d.c. voltage source. The principal converter parameter is the mean value of the
direct voltage Vd, measured at the d.c. terminals. The maximum mean direct voltage of the controlled three-
phase bridge is obtained on no-load in the full-output condition ( = 0°), corresponding to diodes rectifier
operation. This value is designated as the ideal no-load direct voltage Vdio and is simply related to the
transformer voltage V :
3 3 2
Vdio  Vm  V
 
The converter cannot supply a higher voltage. A reduction of the direct voltage Vd can effected by the control
by means of the firing angle . This is illustrated with the aid of the Fig. 42 – 45.
The output condition  = 0° corresponds to the operation of the uncontrolled converter (with diodes). The
direct voltage vd is formed of the envelope of the positive and negative line voltages ( theoretically the mean
value Vd=Vdio is only about 5% (3/) of the line voltage peak amplitude.
The maximum voltage to which the thyristors are subjected (Vth1) in the reverse direction is the peak value
(2 V) of the line voltage. The conduction period of each thyristor is 120° (one-third cycle) and the amplitude
of the thyristor current IT is equal to the load current Id. The line (transformer current) is composed by two
consecutive (one positive, the other one negative) thyristor current pulse (Fig. 46).
As the control pulses are shifted to the right ( Fig. 43-45, the figures show only the first pulse, the thyristors
are triggered with a delay  relative to the natural switching instant. During the delay period  the direct
voltage vd follows the falling line voltage. At the instant of triggering, after the thyristors commutation, the
direct voltage vd follows the next line voltage sine wave, the same process is repeated six time per cycle.
As result of the triggering delay the mean value of the direct voltage Vd is reduced. When  reaches 90° the
mean direct voltage is equal to zero. In this case the direct voltage vd is actually an alternating voltage, of six
times the supply frequency. The thyristor is subjected to positive and negative voltages.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 29
A1 Appendix
RECTIFIER CONTROL CHARACTERISTIC WITHOUT COMMUTATION
The mean value of the ideal direct voltage (without commutation) of the fully controlled three-phase bridge is
given by:
3 2V 120 3 2
Vdi 
 
60
sin tdt 

V cos 
Since:
3 3 2
Vdio  Vm  V
 
Then:
Vdi  Vdio cos 
Fig. 47 shows the graphical representation of the above equation expressed in relative terms of Vdi / Vdio ,
this curve represents the control characteristic of the three-phase bridge.
The mean thyristor current IThAV is obtained from the direct current:
1
IThAV  Id
3
The r.m.s value of the thyristor current IThrms is:
1
IThrms  Id
3
The r.m.s value of the (rectilinear wave) a.c. supply current is given by:
2
Irms  Id
3
Fig. 42 – Direct Voltage vd -  = 0°
A1 - 30 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
Fig. 43 – Direct Voltage vd Vd -  = 30°
Fig. 44 - Direct Voltage vd Vd -  = 60°
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 31
A1 Appendix
Fig. 45 - Direct Voltage vd Vd -  = 90°
Fig. 46 – Line Current ILR -  = 0°
Fig. 47 – Rectifier Control characteristic of the three-phase bridge
A1 - 32 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
RECTIFIER CONTROL CHARACTERISTIC WITH COMMUTATION
By phase-shifting the control pulses the delay angle  of the converter is varied, which, as shown in a
simplified way from Fig. 42 to Fig.45, varies the direct voltage vd . In the ideal case (without commutation)
the mean value of the direct voltage is given by Vd=Vdio cos . The maximum obtainable peak value of the
direct voltage is approximately equal to the amplitude of the line voltage Vdio=(3/)2V.
With  = 90° the mean value Vd is zero, but the terminal voltage of the converter is not zero (Fig. 45), but is
an alternating voltage of triangular waveform.
Commutation, the transfer of current from one thyristor to another, causes a reduction of the direct voltage.
Fig. 35 shows the voltage-time integral (Ax) lost through commutation in the case of uncontrolled converter,
the mean voltage drop is proportional to the direct current Id and to the commutation reactance Xk:
3 3
 
This rule applies also to the fully controlled converter. With constant current loading, therefore, the voltage
drop Vx is independent of the delay angle. With a constant triggering angle, for any value of , the direct
voltage Vd falls linearly with increasing load current.
The direct voltage of a controlled three-phase bridge with commutation can be calculated as follows:
Vd  Vdio cos   Vx

where:
3 3 2
Vdio  Vm  V
 
and
3 3
 
then:
3 2 3
Vd  V cos   IdXk
 
 delay angle [°el]
Xk =  Lk commutating reactance []
During commutation the commutating current (Fig. 34) is derived from the prospective short-circuit current:
ik  Im(cos   cos(  t ))
where:
Vm 2V V
Im   
2 Xk 2 Xk 2 Xk
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 33
A1 Appendix
During the period t =  the current Ik reaches the level of the direct current Id, and therefore
Id  Im(cos   cos(   ))
or
V
Id  (cos   cos(   ))
2 Xk
From the above equation:

2 XkId
cos(   )  cos  
V
or
2 X kId
  arc(cos   ) 
V
The above equation establishes the relationship of the overlap angle  to the delay angle  and the load
current Id. All the equation given above are valid only for  < 60*
The above formula can be expressed in per unit term as follows:
V V
Xk  XkpuXN XN  Xk  Xkpu
3 IN 3 IN
where:
IN line nominal current [Arms]
The relationship between the dc current and the line ac current is given by:
3 2
IdN  IN IN  IdN  0.816 IdN
2 3
then:
3 X k 3 V 3 Id 3 2
Id  Xkpu  VXkpuIpu
  3 2 IdN 
where:
Id
Idpu  dc current expressed in p.u. notation
IdN
The dc voltage Vd expressed in pu of dc current and reactance is given by:
3 2 1
Vd  V (cos   XkpuIdpu )
 2
In a similar way, it can be demonstrated that the commutation angle  expressed in pu of dc current and
reactance is given by :
A1 - 34 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000230691B
Fig. 48 – Mathematical relationships in the fully controlled three-phases bridge
A1 Appendix
A1 - 35
A1 - 36
A1 Appendix
Fig. 49 – Typical current and voltage waveforms in a controlled three-phase rectifier bridge
Fig. 49 illustrates the current and voltage waveforms in the fully controlled three-phase bridge with
commutation. The delay angle  is equal to 30° and the load current Id is assumed to be smooth. The most
important formulae are summarized in Fig. 48.
If we assume a load consisting of a d.c. source E and an inductance L the converter reaches a steady-state
condition when the mean direct voltage Vd is equal to the back voltage E. The direct current Id can only flow if
the output voltage Vdi is higher than E. The greater the difference (Vdi – E), the higher is the steady-state
current.
The direct current Id from the converter depends upon the delay angle  and the back voltage E. If the back
voltage is higher than the no-load voltage Vdio no current can flow in the converter. With no back voltage
(E=0) the current reaches the short circuit level. If there is a back-voltage, for the same delay angle, the
current becomes smaller. The same current can be obtained with different delay angles and back-voltages,
With a given back-voltage, a different direct current can be obtained with a different delay angle .
The way in which the mean direct voltage Vd varies with direct current can be seen in the load diagram
Vd=f(Id) of the controlled three-phase bridge is shown in Fig. 50. It is related to the steady-state conditions
of the converter. The converter is functioning as a rectifier over the whole range. Fig.50 shows the
relationship of the direct voltage Vd (relative to the no-load direct voltage Vdio) to the load current (relative to
the nominal direct current IdN and multiplied by the short circuit reactance Xkpu). The overlap  angle it is also
shown foe two values (60° and 30°).
The load diagram shows three distinct operating regions. In the first region the direct voltage Vd falls linearly
and the overlap angle  increases up to 60°. In the second region, the overlap remains constant, =60°, and
the current-voltage characteristic lies on an arc of circle. In the last region the voltage again falls linearly with
increasing current up to the short-circuit condition (E=0). The overlap angle increases from 60° to 120°.
The load characteristic of the controlled three-phase bridge are linear so long as the overlap (commutation)
angle  is less than 60°. The critical value =60° lies on a semicircle in the relative load diagram,
overstepping this limit leads to instability phenomena and to double commutation. The maximum direct
current occurs with Vd = 0 and  = 30 °. The maximum direct current Id is equal to the amplitude of the
symmetrical short-circuit current of the transformer:
2V
Idk 
3 Xk
or in relative terms:
Id  1.15 IdN
Fig. 50 – Rectifier Load Characteristic
A1 - 37 SILCOVERT S -
2MU10002306914B
A1 Appendix
INVERTER CONTROL CHARACTERISTIC WITH COMMUTATION
The fully controlled bridge can fulfill two different functions: either rectification of an alternating voltage or the
inversion of a direct voltage. It can be stated that:
In a rectifier energy is transmitted from the a.c. voltage source to the d.c. voltage source (Fig.51). In inverter
energy is supplied in the reverse direction from the d.c. voltage source to the a.c. voltage source (Fig.52).
To reverse the direction of energy flow, the polarity of the dc voltage source must be reversed and the
inverter suitable controlled. The direction of the current flow is not changed.
The control of the inverter is achieved by mean of the delay angle . It has be shown ( Fig.47 ) that for 0° < 
< 90° the output voltage is positive, when  = 90° the mean direct voltage is equal to zero. Beyond 90° the
mean voltage is negative and the bridge operation can only be maintained in the presence of a d.c. power
supply. Fig. 53 shows the complete control characteristic of the fully controlled three-phase bridge.
Fig.54 shows some typical waveform of inverter operation with  =145°, the thyristors are triggered with a
delay  relative to the natural switching instant. During the delay period  the direct voltage vd follows the
falling line voltages. At the instant of triggering, after the thyristor commutation, the direct voltage vd follows
the next line voltage sine wave, the same process is repeated six time per cycle.
Fig.55 shows typical current and voltage waveforms in a controlled three-phase inverter bridge, Comparing
Fig.49 with Fig.55 it may be noticed that in the rectifier mode the thyristors support predominantly negative
voltage, in the inverter mode, positive voltage.
The turning-off of the thyristors is in both cases accomplished by the a.c. voltage source the supply. In both
rectifier and inverter operation, the converter is supplying-commutating, the commutation can be seen as
natural.
Without an alternating voltage supply, the inverter with natural commutation (in contrast to the forced
commutation inverter) cannot produce an a.c. output. The bi-directional flow of energy can thus take place
only between two actual voltage sources (a.c. and d.c)
The dual function of the converter can be clearly seen in d.c. motor drives:
 In the rectifier mode the converter drives the machine as motor

 When the d.c. machine functions, during braking, as generator the converter functions
as an inverter
In the steady-state condition of the converter the mean direct voltage Vd corresponds to the back-voltage E
of the load. With a variable back-voltage the direct current can be held constant by suitable control of the
delay angle. This applies not only on the case of positive direct voltage but also with negative voltage.
With the direct current held constant, the direct voltage is changed from a positive to a negative direction by
the control. In the process, the back voltage E must always be varied to mach the mean direct voltage Vd. It
can be noticed that the voltage can reverse with the direction of current unchanged. Accordingly the power
P, being the product of direct current and direct voltage, changes it sign. The converter functions as an
inverter. The flow of power is directed from d.c. source to the a.c. source.
In the rectifier operating mode the maximum direct voltage is produced, for a given delay angle , with
minimum load current (Id  0). With increasing current the voltage falls. In the inverter operating condition, in
contrast, the (negative) direct voltage increases with increasing current loading. The (negative) voltage drop
dx is added to the (negative) direct voltage. The positive direct voltage Vdi (rectifier operation) is reduced by
the inductive voltage drop, whereas the negative direct voltage Vdi (inverter operation) is increased.
A1 - 38 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
iL=iD
T1 T3 T5
VR LR
Ldc
Lk
VS LS
vL=vd
Lk
VT LT
Vdc E
Lk
T4 T6 T2
RECTIFIER ENERGY
Fig. 51 – Rectifier Energy Flow
iL=iD
T1 T3 T5
VR LR
Ldc
Lk
VS LS
Lk
vL=vd
VT LT
Vdc E
Lk
T4 T6 T2
INVERTER ENERGY
Fig. 52 – Inverter Energy Flow
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 39
A1 Appendix
Fig. 53 – Rectifier/Inverter Control characteristic of the three-phase bridge
Fig. 54 – Direct voltage vd -  = 145°
A1 - 40 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
Fig. 55 – Typical current and voltage waveforms in a controlled three-phase inverter
A1 Appendix
A1 - 41
A1 Appendix
LIMIT OF INVERTER OPERATION
As the current rises, the inverter voltage cannot increase indefinitely. It can be observed that, initially, the
inductive voltage drop increases with the direct current, and so, therefore does the mean direct voltage. The
voltage drop is caused by the commutation, and is proportional to the direct current Id. During commutation,
one valve takes over the current from another. Commutation is complete when the first conducting thyristor
turns off. This can only happen when the commutation current passes through zero.
Beyond a certain current limit the commutation current Ik does not fall to zero, so that the current cannot be
transferred to the next thyristor. The first thyristor continue to conduct and commutation is not achieved. The
inverter lapses into a short circuit condition and is no longer controllable (commutation failure).
Fig. 56 shows that the theoretical limit of inverter control is reached when
    180
The overlap angle  is a function of the direct current Id and the delay angle . For any particular angle 
there is a corresponding value of the direct current Id which satisfies the condition +=180°.
2 X kId
  arc(cos   ) 
V
Fig. 56 – Inverter Commutation
A1 - 42 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000133204B
A1 Appendix
Fig.57 illustrates the complete load diagram of the converter for rectifier and inverter operation. The
characteristics, with delay angle  as parameter run smoothly from rectifier into inverter operation. The
diagram is accurate only for steady state (or slowly varying) conditions.
In the inverter operation (Fig.56), sometimes is more convenient to use the angle of advance  :
  180  
also
   
where  is the extinction angle.
It is most important to realize that the range over which inversion can be achieved is limited by point A as
shown in Fig. 56, Beyond point A the current cannot be made to commutate from thyristor 1 to thyristor 3 as
the voltage across the thyristor becomes positive.
The angle  cannot be made equal to zero for two reasons:
a) In practice there will be a finite commutation angle , and  must be made at least equal to it.
b) A sufficient time must be allowed after commutation has been completed for the thyristor to turn
off (refer to the section dedicated to the thyristors).
So an extinction angle 0 must be introduced at least equal in time to the thyristor turn off time tq. The angle
0 is known also as margin angle. For a safe commutation:
 0  tq
where
tq thyristor turn off time
 = 2f line pulsation
This puts a limit to the maximum angle of firing
    (    0)
Moreover, there is a fundamental difference between rectifier and inverter operations which prevents an
optimal firing condition in the latter case. While the rectifier delay angle  can be chosen accurately to satisfy
a particular control constraint, the same is not possible with respect to the angle  because of uncertainty of
the overlap angle . Event taking place after the instant of firing are beyond predictability and, therefore, the
minimum extinction angle 0 must contain a margin of safety to cope with reasonable uncertainties.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 43
A1 Appendix
Rectifier and Inverter Load Characteristic
1,20
1,00
0,80
0,60 

0,40 

0,20 

Vd/Vdio

0,00

0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 1 1,2

-0,20


-0,40 

-0,60 
-0,80
-1,00
-1,20
Xkpu*Id/IdN
Fig. 57 – Rectifier and Inverter Complete Load Characteristic
A1 - 44 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
The mathematical analysis of the inverter operation is not different from that of the rectifier. The direct
voltage of a controlled inverter three-phase bridge with commutation can be calculated as follows:
3 2 3
Vd  V cos   IdXk 90    180
 
 delay angle [°el]
Xk =  Lk commutating reactance []
For convenience the inverter equations are often expressed in terns of angle of advance  = 180°- or the
extinction angle  = -. Thus the following expressions apply:
3 2 3 3 2 3
Vd   V cos   IdXk  ( V cos   IkX k ) 0    90
   
3 2 3 3 2 3
Vd   V cos   IdXk  ( V cos   IdXk ) 
   
or
13 2
Vd   V (cos   cos  )
2 
The expression for the direct current is
V
Id  (cos   cos  )
2 Xk
The above equations enables an equivalent circuit to be set up to represent the behaviour of the rectifier and
inverter on the dc side. This is shown in Fig. 58 and Fig. 59. The element Rc does not represent an ohmic
resistance and no heat losses are associated with it. The term Id Rc stands for the voltage drop due to the
commutation.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 45
A1 Appendix
3
Rc  Xk
 Id
3 2 Vd
V cos 

Fig. 58 – Rectifier Equivalent Circuit
Id
Vd 3 2
V cos 

3
Rc   Xk

Id
Vd
3 2
V cos 

Fig. 59 – Inverter Equivalent Circuits
A1 - 46 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
Fig. 60 shows the inverter characteristic where the delay angle  is replaced by , the inverter characteristics
looks like a mirror image of that of the rectifier
Fig. 60 – Inverter Load Characteristic function of  angle
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 47
A1 Appendix
5 DOUBLE BRIDGE CONVERTER
GENERAL
The fully controlled three-phase bridge with thyristor can function as a rectifier or as an inverter (Fig. 51 and
Fig.52). The converter can, by suitable control, reverse the polarity of the direct voltage, but not the direction
of the direct current.
Two three-phase bridges decoupled on the dc side by and inductor can interconnect two three-phase
systems of different frequencies and voltages, and provide for an exchange of energy in the two directions.
This double-bridge circuit is known also as dc link converter (Fig.61).
RECTIFIER DC REACTOR
INVERTER
Idc
LINE Ldc
T4 T6 T2
T1 T3 T5
TCV L1 Lk L1(R) U(R) LU Lk"

CB
L2 Lk L2(S) V(S) LV Lk"
SM FIELD
L3 Lk L3(T) W(T) LW Lk"
T1 T3 T5
SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR f2
SUPPLY f1 T4 T6 T2
Fig. 61 – Dc Link Converter
The three-phase bridges may also be connected in series. The direct voltage is then doubled. At the same
time, by using a star-delta transformer connection, it is possible to obtain twelve-pulse converter operation,
with reduction in harmonics.
DC REACTOR
RECTIFIER Idc INVERTER
Ldc T4 T6 T2
T1 T3 T5
L1 Lk L1(R)
L2 Lk L2(S)
LINE L3 Lk L3(T) T4 T6 T2
y U(R) LU Lk"
CB
T4 T6 T2 V(S) LV Lk"
TCV SM
D LW Lk"
FIELD
T1 T3 T5
W(T)
d L1 Lk L1(R) T1 T3 T5
L2 Lk L2(S)
L3 Lk L3(T)
T1 T3 T5
T4 T6 T2
Fig. 62 – Twelve-pulse converter
A1 - 48 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
DC LINK CONVERTER
The dc link converter consists of two fully controlled three-phases bridges decoupled by an inductor in the
d.c. circuit. The circuit is known as d.c. link converter, because a direct current Idc, smoothed by the inductor
Ldc, flows between the two bridges (Fig.63).
The operation of the dc link converter is based upon simultaneous current and voltage loading of both
bridges. One bridges functions as a rectifier, the other as an inverter.
INVERTER
Idc
LINE Ldc
T4 T6 T2
T1 T3 T5
TCV L1 Lk L1(R)
VdREC U(R) IMU LU Lk"
CB
L2 Lk IL2 L2(S) V(S) LV Lk"
SM FIELD
L3 Lk L3(T) W(T) IMV LW Lk"
IL3 VdINV
T1 T3 T5
SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR f2
SUPPLY f1 T4 T6 T2
Idc
Fig. 63 – DC Link Converter Operation
Fig. 64 – DC Link Load Characteristic
Fig. 64 illustrates the operation of the fully controlled d.c. link converter in case where the two three-phase
systems are similar (same frequency, voltage and short circuit reactances).
The operating point of the inverter is taken to be with  = 145°.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 49
A1 Appendix
The delay angle of the rectifier then has to be set at 18° to obtain the required current at the given voltage.
The rectifier (vdREC) and inverter (vdINV) direct voltage waveforms, the rectifier (VdREC) and inverter (VdINV)
average values (straight lines) and the line (VLST) and motor (VMRS) alternating voltages are shown on
Fig.65.
Fig. 65 – DC Link Converter Direct Voltages
The dc link current (id) waveform, the average value (Id) of the dc current (straight line), the line (iLS) and
motor (iMR) phase currents are shown on Fig. 66.
The two three-phase systems connected by the d.c. link converter can be of quite different frequencies and
short-circuits reactances, and also of unequal voltages.
Fig.67 shows the currents in the dc link converter fir a case in which the two three-phase systems have
frequency of 50 Hz (rectifier) and 52.5 Hz (inverter). The alternating currents ILS of the rectifier and iRM of the
inverter, and the direct current iDC, are modulated at six time the frequency of both ac systems (300Hz and
315Hz). If the frequency of the two ac systems are only slightly different (as in our case), beats are
noticeable in the direct current. In Fig. 67 is shown the beat frequency which frequency is six time the
difference of the two systems frequency:
Fb  6( Finv  Frec)  6(52.5  50.0)  15 Hz
A1 - 50 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
Fig. 66 – DC Link Converter Direct Current
Fig. 67 – DC Link Converter Coupling two different frequency systems
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 51
A1 Appendix
POWER BALANCE IN THE D.C: LINK CONVERTER
In the dc link converter with two controlled three-phase bridges and an inductive dc link (Fig.63) the power
can transmitted between the two three-phase systems in either direction. The direction of the power flow is
determined by the manner in which the bridges are controlled. The rectifier side functions as an energy
source, the inverter side as a load (Fig.51 and Fig.52).
The power transfer takes places between the a.c. voltage sources of the two systems. Only the fundamental
components (first harmonic) of the currents contribute to the power. The active power (neglecting the losses
of the bridges and dc link reactor) is always the same, but the non-active powers can differ considerably,
they depend upon the control angle  of the rectifier and inverter.
A1 - 52 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
6 SYNCHRONOUS MOTORS
GENERAL
There are many types of synchronous motors, prominent among these are wound-field, permanent magnet,
and reluctance motors. The stator, which has a 3-phase winding is known as armature.
The rotor of a wound-field motor has a dc field winding fed from a dc source through brushes and slip rings.
When the brushes and slip rings are not acceptable because of frequent maintenance requirements, they
are replaced by a brushless excitation system.
Generally, the rotor of a synchronous motor has salient poles. The high speed and high power machines,
with two or four poles, employ cylindrical rotors, They are mainly used as alternators. Cylindrical rotor theory
is primarily used because it is simple and also adequate for the analysis of salient poles motors, unless very
accurate analysis is needed.
The feature which makes a would-field motor different from other synchronous motors is that its power factor
can be controlled by controlling its field excitation. In low power motors, field excitation can be provided
using permanent magnets, thus dispensing with the field winding losses, dc source, brushes and slip rings.
But then the ability to control the power factor is lost. Permanent magnet motors are usually designed to
operate at unity power factor at full load, at lights load they operate at a low (leading) power factor and
efficiency.
Synchronous motor have a number of advantages over dc and induction motors. Due to the absence of a
commutator, synchronous motors are not subjected to the limitation of dc motors, such as a limit on
maximum speed, voltage and power ratings, frequent maintenance, and an inability to operate in explosive
and contaminated environments. They also have lower weight, volume and inertia compared to a dc motor
for the same rating. The wound-field and permanent magnet synchronous motors have a higher full-load
efficiency and power factor than an induction motor.
Wound–field motors can be designed for a higher power rating than induction motors. Since the air-gap flux
is not produced only by the magnetizing current drawn from the armature, a larger air gap suiting the
mechanical design can be chosen.
The speed can be precisely controlled by frequency control and can be made independent of variations in
supply voltage, field current and load. The ablity to control the power factor gives them additional
advantages described in the next chapters.
CYLINDRICAL ROTOR SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR
The cilidrical rotor machine has its rotor in cylindrical form with a distributed dc filed winding embedded in the
rotor slots. It characterized by a uniform airgap. This type of rotor construction is employed in high speed
machine because of greater mechanical strength. The rotor has another winding known as the damper or
armotisseur winding, which is like a squirrel-cage winding in an induction motor. The balanced three-phase
winding on the armature (stator) has the same number of poles as the dc winding on the rotor.
When the armature is supplied by a balanced three phase ac source of frequency  radians per second ( of f
hertz), an air-gap flux wave rotating at a synchronous speed ms radians per second is produced. Where:
2 4f
ms   rad/sec (6.0)
p p
p = number of poles
When excited, the field produced by the dc winding on the rotor interacts with the air gap flux wave to
produce torque. For the production of steady unidirectional torque, the air gap flux wave and the rotor field
must travel at the same speed. Since the field produced by the dc winding revolves with the rotor, the rotor
must run exactly at synchronous speed. Hence, a synchronous motor fed by a constant frequency source
operates at a constant steady state speed regardless of the load, supply voltage or dc filed winding current.
When running in the steady state, the relative speed between the air gap flux wave and the rotor damper
winding is zero, hence no voltages are induced in the damper winding, thus is does not have any influence
on the steady sate operation of the motor
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 53
A1 Appendix
EQUIVALENT CIRCUITS
The symbol of a wound-field synchronous motor is shown in Fig. 68 and its phasor diagram showing the
relationship between various filed components and induced voltages is shown in Fig. 69.
IF
IS
3V
Armature Field
Fig. 68 – Synchronous motor symbol
Vf
Is
F
R
A
Fig. 69 – Synchronous motor phasor diagram
The rotor is running at synchronous speed. The distributed field winding on the rotor produces the field mmf
F , sinusoidally distributed in space and revolving at synchronous speed. The three phase armature winding
connected to a balanced three phase supply carries a phase current Is and produces the armature reaction
mmf A , which is also sinusoidally distributed in space and rotates at synchronous speed in the same
direction of F . The mmf R , which is the resultant of mmfs F and A produces the air gap flux wave a
which also rotates at synchronous speed and consequently induces back emf E in a phase of the machine.
E is 90° out of phase with respect to a . E is known as the air gap emf. The field emf F alone can be
imagined to induce a voltage V f in the armature. Its magnitute is equal to the open circuit voltage induced in
the armature, it is known as the excitation emf. It is in quadrature with F.
A1 - 54 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
Based on the phasor diagram of Fig.69, the equivalent circuit shown inside the dotted lines in Fig.70 is
obtained.
Is Rs A Xsl Is
Im
V Et Xm E If
Fig. 70 – Synchronous motor equivalent circuit
If is the fundamental frequency armature phase current which accounts for the field mmfF in the sense that
when flowing through the three phase armature winding it will produce a rotating mmf identical to F and
consequently produce the same excitation emf V f . The magnetizing current I m required to produce the air-
gap flux a is the sum of phasors I s and I f .The air gap flux causes emf E to be induced in the armature
phase. Xm is the magnetizing reactance. The complete phasor diagram of the machine is obtained when Rs
and Xsl, which are, respectively, the per-phase resistance and leakage reactance of the armature winding,
are added.
IsRs
Et
V
E IsXsl
90°
Is
90°
If
Vf
Im
Fig. 71 – Synchronous motor phase phasor diagram
Fig.71 shows the phasor diagram based on the equivalent circuit. Hence Et is the total emf induced in the
machine by the air gap flux and leakage flux.
The equivalent current If is obtained as follows, let the number of turns in the armature phase winding and
rotor field winding be na and nf respectively, it can be demonstrated that:
 2 nf 
If    IF
 (6.1)
 3 na 
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 55
A1 Appendix
Since the armature winding resistance Rs is very small, it can be ignored, except for the calculation of losses
and efficiency. With this assumption V=Et in Fig.70. Replacing the circuit on the right of terminals A and B by
Thevenin’s and Norton’s equivalent circuits yields the equivalent circuits shown in Fig.72 and Fig.73
respectively. Where:
Xs  Xm  Xsl (6.2)
V f  jXm I f (6.3)
Xm Vf
I 'f  If  (6.4)
Xs jXs
V
I 'm  I s  I ' f  (6.5)
jXs
The reactance Xs is known as synchronous reactance. If V is taken as a reference phasor and the angle
between V and V f is denoted by , then
V f  Vf    (6.6)
Vf
I 'f   I ' f  (   2 (6.7)
jXs
The magnetizing reactance Xm is a nonlinear function of Im, because of saturation. When the motor is
operated in a narrow range of Im, a suitable average value of the magnetizing reactance can be chosen for
this range and used in the equivalent circuits. With this assumption, the analysis is only approximate. It is,
however, widely used because of its simplicity, here also Xm and Xs are assumed constant.
Is Xsl V
 
Is IsXs
V Vf  
Vf
Fig. 72 – Simplified equivalent circuit – Voltage source
Is
V
I’m 
Is
Xm If '  (  2 )  +/2
V
I’f 
I’m
Fig. 73 - Simplified equivalent circuit – Current source
A1 - 56 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
POWER AND TORQUE EQUATION FOR OPERATION FROM A VOLTAGE SOURCE
From Fig.72, the power input to the motor is expressed as
Pin  3VIs cos  (6.8)
Since the armature loss has been neglected, this is also the air-gap power. As no power is transferred to the
rotor circuit, all of the air gap power is converted into mechanical power, hence
Pm  3VIs cos  (6.9)
From Fig.72 it can be shown that
Vf
Is cos   sin  (6.10)
Xs
From the previous equations (6.9) and (6.10)
3VVf
Pm  sin  (6.11)
Xs
Now torque is
Pm
T (6.12)
ms
Substituting from equation (6.11) yields
3 VVf
T sin  (6.13)
ms Xs
Alternative expressions for Pm amd T are obtained by substituting from equation (6.4) and (6.5) into equation
(6.11) and (6.13). Thus
Pm  3VIf ' sin   3 Xs Im' If ' sin  (6.14)
3 3 Xs
T VIf ' sin   Im' If ' sin  (6.15)
ms ms
Equations (6.11) to (6.15) have been derived for the case when V f lags behind V , by substituting the
appropriate sign for the angle of lag. Hence, in these equations,  should be taken positive when V f lags
behind V .
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 57
A1 Appendix
OPERATION FROM CONSTANT VOLTAGE AND FREQUENCY SOURCE
This is the conventional operation of synchrounous motors in the sense that in the past synchronous motos
were employed only in constant speed drives where they where fed from a source of constant voltage and
frequency. Some salient features of this operation are discussed here.
MOTORING AND REGENERATIVE BRAKING OPERATION
For a given field excitation IF, Vf is constant accosrding to equation (6.3). Then for given values of supply
voltage, frequency and field current the motor torque or power is a function only of , as in equation (6.11)
and (6.13). The angle  is known as the torque (or power) angle. The motor meets the changes in load
torque demand by the adjustment of .
Torque versus torque angle for two field excitations are show in Fig.74, and the speed torque chracteristic
for a given field field excitation is shown in Fig.75. A positive  gives the motoring operation and a negative 
gives the regenerative braking operation. The phasor diagrams for the motoring and braking operation at
given values V and Vf are shown in Fig.76. When  is positive, V leads Vf and the motor power factor angle
 is less than 90°. Consequently power flows from the source to the machine, giving a motoring operation.
When  is negative, V lags Vf and to satisfy Kirchoff’s voltage law, Is must differ in phase from V by more
than 90°. Consequently, power flows from the machine to the source, resulting in regenerative braking
operation. Since the regenerative braking operation is obtained at a fixed speed, it can be used only for
holding speed against an active load torque. It cannot be employed for decelerating or stopping the motor.
Fig. 74 – Torque-angle curves
A1 - 58 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
m Pull-out
ms Torque
Braking Motoring
-Tmax Tmax T
Fig. 75 – Speed torque charact. With fixed frequency supply
Vf
Is Is IsXs
 
V
 V
IsXs 
Motoring Braking
Vf
Fig. 76 – Phasor Diagram for a fixed IF
We shall briefly consider a transient operation for a change in load torque, When initially operating in the
steady state, an increase in load torque causes the rotor speed to decrease and  to increase. When 
reaches a value which makes the motor torque equal to the load torque, the rotor speed is lower than
synchronous speed. Consequently,  continues to increase. Since the motor torque is now higher than the
load torque, the rotor accelerates. When the rotor speed reaches synchronous speed,  is larger than
required, hence the rotor continues to accelerate beyond synchronous speed. Thus, the rotor oscillates
around synchronous speed and required  value before reaching steady state.
Similar oscillations are produced for a disturbance in V or IF. These oscillations are known as hunting. The
dumper winding is provided to damp these oscillations. When the rotor runs at synchronous speed, the
relative speed between the air-gap rotating wave and the rotor is zero: consequently no voltage is induced in
the damper winding and its presence has no influence on the motor operation. During hunting, the rotor
speed deviates from the synchronous speed. Consequently voltage are induced in the damper winding and
torque is produced by induction motor action. The torque direction is such that it opposes any deviation from
synchronous speed, consequently damping the oscillation.
From equation (6.11) and (6.13) and Fig.74, for given values of supply voltage, frequency, and field
excitation, the maximum torque or power, known as pull-out torque (Tmax) or pull-out power, is reached at
=90°. Thus,
3 VVf
T max  (6.16)
ms Xs
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 59
A1 Appendix
Any increase of load torque beyond the motoring pull-out torque (=90°) will cause the rotor to slow down.
Synchronous motor action will be lost since it will be impossible to restore the rotor speed to synchronous
speed. This phenomenon is known as pulling out of step or losing synchronism. Automatic circuit breakers
are provided to disconnect the motor from the supply when such a situation arises. In regenerative braking,
the pull-out torque is reached at =-90°, Care should be taken not to exceed the pull-out torque otherwise
the machine speed may reach dangerously high values. Thus, the pull out torque represents the maximum
short time overloading capacity or the steady-state stability limit of the motor for motoring and breaking
operation. The pull-out torque can be increased by an increase in the field excitation or the supply voltage.
The stability limit for step changes in torque is lower than the pull-out torque. When the load torque is
suddenly increased, the rotor slows down to allow  to increase. When  reaches a value 1, for which the
motor torque is equal to the load torque, the rotor speed is lower than the synchronous speed. Consequently
 continues to increase, while the motor accelerates. If the rotor speed fails to reach the synchronous speed
before  exceeds (180-1), the rotor will pull out of step, even though the load is less than pull-out torque.
POWER FACTOR CONTROL AND V-CURVES
From Fig.73
Is  I 'm  I ' f (6.17)
which gives
Is sin    I ' m  I ' f cos  (6.18)
Is cos   I ' f sin  (6.19)
Let us examine the motor operation at a constant torque and variable field excitation. From Eq. (6.15)
3 3 Xs
T VIf ' sin   Im' If ' sin 
ms ms
for a constant torque, I’f sin is constant. Consequently the in phase component of armature current Is cos
is also constant from equation (6.19). At a given source voltage V, I’m is also constant. This suggest that the
phasors I s and I ' f lie on vertical loci AA’ and BB’, respectively, and their sum has a fixed value I 'm as
shown in Fig.77.
B I’f sin  Is cos  A
Is2
2
1
Is1
1+/2
1
I’f1
2
I’m
I’f2
B’ A’
Fig. 77 – Power Factor control by control of field excitation
A1 - 60 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
The figure shows the phasor diagrams for two values of I’f by continuous line for I’f1 and by chain-dotted lines
for I’f2. For I’f1, (-I’m+I’f1cos)<0 ; Issin<0 consequently, according to equation (6.18), the machine draws a
lagging reactive component of current from the line, resulting in a lagging power factor. For I’f2, (-
I’m+I’f2cos)>0 ; Issin>0 consequently, according to equation (6.18), the machine draws a leading reactive
component from the line, giving a leading power factor. The machine operates at unity power factor with field
current, which satisfies the following equation:
 I ' m  I ' f cos   0 (6.20)
Thus, when operating at a constant torque, the machines operates at a lagging power factor for a low value
of field current IF. An increase of IF improves the power factor and reduces the armature current. The
minimum value of the armature current is reached when the power factor becomes unity.
A further increase in the field current causes the machine to operate with a leading power factor and
increased armature current.Fig.78 shows the plots between IS and IF for different values of torque. These
curves are commonly known as V curves because of their shape. The machine is said to be under-excited
when operating at a lagging power factor and over-excited when operating at a leading power factor.
When operating at a given IF and variable torque, the pull out torque is reached at =90°. From Fig.77, at
pull-out (that is at =90°. The entire magnetizing current I’m is drawn from the source; consequently, the
machine operates at a lagging power factor. The locus of the pull out points is also shown in Fig.78.
IS
Pull-out Unity
Power Rated Torque
Points
Factor
Half Rated Torque
No load
Lagging Leading Power Factor

0
Fig. 78 – V-curves of a synchronous motor IF
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 61
A1 Appendix
OPERATION FROM A CURRENT SOURCE
In Fig.79, the equivalent circuit and the phasor diagram of Fig.73 have been redrawn, taking the armature
current as a reference vector. The angle ’ between the phasors I’f and Is is related to  by the following
equation:

'   (6.21)
2
Now,
V  jXs I ' m  jXs ( Is 0  I ' f   '  XsI ' f sin  ' jXs ( Is  I ' f cos  ' )
Power developed is
Pm  3 Re( I sV *)  3 XsIsI ' f sin  ' (6.22)
and the torque is:
Pm Xs
T  3( ) IsI ' f sin  ' (6.23)
ms ms
An alternative expression for torque is obtained by substituting from equation (6.21) into equation (6.23),
giving:
Pm Xs
T  3( ) IsI ' f cos(   ) (6.24)
ms ms
From equation (6.23) or (6.24) the pull out torque is
Xs
T  3( ) IsI ' f (6.25)
ms
The pull-out torque can be increased by increasing either Is or I’f.
 
Is
I’m
’
Is V Xm If '  ' 
Vf
I’f
I’m
Fig. 79 – Synchronous motor fed by a current source
A1 - 62 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
For given value of Is and I’f , the torque is a function of the angle ’. Hence ’ is defined as the torque angle.
A torque versus torque angle is shown in Fig.80. The motoring operation is obtained for 0   '   and the
braking operation is obtained for    '  2 . A given value of motoring torque is obtained at two values of
 ' , that is  '1 and    '1 . Similarly, a given braking torque is available at two values of  ' , that is
   '2  .and 2   '2  .
Fig. 80 – Torque curves of a synchronous motor fed by a current source
STARTING WHEN FED FROM A CONSTANT FREQUENCY SOURCE
A synchronous motor fed from a constant frequency source is not self-starting. It is normally started as an
induction motor, with the damper winding serving as a squirrel cage rotor. The filed winding is shorted
through a discharge resistor to keep inter-winding voltages within safe values. When near synchronous
speed, the field is excited. The synchronous torque assisted by the damper winding torque is able to pull the
rotor into step with the rotating field.
The starting current is high and the starting torque is low. Any attempt to decrease the starting current and
increase the starting torque by increasing the damper winding resistance makes the damper winding less
effective during pull-in and hunting. In large size motors, the high starting current (5 to 10 times the full load
current) causes a large dip in the supply voltage, consequently further reducing the starting torque which is
already low.
Since the frequency is constant, regenerative braking can be employed only for holding an active load at
synchronous speed. For stopping, dynamic braking is used. Dynamic braking is obtained by disconnecting
the armature from the source and connecting it to a three-phase resistor. The machine works a a
synchronous generator and dissipates the generated energy in the braking resistor. Since the synchronous
reactance is higher than the braking resistance for most of the speed range, the variation in armature current
and torque is not large, therefore a single section of resistance is enough.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 63
A1 Appendix
BRUSHLESS EXCITATION OF SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR
This section is concerned mainly with the excitation of synchronous motor for variable speed applications.
One commonly used method is to convert ac to dc in a converter and apply it to the field winding through slip
rings .The field excitation is the varied by controlling the firing angle of the converter. In this configuration,
because of the wear the brushes must be replaced at regular intervals. These application, therefore, employ
brushless excitation systems.
For variable speed application, the exciter must produce field current also when the motor is stationary, and
to provide this the system shown in Fig.81 can be used.
1 2 4 5
Rotating
From rectifier Fixed Frequency
inverter Stator Field fixed to Supply
shaft
Synchronous 3 6
motor
Rotating Stationary
Fig. 81 – Brush-less excitation system of an inverter-fed synchronous motor
The three-phase voltage to the three-phase stator winding of the exciter will set up a rotating flux, which by
transformer action induces a three-phase voltage into the rotor winding, which is the rectified and fed into the
motor field. Control of the thyristor voltage regulator will control the exciter flux and hence the field current.
Once rotating, the induce voltage will change in magnitude, but provided that the exciter stator flux is
arranged to rotate in the opposite direction to the shaft the exciter voltage will increase with speed. Further, if
the pole-number of the exciter is less than that of the main motor the exciter voltage will only rise slightly with
speed.
A1 - 64 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
7 LCI (SELF-CONTROLLED) SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR DRIVE
GENERAL
The LCI (Self-Controlled) variable speed synchronous motor drives have a number of advantages which
makes them either superior to or competitive with induction motor or dc motor variable speed drives,
1 The operation of a synchronous motor in the self-controlled mode eliminates hunting and stability problems, and permits the
realization of versatile control characteristics of a dc motor without the limitation associated with commutator and brushes, such as
limits on maximum speed, voltage, and power, frequent maintenance, inability to operate in contaminated and explosive
environments, and so on. The LCI motor drives have been designed for power ratings of tens of megawatts and speed approaching
8000 rpm, which are beyond the capability of dc and induction motor drives. They have good dynamic response and smooth starting
and braking operation with high torque-to-current ratio.
2 The power factor of a wound-field synchronous motor can be controlled by controlling its field
current. The operation of the drive close to unity power factor minimize the kVA rating, cost, an
losses of variable frequency supplies, and maximizes the motor power output while reducing its
losses. By operating the machine at a leading power factor, the inverter thyristors can be
commutated by the armature induced voltages. Use of this commutation – known as load
commutation (hence the terms LCI, Load Commutated Inverter) – eliminates the need for thyristor
commutation circuits, thus permitting substantial saving in costs, weight, volume, and losses in a
thyristor inverter. Further, the load commutation increases the frequency range of a current source
inverter.
Because of these advantages, the LCI synchronous motor drives are employed in the following variable
speed applications:
1 The self-controlled synchronous motor drives fed from a load commutated current source inverter
have been used in medium to very high power(tens of megawatts) or high speed drives such as
compressors, extruders, fans, conveyers, aircraft test facilities, main line traction, steel rolling mills,
large ship propulsion, flywheel energy storage, and son on.
2 The self-controlled synchronous motor drives fed from a line commutated cycloconverter are
employed in low-speed gearless drives for ball mills in cement plants, mine hoists, rolling mills, and
so on.
3 The LCI drive is also employed for starting large synchronous machines in gas turbine and pumped
storage power plants. A common inverter is time-shared by a number of machines.
Fig.82 shows the phasor diagram for the variable frequency operation of a synchronous motor. It is obtained
from the phasor diagram of Fig.72 – 73. The current phasors are independent of frequency. The induced
voltages are given by the following equations:
V  aXsI ' m (6.26)
Vf  aXsI ' f (6.27)
where the per-unit frequency “a” is the ratio of the frequency of operation f to the rated frequency frated – that
is:
f
a (6.28)
frated
and Xs is the synchronous reactance at the rated frequency frated .
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 65
A1 Appendix
When operating at given values of Is, I’f, and ’ (or ). The parameter I’m, flux and torque have fixed values.
The induced voltages V and Vf, and the reactance drop increase linearly with frequency but theyr phase
relationship remains independent of frequency.
Is aIsXs
Vf
’

I’m
I’f C
Fig. 82 Synchronous motor phasor diagram
Since the equivalent circuit is based on the assumption of a negligible drop across Rs,V represents both the
terminal voltage and the induced voltage (voltage Et in Fig,71) due to the flux linking the armature (that is,
the sum of the air gap flux and armature leakage flux).
A1 - 66 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
CURRENT SOURCE INVERTER WITH LOAD COMMUTATION
One important reason for preferring synchronous motor drives over squirrel-cage induction motor drives for
high speed, and high and medium power ratings is the load commutation. The load commutation is made
possible because of the ability of a synchronous motor to operate at a leading power factor.
Fig.83 shows a current source inverter feeding a synchronous motor. The dc supply for the inverter is
obtained from a 6-pulse (or 12-pulse) fully controlled rectifier, which , together with the link inductor Ld , can
be considered to constitute a current source for the inverter. The link inductor reduces the ripple in the link
current Id and prevents the inverter and rectifier from interfering with each other’s operation.
The synchronous motor has been modeled as a three-phase set of sinusoidal voltages with rms value V
behind a commutating reactance Lc per phase. Due to the very short duration of commutation transients, the
commutating inductance is equal to the subtransient inductance of a synchronous motor. The phases
voltages vAN , vBN and vCN are the voltages induced in the armature due to the flux linking the armature (the
air-gap flux and the armature leakage flux). Since the armature resistance drop has been neglected, these
voltages are equal to the terminal voltages. Hence they are represented by phasor V in the phasor diagram
of Fig.82 . Note that this model of the synchronous motor is valid only for operation during the commutation
intervals. For steady state operation, the model of Fig.72 – which consists of excitation voltage Vf behind the
synchronous reactance Xs or its equivalent given in Fig. 73 – is applicable.
DC REACTOR Id
Ld
+ -
T4 T6 T2
T'1 T'3 T'5
vA'N Lc vAN
A' a A
iA
vB'N Lc vBN
B' b B
N vd1 vd N
iB
vC'N Lc VCN
C' c C
iC
T1 T3 T5
T'4 T'6 T'2 SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR
- +
ig1
RECTIFIER INVERTER
(or source side (or machine side
converter) converter)
Fig. 83 – Load commutation inverter
The function of the commutation circuit is now performed by induced voltages vAN , vBN and vCN. Thyristors
are fired in the sequence of their numbers with 60° interval. Turning on an odd-numbered thyristor causes
commutation of the previously conducting odd-numbered thyristor. The same is true for even-numbered
thyristors. Thus, each thyristor conducts for 120° and only two thyristors conduct at the same time
(neglecting the commutation intervals when three thyrstors conduct at a time).
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 67
A1 Appendix
Fig. 84 – Load commutation in a current source inverter
A1 - 68 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
T4
Fig. 85 – LCI Machine Current Waveforms
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 69
A1 Appendix
Fig.84 shows the waveforms of the three line voltages. The transfer of current from an outgoing to an
incoming thyristor can take place when the respective line voltage is positive so that it acts to forward bias
and reverse bias the incoming and the outcoming thyristors, respectively. The firing angle for the incoming
thyristor is the measured from the instant when the respective line voltage is zero and increasing. For
example, the transfer of current from thyristor T5 to thyristor T1 can occur as long as the line voltage vAC
(vAC=-vCA) is positive. Consequently, for thyristor T1, the firing angle  is measured from the instant vAC=0
and increasing (vCA=0 and decreasing), as shown in Fig.84 and Fig.85. Each firing pulse has a duration of
120°.
Now let us examine the operation of the inverter for  > 90° as shown in the figures. Initially, one assumes
the thyristors T5 and T6 are conducting. The dc link voltage vd will be vCB (vCB=-vBC). At  T1 is fired. Because
of the commutating inductors, the current cannot be transferred instantaneously from T5 to T1. Consequently,
the equivalent circuit shown in Fig. 86 is obtained for the commutation interval. Since the line voltage vAC is
positive, it reduces iT5 to zero and increases iT1 to Id in the period  (Fig.84) known as the commutation
overlap angle. Now T5 turns off and T1 and T6 conduct, making vd equal vAB. By considering various
conduction and commutation intervals, one can draw the waveform of the dc link voltage vd (Fig.84) and
machine phases currents iA, iB and iC (Fig.85). Since the average value of vd is negative and Id is positive, the
power flows from the dc link to the machine, giving motoring operation. If we examine the operation for
<90°, we will find that the average of vd is positive. Since the direction of Id remains unchanged, the power
flows from the motor to the dc link, the inverter works as a rectifier, and the machine regenerates.
Id
- T6
Lc vAN
a A
iA
Lc vBN
b B
vd N
iB
Lc VCN
c C
iC
T1 T5
+
SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR
ig1
iT1 iT5
Id
INVERTER
(or machine side
converter)
Fig. 86 – Equivalent circuit for the commutation of current from T5 to T1
Because the firing is synchronized with the machine induced voltages, the frequency of operation of the
inverter is the same as the frequency of induced voltages. Hence the machine always operates in the self-
control mode. The terminal voltage (or induced voltage) sensor now essentially acts as a rotor position
sensor.
The comparison of the inverter operation with that of a 6-pulse fully controlled rectifier with a source
inductance (when inverting) shows that both are identical in all respects. In a 6-pulse fully controlled rectifier,
the commutations done by the line voltages; hence it is called line commutation. The commutation process
in the inverter is identical to the line commutation, but because the voltages induced in the load are
responsible for the commutation, it is defined as the load commutation.
A1 - 70 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
ANALYSIS OF COMMUTATION AND INVERTER OPERATION
From the equivalent circuit of Fig.86 it can be demonstrated the following relationship among the firing angle
, overlap angle , direct current Id, phase-to-neutral induced voltage V and motor commutating reactance
Lc
2LcId
cos   cos(   )  (6.29)
6V
Let us define the angle  as shown in Fig. 84. Note that  is the angle of lead with respect to the instant
when vAC ceases to be positive (vCA ceases to be negative). The angle  is called the commutation lead
angle and is given by
  180   (6.30)
Substituting from equation (6.30) into equation (6.29) yields
2Lc
cos(    )  cos   Id (6.31)
6V
After the turn-off, T5 remains reverse biased until vAC=0 and is decreasing (vCA increasing). If this duration is
denoted by , then
   (6.32)
The angle  is known as the margin angle. For a safe commutation,
  tq (6.33)
where tq is the turn-off time of thyristors.
The waveforms for the commutation interval are shown in Fig.84. Fig.85 also shows the phase current
waveforms. For phase A, the fundamental component is also shown in the figure. When the overlap angle 
is zero, the fundamental component leads vAN by an angle . The effect of the commutation overlap is to
delay the fundamental component. The delay is approximately 0.5 when the current waveform is assumed
trapezoidal. Hence, in the presence of overlap, the fundamental components leads the induced voltage by
(-0.5). By considering different intervals of operation, the waveforms shown in Fig.87 can be drawn for the
terminal voltage of phase A, vaN.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 71
A1 Appendix
Fig. 87 – LCI motor terminal voltage and current
A1 - 72 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
It differ from vAN only during the overlap period as shown (assuming negligible drop across Rs). The
fundamental component of the phase A current can also assumed to lead vaN by (-0.5). Hence the power
factor angle of the machine  is
1
  (leading) (6.34)
2
For safe commutation  must be greater than  (Fig.84), hence,  will always be positive. This shows that
with load commutation, the machine always operates with a leading power factor.
The phasor diagram of the machine for motoring (<90 - >90) and braking (>90 - <90) operations with
load commutation are shown in Fig.88 and Fig.89.
Is
V

aIsXs

A
’ =-0.5 Vf
90°
B
90+ I’m
180°-’
I’f
C
Fig. 88 – Phasor diagram (motoring) of a synchronous motor fed by a LCI current source inverter.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 73
A1 Appendix
Is
180°-
’
Vf
90°
A 
aIsXs
B I’m 270-
I’f
C
Fig. 89 – Phasor diagram (braking) of a synchronous motor fed by a LCI current source inverter.
Since the machine operates at leading power factor, the torque angle ’ lies between 90° and 180° for
motoring and between 180° and 270° for braking, as noted in section 6 (Operation from a Current Source).
In this range of ’, the conventional operation of a synchronous motor is steady-state unstable. But with self-
control, the operation becomes stable. For example, an increase in ’ caused by a disturbance, with other
parameter unchanged, will reduce the motor torque, causing a decrease in speed. Consequently the
induced voltage will decrease, increasing the motor current and torque, and restoring the balance between
the motor and load torques.
The nature of variation of ,  and  with IS or Id, when the machine operates at a fixed value of  equal to c,
and a constant flux (constant I’m and variable I’f) is shown in Fig.90 (c=35°). At a constant flux the ratio
(V/) is constant. From equation (6.31) when  is held constant,  depends only on IS or Id.
A1 - 74 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
Fig. 90 -   and  versus Id curves for a constant 
For a 6-step current waveform the fundamental rms current is
6
Is  Id (6.35)

and the total rms current is
2
Irms  Id (6.36)
3
Where Irms is the rms value of phase current. The effect of the overlap is to phase shift Is by 0.5. However,
its magnitute remains approximately the same.
The average dc link voltage in the presence of commutation overlap is
3 6V 3
Vd  cos   (LcId ) (6.37)
 
The power input to the motor is
Pin  VdId (6.38)
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 75
A1 Appendix
Power developed by the motor is
Pm  Pin  3I 2 rmsRs (6.39)
Substituting from equation (6.38) and (6.36) gives
Pm  VdId  2 I 2 dRs (6.40)
and developed torque
T
Pm
ms

1
ms
V I
d d  2 I 2 dRs  (6.41)
Also
Pm  3VIs cos   3I 2 rmsRs (6.42)
or
T
3
ms
VI cos   I
s
2
Rs
rms  (6.43)
Equations (6.41) and (6.43) are valid for both motoring and braking operations.
Speed control below base speed is obtained by the control of the rectifier output voltage Vd1 (Fig.83). An
increase in the rectifier output voltage, with  held constant, increases the dc link current Id. As a result, Is
and the motor torque increase. The machine speeds up and the induced voltage V increases until the
balance between the rectifier output voltage Vd1 and the inverter counter emf Vd is restored. Usually the field
is also controlled below speed to maintain a constant flux (V/=constant), as explained later.
Speed control above base speed is obtained by reducing the field current I’f. A decrease in I’f reduces I’m,
which reduces the induced voltage V and the inverter counter emf Vd. therefore, Id and the machine torque
increase. The motor speed increases until V has a value which allows the balance to be restored between
the rectifier voltage Vd1 and the inverter counter emf Vd.
A1 - 76 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
POWER FACTOR OPTIMIZATION
In motoring operation, the power factor is maximum when  is minimum or  is maximum. At a minimum ,
)the inverter output voltage is maximum. Consequently, the power transferred from the dc link to the
machine for a given value of Id is maximized. This in turn maximizes the machine torque for a given Is.
A minimum value of  or a maximum value of  is obtained when the margin angle is chosen just sufficient
(min) to ensure safe commutation. Then equation (6.33) can written as
 min  Kqtq (6.44)
where Kq is a safety factor.
Now the minimum value of  is
 min     min (6.45)
and maximum power factor from equation (6.34) and (6.45) is
PF  max  cos(  min  0.5 )  cos( min  0.5 ) (6.46)
From equation (6.31) and (6.45)
cos   min   cos  min  2LcId (6.47)

6V
In equation (6.47),  depends on speed, and V depends on speed and I’m. The current I’m in turn depends on
Is and I’f. Hence, for a given operating point, determined by values of Is (or Id), and speed, the overlap angle
 can be evaluated from equation (6.47). Then min can be obtained from equation (6.45)
In the braking operation, the power factor, and consequently the regenerated power and braking torque for a
given Id are maximized when 180° (or 0°). Then the maximum power factor is:
PF  max  cos(180  0.5 )  cos 0.5 (6.48)
GENERATION OF INVERTER FIRING ANGLE
The reference signals for the control of the commutation lead angle  (or delay angle ) can be generated by
using either machine terminal voltages or a rotor position encoder.
Fig.87 shows the induced voltage vAN and the terminal voltage vaN for phase A. The induced voltage which
is the sum of sinusoidal voltage Vf and a nonsinusoidal voltage drop across the synchronous reactance, is
almost sinusoidal . The terminal voltage vaN is more distorted because of the commutation transients. Any
attempt to filter it causes a frequency dependent phase shift, for which is necessary to compensate.
However, one can assume the zero crossing points of the terminal voltage are approximately the same as
for the induce voltage. These zero crossing points can be used as reference points for generating inverter
firing signals. This is achieved by converting terminal voltages into rectangular voltages using zero crossing
detectors. A digital control circuit using counters then generates firing signals by using the zero crossing
points of the rectangular waveforms as reference points.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 77
A1 Appendix
INVERTER CONTROL STRATEGIES
A number of approaches are possible for inverter control. A few commonly used control strategies are
described here.
CONSTANT MARGIN ANGLE CONTROL
The operation of the inverter at the minimum safe value of the margin angle gives the highest power factor
and the maximum torque per ampere of the armature current, thus allowing the most efficient use of both the
inverter and motor. The exact implementation of this control strategy is not possible because the minimum
value of the commutation lead angle cannot be accurately predicted. It is therefore implemented only
approximately. Even then it requires complex control.
OPERATION AT A CONSTANT COMMUTATION LEAD ANGLE
A simple control is obtained when the inverter operates at constant  (or ). From equations (6.45) and
(6.47),
Id
cos  min  cos  min  k( ) (6.49)
I m'
where k is a constant.
Equation (6.49) shows that min has the highest value when the ratio (Id / I’m) has a maximum value. When
the operation is limited to the base speed, the ratio (Id / I’m) is maximum when Id or torque is maximum. If the
inverter is operated at a constant commutation lead angle c (or c), which is equal to the value of min (or
max) at the maximum value of Id, then commutation is ensured for all operating points. Now the machine will
still operate at the highest power factor at the maximum torque; however, the power factor and efficiency will
be lower for low torques (due to a decrease in ) compared to the control at a constant margin angle.
When the machine also operate above base speed at a constant terminal voltage, min (or max) has a
maximum value when the machine operates at a maximum Id and highest speed (equation (6.47)). Hence c
is chosen based on this point. Now for lower values of speed and Id, the machine will operate at a lower
power factor and efficiency compared to the constant margin angle control.
However by making the value of commutation lead angle suitable dependent upon the speed (frequency )
and current it is possible to optimise it also at speed lower than base speed and currents lower than the
maximum current.
A1 - 78 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
Fig.91 shows , ,  and  versus Id curves for a constant  control.
Fig. 91 -  constant control
COMMUTATION LEAD ANGLE VARYNG LINEARLY WITH Id
Here the value of the commutation lead angle is given by
  min  KId (6.50)
K is suitably chosen to make enough margin angle available at all the operating points, as shown in Fig.92.
Fig. 92 -  varying linearly with Id
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 79
A1 Appendix
PULSED MODE - COMMUTATION AT LOW SPEEDS
Load commutation is caused by induced voltages. At very low speeds, the induced voltages are too small to
provide satisfactory commutation ( at standstill the stator winding represents a pure inductance, without
voltage sources). Hence, at standstill and for low speeds – typically below 510 percent of base speed –
load commutation cannot be used.
As mentioned above, load commutation is employed only for speeds above 5 10 of base speed. Hence, for
lower speeds, a pulsed mode of operation, also known as the link current interruption method, is employed.
In the inverter of Fig.83. a cycle of operation consists of six 60° intervals. In these intervals, thyristors
conduct dc link current in pairs of two in the sequence
T1T6 - T1T2 - T2T3 – T3T4 – T4T5 – T5T6
Somewhat similar operation of the inverter is obtained when each time the current is to be transferred from
one pair to another, Id is forced to zero by making the firing angle of the line side converter close to 180°.
Consequently, thyristors in the outgoing pair turn off due to the lack of current. Now the firing angle of the
line side converter is brought back to the original value and the incoming pair of inverter thyristors is fired to
establish the flow of Id through it.
Fig.93 shows the waveforms of the dc link current and machine phase currents and voltages. The six
intervals of operation and thyristors pairs under conduction are also shown. The phase current pulse is less
than 120° wide. The angular gap between two adjacent pulses depends on the time required by the line side
converter to force Id to zero and to re-establish it. Because of large value of Ld, a few cycles of the ac supply,
sometimes, are required to accomplish this change in Id. However, the angular gap remains small because
of the very low frequencies of the inverter operation.
Id
T6 T1 – T6 T1 – T2 T2 – T3 T3 – T4 T4 – T5
t
iA
t
IB
t
IC
t
Fig. 93 – Pulsed mode operation
A1 - 80 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
The effect of the angular gap is to reduce the motor current and torque. The gap can be substantially
reduced by connecting by connecting a freewheeling thyristor across the dc link reactor. At the time of
commutation, the current Id is transferred to the freewheeling thyristor, instead of being forced to zero. The
operation is explained with the help of Fig.94. At such low speed, the line side converter output voltage is
low. Consequently it operates at a firing angle slightly less than 90°.The dc link voltage vd1 (see also Fig.45)
is shown in the figure. When the commutation is desired, a single firing pulse is diverted from the converter
to the freewheeling. This cause vd1 to became negative for a duration of 90° (around 5 ms, for a 50 Hz
supply). Consequently, the current is transferred to the freewheeling thyristor and the outgoing inverter
thyristor paired is turned off. Now the incoming inverter thyristor pair is fired. The current Id is transferred to
this pair when the next firing pulse is given to the line side converter.
When the rotor position sensor consists of a rotor position encoder, the firing pulses required for the
foregoing operation can be obtained from the encoder. At approximately 510% of base speed, the
operation is shifted from the pulsed mode to normal operation.
When a rotor position sensor is not available the start sequence begin with the control commanding the
motor exciter to output a field current pulse. This allows the control to determine the rotor position and the
firing of first couple of thyristors, The converter provide pulsanting power to the motor stator winding until the
rotor reaches a speed of approximately 510% of the base speed, when the pulses mode ceases and
normal operation begins.
vd1
t
Id
Firing pulses for converter thyristors
Firing pulse for the freewheeling thyristor
Fig. 94 – Pulsed mode of operation with freewheeling thyristor
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 81
A1 Appendix
INVERTER CONTROL STRATEGIES
Characteristics and control requirements of self-controlled synchronous motor dives related to a specific
variable frequency semiconductor converter are described in this section.
Recalling that in a self-controlled synchronous motor drive, the converter frequency is controlled by the
motor speed, and therefore, it is not available as an independent control parameter, as in case of a converter
controlled from an independent oscillator. A self-controlled synchronous motor drive is neither subjected to
hunting, nor is it started as an induction motor; therefore a damper winding is not needed to serve its
conventional role. It does not mean that it is not needed at all. It is certainly employed in certain drives but
the reasons for its use are different than its conventional ones.
CURRENT SOURCE INVERTER (CSI) DRIVES
A CSI synchronous motor drive employs a load commutated thyristor inverter (LCI), The load commutated
inverter gives approximately rectangular (Fig.95) or trapezoidal current waveforms which have some
harmonics.
Id
/6 5/6 2
Fig. 95 – CSI current waveform
The harmonic current is given approximately by equation (6.51):
2 3  sin 5t sin 7t sin 11t sin 13t sin 17t 
iA  Id sin t      (6.51)
  5 7 11 13 17 
the fundamental (1st harmonic) rms current is
6
Is  Id (6.52)

the total rms current is
1
5
1 2 2
Irms  


6
6
I d2 d (t ) 
 3
Id (6.53)
A1 - 82 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
The main effects of harmonics on the machine are to distort the machine terminal voltages, increase losses,
and produce torque pulsation which cause stepped motion at low speeds. The damper windings are helpful
in reducing the distortion of the machine terminal voltage. They offer a low impedance path to the harmonic
currents; consequently, the magnetizing current and flux become nearly sinusoidal, making the terminal
voltage also nearly sinusoidal. The damper windings also reduce the commutating reactance, and thus help
in reducing the commutation overlap. Therefore, damper windings, are always employed in these drives.
At the time of commutation, the current in one phase of the armature jumps from 0 to Id and in another phase
it jumps from Id to 0. This sudden change of phase currents produces voltage spikes in the terminal voltage.
Further, the sudden change in the mmf’s of two armature phases caused by the sudden change of currents
tends to change the flux linkage. Since the flux linkage cannot change abruptly, a burst of current is
produced in the dumper windings and field winding to counteract the changes in the armature mmf’s. The
magnitude of the burst of current in the damper windings is much larger than that in the field, because of the
damper windings lower impedance.
It is useful to examine the exact nature of the armature mmf wave. The operation of the motor can be divided
into 6 intervals of approximately 60° duration (Fig.96), separated by commutation intervals. When operating
in any one interval, two machine phases carry dc link current and produce a stationary armature mmf wave.
The commutation shifts the dc link current from one phase to another; consequently the armature wave
jumps by an angle of 60° (electrical) around the air gap. The mmf wave again remains stationary for an
interval of 60° until the next commutation occurs and shift it around the air-gap by another 60°. Thus, the
armature mmf wave does not revolve continuously and smoothly but in discrete steps of 60°. As a result of
this, at very low frequencies, the rotor also moves in steps. At high frequencies, the inertia causes the rotor
to move continuously and smoothly. If now the rotor speed is assumed constant, the armature mmf waves
moves at a variable speed with respect to the rotor, although the average speed remains the same as that of
the rotor. Because of the difference in the instantaneous speeds of the armature mmf and rotor, currents are
induced in the damper and field windings to maintain the flux linkages constant. This tendency to maintain a
constant flux linkage smoothens out the effects of stepped motion of the armature mmf and produces a
nearly sinusoidal air-gap flux wave. Hence, the machine terminal voltages are nearly sinusoidal, except at
the instant of commutation where voltages spikes are produced by sudden changes of current.
The load commutated inverter is fed from the closed-loop current source of Fig.97., when braking is
required, a fully controlled rectifier is used. In the previous sections the load commutated inverter is
discussed without a closed loop current source because was not essential for the explanation of its
operation. In actual practice, it is always employed with a closed loop-current source. The closed-loop
current control causes the source side converter to track the inverter terminal voltage at a constant current.
When the  angle is changed to change the motor operation from motoring to regenerative braking, the
inverter changes its operation from inversion to rectification and its terminal voltage reverses. Since the
source side converter tracks the inverter terminal voltage at a constant dc link current, its operation
automatically and smoothly shifts from rectification to inversion, causing the regenerated energy to be fed to
the ac mains. Similarly, the change of motor operation back to motoring will cause the source side converter
operation to change to rectification, automatically and smoothly.
For load commutated inverter drives one-phase sequence gives operation in quadrants I and II. When the
motor is stationary, the reversal of phase-sequence, by interchanging the firing pulses between any two legs
of the inverter, will drive the motor in the reverse direction and will provide operation in quadrants III and IV.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 83
A1 Appendix
U1 U1
V2 W1 V2 0 W1
0
W2 V1 W2 V1
U2 U2
DC REACTOR Id DC REACTOR Id
Ld Ld
- -
T4 T6 T2 T4 T6 T2
U Lc U Lc
iU V Lc iU V Lc
N N
vd Lc
vd Lc
iV W iV W
iW iW
T1 T3 T5 T1 T3 T5
+ +
U1 U1
V2 V2 W1
W1
0
0
W2 V1 V1
W2
U2
U2
Ld Ld
- -
T4 T6 T2 T4 T6 T2
U Lc U Lc
iU V Lc iU V Lc
N N
vd Lc
vd Lc
iV W iV W
iW iW
T1 T3 T5 T1 T3 T5
+ +
A1 - 84 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
U1 U1
V2 V2
W1 W1
0 0
W2 V1 W2 V1
U2 U2
Ld Ld
- -
T4 T6 T2 T4 T6 T2
U Lc U Lc
iU V Lc iU V Lc
N N
vd Lc
vd Lc
iV W iV W
iW iW
T1 T3 T5 T1 T3 T5
+ +
Fig. 96 – Phase commutations
INVERTER
Idc
LINE Ldc
T4 T6 T2
T1 T3 T5

CB
SM FIELD
T1 T3 T5
SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR
SUPPLY f1 T4 T6 T2
Idc
Id
-
CURRENT CONTROL +
CIRCUIT Id*
Fig. 97 – LCI current control
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 85
A1 Appendix
LOAD COMMUTATED SYNCRONOUS MOTOR DRIVES
In load commutation, the inverter firing pulses may be derived either from the rotor position encoder or
machine terminal voltage sensor and any one of the control strategies described in the previous sections
may be used. The machine is fed from a load commutated source inverter. The drive may accordingly be
called a brushless (or commutatorless) dc or ac drive with load commutation.
Fig.98 shows a LCI motor drive employing a wound type synchronous motor and a terminal voltage sensor
with a constant commutation lead angle control.
INVERTER
Idc
LINE Ldc
T4 T6 T2
T1 T3 T5

CB
SM FIELD
T1 T3 T5
SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR
SUPPLY T4 T6 T2
Idc
alfa beta f
CURRENT CONTROL TERMINAL

CIRCUIT AND FIRING FIRING VOLTAGE
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT SENSOR
f
f
- Id
PHASE
Id* + DELAY
Rotor
Position
Current
Limiter
SIGN
OF
ewm
SPEED
CONTROLLER
ewm
w*m
+
-
wm
Fig. 98 – LCI drive with terminal voltage sensor and constant  angle control
The drive employs an inner current control loop with an outer speed loop. The inner control loop is nothing
but a closed-loop current source. The terminal voltage sensor generates reference pulses of the same
frequency as the machine induced voltage. The phase delay circuit shift the reference pulses suitably to
obtain control at a constant commutation lead angle c. Depending on the sign of the speed error em, c is
set to provide motoring or braking operation. Signals f and m are obtained from the terminal voltage sensor.
The speed and dc link current controllers are generally PI (Proportional Integral) controllers.
An increase in speed command *m produces a speed error em. The speed controller and current limiter set
the dc link current command I*d at the maximum allowable value. The machine accelerates at the maximum
available torque. When close to the desired speed, the current limiter desaturates and the drive settles at the
desired speed and at the dc link current which balances the load torque. Similarly, a reduction in speed
command produces a negative speed error. This set c as close as possible to 180° and the drive
decelerates at the maximum torque. When the speed error changes sign, the operation shifts to motoring
and the drive settles at the desired speed.
A1 - 86 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
If the portion enclosed by dotted lines in Fig.98 is replaced by the portion shown in Fig.99, the drive operates
according to the control law of equation (6.50).
INVERTER
Idc
LINE Ldc
T4 T6 T2
T1 T3 T5

CB
SM FIELD
T1 T3 T5
SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR
SUPPLY T4 T6 T2
Idc
alfa beta f
CURRENT CONTROL TERMINAL

CIRCUIT AND FIRING FIRING VOLTAGE
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT SENSOR
f
f
- Id
PHASE
Id* + DELAY
Rotor
beta* Position
Current +
Limiter gamma min
+
Kb
SPEED
CONTROLLER
SIGN
ewm OF
ewm
w*m
Id
+
-
wm
Fig. 99 – LCI drive with terminal voltage sensor and  angle control
Fig. 100 shows the same drive when the terminal voltage sensor is replaced by a rotor position encoder.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 87
A1 Appendix
INVERTER
Idc
LINE Ldc
T4 T6 T2
T1 T3 T5 SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR

CB
SM FIELD
SUPPLY T1 T3 T5
T4 T6 T2
Idc
Rotor
alfa beta f Position
Encoder
CURRENT CONTROL
CIRCUIT AND FIRING FIRING
CIRCUIT CIRCUIT
- Id
PHASE
Id* + DELAY
Rotor
Position
and f
Current
Limiter
SIGN
OF
ewm
SPEED
CONTROLLER
ewm
w*m
+
-
wm
Fig. 100 – LCI drive with rotor position encoder
A1 - 88 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
EXCITER CONTROL
Fig. 101 shows a synchronous motor is excited by a brush-less exciter (mounted on the same shaft) with
rotating diodes wheel (RD) fed by the wound rotor of an asynchronous machine (AS) with the stator fed by
constant frequency (50 or 60 Hz) and rotating field in the opposite direction of the motor rotation.
The stator of the asynchronous motor is fed by an ac-thyristor converter controlled by a set of three
regulators (Fig.101).
The first regulator is a feedback current regulator which is active only at standstill and very low speed, then a
stator voltage regulator takes the precedence.
The reference of such voltage regulator is proportional to the speed. Therefore the machine operates under
a constant V/Hz law, what means that the flux is always closed-loop regulated at its rated value.
A third voltage regulator loop shown in the block diagram takes the precedence when the stator voltages
reaches a preset value and flux weakening starts.
FIELD
RD
SM AS
CURRENT
REGULATOR
< GATING
Iref UNIT
VOLTAGE
REGULATOR
<
Vlim
VOLTAGE /
HERTZ <
Speed n REGULATOR
TE
AUX LINE
Fig. 101 – Synchronous Motor Brushless Exciter Control
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 89
A1 Appendix
A1 - 90 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A1 Appendix
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A1 - 91
A1 Appendix
A1 - 92 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
APPENDIX A2
SIGNAL MEASURING AND CONDITIONING
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................................................... 3
VOLTAGE AND CURRENT SENSING AND MEASURING.............................................................................. 3
6 PULSE – 6 PULSE ..................................................................................................................................... 3
12 PULSE – 6 PULSE ................................................................................................................................... 4
MOTOR SIDE VOLTAGE TRANSDUCERS AND MEASURE ..................................................................... 5
MOTOR VOLTAGE MEASURE .................................................................................................. 5
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS ..................................................................................................... 5
VR”T” VT”S” SCALING .......................................................................................................... 8
MOTOR VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT VMOT .......................................................................... 9
VMOT VMOT INST SCALING .................................................................................................. 9
MOTOR SIDE CURRENT TRANSDUCERS AND MEASURE ................................................................... 10
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (TRANSDUCERS)................................................................ 10
CLOSED LOOP HALL EFFECT CURRENT TRANSDUCERS ............................................ 11
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN AC rms MOTOR CURRENT AND Idc CURRENT ............... 12
IR IT SCALING ................................................................................................................... 13
DC CURRENT MEASUREMENT IDC ..................................................................................... 15
I”DC SCALING .................................................................................................................. 15
LINE SIDE VOLTAGE TRANSDUCERS AND MEASURE ......................................................................... 16
LINE VOLTAGE MEASURE................................................................................................... 16
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS (MAGNETIC) ....................................................................... 16
VOLTAGE TRANSDUCERS (HALL EFFECT) ..................................................................... 17
VRT VTS SCALING .............................................................................................................. 18
VR’T’ VT’S’ SCALING ......................................................................................................... 20
VLINE VLINE INST SCALING ................................................................................................ 21
LINE CURRENT MEASURE ....................................................................................................................... 22
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (TRANSDUCERS)................................................................ 22
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN AC rms LINE CURRENT AND Idc CURRENT .................... 23
IR IT SCALING ................................................................................................................... 24
DC CURRENT MEASUREMENT IDC ..................................................................................... 26
I’DC IDC INST SCALING....................................................................................................... 26
GROUND FAULT CURRENT TRANSDUCER AND MEASURE .................................................................... 27
VGND SCALING ................................................................................................................... 28
SIGNALS EXCHANGED WITH THE OUTSIDE EQUIPMENTS ..................................................................... 30
SPEED REFERENCE (SETPOINT) ......................................................................................... 30
A/D ................................................................................................................................................................... 30
D/A ................................................................................................................................................................... 30
SPEED FEEDBACK ................................................................................................................. 31

A2 Appendix
FIGURES
Fig. 1 – LCI Drive One Line Diagram 6pulse/6pulse ......................................................................... 3

Fig. 2 – LCI Drive One Line Diagram 12pulse/6pulse ....................................................................... 4
Fig. 3 – Motor Voltage measure by magnetic transformer ................................................................ 5
Fig. 4 – Typical Motor Voltage waveform .......................................................................................... 6
Fig. 5 – Board ATAV0X Motor Voltage Signals Scaling and Conditioning ........................................ 7
Fig. 6 – Motor Voltage VMOT waveform ............................................................................................. 9
Fig. 7 – Motor Current measure by Hall effect transducers ............................................................ 10
Fig. 8 – Hall Effect........................................................................................................................... 11
Fig. 9 - Hall Effect Current Transducer ........................................................................................... 11
Fig. 10 - Typical Motor Current waveform ....................................................................................... 12
Fig. 11 - Typical DC Current waveform ........................................................................................... 12
Fig. 12 – Board ATAV0X Motor Current Signals Scaling and Conditioning .................................... 14
Fig. 13 - Typical DC Current waveform ........................................................................................... 15
Fig. 14 – Line Voltage measure by magnetic transformer .............................................................. 16
Fig. 15 – Typical Line Voltage waveform ........................................................................................ 17
Fig. 16 – Line Voltage measure by Hall effect transducers ............................................................ 17
Fig. 17 – Hall effect Voltage transducer .......................................................................................... 18
Fig. 18 – Board ATAV0X Line Voltage Signals Scaling and Conditioning ...................................... 19
Fig. 19 – Typical Line Voltage Measure waveform ......................................................................... 21
Fig. 20 – Line Current measure by Hall effect transducers ............................................................. 22
Fig. 21 – Typical Line Current waveform ........................................................................................ 23
Fig. 22 – Typical DC Current waveform .......................................................................................... 23
Fig. 23 – Board ATAV0X Line Current Signals Scaling and Conditioning ...................................... 25
Fig. 24 – Typical DC Current waveform .......................................................................................... 26
Fig. 25 – Ground Fault Current Measure by Hall effect transducer ................................................ 27
Fig. 26 – Converter minus point ground fault current ...................................................................... 28
Fig. 27 – Transformer phase S round fault current ......................................................................... 28
Fig. 28 – Ground Fault Protection Block ......................................................................................... 29
Fig. 29 – Speed Reference Conditioning Block .............................................................................. 30
Fig. 30 – Speed Feedback signal conditioning block ...................................................................... 31
A2 Appendix
INTRODUCTION
This chapter deals with the sensing, measuring and scaling of the signals that are necessary for control,
regulation and protection of the converter, refer to others sections of the operating manual for all the others
signals exchanged with the outside world.
VOLTAGE AND CURRENT SENSING AND MEASURING
6 PULSE – 6 PULSE
The figure below shows a typical arrangement an LCI drive (6 pulse line side / 6 pulse motor side) , in order
from right to left we have :
a) Synchronous Motor SM and Field

b) Voltage and Current Transducers
c) XTAV0X Scaling Passive Board
d) ATAV0X Signal Conditioning Active Board
e) Inverter Thyristor Converter
f) DC Link Reactor Ldc
g) Rectifier Thyristor Converter
h) Voltage and Current Transducers
i) XTAV0X Scaling Passive Board
j) ATAV0X Signal Conditioning Active Board
k) Supply Power Transformer TCV
l) Line Circuit Breaker CB
RECTIFIER DC REACTOR INVERTER

Idc
LINE
Ldc T4 T6 T2
T1 T3 T5
TCV RH
SM
L1(R) U(R)
CB
L2(S) V(S)
FIELD
L3(T) W(T)
RH
T1 T3 T5
T4 T6 T2
IR' IT' VRT' VTS' IGND VRT" VTS" IT" IR"

SPEED REF SPEED FDBK
XTAVOX XTAV0X
VLINE IDC VMOT
VLINE INST VMOT INST

IDC INST
ATAV0X ATAV0X
nREF IDC' VRT' VTS' VLINE F VGND VRT" VTS" VMOT F IDC" nFBK
SPEED FDBK SPEED REF
CONTROL & PROTECTIONS
Fig. 1 – LCI Drive One Line Diagram 6pulse/6pulse
A2 Appendix
12 PULSE – 6 PULSE
The figure below shows a typical arrangement an LCI drive (12 pulse line side / 6 pulse motor side)
in order from right to left we have :

g) Rectifier Thyristor Converter (y transformer supply )
h) Rectifier Thyristor Converter (d transformer supply )
i) Voltage and Current Transducers
j) XTAV0X Scaling Passive Board
k) ATAV0X Signal Conditioning Active Board
l) Supply Power Transformer TCV
m) Line Circuit Breaker CB
DC REACTOR
Ldc T4 T6 T2
TCV T1 T3 T5
L1(R)
L2(S) RH
LINE D y T4 T6 T2
L3(T)
U(R)
CB T4 T6 T2 V(S)
SM
W(T) FIELD
T1 T3 T5
L1(R) T1 T3 T5
L2(S)
D d
L3(T) RH
T1 T3 T5
T4 T6 T2
IRy' ITy' IRd' ITd' VRT' VTS' IGND VRT" VTS" IT" IR"

XTAVOX VLINE IDC VMOT XTAV0X
VLINE INST VMOT INST

ATAV0X IDC INST
ATAV0X
nREF IDCy' IDC' VRT' VTS' VLINE F VGND VRT" VTS" VMOT F IDC" nFBK
CONTROL & PROTECTIONS
Fig. 2 – LCI Drive One Line Diagram 12pulse/6pulse
A2 Appendix
MOTOR SIDE VOLTAGE TRANSDUCERS AND MEASURE
MOTOR VOLTAGE MEASURE
The figure below shows a typical arrangement of the motor side (inverter side) of an LCI drive, in order from
right to left we have :
n) Thyristor converter (inverter) and smoothing DC Link Reactor

o) Voltage transformers (TV03 – TV04)
p) Synchronous Motor
q) Synchronous Motor Field
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS
Line to line motor voltage is sensed by means of low power voltage transformers which operate almost on
no-load. They isolate the voltage on the primary side from the connected measuring and protective circuits
and transform the sensed voltage accurately in magnitude and phase to a convenient secondary voltage.
DC LINK REACTOR Idc
T4 T6 T2
FIELD
A B A B
T1 T3 T5
TV03 TV04
VabN
Vab  Vxx
VABN
a b a b
02 04 06 08
R R R R
P24 N24
R R
XTAV01
R" T" T" S"

1
1 TO CONTROL BOARD V * T " S "  Vab
V * R" T "  Vab 3
3 ATAV01
VABN = Primary Transformer Nominal Voltage VABN = see schematic diagram

VabN = Secondary Transformer Nominal Voltage VabN = 100/3 (standard value)
Vxx = Measured Voltage R..R Scaling Resistors
Fig. 3 – Motor Voltage measure by magnetic transformer
A2 Appendix
Every voltage transformers has a primary winding and a secondary winding , two bushing which measure the
voltage between line and line. The rated voltage (primary or secondary) of a voltage transformer is the
voltage (r.m.s) given on the rating plate. The rated secondary voltage is 100/3.
The rated ratio of a voltage transformer (KN) is the ratio of the primary to the secondary voltage.
e.g. 7000 / 100:3.
Voltage transformer accuracy is given by classes, which are designated by accuracy class indices e.g. cl 0.5.
The rated power of a voltage transformer is the apparent power in VA with rated secondary voltage and the
rated burden e.g. 12VA.
Example
VAB = 7000 Vrms Vxx = 6050 Vrms Vab = 49.90 Vrms V*R”T” = 16.63 Vrms
Fig. 4 – Typical Motor Voltage waveform
The above figure shows a typical voltage waveform measured at the secondary of the voltage transformer.
The two signals V*R”T” and V*T”S” proportional to the motor voltage are forwarded to the ATAV0X board for
further processing
A2 Appendix
XTAV01 ATAV01 VR”T”
R25
VR”T” VS”R” = -VR”T”- VT”S” VS”R”

V*R”T” 1/3 R26 1
VT”S” VT”S”
R38 R137
VMOT Inst
V*T”S” 1/3 R39 1 R138 R143
R144
VMOT F
+VMOT
-VMOT
Fig. 5 – Board ATAV0X Motor Voltage Signals Scaling and Conditioning
A2 Appendix
VR”T” VT”S” SCALING
R25 R38 are selected in such a way that when :
V*R”T” = VNOM VR”T” = 6 Vrms (8.49 Vpeak)
V*T”S” = VNOM VT”S” = 6 Vrms (8.49 Vpeak)
Example
Vxx = 6050 Vrms Vab = 49.90 Vrms V*R”T” = 16.63 Vrms V*T”S” = 16.63 Vrms
1 R 25
VR " T "  V * R " T " R 25  16.28k R 26  15k VR" T "  6.0Vrms
3 R 26
1 R38
VT " S "  V * T " S " R 38  16.28k R 39  15k VT " S "  6.0Vrms
3 R39
1 R 25
VR " T "  V * R " T " R 25  16.28k R 26  15k VR " T "  6.0Vrms
3 R 26
1 R38
VT " S "  V * T " S " R38  16.28k R39  15k VT " S "  6.0Vrms
3 R39
VS”R” is not measured directly but it is calculated by means of the other two voltages VR”T VT”S”
VS”R” = - VR”T - VT”S”
A2 Appendix
MOTOR VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT VMOT
Phase to phase voltages VR”T and VT”S” are filtered by mean of a low pass filter in order to remove the
distorsion due to the thyristor commutation.
-3dB Corner Frequency  111 Hz
The third phase to phase filtered voltage is calculated by means of the other two filtered voltages
VFS”R” = - VFR”T - VFT”S”
The three voltages are then rectified in order to have a continuos voltage proportional to the
motor voltage. Since the signal is the result of rectification of three sinusoidal waveforms it is
not perfectly continuos but has a ripple which frequency is six times the frequency of the
sinusoidal signals (Fig. 5).
Fig. 6 – Motor Voltage VMOT waveform
The resultant signal is used throughout the control (VMOT), for metering of the motor voltage (VMOT
INST) and protection (VMOT F).
VMOT VMOT INST SCALING
Resistor R137 is selected in such a way that when the motor voltage reaches its nominal voltage signal VMOT
is equal to 8 Vdc.
Example
Vxx = 6050 Vrms @ VMOT= 8 Vdc

Vxx = 1550 Vrms @ VMOT= 8 Vdc
Resistor R143 is selected in such a way that when the meter reaches the full scale voltage corresponding to
the value reported on the instrument tag the signal corresponding value is equal to 10 Vdc
A2 Appendix
Example
VFS = 7000 Vrms @ VMOT iNST= 10 Vdc
VFS = 2000 Vrms @ VMOT iNST= 10 Vdc
MOTOR SIDE CURRENT TRANSDUCERS AND MEASURE
The figure below shows a typical arrangement of the motor side (inverter side) of an LCI drive, in order from
a) Thyristor converter (inverter) and smoothing DC Link Reactor

b) Current transformers (TA03 – TA04)
c) Synchronous Motor
d) Synchronous Motor Field
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (TRANSDUCERS)

Phase motor current is sensed by means of Hall effect transducer. They isolate the voltage on the primary
side from the connected measuring and protective circuits and transform the sensed current accurately in
magnitude and phase to a convenient secondary current.
DC LINK REACTOR Idc
T4 T6 T2
FIELD U U(R)
V TA03 V(S)
W W(T)
TA04
T1 T3 T5
ISN
Ir  Ixx
IPN
- + M - + M
11 34 33 09 14 37 36 12
N24 P24 N24 P24
R39 R43 P24 N24
R40 R44
R41 R45
R42 R46
XTAV01
VIR  R 39 // .. // R 42  Ir
IR- IR IT- IT
TO CONTROL BOARD
ATAV01 VIT  R 34 // .. // R 46  It
Fig. 7 – Motor Current measure by Hall effect transducers
IPN = Primary Transformer Nominal Current IPN = see schematic diagram (ex IPN=2000 A)
ISN = Secondary Transformer Nom. Current ISN = 400mA @ I= IPN (standard value)
Ks = ISN / IPN Conversion ratio Ks = 1:5000 (0.4/2000)
Ixx = Measured Current R39..,,,,,,, R46 Sensing and scaling resistors
A2 - 10 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A2 Appendix
CLOSED LOOP HALL EFFECT CURRENT TRANSDUCERS

The Hall effect is caused by the Lorentz force, which acts on the mobile electrical charge carries in the
conductor, when they are exposed to a magnetic field that is perpendicular to the current direction
Ic
VH
Fig. 8 – Hall Effect

The control current Ic flows through a semiconductor thin bar, the magnetic flux B generates a Lorentz force
perpendicular the direction of the charges composing the current causing a change of the number of charge
at the edges of the bar, this creates a difference of potential called Hall voltage VH.
In the open loop transducers the magnetic flux is created by the primary current Ip to be measured. The
magnetic flux is measured in the air gap using the Hall sensor, the output is an exact copy (reduced in
magnitude) of the primary current Ip.
In the closed loop transducers the magnetic flux created by the primary current Ip is balanced by a
complementary flux produced by driving a current through the secondary windings. A Hall sensor and
electronic circuits generates the secondary compensation current that is an exact copy (reduced in
magnitude) of the primary current I
Ip
Is
Fig. 9 - Hall Effect Current Transducer

The main advantage of Hall effect transducers ii that they are able to measure DC, AC and very complex
waveform with galvanic isolation, moreover they don not produce any insertion losses in the circuit to be
measured, some other advantages are :
- excellent accuracy
- very good linearity
- current overload withstanding without damages
- very fast time response and wide frequency bandwidth
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A2 - 11
A2 Appendix
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN AC rms MOTOR CURRENT AND Idc CURRENT

The relationship between the AC current (Fig.9) flowing in each motor phase and the direct current Idc
flowing in the DC link (Fig.10) is the following :
2
Irms   Idc  0.816  Idc
3
The above relationship supposes that the motor current is a perfect squared waveform, actually the current,
due to the commutation of the thyristors is a trapezoidal waveform with some ripple on the top.
Fig. 10 - Typical Motor Current waveform
The above figure shows a typical current waveform measured at the primary of the current transducer.
Fig. 11 - Typical DC Current waveform
The above figure shows a typical current waveform measured on the dc link.
A2 - 12 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A2 Appendix
Example
IPN = 2000 Arms ISN = 400 mArms Ixx = 857 Arms Ir = 171 mArms
Ixx = 1050 Adc Ir = 210 mAdc
IR IT SCALING
R39…R42, R43…R46 are selected in such a way that when the motor current reaches its nominal value the
output voltage of the XTAV0X board is equal to 6 Vdc :
I*R = INOM VIR = 6 Vdc
I*T = INOM VIT = 6 Vdc
Example of calculation
IPN = 2000 Arms ISN = 400 mArms IN = 857 Arms In = 171 mArms
IN = 1050 Adc In = 210 mAdc
VIR
VI R  R 39 // .. // R 42  In  6 R 39 // .. // R 42   28.57 
In
VIR
VI T  R 43 // .. // R 46  In  6 R 43 // .. // R 46   28.57 
In
VIR
VI R  R 39 // .. // R 42  In  6 R 39 // .. // R 42   24.92 
In
VIR
VI T  R 43 // .. // R 46  In  6 R 43 // .. // R 46   24.92 
In
VIR
VI R  R 39 // .. // R 42  In  6 R 39 // .. // R 42   20.69 
In
VIR
VI T  R 43 // .. // R 46  In  6 R 43 // .. // R 46   20.69 
In
The two signals VIR and VIT proportional to the motor phases current are forwarded to the ATAV0X board for
further processing.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A2 - 13
A2 Appendix
XTAV01 ATAV01
IR 1
IDCInst
R71
IR R72
R66
IS Idc
+I”DC
IT 1 1 R63
IT -I”DC
-I”DC F
+I”DC F
Fig. 12 – Board ATAV0X Motor Current Signals Scaling and Conditioning
A2 - 14 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A2 Appendix
DC CURRENT MEASUREMENT IDC
The third phase current is calculated by means of the other two unfiltered currents
VIS = - VIR - VIT
The three voltages are then half-rectified in order to have a continuos voltage proportional to
the motor current, the resultant signal it is also proportional to the dc current I DC flowing in
the dc link.
Fig. 13 - Typical DC Current waveform
The above figure shows a typical current waveform measured on the dc link.The resultant signal is used
throughout the control and for protection (I”dc) .
I”DC SCALING
Resistor R66 is selected in such a way that when the dc current reaches its nominal value the signal I”DC is
equal to 6 Vdc.
Example
Ixx = 1050 Adc @ I”DC= 6 Vdc
A2 - 15 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A2 Appendix
LINE SIDE VOLTAGE TRANSDUCERS AND MEASURE
LINE VOLTAGE MEASURE
The figure below shows a typical arrangement of the line side (rectifier side) of an LCI drive, in order from
a) Thyristor converter (rectifier) and smoothing DC Link Reactor

b) Voltage transformers (TV01 – TV02)
1) For voltage up to 4000 Vrms : Hall Effect Voltage Transducers
2) For voltage beyond 4000 Vrms : Magnetic Voltage Transformers
c) Converter Power Transformer
d) Line Circuit Breaker
VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS (MAGNETIC)
Line to line motor voltage is sensed by means of low power voltage transformers which operate almost on
no-load. They isolate the voltage on the primary side from the connected measuring and protective circuits
and transform the sensed voltage accurately in magnitude and phase to a convenient secondary voltage.
LINE DC LINK REACTOR Idc
T1 T3 T5
TCV
L1 L1(R)
CB
L2 L2(S)
L3 L3(T)
A B A B
100 3
Vab  Vxx
TV01 TV02 T4 T6 T2
VABN
a b a b
02 04 06 08
R R R R
P24 N24
R R
XTAV01
R' T' T' S'
1 TO CONTROL BOARD 1
V * R ' T '  Vab V * T ' S '  Vab
3 ATAV01 3
Fig. 14 – Line Voltage measure by magnetic transformer

VABN = Primary Transformer Nominal Voltage VABN = see schematic diagram
VabN = Secondary Transformer Nominal Voltage VabN = 100/3 (standard value)
Vxx = Measured Voltage R..R Scaling Resistors
Example
VAB = 7000 Vrms Vxx = 6050 Vrms Vab = 49.90 VrmsV*R’T’ = 16.63 Vrms
A2 - 16 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A2 Appendix
Fig. 15 – Typical Line Voltage waveform

The above figure shows a typical voltage waveform measured at the secondary of the voltage transformer.
The two signals V*R’T’ and V*T’S’ proportional to the line voltage are forwarded to the ATAV0X board for
further processing
VOLTAGE TRANSDUCERS (HALL EFFECT)

Line to line voltage is sensed by means of Hall effect voltage transducers. They isolate the voltage on the
primary side from the connected measuring and protective circuits and transform the sensed voltage
accurately in magnitude and phase to a convenient secondary voltage.
T1 T3 T5
TCV
L1 L1(R)
CB
L2 L2(S)
L3 L3(T)
T4 T6 T2
TV01 TV02
ISN
Irt  Vxx
VPN ISN
- + M - + M
Its  Vxx
04 27 26 02 08 31 30 06
VPN
N24 P24 N24 P24
R3 R6 P24 N24
R4 R7
R5 R8
XTAV02
V * R ' T '  R 3 // R 4 // R 5  Irt

R' T' T' S'
TO CONTROL BOARD
ATAV02 V * T ' S '  R 6 // R 7 // R8  Its
Fig. 16 – Line Voltage measure by Hall effect transducers
VPN = Primary Transformer Nominal Voltage VPN = see schematic diag. (ex VPN=3000 Vrms )
ISN = Secondary Transformer Nom. Current ISN = 50mA @ V= VPN (standard value)
Vxx = Measured Voltage R3..,,,,,,, R8 Sensing and scaling resistors
A2 - 17 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A2 Appendix
CLOSED LOOP HALL EFFECT VOLTAGE TRANSDUCERS

A very small current limited by a series resistor is taken from the voltage to be measured and is driven
through the primary coil, the magnetic flux created by the primary current IP is balanced by a complementary
flux produced by driving a current through the secondary windings. A hall devices and associated electronic
circuit are used to generate the secondary (compensating) current that is an exact representation of the
primary voltage. The primary resistor RP can be incorporated or not in the transducer.
MEASURED
VOLTAGE Is
Ip
Fig. 17 – Hall effect Voltage transducer

Example
VPN = 3000 Vrms ISN = 50 mArms Vxx = 3000 Vrms Irt = 50 mArms
VPN = 2000 Vrms ISN = 50 mArms Vxx = 1550 Vrms Irt = 38.75 mArms
VRT VTS SCALING

R3-R4-R5, R6-R7-R8 are selected in such a way that when the line voltage reaches its nominal value the
output voltage of the XTAV0X board is equal to 6 Vrms :
VRT = VNOM V*R’T’ = 6 Vrms
VTS = VNOM V*T’S’ = 6 Vrms
VPN = 3000 Vrms ISN = 50 mArms VN = 3000 Vrms In = 50 mArms
V * R' T '
V * R ' T '  R 3 // R 4 // R 5  In  6 Vrms R 3 // R 4 // R 5   120 
In
V * T ' S'
V * T ' S '  R 6 // R 7 // R 8  In  6 Vrms R 6 // R 7 // R8   120 
In
VPN = 2000 Vrms ISN = 50 mArms VN = 1550 Vrms In = 38.75 mArms
V * R' T '
V * R ' T '  R 3 // R 4 // R 5  In  6 Vrms R 3 // R 4 // R 5   154.8 
In
V * T ' S'
V * T ' S '  R 6 // R 7 // R 8  In  6 Vrms R 6 // R 7 // R8   154.8 
In
The two signals V*R’T’ and V*T’S’ proportional to the line voltage are forwarded to the ATAV0X board for
further processing.
A2 - 18 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A2 Appendix
XTAV0X ATAV0X VR”T”
R25
VR’T’ VS’R’ = -VR’T’- VT’S’ VS’R’

V*R’T’ kd R26 1
VT’S’ VT’S’
R38 R137
VLINE Inst
V*T’S’ kd R39 1 R138 R143
R144
VLINE F
kd = 1/3 TV MAG ATAV01
kd = 1 TH HALL ATAV02
+VLINE
-VLINE
Fig. 18 – Board ATAV0X Line Voltage Signals Scaling and Conditioning
A2 - 19 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A2 Appendix
VR’T’ VT’S’ SCALING
R25 R38 are selected in such a way that when :
V*R’T’ = VNOM VR’T’ = 6 Vrms (8.49 Vpeak)
V*T’S’ = VNOM VT’S’ = 6 Vrms (8.49 Vpeak)
Example of calculation – TV Magnetic
Vxx = 6050 Vrms Vab = 49.90 Vrm s V*R'T’ = 16.63 Vrms V*T’S’ = 16.63 Vrms
1 R 25
VR ' T '  V * R ' T ' R 25  16.50k R 26  15k VR ' T '  6.0Vrms
3 R 26
1 R38
VT ' S '  V * T ' S ' R38  16.50k R39  15k VT ' S '  6.0Vrms
3 R39
Example of calculation – TV Hall Effect
Vxx = 3000 Vrms In = 50.00 mArms V*R”T” = 6 Vrms V*T”S” = 6 Vrms
1 R 25
VR ' T '  V * R ' T ' R 25  15k R 26  15k VR ' T '  6.0Vrms
1 R 26
1 R38
VT ' S '  V * T ' S ' R 38  15k R 39  15k VT ' S '  6.0Vrms
1 R39
Vxx = 1550 Vrms In = 38.75 mArms V*R”T” = 6 Vrms V*T”S” = 6 Vrms
1 R 25
VR ' T '  V * R ' T ' R 25  15k R 26  15k VR ' T '  6.0Vrms
1 R 26
1 R38
VT ' S '  V * T ' S ' R38  15k R39  15k VT ' S '  6.0Vrms
1 R39
VS’R’ is not measured directly but it is calculated by means of the other two voltages VR’T’ VT’S’
VS’R’ = - VR’T’ - VT’S’
A2 - 20 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A2 Appendix
LINE VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT VLINE
Phase to phase voltages VR’T’ and VT’S’ are filtered by mean of a low pass filter in order to remove the
distorsion due to the thyristor commutation.
-3dB Corner Frequency  111 Hz
The third phase to phase filtered voltage is calculated by means of the other two filtered voltages
VFS’R’ = - VFR’T’ - VFT’S’
The three voltages are then rectified in order to have a continuos voltage proportional to the
line voltage. Since the signal is the result of rectification of three sinusoidal waveforms it is not
perfectly continuos but has a ripple which frequency is six times the frequency of the
sinusoidal signals (see Fig. 18).
Fig. 19 – Typical Line Voltage Measure waveform
The resultant signal is used throughout the control (VLINE) ,for metering of the line voltage (VLINE INST)
and for protection (VLINE F).
VLINE VLINE INST SCALING

Resistor R137 is selected in such a way that when the line voltage reaches its nominal value the voltage
signal VLINE is equal to 8 Vdc.
Example
Vxx = 6050 Vrms @ VLINE= 8 Vdc
Resistor R143 is selected in such a way that when the meter reaches the full scale corresponding to the
value reported on the instrument tag the signal corresponding value is 10 Vdc
Example
VFS = 7000 Vrms @ VLINE INST= 10 Vdc

A2 - 21 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A2 Appendix
LINE CURRENT MEASURE
The figure below shows a typical arrangement of the line side (rectifier side) of an LCI drive, in order from
a) Thyristor converter (rectifier) and smoothing DC Link Reactor

b) Current transformers (TA01 – TA02)
c) Converter Power Transformer
d) Line Circuit Breaker
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS (TRANSDUCERS)
Phase line current is sensed by means of Hall effect transducer. They isolate the voltage on the primary side
from the connected measuring and protective circuits and transform the sensed current accurately in
magnitude and phase to a convenient secondary current.
T1 T3 T5
TCV
L1 L1(R)
CB
L2 TA01 L2(S)
L3 L3(T)
TA02
ISN
Ir  Ixx
T4 T6 T2
IPN
- + M - + M
11 34 33 09 14 37 36 12
N24 P24 N24 P24
R39 R43 P24 N24
R40 R44
R41 R45
R42 R46
XTAV01/02
IR- IR IT- IT
TO CONTROL BOARD VIR  R 39 // .. // R 42  Ir

ATAV01/02
VIT  R 34 // .. // R 46  It
IPN = Primary Transformer Nominal Current IPN = see schematic diagram (ex IPN=2000 A)
ISN = Secondary Transformer Nom. Current ISN = 400mA @ I= IPN (standard value)
Ks = ISN / IPN Conversion ratio Ks = 1:5000 (0.4/2000)
Ixx = Measured Current R39..,,,,,,, R46 Sensing and scaling resistors
Fig. 20 – Line Current measure by Hall effect transducers
A2 - 22 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A2 Appendix
RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN AC rms LINE CURRENT AND Idc CURRENT

The relationship between the AC current (Fig. 19) flowing in each line phase and the direct current Idc
flowing in the DC link (Fig. 20) is the following :
2
Irms   Idc  0.816  Idc
3
The above relationship supposes that the line current is a perfect squared waveform, actually the current,
due to the commutation of the thyristors is a trapezoidal waveform with some ripple on the top.
Fig. 21 – Typical Line Current waveform

The above figure shows a typical current waveform measured at the primary of the current transducer.
Example
Fig. 22 – Typical DC Current waveform

A2 - 23 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A2 Appendix
IR IT SCALING
R39…R42, R43…R46 are selected in such a way that when the line current reaches its nominal value the
output voltage of the XTAV0X board is equal to 6 Vdc :
I*R = INOM VIR = 6 Vdc
I*T = INOM VIT = 6 Vdc
VIR
VI R  R 39 // .. // R 42  In  6 R 39 // .. // R 42   28.57 
In
VIR
VI T  R 43 // .. // R 46  In  6 R 43 // .. // R 46   28.57 
In
VIR
VI R  R 39 // .. // R 42  In  6 R 39 // .. // R 42   24.92 
In
VIR
VI T  R 43 // .. // R 46  In  6 R 43 // .. // R 46   24.92 
In
VIR
VI R  R 39 // .. // R 42  In  6 R 39 // .. // R 42   20.69 
In
VIR
VI T  R 43 // .. // R 46  In  6 R 43 // .. // R 46   20.69 
In
The two signals VIR and VIT proportional to the line phases current are forwarded to the ATAV0X board for
further processing.
A2 - 24 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A2 Appendix
XTAV0X ATAV0X
IR 1
IDCInst
R71
IR R72
R66
IS Idc
+I’DC
IT 1 1 R63
IT -I’DC
-I’DC F
+I’DC F
Fig. 23 – Board ATAV0X Line Current Signals Scaling and Conditioning
A2 - 25 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A2 Appendix
DC CURRENT MEASUREMENT IDC
The third phase current is calculated by means of the other two unfiltered currents
VIS = - VIR - VIT

The three voltages are then half-rectified in order to have a continuos voltage proportional to
the line current, the resultant signal it is also proportional to the dc current I DC flowing in the
dc link.
Fig. 24 – Typical DC Current waveform

The resultant signal (I’dc) is used throughout the control for regulation, protection and metering of the
dc link current (IDC INST).
I’DC IDC INST SCALING
Resistor R66 is selected in such a way that when the dc current reaches its nominal value the signal I’DC is
equal to 6 Vdc.
Example
Ixx = 1050 Adc @ I’DC= 6 Vdc
Resistor R71 is selected in such a way that when the meter reaches the full scale corresponding to the value
reported on the instrument tag the signal corresponding value is equal to 10 Vdc.
Example
IFS = 2000 Adc @ VDC INST= 10 Vdc
A2 - 26 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A2 Appendix
GROUND FAULT CURRENT TRANSDUCER AND MEASURE
The fault current is sensed by means of an Hall effect voltage transducer (TH01) used as a very low current
transducer. One terminal of sensing device is connected to a convenient point of the converter by means of
resistors, the second terminal is connected directly to ground. The ground fault device is able to detect faults
on the line side ( transformer secondary windings ), converter (inverter and rectifier), dc link reactor and
motor side.
The figure shows two examples of earth fault :
- transformer phase L2
- converter plus connection
- converter minus connection
- motor phase U
In case of fault a current is flowing through the current transducer and ground (see Fig.26 and Fig.27). The
fault current waveform depends upon in which side of the converter occurs.
LINE Idc DC REACTOR
T4 T6 T2
T1 T3 T5
TCV RH
SM
L1(R) U(R)
CB
L2(S) V(S)
THO1 FIELD
L3(T) W(T)
RH
T1 T3 T5
T4 T6 T2
DC REACTOR
- + M
ISN
Ignd  Ifault
17 40 39
16 IPN
N24 P24
P24 N24 R47
R48
R49
XTAV0X
0 VGND
TO CONTROL BOARD
ATAV0X VGND  R 47 // R 48  Ignd
Fig. 25 – Ground Fault Current Measure by Hall effect transducer
IPN = Primary Transformer Nominal Current IPN = see schematic diagram (ex IPN=20 mA)
ISN = Secondary Transformer Nom. Current ISN = 100mA @ I= IPN
Ks = ISN / IPN Conversion ratio Ks = 5:1 (0.1/0.02)
Ifault = Measured Fault Current R47..R48 Sensing and scaling resistors
A2 - 27 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A2 Appendix
Fig. 26 – Converter minus point ground fault current
Fig. 27 – Transformer phase S round fault current
VGND SCALING
R47.R46.R48 are selected in such a way that when the ground fault current reaches its maximum value the
output voltage of the XTAV0X board is equal to 8 V :
Ifault = IMAX VGND = 8 V
A2 - 28 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A2 Appendix
IPN = 20 mA ISN = 100 mA Ifault = 16 mA Ignd = 80 mA
VGND
V GND  R 47 // R 48  Ignd  8V R 47 // R 48   100  R 49  0 
Ignd
VGND signal in then processed by the ATAV0X board for further scaling (when necessary) and to the
APROTB board where the signal is filtered and rectified.
XTAV0X ATAV0X APROT
R78
0 GND Fault
VGND 1 R79
Fig. 28 – Ground Fault Protection Block
R78 is selected in such a way that when the ground fault current reaches its maximum value the output
voltage V*GND of the op-amp is equal to 8 V :
1 R78
V * GND  VGND R 78  15k R 79  15k V * GND  8V
1 R79
Signal VGND proportional to the ground fault current is filtered by mean of a low pass filter. -
3dB Corner Frequency  140 Hz
The filtered signal is then rectified in order to have a continuos voltage proportional to the fault
current
Ground Fault Alarm (Trip) Threshold
A2 - 29 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A2 Appendix
SIGNALS EXCHANGED WITH THE OUTSIDE EQUIPMENTS
The signals exchanged with the outside equipments depend upon the application and are broadly subdivided
in two categories :
- digital for command and status control dealt with in another section of the operating manual
- analog input signals for reference (speed) and feedback output signals (speed, power, current etc)
dealt with in this section.
SPEED REFERENCE (SETPOINT)
The speed reference signal is connected to the control by means of a galvanic isolated devices, usually the
input is provided by 4-20mA or 0-20mA current, the output of the device is a 0-10V signal.
SPEED REF
FROM DCS
ACPU0X AINT01
XTAV0X ATAV0X
R84
LIVE INST
0-20mA
SPEED 1 R85 A/D D/A
0-10V REF
SPEED REF
Fig. 29 – Speed Reference Conditioning Block
SREF NOM = 18.55 mA @ n = 5100 rpm F = 85.00 Hz
SREF MAX = 20.00 mA @ n = 5500 rpm F = 91.67 Hz
S*REF NOM = 10.00 V @ n = 5100 rpm F = 85.00 Hz
Resistor R84 is selected in such a way that when the speed reference reaches its nominal value the voltage
signal SPEEDREF is equal to 8 Vdc.
1 R84
SPEEDREF  S * REF R84  12k R85  15k SPEEDREF  8.0Vdc
1 R85
SPEEDREF is then converted from analogic to digital used by the speed regulator as speed set-point.
SPEEDREF is displayed on the panel meter, it is scaled in such a way that when the meter reaches the full
scale corresponding to the value reported on the instrument tag the signal corresponding value is equal to 10
Vdc.
A2 - 30 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A2 Appendix
SPEEDREF may differ from the instantaneous value of the signal received from the outside equipment (S*REF)
since is internally ramped, a step signal is usually translated in a ramp signal.
SPEEDFS = 5500 rpm @ VDC iNST= 10 Vdc
SPEED FEEDBACK
The motor speed feedback is provided to the outside equipments by means of a galvanic isolated devices,
usually the output is provided by 4-20mA or 0-20mA current corresponding to the control voltage signal 0-
10V.
The motor speed is calculated by the AREV0X board by measuring the period of the motor voltage signals
VR”T VT”S”.
AREV0X ATAV0X XTAV0X DCS

VR”T”
0-10V MOTOR SPEED
VT”S” REVE
SFBK 0-20mA
REVE
R113 SPEEDFBK
R112
REVE
SFBK MOTOR SPEED
Fig. 30 – Speed Feedback signal conditioning block
The AREV0X board is internally calibrated in such a way that when the motor reaches the nominal speed the
REVE voltage is equal to 8V
SPEEDFBK is displayed on the panel meter, it is scaled in such a way that when the meter reaches the full
scale corresponding to the value reported on the instrument tag the signal corresponding value is equal to 10
Vdc.
REVE (SFBK) = 8V @ nNOM = 5100 rpm F = 85.00 Hz
REVE (SFBK) = 8.63V @ nFS = 5500 rpm F = 91.67 Hz
nFS = 5500 rpm @ VDC iNST= 10 Vdc
Resistor R112 is calculated taking into account the relationship between the instrument voltage signal VDC
iNST and the motor speed feedback signal REVE (SFBK)
R113
SPEEDFBK  SSBK R112  19.07k R113  22.1k SPEEDFBK  10V SFBK  8.63V
R112
A2 - 31 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A2 Appendix
A2 - 32 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A2 Appendix
A2 - 33 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
APPENDIX A3
PROTECTIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION .............................................................................................................................. 3
TYPICAL LCI VFD CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS ....................................................................................... 3
6 PULSE – 6 PULSE ....................................................................................................................... 3
12 PULSE – 6 PULSE ..................................................................................................................... 3
12 PULSE – 12 PULSE ................................................................................................................... 5
PROTECTIONS LIST ....................................................................................................................... 6
PROTECTION PHILOSPHY ............................................................................................................. 6
SIGNALS USED FOR CONVERTER PROTECTION .................................................................. 7
PROTECTION BASIC BLOCK ..................................................................................................... 8
COMPARATOR BLOCK .................................................................................................................. 9
DELAY BLOCK ............................................................................................................................ 11
PROTECTION INHIBIT BLOCK ..................................................................................................... 12
PROTECTION BOARD APROTB SETTING TABLE..................................................................... 13
VOLTAGE PROTECTIONS ............................................................................................................ 14
LINE VOLTAGE PROTECTIONS ........................................................................................... 14
LINE OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION VLINE Max ............................................................................. 14
LINE UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION VLINE Min ........................................................................... 15
FLYING RESTART CAPABILITY ................................................................................................... 15
MOTOR VOLTAGE PROTECTIONS ..................................................................................... 16
MOTOR OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION VMOT Max......................................................................... 16
CURRENT PROTECTIONS ........................................................................................................... 17
LINE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION I’DC Max ............................................................................... 17
MOTOR OVERCURRENT PROTECTION I”DC Max .......................................................................... 17
DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION BETWEEN CURRENTS LINE-MOTOR SIDE I’DC < I”DC ...................... 18
DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION BETWEEN CURRENTS LINE-MOTOR SIDE I”DC < I’DC ...................... 18
DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION BETWEEN CURRENTS LINE SIDE  I’DC and Y I’DCY ...................... 19
GROUND FAULTS ......................................................................................................................... 20
CONVERTER DC+ GROUND FAULT.............................................................................................. 21
MOTOR PHASE R GROUND FAULT .............................................................................................. 22
MINIMUM EXCITER CURRENT - IEXC ............................................................................................ 24
CONVERTER SUPPLY VOLTAGE PHASES SEQUENCE ........................................................... 25
EXAMPLES
Ex. 1 - Example of calculation of protection threshold .............................................................. 10

A3 Appendix
FIGURES
Fig. 1 - 6 Pulse / 6 Pulse .................................................................................................................. 3

Fig. 2 - 12 Pulse / 6 Pulse ................................................................................................................ 4
Fig. 3 - 12 Pulse / 12 Pulse.............................................................................................................. 5
Fig. 4 - Protection Block ................................................................................................................... 8
Fig. 5 - Schmitt Trigger Comparator ............................................................................................... 9
Fig. 6 - Delay Block ......................................................................................................................... 11
Fig. 7 - Inhibit Block ........................................................................................................................ 12
Fig. 8 – Line Over-voltage Protection Block................................................................................ 14
Fig. 9 - Line Under-Voltage Protection Block.............................................................................. 15
Fig. 10 - Motor Over-Voltage Protection Block ........................................................................... 16
Fig. 11 - Line Over-Current Protection Block .............................................................................. 17
Fig. 12 - Motor Over-Current Protection Block ........................................................................... 17
Fig. 13 – Differential I’DC < I”DC Current Protection Block .......................................................... 18
Fig. 14 – Differential I”DC < I’DC Current Protection Block .......................................................... 18
Fig. 15 – Differential Current I’DC and I’DCY Protection Block ................................................. 19
Fig. 16 – Ground Faults Protection Block.................................................................................... 20
Fig. 17 – Ground Fault – Converter DC+ side - Ignd................................................................. 21
Fig. 18 – Ground Fault – Converter DC+ side – V*GND .......................................................... 21
Fig. 19 – Ground Fault – Converter DC+ side – VGNDR – 0 GND FAULT........................... 22
Fig. 20– Ground Fault – Motor Phase R – Ignd ......................................................................... 22
Fig. 21 – Ground Fault – Motor Phase R – V*GND ................................................................... 23
Fig. 22 – Ground Fault – Motor Phase R – VGNDR – 0 GND FAULT ................................... 23
Fig. 23– Minimum Exciter Current Protection Block .................................................................. 24
Fig. 24– Six-pulse fully controlled bridge voltage phase sequence ........................................ 25
Fig. 25– Voltage Phase Sequence ............................................................................................... 26
Fig. 26– Converter Supply Voltage Sequence Protection Block ............................................. 26
TABLES
Tab. 1 - Protections settings ............................................................................................................ 7

Tab. 2 - Board APROTB protection setting table ...................................................................... 13
Tab. 3 - Line Over-Voltage Protection Standard Setting Table ............................................... 14
Tab. 4 - Line Over-voltage Protection Standard Setting Table ................................................ 15
Tab. 5 - Motor Over-Voltage Protection Standard Setting Table ............................................. 16
Tab. 6 - Line Over-Current Protection Standard Setting Table................................................ 17
Tab. 7 - Motor Over-Current Protection Standard Setting Table ............................................. 17
Tab. 8 - Differential I’DC < I”DC Current Protection Standard Setting Table ........................... 18
Tab. 9 - Differential I”DC < I’DC Current Protection Standard Setting Table ........................... 18
Tab. 10 - Differential Current Protection I’DC and I’DCY Standard Setting Table.................. 19
Tab. 11 – Ground Fault Protection Standard Setting Table ..................................................... 20
Tab. 12 – Minimum Exciter Protection Standard Setting Table ............................................... 24
A3 Appendix
INTRODUCTION
This chapter deals with the basic protections that a typical of the VFD frequency converter, refer to others
sections of the operating manual for all the others protections concerning auxiliary devices of the VFD
converter (ex supply transformer, dc link reactor, cooling system) or depending upon the particular
application.
TYPICAL LCI VFD CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS
6 PULSE – 6 PULSE
The figure below shows a typical arrangement an LCI drive (6 pulse line side / 6 pulse motor side) , in order
from right to left we have :

g) Rectifier Thyristor Converter
h) Voltage and Current Transducers
i) XTAV0X Scaling Passive Board
j) ATAV0X Signal Conditioning Active Board
k) Supply Power Transformer TCV
l) Line Circuit Breaker CB
m) APROTB Protections Board
n) ASIP01 Fault Signalling Board
INVERTER
Idc
LINE
Ldc T4 T6 T2
T1 T3 T5
TCV RH
SM
L1(R) U(R)
CB
L2(S) V(S)
FIELD
L3(T) W(T)
RH
T1 T3 T5
T4 T6 T2
IR' IT' VRT' VTS' IGND VRT" VTS" IT" IR"

XTAVOX XTAV0X
ATAV0X ATAV0X
IDC' VLINE F VGND VMOT F IDC"
APROTB
XTAVXX
MX VL
MX SPD
MX I"D
MX VM
MX STRT
MN VL
TRP SW
I'D< I"D
I"D< I'D
MX I'D
THY FLT
GND FLT
0SS
ASIP01
Fig. 1 - 6 Pulse / 6 Pulse

A3 Appendix
The figure below shows a typical arrangement an LCI drive (12 pulse line side / 6 pulse motor side)
in order from right to left we have :

g) Rectifier Thyristor Converter (y transformer supply )
h) Rectifier Thyristor Converter (d transformer supply )
i) Voltage and Current Transducers
j) XTAV0X Scaling Passive Board
k) ATAV0X Signal Conditioning Active Board
l) Supply Power Transformer TCV
m) Line Circuit Breaker CB
n) APROTB Protections Board
o) ASIP01 Fault Signalling Board
DC REACTOR
Ldc T4 T6 T2
TCV T1 T3 T5
L1(R)
L2(S) RH
LINE L3(T) T4 T6 T2
y U(R)
CB
T4 T6 T2 V(S)
SM
D FIELD
T1 T3 T5
W(T)
d L1(R) T1 T3 T5
L2(S)
L3(T)
RH
T1 T3 T5
T4 T6 T2
IRy' ITy' IRd' ITd' VRT' VTS' IGND VRT" VTS" IR" IT"

XTAVOX XTAV0X
0DIFF DY
ATAV0X ATAV0X
IDCy' IDC' VLINE F VGND VMOT F IDC"
APROTB
XTAVXX
MX VL
MX SPD
MX I"D
MX STRT
DIFF DY
MX VM
MN VL
TRP SW
MX I'D
I'D< I"D
I"D< I'D
THY FLT
GND FLT
0SS
ASIP01
A3 Appendix
The figure below shows a typical arrangement an LCI drive (12 pulse line side / 12 pulse motor side).
Comparing Fig.3 with Fig.1 we may notice that the two configuration are quite similar : 12/12 pulse is just
the 6/6 doubled.
ASIP01
IDC" IDC"
VLINE F VLINE F
ATAV0X IDC' IDC'
APROTB VMOT F VMOT F
ATAV0X
VGND VGND
XTAVOX XTAVOX
IRy' ITy' VRT' VTS' IGND VRT" VTS" IR" IT"
RECTIFIER INVERTER
Idc DC REACTOR
Ldc T4 T6
T1 T3 T5 T2
L1(R) RH
U(R)
L2(S) V(S)
LINE L3(T) W(T)
y RH
T1 T3 T5
CB T4 T6 T2
TCV Idc DC REACTOR SM

D FIELD
Ldc T4 T6 T2
T1 T3 T5
d L1(R) RH
U(R)
L2(S) V(S)
L3(T) W(T)
RH
T1 T3 T5
T4 T6 T2
IRd' ITd' VRT' VTS' IGND VRT" VTS" IR" IT"

XTAVOX XTAV0X
VGND VGND
VLINE F VLINE F
ATAV0X IDC' IDC'
APROTB VMOT F VMOT F
ATAV0X
IDC" IDC"
ASIP01
A3 Appendix
PROTECTIONS LIST
The following is the list of the hardware protections detected on the APROTB board and displayed on the
ASIP01 leds :
1 Maximum instantaneous current of the line side bridge (rectifier) – overcurrent I’dc H09
2 Maximum instantaneous current of the motor side bridge (inverter) – overcurrent I”dc H10
3 Differential current between the line side and the motor side bridge - I’dc < I”dc H11
4 Differential current between the line side and the motor side bridge - I”dc < I’dc H12
5 Differental current between line  I’dc and Y I’dcY side (12 pulse line side only). H08
this protection is carried out by the ATAVXX board
6 Maximum motor voltage – over-voltage VMOT H05
7 Maximum line voltage – over-voltage VLINE H04
8 Minimum line voltage – under-voltage VLINE H03
9 Ground fault - VGND H15
10 Minimum exciter current - IEXC (external exciter only) H07
11 Maximum starting time – time out STTOUT H06
12 Converter supply voltage phases sequence H02
13 Connection fault between boards XTAV0X and ATAV0X H01
14 CPU board ACPU0X fault – watch dog H13
PROTECTION PHILOSPHY
The aim of the converter protection system is to detect, in the early stage, anomalous or abnormal conditions
in the operation or on the supply of the converters (rectifier and inverter) that could endanger or destroy the
converter valves (thyristors).
Two main reasons can destroy converter valves :
1. Voltages in excess of the voltage rating of the valves

2. Currents that cause excessive heating in the valves
If the negative blocking voltage of a semiconductor valve exceeds a critical value, the breakdown voltage,
the result is an electrical puncture which destroys the internal structure of the silicon wafer. The punctured
valve behaves like a low-resistance conductor.
If the positive blocking voltage across the thyristor exceeds, even momentarily, the breakover voltage, the
thyristor turns on (without a triggering pulse), and this too can lead to destruction of the internal structure.
The thyristor currents is determined by the control (rectifier delay angle) however under a converter fault
condition valves carry currents many times their rated currents and are thereby endangered.
The detection of an anomalous condition and the consequent trigger of the protection causes the shifting of
the rectifier thyristor firing pulses to the inverter delay limit ( = 150 °), once the current is reduced to zero
the firing pulses are blocked, the line side and motor side (when available) circuit breakers are opened.
The anomalous condition is detected by observing basically two quantities (voltage and current) through the
control and regulation, please refer to the section SIGNAL SENSING AND MEASURING to be acquainted
with the measuring and scaling of such signals.
A3 Appendix
SIGNALS USED FOR CONVERTER PROTECTION
The following signals are used for converter protection purpose :
 VMOT F Motor Voltage

 VLINE F Line Voltage
 I”DC DC Current Inverter-Motor Side
 I’DC DC Current Rectifier-Line Side
 I’DC DC Current Rectifier-Line  Side (12 pulse line only)
 I’DCy DC Current Rectifier-Line Y Side (12 pulse line only)
 IEXC Exciter Current
Scaling and filtering :
 VMOT F = 8 V @ Motor Voltage = Nominal Value Filtered

 VLINE F = 8 V @ Line Voltage = Nominal Value Filtered
 I”DC = 6 V @ DC current = Nominal Value Unfiltered
 I’DC = 6 V @ DC current = Nominal Value Unfiltered
 I’DC F = 6V @ DC current = Nominal Value Filtered
 I’DCY F = 6V @ DC current = Nominal Value Filtered
 IEXC = 6 V @ Exciter Current = Nominal Value Filtered
Protection and delay setting :
Protection Quantity Nominal Value V Threshold value V Threshold Value % Delay ms
I’DC Max 6 9.12 150 -

I”DC Max 6 9.12 150 -
I’DC < I”DC 0 0.92 15 -
I”DC < I’DC 0 0.92 15 -
| I’DCY F - I’DC F| 0 0.92 15 1
VMOT Max 8 8.89 110 30
VLINE Max 8 8.89 110 100
VLINE Min 8 6.80 85 100+25
VGND (IGND) Max 8 (25mA) 4.2 - -
IEXC Min 6 0.5 8 18.4
STTOUT - - - 5000
Tab. 1 - Protections settings
Values reported on the above table are the standard values and may differ slightly from the ones actually
implemented on the plant, for any particular application refer to the schematic diagram protection setting
table.
A3 Appendix
PROTECTION BASIC BLOCK
Fig. 4 shows the basic protection block, it is composed by a regenerative comparator (Schmitt Trigger) and a
delay block.
The Schmitt Trigger compares the input signal with a reference value corresponding to the nominal value of
the input signal (ex VLINE F = 8 V), the output doesn’t change until the difference between the input signals is
greater than the first threshold value :
VLINE F -VRIF 8V  VTH1
In order to prevent oscillation of the output signals due to input signals very close to the reference value the
circuit exhibits an hysteresis, in the way back the output change state only when the difference between the
input signals is less than the second threshold value :
VLINE F -VRIF 8V  VTH2
The threshold value VTH1 determines the setting ( level ) of the protection : how much higher should be the
input value with respect to the nominal value (ex VLINE > 110% ) for triggering the protection.
The protection doesn’t have effect until a certain amount of time (delay) is elapsed, the delay time
determines how long should last the anomalous condition (ex 200ms) for triggering the protection.
Threshold and delay values are set for each type of protection and shall be discussed further in this section.
COMPARATOR SCHMITT TRIGGER DELAY
Vo
VLINE F
- +Vcc
ATAV0X
VLINE > 110%

VRIF 8V
+ VLINE F -VRIF 8V
VTH2 VTH1 Vi Delay
Fig. 4 - Protection Block
A3 Appendix
COMPARATOR BLOCK
Fig. 5 shows a typical Schmitt trigger circuit along with the transfer input/output characteristic curve.
+Vcc
Vo
R1 Rpull-up
+Vcc
Vi -
Vo
Va
+
VTH2 VTH1 Vi
R3 R3>>Rpull-up
RTH1
Fig. 5 - Schmitt Trigger Comparator
When the input Vi < Va, then Vo = high = Vcc . We find that :
Vo
+Vcc
VccRTH 1
Va  VTH 1  (p-1)
( R1 // R 3)  RTH 1
VTH2 VTH1 Vi
As Vi increases Vo remains constant until Vi reaches VTH1, at this threshold the output changes status to
V0=low=0
Vo
We find that :
Vcc ( RTH 1 // R 3)
Va  VTH 2  (p-2)
R1  ( RTH 1 // R 3)
VTH2 VTH1 Vi
A3 Appendix
As Vi decreases Vo remains constant until Vi reaches VTH2, at this threshold the output changes status to
V0=high=Vcc.
Note that VTH1> VTH2 the difference between the two values is called hystereris VTH
Vo
+Vcc
VTH  VTH 1  VTH 2 (p-3)
VTH2 VTH1 Vi
Ex. 1 - Example of calculation of protection threshold
Protection : Line Overvoltage VLINE Max
Nominal Value: VLINE N = 8 V
Setting : 111% of Nominal value VLINE P = 8.88 V
VTH 1  VLINEN (1.11  1)  0.88
From Eq. (p-1)
VTH 1( R1 // R 3)
RTH 1 
VCC  VTH 1
VCC  14.7 R1  100k R 3  475k
RTH 1  5.2k
From Eq. (p-2) and (p-3) :
VTH 2  0.74 VTH  VTH 1  VTH 2  0.155
in term of % of the nominal value VLINE N = 8 V :
VLINEN  VTH 2
VTH 2%   100  109.2%
VLINEN
A3 - 10 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A3 Appendix
DELAY BLOCK
Fig. 6 shows the delay block carried out by means of Schmitt Trigger Nand gate connected to a capacitors
and resistor network.
When the comparator input signal Vi reaches the threshold level VTH!, the output signal Vo goes low , then
the output of U23A is high. The output of U21A doesn’t go immediately low since input 2 is hold low by the
low voltage of the capacitors C21/22 that in the meantime are charging through the resistor RP39. When the
capacitor voltage reaches the threshold voltage of U21A, the two inputs are high and the output goes low.
The signal VLINE>100% is then High. The trip signal is hold high until the input of the comparator reached the
value VTH2.
Delay time depends upon the time constant
RC  RP39  (C 22  C 21)
C 22  C 21  1F
tdelay  0.9  RC
U23A
1 U21A U24A
3 1 1
2 3 3
VLINE>110%
2 2
CD4093B
CD4093B CD4093B
RP41
RP39 4.75k
100k
RP40 DP11 C22
10k 1u
DP12 C21
V+ 0
1u
Fig. 6 - Delay Block
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A4 - 11
A3 Appendix
PROTECTION INHIBIT BLOCK
Some protections (typically the ones related to the line voltage monitoring VLINE Max and VLINE Min) are
disabled in some particular conditions as when the line Circuit Breaker 52FF (refer to Fig.1 – Fig.3) supplying
the converter is open.
During the closing Circuit Breaker transient, in order to avoid undue protection trips due to CB contacts
bouncing, the protection is still inhibit by delaying the closing recognition. Delay block is similar to the one
shown in Fig. 6.
DELAY BLOCK
LINE
VLINE Max
VLINE Max
CB OPEN CB CLOSED
CB 52FF
52FF CLOSED
Delay
VLINE Min
VLINE Min
Fig. 7 - Inhibit Block
Delay time depends upon the time constant
RC  RP5  (C 3  C 4  C 5)
C 3  C 4  C 5  1F
tdelay  0.9  RC
delay typical value
tdelay  300ms
A3 - 12 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A3 Appendix
PROTECTION BOARD APROTB SETTING TABLE
All the protection settings are summarized on a table included on the last section of the schematics diagram,
each sheet number is identified by the letter Z followed by the sheet number.
The setting table reports the following data :
SIGNAL NAME - Protection type and threshold Line Voltage VLINE
CALIBRATION - Setting Type Delay or Trip Identification Protection Trip Threshold

Protection Delay Time
VALUE - Setting value Threshold = 0.89V (1)

Delay200ms
COMPONENT – Component identification name Resistor R35

Resistor R39
TOWER – Component support identification name Support X13-X14

Support X15-X16
VALUE - Value of component R35=5.62k//82.5k

R36=100k
FACTORY NUMBER – Component Part Number Part number R35 20022350//20022362

Part number R36 20022303
BOARD APROTB
COMPONENT TOWER VALUE FACTORY PART NUMBER SIGNAL NAME CALIBRATION VALUE
R35 X13-X14 5.62K//82.5K 20022350//20022361 VLINE >110% Trip 0.89V

R39 X15-X16 100k 20022303 Delay 200ms
Tab. 2 - Board APROTB protection setting table
(1) According to. (Eq p-1)
VccRTH 1 VccR 35 Vcc (5.62k // 82.5k )

Va  VTH 1     0.89
( R1 // R 3)  RTH 1 ( R1 // R 3)  R 35 ( R1 // R 3)  (5.62k // 82.5k )
VLINEN  VTH 1
VTH 1%   100  111.1%  110%
VLINEN
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A4 - 13
A3 Appendix
VOLTAGE PROTECTIONS
LINE VOLTAGE PROTECTIONS
LINE OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION VLINE Max
VLINE F
- Vo H04
ATAV0X
VLINE > 110%
VRIF 8V
+ Vi Delay mS
VLINE F - VRIF 8V
Fig. 8 – Line Over-voltage Protection Block
BOARD APROTB
COMPONENT TOWER VALUE FACTORY NUMBER SIGNAL NAME CALIBRATION VALUE
R35 X13-X14 5.62K//82.5K 20022350//20022361 VLINE >110% Trip 0.89V

R39 X15-X16 100k 20022303 Delay 200ms
Tab. 3 - Line Over-Voltage Protection Standard Setting Table
A3 - 14 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A3 Appendix
LINE UNDERVOLTAGE PROTECTION VLINE Min
VLINE F
- Vo
ATAV0X
0R> 25mS
VRIF 8V
+ Vi Delay mS
VRIF 8V - VLINE F
H03
VLINE < 85%
Delay mS
Fig. 9 - Line Under-Voltage Protection Block
BOARD APROTB
R8 X3-X4 33.2K 20022332 Delay ARL Gen 5ms

R9 X5-X6 120K 20022309 Delay ARL Mot 25ms
R13 X7-X8 7.5K//169K 21805108//20022315 VLINE < 85% Trip 1.2V
R20 X9-X10 34K 20022339 Delay 100ms
Tab. 4 - Line Over-voltage Protection Standard Setting Table
FLYING RESTART CAPABILITY
When the line voltage goes below the threshold value the protection system doesn’t trip immediately, a delay
time is foreseen to allow the line to recover from a power dip.
After the time delay ARL is elapsed the thyristors pulses are removed, the motor is not supplied anymore by
the power converter, speed decreases as function of the total inertia of the system (motor + gear + load).
ARL delay is adjusted according to the application requirements as shown in Tab. 4.
The trip protection delay starts when the ARL delay time is elapsed, it allows and additional time for the line
recovering. Standard trip delay is shown in Tab. 4.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A4 - 15
A3 Appendix
MOTOR VOLTAGE PROTECTIONS
MOTOR OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTION VMOT Max
VRIF 8V H05
- Vo
AT VMOT > 110%
AV
0X VMOT F
+ Vi Delay mS
VMOT F - VRIF 8V
Fig. 10 - Motor Over-Voltage Protection Block
BOARD APROTB
R59 X17-X18 5.62K//82.5K 20022350//20022361 Trip 0.89V

VMOT >110%
R63 X19-X20 150k 20022312 Delay 30ms
Tab. 5 - Motor Over-Voltage Protection Standard Setting Table
A3 - 16 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A3 Appendix
CURRENT PROTECTIONS
LINE OVERCURRENT PROTECTION I’DC Max
Vo H09
ATAV0X
I'DC I' DC MAX
Vi
Fig. 11 - Line Over-Current Protection Block
BOARD APROTB
R85 X25-X26 22.6K 20022320 I’DC  150% Trip 9.12V
Tab. 6 - Line Over-Current Protection Standard Setting Table
MOTOR OVERCURRENT PROTECTION I”DC Max
Vo H10
ATAV0X
I"DC I"DC MAX
Vi
Fig. 12 - Motor Over-Current Protection Block
BOARD APROTB
FACTORY SIGNAL
COMPONENT TOWER VALUE CALIBRATION VALUE
NUMBER NAME
R86 X27-X28 22.6K 20022320 I”DC  150% Trip 9.12V
Tab. 7 - Motor Over-Current Protection Standard Setting Table
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A4 - 17
A3 Appendix
DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION BETWEEN CURRENTS LINE-MOTOR SIDE I’DC < I”DC
I'DC
- Vo H11
ATAV0X
I"DC - I'DC I'DC < I"DC
I"DC
+ Vi
Fig. 13 – Differential I’DC < I”DC Current Protection Block
BOARD APROTB
R75 X21-X22 3.92K 20560670 I”DC- I’DC  15% Trip 0.92V
Tab. 8 - Differential I’DC < I”DC Current Protection Standard Setting Table
DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION BETWEEN CURRENTS LINE-MOTOR SIDE I”DC < I’DC
I'DC
- Vo H12
I'DC - I"DC
ATAV0X
I"DC < I'DC
I"DC
+ Vi
Fig. 14 – Differential I”DC < I’DC Current Protection Block
BOARD APROTB
R76 X23-X24 3.92K 20560670 I’DC- I”DC  15% Trip 0.92V
Tab. 9 - Differential I”DC < I’DC Current Protection Standard Setting Table
A3 - 18 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A3 Appendix
DIFFERENTIAL PROTECTION BETWEEN CURRENTS LINE SIDE  I’DC and Y I’DCY
I'DCd F
- Vo Vo
ATAV0X
I'DC y F
+ Vi Vi
I'DCy F - I'DCd F
H08
(I'DCy-I'DCd) > 15 %
Delay mS
Fig. 15 – Differential Current I’DC and I’DCY Protection Block
BOARD APROTB
R168 X21-X22 3.92k 20560670 Trip 0.92V

|I’DCY - I’DC | > 15%
R173 X23-X24 100k 20022303 Delay 1ms
Tab. 10 - Differential Current Protection I’DC and I’DCY Standard Setting Table
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A4 - 19
A3 Appendix
GROUND FAULTS
The fault current is sensed by means of an Hall effect voltage transducer (TH01) used as a very low current
transducer. One terminal of sensing device is connected to a convenient point of the converter by means of
resistors, the second terminal is connected directly to ground. The ground fault device is able to detect faults
on the line side ( transformer secondary windings ), converter (inverter and rectifier), dc link reactor and
motor side.
Fig. 16 shows some examples of earth fault :
- transformer phase L2
- converter DC plus connection
- converter DC minus connection
- motor phase U
- motor star center
In case of fault a current is flowing through the current transducer and ground. The fault current magnitude
and waveform depends upon in which side of the converter the fault occurs.
LINE Idc DC REACTOR
T4 T6 T2
T1 T3 T5
TCV SM
L1(R) RH U(R)
CB
L2(S) Ignd V(S)
THO1 FIELD
L3(T) 5 W(T)
RH
T1 T3 T5
T4 T6 T2
H15
IGND V*GND VGNDF VGNDR 0 GND FAULT

R78
Fig. 16 – Ground Faults Protection Block
BOARD APROTB
R160 X45-X46 12.1K 20560611 GND FAULT Trip 4.2V
Tab. 11 – Ground Fault Protection Standard Setting Table
A3 - 20 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A3 Appendix
CONVERTER DC+ GROUND FAULT
The followings figures show an example of ground fault of the converter DC+ , they reports all the signals
shown in the protection block . In order to have a better understanding of the fault it is supposed that the
converter it is not tripped.
Fig. 17 – Ground Fault – Converter DC+ side - Ignd
Fig. 18 – Ground Fault – Converter DC+ side – V*GND
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A4 - 21
A3 Appendix
Fig. 19 – Ground Fault – Converter DC+ side – VGNDR – 0 GND FAULT
MOTOR PHASE R GROUND FAULT
The followings figures show an example of ground fault of the motor phase R , they reports all the signals
shown in the protection block . In order to have a better understanding of the fault it is supposed that the
converter it is not tripped.
Fig. 20– Ground Fault – Motor Phase R – Ignd
A3 - 22 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A3 Appendix
Fig. 21 – Ground Fault – Motor Phase R – V*GND
Fig. 22 – Ground Fault – Motor Phase R – VGNDR – 0 GND FAULT
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A4 - 23
A3 Appendix
MINIMUM EXCITER CURRENT - IEXC
Vo H07
IEXC IEXC < 8%
Min IEXC
Vi Delay mS
Fig. 23– Minimum Exciter Current Protection Block
BOARD APROTB
R118 X35-X36 3.32k 20022334 Min IEXC Trip 0.5V

R122 X37-X38 392k 20560671 IEXC < 8% Delay 18.4ms
Tab. 12 – Minimum Exciter Protection Standard Setting Table
A3 - 24 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A3 Appendix
CONVERTER SUPPLY VOLTAGE PHASES SEQUENCE
The thyristor firing of a fully controlled converter bridge is usually carried out by means of a modulator
synchronized by the line voltages supplying the same bridge. Measure voltage transformers (TV01,TV02)
connected to the line voltage supply the synchronism signals (Fig. 24)
Synchronism voltages should have a phase sequence defined as direct R-S-T, this phase sequence is
necessary in order to fire each thyristor in the sequence they are numbered T1-T2-T3-T4-T5-T6-T7.
Since the modulator is designed to operate only in the condition above-mentioned, each wrong connection of
the supply line cables, as the reverse sequence T-R-S, is detected by the protection system.
T1 T3 T5
TCV
L1 L1(R)
CB
L2 L2(S)
L3 L3(T)
A B A B
TV01 TV02 T4 T6 T2
a b a b
Fig. 24– Six-pulse fully controlled bridge voltage phase sequence
Phase sequence protection checks two phase to phase squared synchronism voltages x of VRT and y of VSR
(Fig. 26) , the right phase sequence is when the first (VRT) leads the second (VSR) by 120°. In this case the
protection system doesn’t issue any signaling.
In case of, once the line circuit breaker CB is closed, the two voltage phases sequence should be reversed,
the protection system, before firing any thyristor, issue a signaling followed by the converter trip. The
protection is inhibited when the line circuit breaker is open or the voltage average value is lower than the
minimum threshold, in this case another signaling is issued by the protection system: line under-voltage.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A4 - 25
A3 Appendix
Fig. 25– Voltage Phase Sequence
LINE CB
VRT F 1X H02
PHASE
SEQUENCE 0SS INV
LOGIC
VST F 1X
MIN VLINE
Fig. 26– Converter Supply Voltage Sequence Protection Block
A3 - 26 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A3 Appendix
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A4 - 27
A3 Appendix
A3 - 28 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
APPENDIX A4
IGNITION BOARD OF OPTICAL FIBRE THYRISTORS
INDEX
IGNITION SYSTEM OF OPTICAL FIBRE THYRISTORS ............................................................. 2

INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................................... 2
IGNITION BOARD ASAI XX ....................................................................................................... 2
POWER SUPPLY ........................................................................................................................ 2
BOARD VERSIONS: ASAI XX ................................................................................................. 3
IGNITION CONTROL ................................................................................................................ 4
MONITORING ................................................................................................................................ 5
AUTOMATIC PROTECTION ........................................................................................................ 5
FIGURES
Fig. 1 – Power supply ............................................................................................................. 2

Fig. 2 – Overvoltage ignition and self-ignition circuit................................................................... 4
Fig. 3 – Monitoring circuit ........................................................................................................ 5
TABLES
Table. 1 - Board versions: ASAIXX .......................................................................................... 3

A4 Appendix
IGNITION SYSTEM OF OPTICAL FIBRE THYRISTORS
INTRODUCTION
This chapter deals with the board coupled with each thyristor to cause its ignition with a command
from control or by self-ignition due to a dangerous overvoltage at the ends of the thyristor itself
IGNITION BOARD ASAI XX
This board is used with all thyristor-bridge appliances up to a 100-mm diameter and a 7500-Volt
latching voltage.
POWER SUPPLY
For each board a mains-frequency highly-insulated transformer  than 50 Hz with a 24  26 Vac

input voltage is provided. Input voltage is equal to output voltage, which is subsequently rectified
on the board by a diode bridge and then filtered with condensers C 2  6.
Led H1 signals the presence of supply voltage.
Maximum input is equal to 700 mA.
Board : ASAI XX
Highly - insulated
transformer
P24
H1
C2÷6
P18
Fig. 1 – Power supply
A4 Appendix
BOARD VERSIONS: ASAI XX
According to the different uses, various versions of the same board have been developed. As
control interface, plastic optical fibres are provided, with a maximum length of 40 metres.
The following table shows the various possibilities:
Board Number of Number of Thyristor

version Receivers Transmitters latching voltage
optical fibre optical fibre
used
for ignition for monitoring
ASAI 01 1 0 2800
ASAI 02 1 0 4200
ASAI 03 1 0 5200
ASAI 04 1 0 7500
ASAI 06 1 1 2800
ASAI 07 1 1 4200
ASAI 08 1 1 5200
ASAI 09 1 1 7500
ASAI 11 2 2 2800
ASAI 12 2 2 4200
ASAI 13 2 2 5200
ASAI 14 2 2 7500
Table. 1 - Board versions: ASAIXX
A4 Appendix
IGNITION CONTROL
It consists of optical receiver HP type HFBR 2521, transistors Q 5- 6, resistances R12 with front
condenser C1 and tail/back/queue resistance R 8.
When receiving the optical pulse from the control there is a switching of the above-mentioned
transistors applying a voltage of about 24 Volt to the resistive capacitative gate circuit which will
produce a peak current equal to about 3,5 Amp. Led H 2 will light up at the pulse.
Board : ASAI XX
P24
Q5
Q6
Q4 R12 R8
C1
RF
V15
5,6V
R34 H2
P18
Overvoltage
self-ignition M
control
Fig. 2 – Overvoltage ignition and self-ignition circuit
A4 Appendix
MONITORING
The presence of voltage at the thyristor ends during its working is measured:
 if it is always equal to zero, the thyristor is in short-circuit

 if it is always present , the thyristor is not conducting
and this can occur when the current circulating in the bridge is close to zero, or when the pulse
at the thyristor gate is indeed lacking
- if it is partially equal to zero, the thyristor is sound
This function is carried out through a resistive bi-directional divider with a bi-directional fet
threshold:
 V-anode, R 1 , V 8 , R 31 and V-cathode for the positive polarity
 V-cathode, R 1 , V 7 , R 30 and V-anode for the negative polarity
When the voltage at the ends of R31 (R30) exceeds fet Vgs voltage Q3 (Q2), which is equal to
some Volts, the fet goes in conduction and the transmitter diode TF (HP type HFBR 1521) is
activated.
Resistive dividers allow to monitor in a selective way even with an anode-cathode voltage equal to
about 10 Volt. See Fig. 3
AUTOMATIC PROTECTION
The voltage to the thyristor ends is applied to the circuit consisting of resistance R 1, diode V 8,
zener V 10 and resistance R 34. When the voltage at the ends of resistance R 34 reaches the
value of about 6,1 Volt (corresponding to the voltage value of the Q4 emitter base junction plus the
one of zener V15) transistor Q4 is dragged in conduction, so that Q5, generating the ignition pulse,
closes. See also Fig. 2.
Unlike the BOD automatic protection, which produces a gate current higher than the one normally
originated by the control, in this case the produced pulse is equal to the control one but only
shorter (truncated by thyristor ignition), this is in any case enough to ignite the thyristor correctly.
Board : ASAI XX
P24
TF
Q2 V7 R1
V10 V8
Q3
R31 R34 R30
Overvoltage
self-ignition
control
Fig. 3 – Monitoring circuit
A4 Appendix
A4 Appendix
APPENDIX A5
GROUNDING AND GROUNDING VOLTAGES
Following wiring diagram should be taken into consideration:
Three grounding options may be implemented: power supply transformer 01 star center grounding, d.c.
intermediate circuit N negative pole grounding, synchronous machine coil 02 star center grounding (the latter
opton may be performed directly or through an impedence). Only one of the three 01, 02 and N points shall
be grounded.
Should the d.c. intermediate circuit N negative pole be grounded, maximum grounding voltage shall
correspond to maximum voltage between lines.

A5 Appendix
Should the 01 star center be grounded, maximum grounding voltage shall correspond to network star
voltage plus machine voltage between lines.
Vb = Vt01 + Vuw
(Vb: B point voltage towards grounding)
A5 Appendix
Should the 02 star center be grounded, maximum grounding voltage shall correspond to machine star
voltage plus network voltage between lines.
Vb = Vw02 + Vrt
(Vb: B point voltage towards grounding)
A5 Appendix
A5 Appendix
A
APPP
PEEN
NDDIIX
X A6
POWER MODULE MAINTENANCE
General
These instructions define the procedures, actions and instruments necessary for replacing
the electronic and mechanical components making up the Power Module
If the trouble is catastrophic and involves the P.M. in its whole, or several P.M.’s, the damaged
P.M.’s must be replaced completely.
A5 Appendix
PRECAUTIONS AND NECESSARY EQUIPMENT
Maintenance operations must be always carried out by trained personnel.
Converters to be submitted to maintenance must not be supplied with

power.
Maintenance operations must be carried out making use of original spare

parts supplied by ASI; in case the user wishes to purchase the spare part
autonomously, he must always operate in compliance with the technical
specifications by ASI.
As concerns operations on some components, the utilization of specific

tool kits is required; they are supplied by ASI.
Missing these kits, the operator cannot operate in safe conditions, while the
operation could not be effective and could cause additional damages.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
ON CONVERTER SUPPLIED MUST ACT ONLY QUALIFIED PERSONAL IN
COMPLIES WITH EN 50110-1
A5 Appendix
1 Ignition card replacement
B1
A D Power Module
SIDE VIEW
B2
As concerns the figure above, operate as follows:
01) Individuate the faulty card

02) Disconnect connectors B1 (2 pieces) and B2 positioned on the rear and front sides
03) Disconnect the optical fibers positioned on the front side (quantity variable
according
to the card type)
04) Take out the screw indicated in position C. Operate considering that the screw might
be engaged in the threaded hole in support D, or that this hole may be a through
hole and nut and washer indicated in pos. () might be utilized.
05) Take out the faulty card and put in the spare one (they must slide in the same
direction of the arrow)
06) Install the screw and the accessories of pos. C again in their positions. Make use of
rear nut and washer () if support D is not provided with threaded hole.
07) Connect connectors B1 and B2 and optical fibers again according to relevant
mark or physical position.
A5 Appendix
2 Snubber resistor replacement
Resistor may be replaced after extraction of RCTI module complex.

Following operations shall allow the extraction of RCTI complex relevant to part under replacement :
1.Disconnecting capacitors
2.Remove the 4 bolts and remove the panel
3.The resistors are free to be disconnected and replaced.
Replace the resistor, connect the terminals and repeat steps 3 to 1
A5 Appendix
2.1 Snubber capacitors replacement

Looking at P.M. from the front side, the snubber capacitor banch is positioned in the upper
and lower part of the module.
The capacitors are installed on the metal plate fastened to the capacitor support
panel by means of two captive screws
Captive screws M4 are to be screwed in special threaded holes on the support
panel.
The faulty component replacement is carried out as follows:
1.Disconnecting capacitors
2.Remove the bolt and remove the capacitor
Replace the capacitor and repeat steps 2 to 1
A5 Appendix
3 THYRISTOR REPLACEMENT
In order to replace the thyristor, operate as described below:
01) Individuate the faulty thyristor(s).

02) Special tools torque wrench.
Particular attention should be given to the following:
a) For capsule devices we recommend the use of Jet Lube SCX13 as a Heat Sink /
jointing compound for standard application.
b) If the grease is removed from the Heat Sink contact surfaces for a long period of time it
may be necessary to clean the aluminium because of the rapid formation of an oxide film.
Abrade the aluminium surface of the contact area using a wire brush (a 25mm rotary wire
cup brush is suitable) under a slurry of Jet Lube SCX13 Grease and carry out the mounting
operation on the same day.
c) When finally making the Thyristor / Heat Sink joint only a thin smear of jet Lube SCX13
grease is required (a small bead of grease of approximately 0,1 mm radius maximum
should be squeezed out from the device heat sink joint as excessive use of grease will
cause a high volt drop across the joint).
Replacement Procedure
a) Remove the Assembly from the equipment and place on the bench with the AC Bus
Bars nearest the bench.
Disconnecting cable
A5 Appendix
b) Disconnect the RC network wires from the module noting their positions.
If thyristor fault is an thyristor of the inverter bridge you remove this RC panel
If thyristor fault is an thyristor of the rectifier bridge you remove this RC panel
c) Slacken and withdraw the 4 – M8 rods holding the module to be replaced. It may be
necessary to support the AC Bus Bars on block.
Disconnecting thyristor gate/cat. cable from terminal board
Loosen the 4 bolts until the Heat Sink is liberated for the extraction towards the front
A5 Appendix
Remove AC/DC bus bars
d) Undo the DC connection to the module to be replaced and withdraw it from the
Assembly. It may be necessary to remove the fan.
A5 Appendix
e) Remove the front cover
f) Remove the clamps compression
A5 Appendix
g) Replace the thyristor
Put the dowel pins in the special seats on the component (figure "A").
Put in the component, making the pins slide in the grooves on the heat sink (figure "B").
A B
A6 - 10 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
A5 Appendix
h) Place one half of the top fin over the device locating the insulated sleeve
R- 4XT through the holes. Push the M8x120 bolt into the holes and locate
them in the insulated sleeves.
While the assembly is still clamped Clamp each side of the

tighten the 4 M8 Guasch nuts using the assembly, both devices,
torque wrench. Torque to 22 lbf-in to 22KN.
(2.485 Nm)
Repeat the process with the other half
of the assembly.
SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B A6 - 11
A5 Appendix
i) Fix the front cover
Carefully clip the ends of the top

cover under the edges of the end
frames, as shown.
A6 - 12 SILCOVERT S - 2MU1000253116B
PREVEN
NTIVE MAINTE
ENANCE:
SYSTEM DESIGNATION : VFD

UNIT + EL
LEMENTARY FU UNCTIONAL SY
YSTEM : SILCO
OVERT-S – SILC
COSTAT-D
Reference
e document : 2FN10
000253116C
COMMPONENT
ORIGINAL
L MAINTENANCE RE
EFERENCE
2FN10
000253116C
COMPONE
ENT SEQUENCE COMPONENNT DES
SIGNATION ACTION A
ACTION REQUIREDD PARTS DO
OCUMENT
CODE NUMBER MANUFACTURER (See Note) Item Code Quantity
- -
Check tightnesss of terminations
Check tightnesss of auxiliary
connections. LCII REACTOR
mpressed air (low
Clean with com
=G1.H0
01 -LL01 TRAFOMEC
C DC REAC
CTOR 50mH Y pressure) also
o the air cooling – du
ucts.
- - F13J31
Check insulation resistance betwe een manual
windings and the
t ground by megg ger
with 500V R> 10 MΩ
MANUAL
Remove any dustd from the heat sink.
s 2MU
U1000217907B
Check tightnes ss of terminations Section2
=G1.G0
01 -GF01 Westcode RECTIFIE
ER/INVERTER Y Check tightnes ss of auxiliary - - POWER
connections. MODULE
Clean it if nece
essary MAINTENANCE
Appendix A6
Note – MAINT
TENANCE FREQUEN
NCY
H= Hour D= Dayy W= Week M= Month Y=
= Year C= Cyccle number
VFD SYST
TEM - 2MU1000
0253116B A - 1
A7
COMMPONENT
ORIGINAL
L MA
AINTENANCE RE
EFERENCE
2FN10
000253116C
COMPONE
ENT SEQUENCE COMPONENNT DESIGN
NATION ACTION A
OCUMENT
CODE NUMBER MANUFACTURER (See Note) Item Code
e Quantity
- -
1. check tightnes ss of terminals.
2. clean with com mpressed air the E
EXCITER
DRY T TYPE
Transformer’s su urfaces and the air duct.
d TR
RANSFORM
TRANSFO ORMER ER
=G2.D1
1 -TRE Trafomec Y 3. check insulatioon resistance betwe een - -
40kVA - 3
3F-50HZ windings and the e ground of each F13J42
415V/3
350V inductor by a Megger with manual
2.5kVdc, R ≥ 1 GΩ.
G
2. clean with com mpressed air the
d
DRY TTYPE 3. check insulatioon resistance betwe een Ma
aintenance
TRANSFOORMER windings and the e ground of each Manual
inductor by a Megger with
=G1.C0
01 -TLS Trafomec 585kVA
A - 3F- 36M 2.5kVdc, R ≥ 1 GΩ.
G
- - IO
OM TMEC-
50H
HZ If the value of the
e measured insulatio on
0585-
6600V/1650V resistance is ≥ 1 GΩ but the machine is 6.6/1.65
presenting not ne egligible
quantity of dirt, the cleaning opera ation
as below is to be performed.
Note – MAINT
TENANCE FREQUEN
NCY
VFD SYST
TEM - 2MU1000
0253116B A - 2
A7
COMMPONENT RE
EFERENC
ORIGINAL
L MA
AINTENANCE
2FN10
000253116C E
COMPONE
NATION ACTION A
OCUMENT
e Quantity
- -
2. clean with com mpressed air the
d
DRY TTYPE 3. check insulatioon resistance betwe een Ma
aintenance
TRANSFOORMER windings and the e ground of each Manual
inductor by a Megger with
=G1.J02
2 -TMS Trafomec 515kVA
A - 3F- 36M 2.5kVdc, R ≥ 1 GΩ.
G
- - IO
OM TMEC-
50H
HZ If the value of the
e measured insulatio on
0585-
1450V/6
6600V resistance is ≥ 1 GΩ but the machine is 6.6/1.65
presenting not ne egligible
quantity of dirt, the cleaning opera ation
as below is to be performed.
Drawing_852
Remove any du ust from the heat sink.
s 481
CONVEERTER
Check tightness s of terminations
ACS TYYPE – 2M
MU10002531
=G2.J01 -GS40 SECOM Y Check tightness s of auxiliary - -
600Vacc- 3F- 16B
B.
connections.
50HZ-200A EX
XCITER Cha
Clean it if neces
ssary 5.4
4
Note – MAINT
TENANCE FREQUEN
NCY
VFD SYST
TEM - 2MU1000
0253116B A - 3
A7
COMMPONENT RE
EFERENC
ORIGINAL
L MA
AINTENANCE
2FN10
000253116C E
COMPONE
NATION ACTION A
OCUMENT
e Quantity
- -
Check frequenttly to ensure that
ound
Safety gro safety ground connections
c are
2FN1000253
=G3.U0
01 -AJ01 Nidec-ASI - S.p
p.A. - and electrrical Y secure and thatt electrical cables and - -
116C
system conduits are seecure and in good
condition
Check frequenttly to ensure that
ound
Safety gro safety ground connections
c are
2FN1000253
=G3.U0
03 -AJ03 Nidec-ASI - S.p
p.A. - and electrrical 6M secure and thatt electrical cables and - -
116C
system conduits are seecure and in good
condition
Check output voltage: 24,5 Vdc
Adjust with trim
mmer on front.
Y 2M
MU10002531
Safety gro
ound Check frequenttly to ensure that
=G3.D0
02 GA20/21/22 (If con
ntinuous service 16B
B.
ENNEBI and electrrical safety ground connections
c are - -
=G3.U0
01 GA05/06 Nidec suggests after 6 Cha 7, Table 3
system secure and thatt electrical cables
Years replace them)
and conduits arre secure and in
good condition
Note – MAINT
TENANCE FREQUEN
NCY
VFD SYST
TEM - 2MU1000
0253116B A - 4
A7
COMMPONENT
ORIGINAL
L MAIN
NTENANCE RE
EFERENCE
2FN10
000253116C
COMPONE
NATION A
ACTION ACT
TION REQUIREDD PARTS DO
OCUMENT
CODE NUMBER MANUFACTURER (Se
ee Note) Item Code Quantity
Remove any debris thaat may have
cumulated round the
acc e guards.
Y Remove any material/ddirt build-up betwee
en - -
e motor fins
the
Cle
ean safety support
Examine the clearan nce between the fan
=G1.H0
01 -EV01 Reactor an
nd imppeller blade tips and
a the fan duct RH440M-4DK-
ZIEHL-ABEG
GG
Converter Blowers Chheck torque of fan--to-support fixings
s 4C-1R –data
she
eet
Examine motor, fan and ancilllary
Y - -
equipment fixings
Chheck movement off vibration
Chheck motor volltage and currrent
connsumption
Remove any debris thaat may have
cumulated round the
acc e guards.
6M Remove any material/ddirt build-up betwee
en - -
e motor fins
the
Cle
ean safety support
Examine the clearan nce between the fan RH
H40M-4DK-
=G2.D0
01 -EV03 Control cub
bicle imppeller blade tips and
a the fan duct
ZIEHL-ABEG
GG 4C-1R –data
blower Chheck torque of fan--to-support fixings
s eet
she
Examine motor, fan and ancilllary
Y - -
equipment fixings
Chheck movement off vibration
Chheck motor volltage and currrent
connsumption
Note – MAINT
TENANCE FREQUEN
NCY
VFD SYST
TEM - 2MU1000
0253116B A - 5
A7
COMMPONENT
ORIGINAL
L MAINTENANCE RE
EFERENCE
2FN10
000253116C
COMPONE
ENT SEQUENCE COMPONENNT DES
SIGNATION ACTION A
OCUMENT
CODE NUMBER MANUFACTURER (See Note) Item Code Quantity
AIR
R FILTER
+11 +
+12 +21 +22 - -
cuubicles
The filter cellls are generally
dimensioned d for a substitution
n
periodic of 2 annual changes.
Obviously the e substitution
depends on the t load of dust to o
FANDIS dust filters Cubicle A
Air filter clogged Y filter: - -
- with tall con
ncentration:
substitution of
o 3 changes
maximum ye ear
- with low con ncentration: 1 chaange
year (least su uggested)
Note – MAINT
TENANCE FREQUEN
NCY
VFD SYST
TEM - 2MU1000
0253116B A - 6
A7

Nidec PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Nidec PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Nidec PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main components discussed in the manual?

What are the main components discussed in the manual?

What safety precautions are mentioned?

What safety precautions are mentioned?

SSTTA

NIDEC ASI S.p.A. – INSTALLATION, USE AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

GENERAL OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

 SECTION I: GENERAL OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

 SECTION II: STATIC STARTER MANUAL

 SECTION III: STATIC EXCITATION SYSTEM MANUAL

Plant: BORL BINA 2

EQUIPAGGIAMENTI ELETTRICI ED ELETTRONICI IN QUADRO

ELECTRIC AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT (BOARDS)

MANUALE GENERALE DI USO E MANUTENZIONE

GENERAL OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

02 Up_grade for <500kw LCI equipement Fregoni Paletti 09-06-217

01 Sostituito logo aziendale e corrette imprecisioni.. Scremin Paletti Collini 02.10.06

2.1 health and safety

3 REFERENCE TECHNICAL DATA

3.1 Electric data

4 RECEIVING AND HANDLING

5.1 Packed equipment storage

6.1 Safety rules before and during installation

7.1 Signal and control connections

8.1 Reference environmental conditions

NIDEC ASI S.p.A. – INSTALLATION, USE AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

9 PRELIMINARY CHECKS, COMMISSIONING AND OPERATION

9.1 Preliminary checks and commissioning

10.1 Maintenance preliminary operations

12 USE AND DIAGNOSTICS

13 DEMOLITION AND DISPOSAL

14 ADDRESS MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR REQUESTS AND SERVICE

NIDEC ASI S.p.A. – INSTALLATION, USE AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

NIDEC ASI S.p.A. – INSTALLATION, USE AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2.1 HEALTH AND SAFETY

- Shutdown : Open main input switch

- Team job : Maintenance should be performed by a team of two electricians

- Fire : First of all, de energize the equipment on fire. Before using

- Tools : All electric tools should be grounded and tools handless

NIDEC ASI S.p.A. – INSTALLATION, USE AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2.2 SAFETY AND WARNING SYMBOLS

This manual contains different cautionary statements:

NOTE Relates to a clarification about instructions, repair operation or any other

Dangerous scenarios are highlighted using the following symbols:

Risk of death, fire or heavy injuries.

Risk of death, electric shock or heavy injuries

 All the interventions concerning the maintenance and electric installa-

NIDEC ASI S.p.A. – INSTALLATION, USE AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

2.3 Plate indicating the rules and obligations

Handle the device so not to damage any of its parts.

Protect the device from stresses (temperature, humidity, crashes, etc.)

Always effect earthing, using the suitable bar in the board.

NIDEC ASI S.p.A. – INSTALLATION, USE AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

The drive contains equipment sensitive to electrostatic charges: they can

The electronic cards should be handled only if this is strictly necessary to

Cards and components must be wrapped and shipped only in conductive

NIDEC ASI S.p.A. – INSTALLATION, USE AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

3 REFERENCE TECHNICAL DATA

COMMESSA N. DISEGNO N. CARICO MASSIMO